Home

ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides

1. 4 4 39 t 000m X water JN 5 5 55e 100 xX 5 8 s 100p xx I are Sail Set Alarms The Signature Alarm utility highlights the pixels in the Viewer that belong to or are estimated to belong to a class according to the parallelepiped decision rule An alarm can be performed with one or more signatures If you do not have any signatures selected then the active signature which is next to the gt is used 1 Inthe Signature Editor select Forest 1 by clicking in the gt column for that signature The alarm is performed with this signature 2 Inthe Signature Editor menu bar select View Image Alarm The Signature Alarm dialog opens Wa Signature Alarm E Indicate Overlap t3 Click to change the 9 Edi Parallelepiped Limits parallelepiped limits e pese 3 Click Edit Parallelepiped Limits in the Signature Alarm dialog to view the limits for the parallelepiped The Limits dialog opens 4 Inthe Limits dialog click Set to define the parallelepiped limits The Set Parallelepiped Limits dialog opens Tour Guides 469 Advanced Classification 470 Ws Limits Forest_1 E x Wa Set Parallelepiped Limits E X Methad C Minimum Masimum C Std Deviation go Signatures Curent Selected C All i Cancel Help The Signature Alarm utility allows you to define the parallelepiped limits by eith
2. 6 m 5 am a o Eg county_forests spt How File Descriptor File Path and Name EQ Loudoin TM Boundary mping Loudoun TM Sample 15 Sample 18 bo dig Sampei Z mpotedSame i i Sample_10 3 gy Sample 13 4 ge Sample 4 j e ie Sample 2 T den Sample 5 B Sample 7 B Sample 5 j M s Sample 3 T den Sample 8 B Sample 38 B Sample 14 j M is Sample 11 T E Sample 15 B Sample 12 5 Click Next in the Interpret Samples step of the Sampling Project Wizard The Final Analysis step is displayed Final Analysis The Final Analysis Wizard lets you set the parameters which will dictate how the Final Wizard Analysis process will run 6 Click the Final Analysis icon to start the Final Analysis Wizard ui 552 ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools The Final Analysis Wizard opens with the Select Tiles for Analysis step displayed i Select Tiles For Analysis fou must select which Tiles will be used in the analysis By default all Tiles with interpreted samples are pre selected To exclude Tiles from the analysis deselect them in the table below The total number of Samples for the tile An X indicates the Tile will be included in the Final Analysis The number of Samples that have been interpreted and are ready for Final Analysis NOTE If you enabled both Dot Grid and Polygon Analysis when you created the Sampling Project a preliminary step will display asking you to choose which sampling method to use in
3. Click the Save icon to Save the current label set Read the Warning Message Click Save Label Set on the Warning Message The File Chooser opens Browse to the Sampling Project directory It is generally a good idea to save the Label Set in the Tile level directory This keeps the Labels in a logical place within the project files hierarchy Enter forest moi labels Ibs as the filename Click OK to save the Label Set Use the Manual Zoom tool Ql to zoom in on the portion of the Dot grid that falls outside of the high resolution image Use the Manual Zoom tool amp in the Zoom View to zoom in to a comfortable magnification Use the Manual Zoom tool Ql in the Overview so that it displays the extent of the Dot Grid Click the Select icon Xx on the Dot Grid Tool toolbar Select a dot on the edge of the image by clicking on it in the Main View ERDAS IMAGINE Click on this dot Frame Sampling Tools ini xi File Utility View AGI Raster Vector Annotation Dot Grid Help God eg o x Dp WX Y o eG BS f n E CHI P Li amp 4 ao WIES Si E J F ING AN E al The dot is also selected in the Overview to select it The dot is centered in the Zoom View Click here to set the Not Used label as the current label The Zoom View shows that over half of the dot is outside of the image 6 Setthe carat in the Not Used row of the Grid Labels by clicking in the first column 7 Label the select
4. 2 2 Right click here 3 O00 0 00 O00 0 00 0 00 0 21 0 20 0 216 DEET and select Criteria 2e New Value jE Change Selected Rows Cancel Help Tour Guides 531 Frame Sampling Tools Take a moment to look at the Columns that appear in the Thematic Recode CellArray Notice that the columns that were created with the Grouping Tool are all labeled with GT TargetName GroupName A 0 in this column means that the Class Value column is not included in this Group A 1 indicates that Class is included in the Group 5 Right click in the Value column and select Criteria from the popup list The Selection Criteria dialog is opened W Selection Criteria E x Columns Functions Compares GT water wetland GT water edgewater GT forest decid P To select the forested classes set GT Forest columns 1 int a gt s GT ag bluefields even a gt GT ag greenfields add a l GT aq redfields mas a lt b gt contains GT urban la density min za lt b gt GT urban hi_density rovw riteria Click Select G3T forest decid 1 or GT forest conif 1 Click Close 6 Seteach of the GT Forest columns zz 1 7 Click the Select button All of the columns that are grouped into the Forest Target Class should be selected in the Thematic Recode dialog ee eoo amp 222350 183 8h L 8 83 B4 E5 RE E9
5. Single Signature Single Band All Selected Signatures All Bands Auto Plot i Print Options Help Band Ma Click here to create histogram plot iN m E W Agricultural Field 1 1 ini xi Band Number z histogram sg k To 138 008 I Print Save Help i 3 Inthe Histogram Plot Control Panel dialog change the Band No number field to 5 in order to view the histogram for band 5 i e layer 5 4 Click Plot The Histogram dialog changes to display the histogram for band 5 You can change the different plot options and select different signatures to see the differences in histograms for various signatures and bands 5 Inthe Histogram Plot Control Panel dialog click Close The two Histogram dialogs close ERDAS IMAGINE Compute Signature Separability Tour Guides Advanced Classification The Signature Separability utility computes the statistical distance between signatures This distance can be used to determine how distinct your signatures are from one another This utility can also be used to determine the best subset of layers to use in the classification The distances are based on the following formulas e euclidean spectral distances between their means e Jeffries Matusita distance e divergence e transformed divergence The Signature Separability utility can be performed with multiple signatures If you do not have any signatures selected then all of t
6. Accuracy Assessment Feature Space Image Feature Space Thematic Knowledge Classifier Knowledge Engineer Frame Sampling Tools Spectral Analysis Select Unsupervised Classification from the Classification menu to perform an unsupervised classification using the ISODATA algorithm The Unsupervised Classification dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Enter germtm isodata img here Enter 24 for the maximum number of times the process can run This should be set to 950 Click here to start the process Set Initial Cluster Options Tour Guides Advanced Classification W Unsupervised Classification Isodata E J X j Input Raster File i Enter germtm img here um germtm img eg Input Signature File isig Click here to turn off em f the Output Signature Set filename part v Output Cluster Layer Output Signature Set Filerrame Set Filename img germtm Isodata imq Clustering Options nitialize from Statistics Use Signature Means Number of Classes 10 Enter 10 here to generate 10 classes i e signatures Initializing Options Color Scheme Options Processing Options Skip Factors ipaum Iterations Convergence Threshold Classify zeros Y E Batch ADI Cancel Hep Click Close in the Classification menu to clear it from the screen In the Unsupervised Classification dialo
7. progress Root Level The Single Sampling wizard is designed to walk you through the steps associated with the Functions Frame Sampling process 1 Click the Use Sampling Project Wizard button to open the Single Sampling Wizard Palette ui 524 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools Wa Single Sampling Wizard Palette X Foot Tile Sample Made Made Made Steps Steps Steps Set up Root Node Files a Add Image Tiles Set up Tile Made Files These steps affect the Root Node level files in the Project Manager These steps affect the Tile Node level files in the Project Manager Select Samples Set up Sample Made Files HP Assign Sample Node Files ay Interpret Samples 3 Final Analysis Calculate Tile Estimates Help These steps affect the Sample level files in the Project Manager The general workflow in the Frame Sampling process will move from the top to the bottom of the Palette Clicking on a button in the palette will jump you directly to that step in the Frame Sampling workflow wizard Single Sampling Project Nodes Root Node Level steps affect the project as a whole Root Node files will appear in the far left of the Tree View hierarchy Tile Node Level steps are performed on the Tiles Image Tiles are the large scale synoptic images that cover the study area Each of these Tiles will be stratified and then divided into representative samples Tile Node
8. 3 Inthe Vector Layer to Copy section navigate to the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory and select zone88 4 Inthe Output Vector Layer section navigate to a directory where you have write permission 5 Type the name Zone68 then press Enter on your keyboard 6 Click OK in the Copy Vector Layer dialog A Job Status dialog opens tracking the progress 7 When the job is finished click OK in the Job Status dialog 8 Click Close in the Vector Utilities menu Set up the Model 1 Click the Modeler icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel AMEC Modeler The Spatial Modeler menu opens Select Model Maker Model Maker j 2 Model Librarian 2 Close Help 2 Click on the Model Maker button in the Spatial Modeler menu A blank Model Maker viewer opens along with the tools Tour Guides 409 ui Spatial Modeler 410 10 11 12 Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 2 Click near the upper left corner of the Model Maker viewer Click on the Vector icon in the Model Maker tool palette B Click to the right of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click below and between the Raster and the Vector objects in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Table icon in the Model Maker tool palette mi Click below the Function object in the Model Maker viewer Using the Connection too
9. ciekhere t gm 1 print the map Click on the Files Permissions Options map name here Filename map Directory K ig anenee eat tour map fi t tmp mnt home t jay 10177 Eg cddbs Eg desktop 199 7 Eg desktop freon H S p P File Type Map Composition map i Filename taur map size Bellz 3 Under Filename click on the name of the map you previously created 4 Click OK in the Compositions dialog The Print Map Composition dialog opens i Click here to rinter l PA NN ftmp mntinomefay1017 tour map print the map Printer Page Setup Options Preview Print Destination Image File A Image File Plot File img 5 Click on the Print Destination popup list to select the printer you want to use If you do not have any output devices configured you can output your map to an ERDAS IMAGINE image file img extension and display it in a Viewer When displaying maps converted to image format assign bands 1 2 3 to R G B respectively in the Select Layer To Add dialog This gives you an idea of what the map looks like if it 1s printed 6 For this exercise select EPS File in the Print Destination popup list to create an encapsulated PostScript file This file can be sent to a PostScript printer using the standard file print command for your platform Tour Guides 91 Map Composer 7 Click OK to print the map composition Edit C omposition
10. wl Output File img Save the Output File in vit res merse remo lief a directory where you have write permission OK Cae For the Multispectral File select dmtm img trom the examples directory The file dmtm img is located in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory where IMAGINE HOME is the location of ERDAS IMAGINE on your system For the High Resolution Pan File select spots img from the examples directory For the Output File select a directory in which you have write permission and enter the name bit res merge TG img then press Return on your keyboard Click OK A Job Status dialog opens tracking the progress c Modeler running model 8bit res merge meal Job State Done Percent Done 100 0 MEE 100 OK Cancer Help When the job is 100 complete click OK in the dialog You can set the Keep Job Status Box in the User Interface amp Session category of the Preference Editor so that the Job Status box is dismissed automatically after an operation is performed In the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel click the Viewer icon ERDAS IMAGINE Use the Swipe Utility Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Click the Open icon and navigate to the directory in which you saved the Output File you just created bit res merge TG img y a Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to add the file The image displays in the Viewer Hle Utility View AO
11. 44201 71 3150 ore meters 2 Drag on the Eye marker of the Positioning tool to change the observer s point of view in the Image Drape viewer The data in the Position Parameters dialog updates to reflect the changes in the observer s position The view in the Image Drape viewer is also updated ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer If the image in the Image Drape viewer does not completely refresh when the mouse button is released click the Update icon zu 3 Next drag on the Target marker of the Positioning tool to change the point of observation in the Image Drape viewer The data in the Position Parameters dialog updates to reflect the changes in the point of observation The view in the Image Drape viewer is also updated 4 Change the position of both the observer and the target at once by dragging on the line that connects them in the Viewer The data in the Position Parameters dialog and the Image Drape viewer is updated 5 Inthe Image Drape viewer click the Goto icon to return to the original position of the observer and the target m KEN il The image and the Positioning tool in the Viewer are updated to their original position The Position Parameters dialog is also updated Use the Position Parameters Dialog 1 Inthe Position Parameters dialog change the FOV to 90 and the Roll to 45 then click Apply The image in the Image Drape viewer is updated to reflect this change 2 Inthe Position
12. Filename img flevolandradarskews img flood tm147 radar imt floodplain img gt imagine hardcopy data img gt examples hyperspectral img Eg bidgs Eg info Eg lanier dms File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 1024 Rows x 1024 Columns x 6 Bandis Set Layers to Colors at 4 5 and 3 respectively Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the image file oK Recent Goto Rename Delete CDROM Cancel Help Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar to display the thematic raster layer germtm isodata img over the germtm img file The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Under Filename open the directory in which you previously saved germtm isodata img by entering the directory path name in the text entry field and pressing the Return key on your keyboard ERDAS IMAGINE Open Raster Attribute Editor Tour Guides 10 1 Click here to move Classification Select the file germtm isodata img from the list of files in the directory You are going to evaluate identify the classes in this file Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Click Clear Display to turn off this checkbox Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the image file Select Raster Attributes from the Viewer menu bar The Raster Attribute Editor displays In the Raster Attribute Editor sele
13. Fourier Transform Editor 5 Press Return on your keyboard The value returned is 78 99 Wedge Mask Angles The angles are measured as shown in the illustration below 90 45 180 270 90 315 45 6 Enter a Wedge Angle of 10 00 This is the total angle of the wedge in this case 5 00 degrees on either side of the center 7 Click OK to edit the layer The resulting fft layer looks similar to the following example Viewer amp 1 wedge img Layer 7 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel After performing an inverse Fourier transform the resulting image is destriped ui 230 ERDAS IMAGINE Fourier Transform Editor Edit Using Mouse Driven Tools Use Low Pass Filtering Use High Pass Filtering Tour Guides The mouse driven tools allow you to perform the same types of edits as in the menu options but they are a bit easier to use since they are more interactive than the dialogs You can extend a filter radius or indicate where to place a mask simply by dragging the mouse If it is not already displayed open the original fft layer in the Fourier Editor e g TM 1 fft From the Fourier Editor menu bar select Edit Filter Options The Filter Options dialog opens Filter Options Select window function here Window Function Ideal Minimum Affected Frequency foo E OK Cane Help This is where you set the window that is use
14. Table P 5 Utility Menu Options JPEG Compress Images Compress raster images using the JPEG compression technique and save them in an ERDAS IMAGINE format Decompress JPEG Images Decompress images compressed using the JPEG Compress Images utility Convert Pixels to ASCII Convert ASCII to Pixels Output raster data file values to an ASCII file Create an image from an ASCII file Convert Images to Annotation Convert a raster image to polygons saved as ERDAS IMAGINE annotation ovr Convert Annotation to Raster Create Update Image Chips Convert an annotation file containing vector graphics to a raster image file Provide a direct means of creating chips for one or more images Mount Unmount CD ROM Mount and unmount a CD ROM drive Create Lowercase Parallel Links Create Font Tables Make a set of links to items on CD for systems that convert CD paths to uppercase Create a map of characters in a particular font Font to Symbol Create a symbol library to use as annotation characters from an existing font Compare Images Reconfigure Raster Formats Open Image Compare dialog Compare layers raster map info etc Start a DLL to reconfigure raster formats Reconfigure Vector Formats Start a DLL to reconfigure vector formats Reconfigure Resample Methods Reconfigure Geometric Models Start a DLL to reconfigure resampling methods Start a DLL t
15. llli RR rra 170 Import Generic Binary Data 2 rere hh hh hh hn hihn hun nn 171 vi ERDAS IMAGINE Altar WIG oo decd nicer ure E eee ws dee eee es ee ce eared oe te eran are ee a eer 172 Enter Image Dimensions xau ac a cist rnc cd atm trate Pee deo tie aie Dco X dece iac 36 ade De ah ake oe 174 SAVE OPIONS sa aaa aes epee eae a Ste gi eee Seg sw OTRO ORELLI ee ee eres 175 Preview the Image eui qx s 8 sree ae eed ae Rh uet ua ah ace atte LR Siete SQUE On ir d dero dU M Ro Sr Seaton e 176 Gel Image Information 2 3 ghee x ERES rions dridi ERE EE Sd d Eam dau ed 176 Edil Image MOMMANON sereas rts UE eee BR 39 a ewe a Edo E ee ana diae ad doa doa 176 View Image Information 0 0 hrs 177 Chapter 9 Batcn FrOCeSSIIO uu xxoack mmo R buted deere POE XORUE UR EDEN eee eee OR UR be Gee 179 INVOGUCUOR PD ES EEREN ERENER ENAERE REEE 179 Set up Start the Task Scheduler on NT and 2000 cler 180 Use Batch with a UNIX System uu uam E Seas Se xxr REESE EIS xard xx 182 Execute a Single File Single Command es 182 Execute Multiple Files Single Command Run Now crrrr hh 183 Set TIFF Image File Preferences llle rr 184 Start the Image Command Tool llle 184 Sar The alc WIZ eea E EE mi ee i c ab Wu bota oat NUS olt anon tor d cR UH OUR RP ed ee 3 185 Execute Multiple Files Single Command Run Later rrr 188 eee Xal
16. the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined j r Commands Variables ToT This is the d imagecommand usridata germtm tif stats 0 0 000000 10 10 Default 251 I EN N Li file name Replace Undo Save argument icon Insert variable icon Create and insert Load variables icon 4 Click the Create and Insert Variables button to create variables S This tool examines the command for file names and replaces them with variables In this case one variable called Input is created and replaces a specific file and path For more information about variables see Work with Variables on page 202 The Batch commands can be saved for future use See Save Load Options on page 207 Commands Variables imagecommand G Input stats 0 0 000000 10 10 Default 256 aoi none The variable displays in the command line as well as the variable dropdown list Es input A i ls oll 5 Click the Next gt button to display the Select Files to Process panel 186 ERDAS IMAGINE Batch Processing Batch Wizard Select Files to Process Use the popup list to select the column to modify Use the Select button to add files to the list The Delete button can be used to remove selected rows from the list There must be at least one name in the list below to proceed Input A Add files to the Input list by clicking this button E 4 Show Full P
17. 1 4 Click to the left of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer 5 Click on the Matrix icon again in the Model Maker tool palette 6 Click to the right of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer 396 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Spatial Modeler Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click below and to the left of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon again in the Model Maker tool palette Click below and to the right of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below the first Function object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Raster icon again in the Model Maker tool palette Click below the second Function object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below and between the Raster objects just placed in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Vector icon in the Model Maker tool palette B Click to the left of the Function object just placed in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click to the right of the Function object just placed in the Model Maker viewer Using the Connection tool and optionally the Lock tool connect the objects in the model as depicted in the following picture When y
18. 308 a pag eN zaa amp t Taa ea a ca Click Close in the Add Images for Mosaic dialog The images in the Mosaic Tool viewer are positioned as 1f they were regular photos that a person stacked by hand One image intersects everything below it in the stack Experiment with the stacking order in the Mosaic Tool viewer by clicking on any or all of the images in the canvas and then clicking on any of the icons pictured below T ma ma Sa G When you are finished experimenting with the stacking icons click outside of the images in the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer to deselect the image s Click the Image Matching icon in the Mosaic Tool viewer In the Matching Options dialog under Matching Method select Overlap Areas The Matching Options dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Run the Mosaic Tour Guides Mosaic Click OK in the Matching Options dialog Click on the Intersection 1con in the Mosaic Tool tool bar In the Mosaic Tool tool bar click the Function icon f The Set Overlap Function dialog opens In the Set Overlap Function dialog under Select Function select Average and then click Apply Click Close in the Set Overlap Function dialog In the Mosaic Tool viewer select Process Run Mosaic The Run Mosaic dialog opens UITITCOEENEN xj Enter the name of Output File Name irmq the output file here OR 2sie_mosaic img Cap Output a Common Look Up T able Choose the pp
19. 36 Raster AltriDUle EGUOl uui hascueeA3 ead i naw eee UE EAE ROE R REGE EU RR ee ROC Dee ee eee 36 Clete Color AUDUS T M DA 36 Make Layers Transparent 0 ccc hh hh 38 Manipulate CellArray Information 0 0 00 cc eee eee eee eens 39 Edit Column Properties uuu socio dant a dawbadeh sa dames re a heehee eee oS a ne m de por oan 40 Caeberate stals 6S adiu rta Rabani dido vod ec aparato d REOR n i820 i to Soc e Ze Urn due PI om crc tu rati LI dr ee dida 41 SEleCt Criteria ob 42 Generate Report llli hh hh rens 43 PFIOIHO TOO Su 3 a414 152592229 34 299292 9 4 G5 A 5 0 3 9 d 2 378 2 5 d E E Gd E AE AEE Sees 46 Display Spectral Prole sice rer case sed doe pud t eR Sad oe bag oe Gudea de RODEO PS Pur EUN 46 Display Spatial Profile 222 llllllellsleeee RR rrr 49 View SU dES PIONB ee oud eds 9rd Gs I oe ope eee ease Fus dnd Hate eo da Y Xon le e 51 Mage Diape rrr 52 Change OPON M 54 Change Sun Position 0060 eee eee eee eee eee eee nn 54 Dump Contents to Viewer 1 ee hh sns 55 vitigimuAio m L M 55 Manipulate the Observer and Field of View llllellleel n 56 Chapter 2 mage GalaloU 2202 ieee Erud E eu OW RA OE PEOR EUR Oe ee ee Eo ER M dra 59 MOOOC ON MERE TD eacaest Pesene a eee ee eee eee eee eee ee
20. 408 6 When you are finished viewing the image select File Close from the Viewer menu bar Another application of using vector layers in models is to calculate summary information about your imagery for each polygon in a vector layer This summary information can then be stored as an additional attribute of the vector layer You must have ERDAS IMAGINE running 1 Click the Vector icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar Ed The Vector Utilities menu opens Clean Vector Layer Click Copy Vector Layer Build Vector Layer Topology Copy Vector Layer Extemal Vector Layer Rename Vector Layer Delete Vector Layer Display Vector Layer Info subset Vector Layer Mosaic Polygon Layers Transform Vector Layer Create Polygon Labels Raster to Vector Vector to Raster start Table Tool onal Attributes ASCII to Point Vector Layer Close Help 2 Click the Copy Vector Layer button on the Vector Utilities menu The Copy Vector Layer dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Copy Vector Layer a Vector Layer to Copy arcinfo Output Vector Layer arcinfo Keep the name oxo ofthe file the same i wal infos infos lanier dms bldgs streets ONES va bldgs This isa directory ENEE examples data write permission OK Batch Cancel in which you have
21. 466 ERDAS IMAGINE Define Feature Space Signature Tour Guides Advanced Classification The Viewer number field in the Linked Cursors dialog changes to 2 You could also enter a 2 in this number field without having to click the Select button In the Linked Cursors dialog click Linkto link the Viewers then click in the Viewer displaying germtm img The linked inquire cursors white crosshairs open in the Viewers Drag the inquire cursor around in the germtm img Viewer Viewer 1 to see where these pixels are located in the Feature Space image Notice where the water areas are located in the Feature Space image These areas are black in the germtm img file Viewer 1 Any Feature Space AOI can be defined as a nonparametric signature in your classification Use the polygon AOI tool to draw a polygon in the Feature Space image Draw the polygon in the area that you identified as water You may need to zoom in on the images 1 e zoom in on either or both the Feature Space image or germtm img to draw the polygon The Feature Space signature is based on this polygon ini x Wi Viewer 42 germtm 2 5 fsp img Layer 1 File Utility View AOI Raster Help 2 B D Ed ego mtHA E Draw a polygon in the area identified as water After the AOI is created click on the Create New Signature s from AOI icon L in the Signature Editor to add this AOI as a signature The signature you have just added is a no
22. 5 Click OK in the Create Feature Space Images dialog to create the Feature Space image for layers two and five of the germtm img file The Create Feature Space Images dialog closes then the Job Status dialog opens 1 000 locals 1 temp efsp xi a FS Mapping c docume 1 jay 101 Click here to close Job State Done this dialog Percent Done 100 0 BNNEBEBEEEEEEENNE 100 Help Tour Guides 465 Advanced Classification After the process is completed a Viewer Viewer 2 opens displaying the Feature Space image PIX iix File Utility View AOI Raster Help Z m D 6 Click OK in the Job Status dialog to close this dialog Link Cursors in The Linked Cursors utility allows you to directly link a cursor in the image Viewer to the Image Feature Feature Space viewer This shows you where pixels in the image file are located in the Feature Space Space image 1 Inthe Signature Editor select Feature View Linked Cursors The Linked Cursors dialog opens lig Linked Cursors x Select Feature Space Viewers Click to select I the Feature Space set to 2 All Feature Space Viewers viewer Click to link the Viewers Feature Space H Click to close l this dialog Click to unlink Viewers 2 Click Select in the Linked Cursors dialog to define the Feature Space viewer that you want to link to the Image Viewer 3 Click in Viewer 2 the Viewer displaying the Feature Space image
23. Classification 134 19 20 21 22 23 Repeat these steps with each class so that you can see how the pixels are assigned to each class Y ou may also try selecting more than one class at a time Continue assigning names and colors for the remaining classes in the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray In the Raster Attribute Editor select File Save to save the data in the CellArray Select File Close from the Raster Attribute Editor menu bar Select File Clear from the Viewer menu bar ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER SIX Polynomial Rectification Introduction Rectify a Landsat Image Perform Image to Image Rectification Display Files Rectification is the process of projecting the data onto a plane and making it conform to a map projection system Assigning map coordinates to the image data is called georeferencing Since all map projection systems are associated with map coordinates rectification involves georeferencing Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 1 hour In this tour guide you rectify a Landsat TM image of Atlanta Georgia using a georeferenced SPOT panchromatic image of the same area The SPOT image is rectified to the State Plane map projection In rectifying the Landsat image you use these basic steps e display files e start Geometric Correction Tool e record GCPs e compute a transformation matrix e resample the image e verify the rectification pro
24. Click on the Connect icon and then on the Lock icon i Connect the input Raster graphics n4 sensitivityand n7 spot summary to the Function the input Scalar to the Function and then the Function to the output Raster Click the Lock icon to disable the lock tool nl Click the Select icon Double click the Scalar graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Scalar dialog opens Change scalar type here Enter value here J3 Show Scalar in Session Log OK Cancel Help In the Scalar dialog enter a Value of 5 Click on the Type popup list and select Integer Click OK in the Scalar dialog The Scalar dialog closes and n11 Integer displays under the Scalar graphic in the Model Maker viewer Next you create a file that shows sensitivity data where they exist and allows the SPOT data to show in all other areas Therefore you use the conditional statement 359 ui Spatial Modeler 360 When you click here it displays here Double click the untitled Function graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Function Definition dialog opens Function Definition e Sue inpar Functions Conditional i n sensitivit n7 spot summary CONDITIONAL testl arg EITHER arg IF lt test gt OR INDEX test 1 argl arge PICK number argi an EITHER n4 sensitivity IF n4 sensitivity OR arg2 OTHERWISE OK Clear Cancel Help In
25. E pg 2 Fus i Introduction Create a Viewshed One of the many tasks you can perform using IMAGINE Advantage is Viewshed Analysis This tour guide describes how to use this analysis tool Viewshed Analysis allows you to position an observer on a DEM in a Viewer and determine the visible areas within the terrain You can adjust the observer s height either above ground level or above sea level and set the visible range This tool is useful for planning the location and height of towers used for observation or communications It might also be used to determine areas that lie within poor reception of standard broadcast towers and are thus potential cable markets In this tour guide you can learn how to e start an Image Drape viewer e start the Viewshed tool e work with multiple observers e query Viewshed data and layers Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 15 minutes In this exercise you create a viewshed and analyze the terrain within it ERDAS IMAGINE must be running with a Viewer open Click the Open icon in the Viewer or select File Open Raster Layer 1 In the Select Layer To Add dialog navigate to the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory Select the file eldodem img then click the Raster Options tab In the Raster Options tab make sure that the Fit to Frame checkbox is active Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog Tour Guides 323 ui Viewshed Analysis Add the Raster
26. Input High Resolution 8 bit Stretch to Approximate PC1 Data Range set cell size for the model SET CELLSIZE MIN set window for the model SET WINDOW INTERSECTION set area of interest for the model SET AOI NONE declarations Float RASTER n1 dmtm FILE OLD NEAREST NEIGHBOR AOI NONE IMAGINE_HOME examples dmtm img Integer RASTER n23_ spots FILE OLD NEAREST NEIGHBOR AOI NONE IMAGINE_HOME examples spots img Integer RASTER n29_merge_small FILE DELETE_IF_EXISTING IGNORE 0 ATHEMATIC 8 BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER c temp merge_small img FLOAT MATRIX n3_ Output FLOAT MATRIX n11_ Output FLOAT MATRIX n26_ Output FLOAT TABLE n16 Output function definitions define n31 memory Float STRETCH n23 spots 1 3 0 255 n3 Output COVARIANCE n1_dmtm n11_ Output MATTRANS EIGENMATRIX n3 Output n26 Output MATINV n11 Output define n7 memory Float LINEARCOMB n1_dmtm GLOBAL MEAN n1_dmtm n11 Output n16 Output EIGENVALUES n3 Output define n22 memory Float FLOAT n31_memory 127 5 3 SQRT n16_Output 0 127 5 define n38 memory Float STACKLAYERS n22 memory n7 memory 2 NUMLAYERS n7 memory n29 merge small LINEARCOMB n38 memory n26 Output GLOBAL MEAN n1 dmtm j QUIT 4 Locate 9IMAGINE HOME examples dmtm img in bold above on line 24 and change it to arg ERDAS
27. row 2under the AND column name it TM Band 2 set Relation to lt and set the value to 35 Rule Props untitled ckb Two Variables their Helations and Values have been added to Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions Specify gioi r the rule High IR and i m List of Conditions Low Visible us AND Variable Relation Value Confidence El JEEE ram ie EE i Apply Close Help Click Apply then Close in the Rule Props dialog Since the hypothesis for the Commercial Services class has very similar rules and conditions to the Residential class some of the conditions can be used directly or copied and edited to save time Begin editing the Commercial Services class by placing a new rule on the Commercial Services hypothesis rectangle then double clicking the New Rule to open the Rule Props dialog Refer to Enter Rules for the Hypothesis on page 562 if you forget how to create a new rule In the Rule Props dialog change the Name of the rule to Bright Within City The first variable that is needed is Highway Map which is now in the Variable list since it was entered previously Click in the cell below Variable and select Highway Map confirm that the Relation is set to zz and set the Value to 7 As before this makes the variable equal to the urban area from nput img ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Bule Props untitled ckb Me nds ccc ia Services c
28. shp loudoun_ strata img Fi laeudoun tm grid shp Le Map 5 patem Grid Cell Options Alignment Options Select the Square Cells Upita Use Mask Overlay 1000000 v Align ta Reference Image Enter 8096 as the checkbox Align to Cell Size Multiples Inclusion Th reshold 000 00000 ES Masking Options Iv Use Mask Overlay Inclusion Threshold 80 ET A Mask Ficname feng Click OK to generate Browse to audoun mask im Recode the Shapefile loudoun mask img SODIUM ux Cancel Help 1 Make sure that the Reference Image is set as loudoun_strata img 2 Note that the Output Grid File is loudoun_tm_grid shp This is the default name which has the appends _ grid shp to the Tile Name If you change the Output File Name that change will be reflected in the Project Manager 3 Select the Use Mask Overlay checkbox The Mask file is used to limit the coverage of the Sampling Grid Because the Sampling that can be performed in this tour is restricted by our ability to use only the two existing high resolution files we use the mask file to mask out all of the portions of the Tile that do not have high resolution imagery coverage Les 4 Next to the Mask Filename part click the Browse button zm and browse to the IMAGINE HOME examples directory Select loudoun_mask img from the list of files and click OK 5 Enter 60 as the Inclusion Threshold Setting the Inclusion Threshold to 80 will
29. 1 Double click the Function object The Function Definition dialog opens Available Inputs n1 genntm n1 genntm 1 n1 genntm 2 n1 germtm 3 n1 germtm 5 n1 genmtm 5 n2 zone amp 88 Functions onal IRE value value raster value raster IGMORE va IORE value value raster IGNORE lt 4 l ZONAL MEAN n2 zone88 n1 genntm 4 OK clear Cancel 412 Help ERDAS IMAGINE Add Table Properties Tour Guides Spatial Modeler In the Functions popup list select Zonal In the list of Functions select ZONAL MEAN zone raster value raster this should be the sixteenth item on the list In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of zone raster Under Available Inputs click on n2 zone88 In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of value raster Under Available Inputs click on n1_germtm A4 Click on the OK button in the Function Definition dialog Double click the Table object The Table Definition dialog opens Verify that Output is selected Under the Output Options click on the Output to Descriptor or Attribute checkbox For the Existing Layer Type popup list select Vector Layer For File select the copy of zone88 from the directory in which you saved it earlier Since we are computing a new attribute for Attribute type MEAN
30. 180 Before you can use the Batch Wizard to schedule jobs to run at a later time on Windows NT systems you must set up and run the Scheduler This requirement means that the account that starts Scheduler must remain logged in for the scheduled job to run You must log in as an administrator or as a person with administrator privileges to set up and start the Task Scheduler Once started you no longer need to have administrator privileges to submit jobs There are two ways to determine if Task Scheduler is installed on your system If the Explorer shows a folder called Scheduled Tasks under My Computer then Task Scheduler is installed If there is an entry called Task Scheduler under the Services control panel then Task Scheduler is installed If Task Scheduler is installed there is an additional panel at the end of the Batch Wizard which collects username and password information required by the Task Scheduler The Finish button will be disabled and the Next button will be enabled Once the information has been entered it will be remembered for the session and does not have to be entered again The information is not saved so when IMAGINE is exited it will be forgotten and will have to be reentered during the next session This is a security step because saving it in a file might be a security problem From the Start menu select Settings Control Panel On the Control Panel select Administrative Tools then choose
31. 3 select the file a emen imagine840 9217 CDROM 8407 d File Type Arc Coverage Filename zoned Size 512 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog confirm that the File Type selected is Arc Coverage 3 Under Filename select zone88 4 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the layer in the Viewer The zone88 polygon layer is displayed in the Viewer similar to the following example Viewer zone88 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help 5 Inthe Viewer menu bar select Vector Symbology 638 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Vector The Symbology dialog opens Use these menu bar options to P Hle Edit View Automatic Help nne edit B amp and view symbology Symbology is displayed here a Apply Close Help The Symbology dialog has a CellArray but it does not yet contain any records 6 Inthe Symbology dialog select Automatic Unique Value The Unique Value dialog opens omma Select attribute Click here to E Generate New Styles to use for create new symbology here styles OK Cancel Help y gy In this example you want each zone to have a different symbology 7 Inthe Unique Value dialog click on the popup list and select ZONING 8 Click the Generate New Styles checkbox to enable it 9 Click OK in the Unique Value dialog The Unique Value dialog closes and the CellA
32. Click the Open icon then navigate to the directory where you saved the file sharp dmtm img a 1 Select the file sharp dmtm img then click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to open it in the Viewer 427 Spatial Modeler Eliminate Object type Mismatch 428 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TeraModel Help When you are finished viewing the image click File Close in the Viewer to close the image There are five basic object types that can be either inputs to or outputs from a model These are e Raster e Vector input only e Matrix e Table e Scalar Depending on the arguments each function produces a particular object type For example the GLOBAL MAX function produces a Scalar if the argument is either a Matrix or a Table However it produces a Table if the argument is a Raster In other words for either a Matrix or a Table the maximum value may be represented by a single number 1 e Scalar A Raster has a maximum value in each individual spectral band so the result in this case is a Table of maximum values one for each band In order to be consistent this is still true for a Raster with only one band In this case a table is produced with a single entry In the following exercise you build a model that rescales an image based on the maximum pixel value that actually occurs in an image You do this using the GLOBAL MAX function Initially you incorrectly treat the output of
33. Narrow Roa em Minor Road 1 Narrow Road oe 2 m Flat solid open ground Hat solid open ground qa solid open ground shallow solid open ground 6 steep solid open ground Sic Extreme slope no qo The first two hypotheses Wide Road and Narrow Road are fairly simple The expert rule in these cases is that something identified as a road is going to be easily traversable by the vehicles with major roads being better than minor roads Consequently the Wide Road hypothesis has two rules 1 e they each have an OR statement so that either needs to be true for the hypothesis to be true The first looks for major roads DN value 2 in the Roads variable roads img and the second looks for pixels that are potentially identified as roads by the supervised classification 581 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V r7 Major Road m Highway category hypotheses rules conditions 1 Double click on the Highway category rule The Rule Props dialog opens ule Props mobility factors ckb a Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions Specify i35 a Use the scroll bar List of Conditions 7 to see the Co Variable Relation Value E Confidence value affiewain categonzaton O e y in the CellArray i PpiHY Close Help The Rule Props dialog shows how this particular rule depends on the Terrain Categorization supervised img file 2 Inthe Rule Props dialog click the horizontal scroll bar u
34. The union of Sets A and B i Exclusive Or XOR of Sets The Exclusive Or of two sets is the set of elements belonging to one but not both of the given sets n 4 Subtraction of Sets The subtraction of set B from set A yields a set that contains all data from A that is not contained in B e saved groups of classes that represent a single target class The subtraction of Set B from A 511 Advanced Classification Using the Ancillary Data Tool Setting Up the Ancillary Data Classes It would take a very long time to collect all of the classes in a large image using only the simple tools outlined above To save time you should quickly group all of the classes into Class Groups and then refine these initial groupings to more accurately define the study area The Ancillary Data Tool provides a means of performing this quick initial grouping By using previously collected data such as ground truth data or a previous classification of the same area you can quickly group your image and then concentrate on evaluating and correcting the groups The thematic file used as the Ancillary Data file need not cover the entire area but it must at least overlap with the area being grouped If the Class Group from the previous section is still highlighted in the Viewer use the Clear Working Group contents button e to clear the selections In the Class Grouping Tool click the Start Ancillary Data Tool button 2
35. lt Back button to resume recording E Run commands as they are recorded Close u EER Hext gt PHUSH Help i 1 Fromthe ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar click the Interpreter icon and then select Radiometric Enhancement Histogram Equalization to open the Histogram Equalization dialog 2 Select IMAGINE HOME examples lanier img for the Input File name and your workspace image 1 img for the Output File name Where your workspace is the Default Output Directory specified in the User Interface amp Session category in the Preference Editor and IMAGINE HOME is the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is installed Histogram Equatization Input File img fmm li Coordinate Type subset Definition Output File img Save the Output File in the directory of your From Inquire Box choice UL X 233085 00 z LR x 248415 00 Number of Bins ss oF E ARTA Bee UL SL Click the Batch button to add the command to the Batch Wizard 3 Click the Batch button in the Histogram Equalization dialog The command to perform histogram equalization is added to the Record Commands for Automation panel The histogram equalization process starts and a Job Status dialog displays When the process is done click OK 195 ui Batch Processing Run Next Command 1 Toopen the Brightness Inversion dialog select Brightness Inversion from the Radiometric Enhance menu you opened in the first com
36. on mousedown unload j j on framedisplay disable ok j j on startup display res merge j j 5 Locate d erdas models 8bit res merge md l in bold above on line 74 and change it to the location and name of the script you generated Tour Guides 389 Spatial Modeler 390 ET Editor 8bit res merge eml edited Dir usridata 0 Hle Edit View Find soaa ajem jfile jjinput if S multi spec amp Shi res pan enable ok else disable ok le 9K jo Accept all info and issue the metry 35 190 82 25 mousedown disable ok job modeler nq fusrfdata 8bit _res_merge mdl meter state quote S Smulti spec quote Shi res pan quote Soutputname unload lel jle Cancel o Cancel this process do not run the job Im nnmm 6 Select File Save As Filename Directory Save the eml file with a new name in a directory Ij Shit res merge emt E i i 8hit res merge mul gt usr where you have write 8bit res merge mdl ed datar permission output img nutput rrd Change this section of the code to reflect the location of the mdl file you edited with arg1 arg2 and arg3 Recent File Type Ascu Text File tzt i B Files O subdirectories amp Matched 1155850K Bytes Free 7 Inthe Save As dialog navigate to a directory where you have write permission 8 Sa
37. sj ala Kaje 1 7 siuisjajele s s e I x a e The image is visibly smoothed perhaps too much However the striping remains You remove the stripes using the wedge filter later in this tour guide You could try using the Butterworth filter with an even larger radius or the other windows The following graphics illustrate some of these other scenarios E Viewer 7 iph img Layer 7 E Viewer 7 hph img Layer 7 BE File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help uini alel ee tsi eiaa Type Low Pass Type High Pass Window Hanning Window Hanning Radius 100 00 Radius 20 00 Tour Guides 225 Fourier Transform Editor 9 Use a Circular Mask ul 226 Type Low Pass Type Low Pass Window Bartlett Window Gaussian Radius 150 00 Radius 200 00 Redisplay the original fft layer in the Fourier Editor There are several bright spots in the fft layer such as those in the upper left quadrant These can be eliminated using the circular mask option With your cursor in the Fourier Editor click in the center of one of these bright areas There is one at u v 58 199 You use this coordinate here but you can use another if you like When you have selected a coordinate select Mask Circular Mask from the Fourier Editor menu bar The Circular Mask dialog opens Select window fun
38. t The Classification Path Information dialog opens The class beneath the inquire cursor is identified here Classification Path information Map Wi 13046801553 4282797 1327 meters Row gt Class Name Class Value Confidence n Le Closed Forest tno go a eg Open Forestry qa 4 vi 9 s 000 F s IN c i ul 594 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides IMAGINE Expert Classifier V In the Classification Path Information dialog the second row in the CellArray specifies the second most likely class hypothesis for this pixel since you requested the 2 Best Classes Per Pixel on page 592 An inquire cursor is placed in the Viewer containing the classification and the pathway it corresponds to is highlighted in red in the Knowledge Engineer dialog Click the Select icon from the Viewer tool bar N Using your mouse click hold and drag the inquire cursor to a yellow pixel in the Viewer The Classification Path Information dialog and the Knowledge Engineer dialog update accordingly ae bi AX w Identify possible bridges model 1 en Bridges landings A CENNY POSSINIE Wages model 1 The hypothesis rule and condition are outlined in red Continue to move the inquire cursor around in the Viewer and analyze the results in the Classification Path Information dialog and the Knowledge Engineer dialog When you are finished click Close in the Classific
39. 3 i Click here to select the Viewer in which to locate fiducials S v y status Model has no solution 2 Under Fiducial Type click the first icon 3 Under Viewer Fiducial Locator click the Toggle icon Oo 4 Follow the instructions by clicking in the Viewer that contains pS_napp img A link box opens in the first Viewer and the Chip Extraction Viewer also displays the second Viewer 5 Inthe first Viewer drag the link box to the point in the image you want to digitize as illustrated in the following example Place the center of the link box on the dot at the center of the point where the crosshair intersects NOTE Identifying the dot may sometimes require Breakpoint LUT adjustments 270 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Drag on this scroll bar to view the left and right sides of the image Orthorectification Viewers ps napp img Band 7 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Drag on this scroll bar to view the top or bottom of the image 149306 7 a 48B 8 35 UTM 7 Clarke 1855 The second Viewer displays the point in the image that you have chosen with the link box In the Camera Model Properties dialog click the Place Image Fiducial icon ol Move your cursor into the Chip Extraction Viewer the second Viewer and click on the center point where the crosshair intersects Click here to place the image fiducial The point coordinates displa
40. 377 Spatial Modeler c Crieria Available Layers Criteria Table nl dmtim l Row Out ut nz slope value ni dmtm 4 n1 dmtm 2 eral dmm P ni dmtmi3 SVisni dmtm 4 Click here to ann select a file _ n1_dmtm 6 then click here Ig ont _dmtn to select a ima ay descriptor 4 Columns 7 F EE cu value N Balisfy All Criteria Any Criteria Otherwise ON F OK Add Column Cancel Help Change the number of rows here Click here to add a column columns display here 2 Inthe Criteria dialog click on n2_slope under Available Layers 10 11 378 The descriptor fields associated with that layer are now listed in the Descriptor popup list Click on the Descriptor popup list to select the Value descriptor Click Add Column to add that descriptor to the Criteria Table Under Available Layers click on n1 dmtm 4 then click Add Column to add a column for the minimum data file values 1n band 4 Click Add Column again to add a column for the maximum data file values in band 4 Repeat this procedure for n1 dmtm 5 and n1_dmtm 3 There are now eight columns in the Criteria Table Change the number of Rows to 4 because the final output file has four classes Click in the first row of the n2 slope column and type 3 Press Return on your keyboard Under n2 slope enter gt 3 in row 2 3 in row 3 and gt 3 in row 4 In the same manner enter the minimum a
41. 4 Click Apply in the Options dialog The background of the image in the Image Drape viewer is now gold 5 Click Close in the Options dialog Change Sun Position 1 Select View Sun Positioning from the Image Drape viewer menu bar The Sun Positioning dialog opens Click here to apply your changes Drag this dot to change the position of the sun E Light Switch ambience zoo Fo i a 2 Inthe Sun Positioning dialog drag the dot to another position on the target The center of the target indicates the sun position at high noon 54 ERDAS IMAGINE Dump Contents to Viewer Start Eye Target Tour Guides Viewer Click Apply and then Close in the Sun Positioning dialog Note how the shadows across the image change to reflect the different sun position you have selected Select Utility Dump Contents to Viewer from the Image Drape viewer menu bar A second Viewer opens displaying another view of the image in the Image Drape viewer Select File Close in the first Viewer to clear it from the screen Select View Link Unlink with Viewer from the Image Drape viewer menu bar An instructions box opens directing you to click in the Viewer to which you want the Image Drape viewer to be linked Click in the Viewer you just created The viewers are now linked and a Positioning tool displays in the Viewer File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help s s z u al 2 sre sjel I
42. 7i General Projection Histogram Pixel data File Info Layer Name re ino ast Modified Width Block Width Compression Layer Info Hin statistics Info Median Last Modified Upper Left X 538537 55449342 Lower Right X 548554 34273352 Lower Right Y 3739916 6761681 Pixel Size x N A Unit meters Map Info Hle spheroid Projection Info Zune Number Band 1 Wed Aug 11 13 15 41 1999 Number nf Layers 1 e294 64 Hone Height Block Height 2244 Type Continuous 64 Data Type Unsigned 6 bit Pyramid Layers Present Mean 113 622 sid Dev 28 472 skip Factor Y 22 0 Max 247 124 Mode 123 skip Factor x 22 Wed Aug 11 13 15 43 1999 The modelis listed here Upper Left Y 3743535 45443985 Pixel Size Y N A Geo Model Camera Genreferenced to UTM Clarke 1855 11 Datum HAD27 Look in the Geo Model section If the Geo Model section says Camera you must delete the map model therefore proceed to step 3 If there is no model proceed to Perform Geometric Correction on page 268 3 Select Edit Delete Map Model from the ImageInfo menu bar 4 Select File Close from the ImageInfo menu bar Redisplay the file 1 Click the Close icon in the Viewer currently displaying ps napp img Tour Guides m Click the Open icon and select ps_napp img from the directory in which you saved it 267 Orthorectification ry 3 Move your cursor arou
43. B3 B3 249430 0 200 New Value 1 Change Selected Rows Cancel Help 8 Right click in the Value column and select Invert Selection 532 ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools 9 Enter O in the New Value field and click the Change Selected Rows button al x Value MewValue Value Histogram Red Green 57 11070 0 0 212 ef s ee o 023 Enter 0 here Click Change Change Selected Rowe Selected Rows Help Cancel All of the Classes that are not members of the Forest Target Class will have their pixel values set to 0 This will exclude them from the Stratum File and eliminate them from the computations of the Final Analysis 10 Right click on the Value column again and select Invert Selection from the popup list This selects only those classes that are members of the Forest Target Class 11 Renumber the New Values for the members of the MOI Target class The numbering system depends on your needs ain x Value MewMalue Value Histogram Red Green a wa ofl 1 125130 0 0 543 0 333 109 of 108 2548130 0514 0 629 CS o onn 1772630 oseo 0 408 Renumber the selected Classes m5 of n iem 0675 4 Mew Value Cancel Click OK Help Tour Guides 533 ui Frame Sampling Tools 12 Click OK to exit the Thematic Recode dialog and return to the Recode dialog x Output File ima loudo
44. Cancel Help Mosaic Choose the ppropriate directory by clicking here 2 Inthe Run Mosaic dialog under Output File Name enter a name for the output file in the directory of your choice e g color infrared img 3 Click OK in the Run Mosaic dialog A Job Status dialog displays stating the progress of the mosaic operation 4 Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the mosaic operation is finished NOTE The mosaic operation can take up to ten minutes to run based upon your hardware capabilities and the size of the files 5 Select File Close from the Mosaic Tool viewer to clear it from the screen Display Output Image 1 Click on the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel A new Viewer displays 2 Click the Open icon in the Viewer you just created g Tour Guides 321 Mosaic The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select color infrared img from the directory in which you saved it and then click OK Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Check to be sure the Fit to Frame option is enabled Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The mosaicked output image displays in the viewer E Viewer 2 color infrared img Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Hle Utility View AOI Raster sw olaa o ese Wala ire E BT ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER FIFTEENST amp ET Viewshed Analysis CST
45. Click here to highlight this Cell 2 Click on the Selector icon N in the Sample Selection toolbar 3 Click on the indicated Sample Cell to highlight it 4 Select Utility Blend from the Sample Selection menu bar The Viewer Blend Fade dialog is opened 5 Use the meter handle to adjust the amount of blending so that you can view the Stratum File through the Grid This allows you to select Sample Cells that contain a representative amount to the MOI v You must exercise caution when manually selecting Sample Cells for interpretation No more than half of the Samples should be manually selected Manually selecting more Cells will introduce user bias into the calculations 6 When you have finished viewing the Stratum file click OK on the Viewer Blend Fade dialog to dismiss it 538 ERDAS IMAGINE Automatically Selecting Sample Cells Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools Click the Accept Manually Selected Cells button ES to select this Cell for interpretation The Sample Selection Tool provides a utility for randomly selecting Cells for interpretation This utility automatically selects cells based on the size and expected proportion of the MOI in the stratum Click the Automatic Selection icon in the Sample Selection toolbar The Required Samples dialog is opened x Enter 15 here Current Samples f lez 14 E Total Samples E Click OK Cancel Help Note that the Current Samples number box di
46. Close in the Viewer to close the image Now that you are familiar with the tools and interface of the Spatial Modeler the following two examples Eliminate Division by Zero and Use AOIs in Processing do not have detailed instructions or as many screen captures to guide you through the process Calculating band ratios with multispectral imagery is a very common image processing technique Calculating a band ratio can be as simple as dividing one spectral band by another Any time division is done care should be taken to avoid division by zero which is undefined In the following model you can see what errors division by zero can cause and how to correct these errors You must have Model Maker running Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click near the upper left corner of the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below and to the right of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below and to the right of the Function object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Connection icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click on the Lock icon in the Model Maker tool palette 443 ui Spatial Modeler Add Raster Properties Add Function Properties Add Raster Properties 444 10 1 12 Connect the first Raster object to the Function object as an input Connect the Function objec
47. Double click on the Suburban rule attached to the Buildings no go hypothesis The Rule Props for the Suburban rule open Tour Guides 587 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Identify Choke Points 588 This rule uses an AND statement Hule Props mobility factors ckb Name ETT Rule Confidence Compute from Conditions Specify i35 F List of Conditions JL AND Variable Relation Value Confidence j 1 Terrain Categorization D 7 p e Terrain Categorization e 9 e i PpiHy Close Help In the Rule Props dialog move the horizontal scroll bar all the way to the right Notice that the Confidence values are set to 0 75 Click Close in the Rule Props dialog The final hypothesis is another good example of spatially enabling the IMAGINE Expert Classifier This hypothesis identifies choke points in the road network points where the road narrows considerably and traffic cannot circumnavigate thereby representing a potential no go point The main example of this is bridges Identification of bridges might sound like an easy proposition find roads that are on water However the only information we have on location of water bodies is from the landcover classification the Terrain Categorization variable which cannot identify water that flows below other features Consequently a more complex approach is required Click the Variables tab in the Knowledge Engineer dialog
48. ElL These menus are identical to the ones on the icon panel You can also place your cursor anywhere in the icon panel and press Ctrl Q to exit ERDAS IMAGINE r FY Y The following table contains the Session menu selections and their functionalities Table P 2 Session Menu Options Selection Preferences Configuration Functionality Set individual or global default options for many ERDAS IMAGINE functions Viewer Map Composer Spatial Modeler etc Configure peripheral devices for ERDAS IMAGINE Session Log View a real time record of ERDAS IMAGINE messages and commands and to issue commands Active Process List Commands View and cancel currently active processes running in ERDAS IMAGINE Open a command shell in which you can enter commands to activate or cancel processes Enter Log Message Insert text into the Session Log Start Recording Batch Commands Open the Batch Wizard Collect commands as they are generated by clicking the Batch button that is available on many ERDAS IMAGINE dialogs Open Batch Command File View Offline Batch Queue Open a Batch Command File bcf you have saved previously Open the Scheduled Batch Job list dialog which gives information about pending batch jobs Flip Icons Specify horizontal or vertical icon panel display ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Table P 2 Session Menu Options Continued Selection Functiona
49. Enter the name for Name kT NNNM the new rule here Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions Specify Fs List of Conditions Variable Relation Value Confidence Click here to create a new variable i PpiHy Close Help Change the Name of the rule to Vegetated Within City and leave the Compute from Conditions radio button selected for Rule Confidence Click within the cell under Variable and select New Variable from the popup list The Variable Props dialog opens 563 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Type the name of the variable here Select Raster as the Variable Type Select Input img here Variable Hame Highway Map 3 Optional Variable Type Raster Wi Data Type Integer Wi Raster Variable Options Imagery v Feature Graphic Model Program Leave Undefined Prompt Analyst SIR Layer CLayer 1 i us Use cen Value iW select Image img Apply Close Help 2 Change the Variable Name to Highway Map and change the Variable Type to Raster Changing the type to Raster switches the bottom part of the dialog to the Raster Variable Options providing a different set of choices than for the Scalar variable type 3 Click the Select Image File icon then navigate to and select Input img from the IMAGINE HOME examples directory Select Input img A preview displays c Select Image Files Permissions Filename imq Direct
50. Hew Coverage Precision Single Precision x Double Precision OK Cancel Help 10 Confirm that Single Precision is selected 11 Click OK in the New Arc Coverage Layer Option dialog 109 Vector Querying and Editing The title bar in Viewer 2 reflects the name of the new vector layer you are creating 12 In the menu bar of Viewer 1 select Vector Options The Options dialog opens E Node Snap Dist E Arc Snap Dist Cean aerea i Click here to select Contained In select By r Intersect Contained In Apply Close Help 13 In the Options dialog under Select By click Contained In 14 Click Apply and then Close in the Options dialog 15 In the menu bar of Viewer 1 select Vector Attributes The Attributes dialog opens Attributes for inetimartiniidatalimagine840 92 1 S40 examplesizoeness File Edit view Click here to be 1 sure that Point Record POINT X POINT Y AREA PERIMETER Attributes is imm ZERE selected cu 735040 82 30434 0 726698 81 48641 3 720852 41 4947 95 59 47 936 05 731815 87 498741 31 10388 3E 723735 50 438075 18 71774t 0 0 0 0 cu cn ca cu 7295738 70988 1 75186137 100054 73326737 24254 0 7333143 10617204 730558 62 EIER 72582262 5337 27 e38523 125 434853 50U0 167419 125 076 61 it Eu z m oo im E Ln Co nr cn c A 16 In the Attributes dialog menu bar
51. Image Start an Image Drape Viewer and Set the Level of Detail 324 Click the Open icon again and navigate to the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory Select the file eldoatm img then click the Raster Options tab In the Raster Options tab make sure that the Clear Display checkbox is not active Click OK in the Select Layer to Add dialog Both files are displayed in the Viewer From the menu bar of the Viewer displaying eldodem img select Utility Image Drape The Image Drape Viewer opens displaying eldodem img which supplies terrain relief and eldoatm img which supplies the color Position the Image Drape Viewer so that it does not cover the first Viewer you opened Now you can set the level of detail Select View LOD Control from the Image Drape viewer menu bar The Level Of Detail dialog opens Change DEM level of detail bevel OF Detail A Hund ity Demon co mI NENNEE 7 evel of deta Change raster ENSE E in this field ye eS eT In the field next to DEM LOD enter 100 and press Return on your keyboard Click Apply to increase the level of detail in the Image Drape viewer Click Close to dismiss the Level Of Detail dialog Your two Viewers now look like the following ERDAS IMAGINE Viewshed Analysis Hle Utility View AOI Start the Viewshed Analysis Tool l Click the Interpreter icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar Interpreter The Image Interpreter menu open
52. In the Select Layer To Add dialog select the Fit to Frame option When asked to use the mouse you are directed to click Shift click middle click right click hold drag etc e click designates clicking with the left mouse button e Shift click designates holding the Shift key down on your keyboard and simultaneously clicking with the left mouse button e middle click designates clicking with the middle mouse button e right click designates clicking with the right mouse button e hold designates holding down the left or right as noted mouse button e drag designates dragging the mouse while holding down the left mouse button The following paragraphs are used throughout the ERDAS IMAGINE documentation ERDAS IMAGINE lt These paragraphs contain strong warnings or important tips R These paragraphs direct you to the ERDAS IMAGINE software function that accomplishes the described task These paragraphs lead you to other areas of this book or other ERDAS manuals for additional information NOTE Notes give additional instruction Shaded Boxes Shaded boxes contain supplemental information that is not required to execute the steps of a tour guide but is noteworthy Generally this is technical information Getting Started To start ERDAS IMAGINE type the following in a UNIX command window imagine or select ERDAS IMAGINE 8 6 from the Start menu ERDAS IMAGINE begins running th
53. NOTE Do not select File Close All as this closes both of the models Drag the pasted model to the right in the Model Maker viewer so that it does not overlap the first model You can resize the Model Maker viewer to see the entire model Click outside of the selection to deselect everything Combine Sensitivity Layer with SPOT Data 358 With both the thematic sensitivity layer sensitivity img and the SPOT data spot summary img defined you can use these two files as the input raster layers in a function that combines the two files into one final output A Scalar is also used in the function to offset the data file values in the SPOT image by five so that the sensitivity analysis does not overwrite any SPOT data NOTE Refer to the model pictured on page 362 when going through the next set of steps Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click in the Model Maker viewer below the output raster graphics n4 sensitivity and n7 spot summary to place a Function graphic Click on the Scalar icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click in the Model Maker viewer to the left of the Function graphic you just positioned to place an input Scalar Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 2 ERDAS IMAGINE Define Input Scalar Define Function Tour Guides 10 Spatial Modeler Click in the Model Maker viewer below the Function to place an output Raster graphic
54. Rectification Process Tour Guides Polynomial Rectification In the Resample dialog under Output File enter the name tmAtlanta_georef img for the new resampled data file This is the output file from rectifying the tmAtlanta img file to the coordinate system of the panAtlanta img file NOTE Be sure to enter the output file in a directory where you have write permission and at least 25 Mb of free disk space Under Resample Method click the popup list and select Bilinear Interpolation Click Ignore Zero in Stats so that pixels with zero file values are excluded when statistics are calculated for the output file Click OK in the Resample dialog to start the resampling process A Job Status dialog opens to let you know when the processes complete Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the job is 100 complete One way to verify that the input image tmAtlanta img has been correctly rectified to the reference image panAtlanta img is to display the resampled image tmAtlanta_georef img and the reference image and then visually check that they conform to each other Display the resampled image tmAtlanta_georef img in the first Viewer Use the Clear Display option in the Select Layer To Add dialog to remove tmAtlanta img from the Viewer before the resampled image is opened E ne Tin Clb ER A 8 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help samasa VE ee x a em E A Ne BAA T Nou ts Poe ow s
55. Subset Definition From Inquire Box v No Stretch No of Layers Intensity h E Stretch Intensity Stretch Saturation Stretch 1 amp 8 Ignore Zero in Stats Sat 3 iF OK Batch Cancel View 2 Inthe IHS to RGB dialog enter RGBtolHS img output from the previous exercise as the Input File 3 Enter IHStoRGB img as the Output File in the directory of your choice 4 On the IHS to RGB dialog click Stretch I amp S This option applies a global Min Max contrast stretch to the Intensity and Saturation values in the image before converting 5 Click OK in the IHS to RGB dialog A Job Status dialog displays reporting the progress of the function 6 When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is Done click OK View the Results 1 Open three Viewers and then open the following files for comparison e mineral img nmineral ratio index Proper interpretation can reveal the presence or absence of iron clay or ferrous minerals Tour Guides 261 Image Interpreter Viewer 1 mineral img CLayer_3 CLayer_2 a File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation FCISEIDEHEEEEEEE RGBtolHS img red green and blue values converted to intensity hue and saturation values This image does not appear similar to the input file It is not meant for interpretation it is only meant to produce an input for the IHS to RGB function Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation e IHStoR
56. The Viewer performs a two standard deviation stretch by default Click this checkbox to select an alternate data range to stretch If you want to save the contrast stretched values with the image you can use the Radiometric Enhance LUT Stretch option of Image Interpreter e Zoom by If Fit to Frame is disabled then you can enter the zoom ratio for the data in this data field e Set View Extent Allows you to specify the upper left and lower right coordinates of the portion of the image to display File Coords Map Coords OK Cancel Help The coordinates in this dialog set the area of the image to display in the Viewer This is useful if you have an image that is larger than the Viewer window or if you want only a specific portion of a large image to display in the Viewer You can also select View Scale Extent from the Viewer menu bar e No Stretch Click to display data without applying the normal two standard deviation stretch e Background Transparent Click to make the background of gray scale pseudocolor and true color areas transparent the layer underneath shows through Background areas are automatically transparent in thematic layers e Using Resampling is appropriate if the image is magnified a magnification factor greater than one Use one of the following resampling methods Nearest Neighbor Bilinear Interpolation Cubic Convolution and Bicubic Spline These methods of resampling are discuss
57. Transformed Divergence Using bands 125345 6 Taken 3 at a time Class Agricultural Field 1 Agricultural Field Forezt 1 Forezt Water Concrete Asphalt Bare Soil Sparse Trees Regrowth C0 00 J cn Cr ee 6o p rpm I Best Hinimum Separability Bands AVE HIN Class Pairs RE deter od B This report shows that layers 1 e bands 2 4 and 5 are the best layers to use for identifying features In the Text Editor menu bar select File Close to close the Editor In the Signature Separability dialog click Close The Statistics utility allows you to analyze the statistics for the layers to make your own evaluations and comparisons Statistics can be generated for one signature at a time The active signature which is next to the is used In the Signature Editor move the prompt to the signature for Forest 1 In the Signature Editor menu bar select View Statistics or click on the Statistics icon B ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification The Statistics dialog opens ziBixi Univariate Layer Minimum Maxim Mean Std Dev 111 000 173 000 114 570 1 435 40 000 44 000 41 837 0 703 af 00 43 000 39 360 844 110 000 123 000 120 187 4 r00 63 000 79 000 70 750 3 060 b 15 000 23 000 18 787 1 364 Covariance e 3 After viewing the information in the Statistics dialog click Close Perform Supervised The decision rules for the supervised classification process
58. Use the Toggle Highlighting button amp to view the pixels in question These pixels belong in the Water Target Class and not in the Agriculture Target Class To remove these classes from the Agriculture Target Class make sure the caret is still in the Agriculture Target Class and the Majority Class Group 517 Advanced Classification Coloring the Thematic Table 518 10 1 Click the Exclusive Or boolean button i This loads all of the classes in the selected Class Group Agriculture Majority without any of the classes that were previously highlighted in the CellArray the conflicted classes In the Class Groups area click the Save button to save the Agriculture Majority Class Group without the conflicted classes In the Class Grouping Tool menu bar click the Save button to save the grouping process to the image file Sometimes it is helpful to judge your progress by seeing the entire picture The Class Grouping Tool provides a mechanism for you to see how the grouping process is progressing In the Class Grouping Tool menu bar select Colors Set to Target Colors The colors in the T column in the Working groups CellArray will change to reflect the colors of the associated Target Classes Class w 3 C T Histogram Diversity Maiority Target z BEEN c 59 7 7 BEEN c 03 0 06 B mags oc sis 9 9 2 O c 0 0 6 ENSEM 5 00 2 NES c5
59. Viewer 87 File Edit View BEERE Iw F uo Ef B me 7 spectral Profile for hyperspectral im Click here to create a new profile point in the Viewer Pixel Value In the Spectral Profile viewer click on the Create icon and then select a pixel of interest by clicking it in the Viewer image The data for the selected pixel are displayed in the Spectral Profile viewer NOTE The pixel can be moved around the displayed image by dragging it In the Spectral Profile viewer menu bar select Edit Chart Options The Chart Options dialog opens 47 H Viewer Te i uolet H Click this tab to General x Axis Y Axis Z Axis Title ectral Profile for hyperspectral img J Legend Plot Background El O ire Frome view the options for the Y axis 1 Fill With 4 Gray Level Bice vw SHINE COR d 2 Inthe Chart Options dialog click on the Y Axis tab at the top of the dialog 3 Set Min to 20 and Max to 180 to control the numerical range 4 Click Apply and then Close in the Chart Options dialog The selected range is shown in detail in the Spectral Profile viewer 5 Inthe Spectral Profile viewer menu bar select Edit Plot Stats The Spectral Statistics dialog opens Click to ie select Mean T Mean 4 Min 4 Max Adjust the window size here Stddev L LL Apply Cancel Help 6 Inthe Spectral Statistics dialog change the Window Size to 7 7 Sel
60. Viewer i lanier img y A s V 3801670 0000 meters ee mM 240135 0000 3801670 0000 Pixel information je e reported in this Projection UTM Clarke 1866 CellArray ES zo T3087 00q NE 27 000 117 000 10500 atc Click arrows to move the Inquire cursor O Ma o 7238000818 ps CE oma ont Click the circle to move the Inquire Drag the scroll bars Drag any corner to enlarge cursor to the center of the image for more details the CellArray for more information You can move the Inquire Cursor in the Viewer using any of these methods e drag the white crosshair over the image e enter new coordinates into the CellArray of the Inquire Cursor dialog The Inquire Cursor moves when you move the mouse cursor back into the Viewer e click on the black arrows at the bottom of the Inquire Cursor dialog As the crosshair is moved the information in the Inquire Cursor dialog automatically updates 2 The CellArray in the Inquire Cursor dialog reports a variety of pixel information Drag on the horizontal scroll bar or enlarge the Inquire Cursor dialog by dragging any corner to show all of the pixel information available in the CellArray Change Inquire You can change the color and shape of the Inquire Cursor to make it more visible in the Viewer Cursor Style 1 To change the color of the Inquire Cursor select Utility Inquire Colorfrom the Viewer menu bar The Inquire Color dialog opens i
61. You may use the Use commands as they are option to run the batch commands now or schedule them to run later Use the Modify commands manually or Modify commands automatically options to make further changes to the commands or run the commands on multiple files Automatic modification makes intelligent choices in substituting vanables for inputs Use commands as they are is Use commands as they are already selected Modify commands manually for you se Modify commands automatically Close Back Hext gt Finish Help i ERDAS IMAGINE Execute Multiple Files Single Command Run Now Tour Guides Batch Processing Click the Next gt button The Select When to Process Commands panel displays The Start Processing Now button is already selected If you wish to process the file immediately go to step 6 The Batch job IS On systems which support offline processing UNISMAndowsNT these scheduled to begin commands may be scheduled to be run at a later time When run at a later how i i time the results will be saved in the batch log file Start Processing How sf otart Processing Later At Hpurz 3 E bibis a E fed Hour Cocks SHHIGE F Du lig E Mer fiss fE Hamel mess ohare Close lt Back BONS Finish Help i If you wish to process the file at a later time click the Start Processing Later At option and set the time you wish it to begin processing Click the Finish butto
62. a the closing line M x Middle click to close the polygon Left click to add vertices to the field Your polygon should look something like this NOTE The raster layer of these images have been washed out for the purposes of illustration 5 Open the Vector Attributes table by selecting Vector Attributes from the Viewer menu bar or by clicking on the Vector Attributes button in the Vector Tool palette 6 The Vector Attributes table displays Hle Edit View Paste the Contents into the Selected Columns 116 ERDAS IMAGINE Vector Querying and Editing Editing the Shapefile Layer 7 To divide this polygon into two polygons select the Polygon Splittool from the Vector Tools palette Pl 8 Left click once just outside the left side of the polygon Move your cursor across the middle and outside of the right side of the polygon so that the split line divide the polygon into no more than two parts It should look similar to this 9 Middle click to end the split line The polygon has split into two polygons and should look like this 10 Notice that the Area and Perimeter columns were automatically updated in the Vector Attributes table Hle Edit View 2191738 358 7 87 280 1 2183787 270 8258 783 1 Tour Guides 117 Vector Querying and Editing 11 Next you will create a new polygon that shares a common border with an existing polygon To do this select the Append Polygon
63. and Full Text Search utilities To use these applets you must have installed a compliant browser Netscape 4 7 or Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher are greatly recommended and that you enable Java scripting in your browser properties Following is a list of on line manuals that can be found in the On Line Help in ERDAS IMAGINE software This list may change depending on your software package and add on modules you have purchased e Introduction to ERDAS IMAGINE On Line Help e Annotation On Line Manual e AOI On Line Manual e Digital Point Positioning Database Workstation e Classification On Line Manual e Expert Classifier On Line Manual e Stereo Analyst On Line Manual e HyperSpectral On Line Manual e IMAGINE Command and Function Syntax On Line Manual ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides IMAGINE Interface On Line Manual Image Catalog On Line Manual Image Interpreter On Line Manual Import Export On Line Manual Importing Native Formats On Line Manual Map Composer On Line Manual NITF OrthoBASE On Line Manual OrthoBASE Pro On Line Manual Radar Mapping Suite On Line Manual IFSAR DEM on Line Manual StereoSAR DEM On Line Manual OrthoRadar On Line Manual Generic SAR Node On Line Manual Rectification On Line Manual Session On Line Manual Preferences On Line Manual Spatial Modeler On Line Manual Spectral Analysis Tools and Utilities On Line Manual Vector On Line Manual Viewer On Line Manual Viewer Raster Tools On Line Manual Virtualit
64. canvas Status bar displays single line help 11 Click Close in the Data Preparation menu to clear it from the screen Set Input Images 1 In the first Viewer containing air photo 1 img select AOI Tools 292 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Mosaic The AOI tool palette displays In the AOI tool palette click on the Polygon icon x In the first Viewer draw a polygon around the entire image outlining its shape by dragging to draw lines and clicking to draw vertices 1 e on screen digitize the outline of the image Middle click to close the polygon NOTE If you do not have a three button mouse you can double click to close the polygon When you are finished the AOI layer is highlighted with a dotted line and the image is surrounded by a bounding box The image in the first Viewer should look like the following example EPIBEE lt a 196840852 267413 64 State Plane GRS 1380 293 ui Mosaic Create a Template 1 When you have finished drawing the polygon select File Save AOI Layer As in the first Viewer The Save AOI As dialog opens Save AOlAs Enter the directory and Save AO as ani file name here Titemplate aoi gl 1E info ras files zone887 ts Click here to save Selected Onl the AOI ERE 2 Under Save AOI as enter template aoi in the directory of your choice and click OK 3 Inthe Mosaic Tool viewer select Edit A
65. click OK in the Job Status dialog 6 Ifyou like display slope ppdclass img in a Viewer to view the output image of your model Viewer slope_ppdclass img Layer 7 a Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help el w e CAES The image displays in gray scale The class values are defined in the criteria function where chaparral in gentle slopes 2 chaparral in steep slopes 3 riparian in gentle slopes and 4 riparian in steep slopes Minimizin 9 The Spatial Modeler attempts to perform operations in memory where possible but there are Tem porary Disk some common operations that produce temporary files Any time a Global operation is Usa ge performed on an intermediate result a temporary file is produced For example if the Global Maximum pixel value is required for an image being calculated nothing other than an estimate may be produced without actually generating the image If an intermediate image is going to be used in two or more additional functions in a model a temporary file is created Also if nonpoint functions like Spread and Clump are preformed on intermediate results or if their results are used in further processes temporary files are created There are two types of temporary files created by Spatial Modeler temporary files which are declared as such and intermediate files which get created due to the mix of operations The amount of space required by tempor
66. enter Visible by One Observer and press Return on your keyboard 6 In Row 4 enter Visible by Two Observers and press Return on your keyboard 332 ERDAS IMAGINE Viewshed Analysis c Haster Attribute Editor interzis OA jimqO0 284Claver a File Edit e Ll m El Layer Number n oF Class Names identify each of the areas in the viewshed Class Mamas Color Red Former Hidden Region Visible by One Observer Visible by Two Observers DEEE Add Area Column to the CellArray 1 Now select Edit Add Area Column from the Raster Attribute Editor menu bar The Add Area Column dialog opens Click OK to accept hectares 2 Select acres from the Units popup list and click OK to dismiss the Add Area Column dialog The Area column is added to end of the Raster Attributes CellArray 3 Select Edit Column Properties from the Raster Attribute Editor menu bar The Column Properties dialog opens Tour Guides 333 ui Viewshed Analysis Columns are displayed in the new order faster Attribute Editor intervis QA img 0r 284 Layer 7 Hle Edit A m El Layer Humber n oF 2 4 Visible by Two Observers 113421 s 1 Type Real _ Show RGB Alignment Right iW Formula A i Histogram 0 222335 B More Use the Up and Default only Apply on OK Auto Apply Down buttons to rearrange columns Display Width Units 4 Inthe Columns field select Histogram
67. from the original image F Click on the Clear Top Layer icon E to remove subset no snap img from the Viewer The original image and the Inquire Box should still be displayed in the Viewer In the Inquire Box dialog click the Snap to Raster checkbox to make sure it is active checked Click Apply The Inquire Box snaps to the pixels centers and looks like this The Inquire Box snaps to the center of the included pixels These guides appear to show the edges of the included pixels The coordinates in the Inquire Box dialog update to reflect the new corner coordinates In the Utilities dialog click on the Subset button The Subset dialog displays Under Input File enter dmtm img In the Output File enter subset snap img in a directory where you have write permission Click the From Inquire Box button ERDAS IMAGINE Viewing the Snapped Subset Tour Guides Image Interpreter The coordinates in the Subset Definition area update to reflect the corner coordinates of the Inquire Box Click OK to start the Subsetting Process The Subsetting Progress meter appears displaying the progress of the subsetting Select File Open from the menu bar in the Viewer The Select Layer to Add dialog opens Click on the Recent button The List of Recent Files dialog displays Select subset snap img from the list Click OK on the List of Recent Files to close the dialog Click on the Raster Options tab in the Select L
68. gt button to open the Edit Commands Create Variables panel Ensure the Commands tab is selected Using the horizontal scroll button scroll about 2 3 to the left and observe that Input and Output variables have already been created in the command line Commands Variables age 356 30W single Slnputy Output pixelsize 30 30 units m Lf For more information about variables see the Work with Variables section on page 202 Click the Next button The Select Files to Process panel opens with the selected input file displayed The popup list in the Select Files to Process panel determines which variable is populated when the Add Files button is pressed In this example there is only an Input variable 189 Batch Processing Add Multiple Files 190 Use the popup list to select the column to modify Use the select button to add files to the list The Delete button can be used to remove selected rows from the list There must be at least one name in the list below to proceed Select popup list Add files Delete files By default there is always an Input column in the list which corresponds to the default Input variable Click the Add Files button The Select Batch Files dialog opens Sl Select Inaspect img from the Select Batch Files dialog Click the Multiple File Selection tab and click the Use the following Selection Pattern checkbox Edit the Selection Pattern field to inse
69. gt prompt to the Agricultural Field_2 class by clicking under the gt column in the cell for Class 2 4 Select Histograms View The Distance Histogram for Agricultural Field_2 displays i Distance Histogram Agricultural Field_2 nl xl histogram Hold arrow under histogram and drag Click here to it to here close dialog n 0 18135 2943 21 TN 5 Select the arrow on the X axis of the histogram graph to move it to the position where you want to threshold the histogram 493 Advanced Classification Apply Colors 494 The Chi Square value in the Threshold dialog is updated for the current class Agricultural Field 2 as you move the arrow In the Threshold dialog CellArray move the prompt to the next class The histogram is updated for this class Repeat the steps thresholding the histogram for each class in the Threshold dialog CellArray iudi See Chapter 6 Classification of the ERDAS Field Guide for information on thresholding After you have thresholded the histogram for each class click Close in the Distance Histogram dialog In the Threshold dialog select View View Colors Default Colors Use the default setting so that the thresholded pixels appear black and those pixels remaining appear in their classified color in the thresholded image In the Threshold dialog select Process To Viewer The thresholded image is placed in the Viewer over the germtm superclass img fil
70. it or edit the map file Choose Your Path e To edit the map frame proceed with this section e To delete the map frame proceed to Delete the Map Frame on page 77 e To edit the map file proceed to Edit Composition Paths on page 92 To edit a map frame click the Select Map Frame icon EJ in the Annotation tool palette Click in the map frame you want to edit to select it In the Map Composer viewer select Annotation Element Properties or double click in the map frame A new Viewer opens with the image you are using displayed A white cursor box indicates the area currently in the map frame The Map Frame dialog also opens displaying the settings you originally entered to position and size the map frame Change the information in the Map Frame dialog and or move the cursor box in the Viewer Click OK in the Map Frame dialog when you are satisfied with the map frame Select File Close from the Viewer menu bar Delete the Map Frame Tour Guides If you want to delete the map frame altogether follow the next series of steps Deleting a map frame cannot be undone You must have your map composition open In the Map Composer viewer menu bar select View Arrange Layers 7 Map Composer The Arrange Layers dialog opens c Arrange Layers Viewer 1 90 tour map ovr Press the third mouse hk button to delete this map frame MapFrane modeler outputirrg Click here to delete
71. n 11 Integer OTHERWISE H OK Clear Cancel Help Click on raster then click on the file name n7 spot summary under Available Inputs Click on lt stdcount gt then click on the number 2 on the calculator Using this same method replace m n with 0 and max with 250 The STRETCH function uses two standard deviations to stretch the data file values of spot summary img between 0 and 250 The scalar is added to ensure that there are no data file values between O0 and 4 since these are the values in the sensitivity file Click in front of OTHERWISE to insert the cursor in the function definition Click on the calculator then n11 Integerunder Available Inputs to add the scalar to the function The final function definition should look like the following EITHER n4 sensitivity IF n4_ sensitivity OR STRETCH n spot summary 2 0 290 n 11 Integer OTHERWISE Click OK in the Function Definition dialog The Function Definition dialog closes and EITHER n4 sensitivity IF is written under the Function graphic in the Model Maker viewer Double click the untitled output Raster graphic 361 Spatial Modeler 362 The Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog enter the file name sensitivity spot for the new output file Be sure that you specify a directory in which you have write permission Click on the Delete if Exists option Click on the File Type popup list and select Thema
72. ngpbus ki uL v 505701 9688 JF LR v 2579119600 F ne lee oF ai MRE Dai uiai Area of Interest Declare as Integer Wi Choose AO w Hecogb Doin l seiur PGE Gee Temporary Raster Only integer y A Doni Ronmis Data OK Cancel Help Click the Open icon in the Raster dialog to open the File Name dialog In the File Name dialog select the file dmtm img from the examples directory The file dmtm img is located in IMAGINE HOME examples where IMAGINE HOME is the location of ERDAS IMAGINE on your system 4 Click OK in the File Name dialog The Raster dialog updates with the appropriate File Name 5 Click OK in the Raster dialog Add Matrix Properties In the Model Maker viewer double click the Matrix object The Matrix Definition dialog opens 418 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler select Built In v Custom Matrix w Read Output 2 e r Choose Summary and 5 x 5 E Honnalize Matrix During Execution OK Cancel Help 2 From the Kernel list select Summary 3 From the Size list select 5 x 5 4 Click OK in the Matrix Definition dialog Add Function Properties 1 Double click the Function object The Function Definition dialog opens Tour Guides 419 ui Spatial Modeler Add Raster Properties 420 Selections you make display here CONVOLVE n1 dmtm kernel CLUMP layer 4 CLUMP laye
73. nsoils img is displayed Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the file Now both anier img and Insoils img are displayed in the same Viewer with Insoils img on top To bring lanier img to the top of the Viewer select View Arrange Layers from the Viewer menu bar The Arrange Layers dialog opens Click and drag this box to the top Am remise to change the lanier imqr L 4 Pieria E 3 275 displayed layers lanier im i Later 3 Click here to redisplay layers in the new order essie Resed vp cose Help In the Arrange Layers dialog drag the lanier img box above the Insoils img box as illustrated above When you release the mouse button the layers are rearranged in the Arrange Layers dialog so that the lanier img box is first i5 Viewer Zoom Click Apply in the Arrange Layers dialog to redisplay the layers in their new order in the Viewer The layers are now reversed Click Close in the Arrange Layers dialog In this section you zoom in by a factor of 2 and create a magnifier window Once the image is enlarged you can roam through it lanier img should be displayed on top of Insoils img in a Viewer at a magnification of 1 this is the case if you have been following through this tour guide from the beginning Select View Zoom In by 2 from the Viewer menu bar The images are redisplayed at a magnification factor of 2 The Zoom options are also available f
74. sro n aoao Fans sonos FEL Urvr p goes Fany sanos FEL You want the model to work on the intersection of the input files The default setting is the union of these files 11 In the Set Window dialog click on the Set Window To popup list and select Intersection 12 Click OK in the Set Window dialog Define Input Slope Layer 1 In the Model Maker viewer double click the first input Raster graphic The graphic is highlighted and the Raster dialog opens 342 ERDAS IMAGINE First click on Prompt User for File at Run Time the Open icon Spatial Modeler Humber nf Layers Humber of Rows Humber of Columns to select the Interpolation Nearest Neighbor i Click here to slope file Display Slope Layer Tour Guides Processing Window select Map Hle From Inquire Box processing iw window UL x 1692893 0000 LR x 1731773 0000 E UL Y 304671 8125 E LR Y 259068 8125 Area of Interest Declare as Integer i Choose AO r Recode Data Temporary Raster Only integer ki Don t Recode Data uiii paia PI Unsimnesd dd pip Tyre emate v J innere 5 8 E ai PREE SSMU uini sei Bero Click here then here to recode class values 2 Inthe Raster dialog click on the Open icon under File Name 7a a 3 Inthe File Name dialog under Filename click on the file slope img and then click OK The File Name dialog opens This image has some n
75. the calculations 1 The current Sampling project only uses one Image Tile so click Next on the wizard The Select Samples To Be Used step is displayed If any of the Samples did not represent a good sampling of the MOI e g it was centered over a lake or desert you could exclude that sample from the Analysis 2 Leave all of the Samples selected and click Next on the wizard The Set Class Assignments For High Resolution Interpretation step is displayed Was Set Class Assignments For High Resolution Interpretation All the High Resolution samples must utilize the same interpretation schema In the table below please define whether each class should be interpreted as being the Material of Interest MDI nat the MOL or not used in the analysis Duns Click here to set the dots High Resolution Class Assignments labeled as Not Forest MOI Not MOI as Not MOI Unused Click here to set the dots labeled as Forest as MOI 3 Click in the Not Forest row Not MOI column to set all of the dots in the Dot Grid that were labeled as Not Forest to be Not the Material of Interest in the Final Analysis Tour Guides 553 ui Frame Sampling Tools 4 Click in the Forest row MOI column to set all of the dots that were labeled as Forest to be the Material of Interest for Final Analysis 5 Leave the Xin the Not Used row Unused column to exclude these dots from the Final Analysis computations 6 Click Next in the Final Analysis Wiz
76. to see on line help for this category Check Viewer Preferences Check Preference Editor Help Drag this scroll bar down to see all of Batch Processing Default Data Directory the eml DEM Exporter uaa preferences DOQ Exporter Default Output Directory fdata Dataview Default Icon Directory IMAGINE HOME icons FIT Files id i GCP Editor icon Panel Orientation horizontai IMAGIHE Image Files H Image Catalog Icon Panel Display Options Standard Icons Image Files General ImageDrape Imagelnfo File History Scope Knowledge Engineer ata Click here File History Maximum to see on line help for this dialog Drag the scroll bar on the right side of the dialog down to see all of the User Interface amp Session preferences User Interface amp Session is the default under Category You may change these or any other preferences at any time by selecting the preference category click on the list below Category and then editing the text in the text entry fields Under the User Interface amp Session category in the Preference Editor locate the preferences for the A VHRR Band Defaults MSS Band Defaults Spot Band Defaults and TM Band Defaults The number that is entered for these defaults shows the band that is used for the Red Green and Blue color guns in your display You may change these defaults These are the band assignments that display in the Layers to Colors section of
77. to turn this feature off The annotation layer may be saved and used with other images with the same geographic area These annotation objects may be moved and resized but the measured values in the text boxes are not updated Click the print icon to print and a Print dialog opens which allows you to enter or select the printer to be used 5 Select the Printer and click Print or OK in the Print dialog If you do not wish to print click Cancel Experiment with the other measurement tools 1f you like and when you are done click the Close button in the top toolbar You are asked if you want to save the measurements Save them if you like You can click the Save icon at any time to save your measurements 1 AA Click the Help button to view the on line help for the measurement tools View Menu Options Arrange Layers ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and lanier img should be displayed in a Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Viewer In the Viewer tool bar click the Open icon to open another layer on top of Janier img B The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on Insoils img This is a thematic soils file of the Gainesville Georgia area Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Check to be sure that the Clear Display checkbox is disabled not selected so that lanier img is not cleared from the Viewer when
78. vj i x P E Bes UO SS T LN d NC A E fi AA ol jj a When tmAtlanta img closes in the first Viewer you are asked if you want to save your changes Click No in all of the Save Changes dialogs The Geometric Correction Tool exits Right hold Geo Link Unlink under the Quick View menu in the first Viewer 149 Polynomial Rectification Rotate Flip or Stretch Images Choose Model Properties 150 4 Click in the second Viewer to link the Viewers together 5 Right hold Inquire Cursor under the Quick View menu in the first Viewer The inquire cursor a crosshair is placed in both Viewers An Inquire Cursor dialog also opens 6 Drag the inquire cursor around to verify that it is in approximately the same place in both Viewers Notice that as the inquire cursor is moved the data in the Inquire Cursor dialog are updated 7 When you are finished click Close in the Inquire Cursor dialog It is often necessary to perform a first order rectification to a layer displayed in the Viewer You may need to rotate flip or stretch the image so that North is up 1 Display the file tmAtlanta img in a Viewer 2 Inthe Viewer select Raster Geometric Correction The Set Geometric Model dialog opens 3 Inthe Set Geometric Model dialog click Affine and then OK The Geo Correction Tools open along with the Affine Model Properties dialog Linear Adjustment Options Enter scaling 1 TE F options here BS
79. 1 Using a UNIX shell or the Microsoft Explorer navigate to the directory in which you created germtm tif and generated germtm tfw 2 Note the presence of the file in that directory Y winterm a ll 47 home kswanson gt pud Neu Madel dgmd sharp dmtm img germtm aux sharp_dmtm rrd germtm rrd sharpen md stretched img germtm tif stretched rrd mismatch gmd templatel aoi output img output rrd The tfw file resides in the same directory as the tif file it was generated from Now you can use the tfw file to supply georeferencing information to other software packages such as ArcView Georeferencing information includes coordinate information 158 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER EIGHT Import Export Introduction Import a SPOT Scene Tour Guides The ERDAS IMAGINE Import function allows you to import a wide variety of data types for use in ERDAS IMAGINE The Export function lets you convert image ERDAS IMAGINE img file format files into one of several data formats In this tour guide you can learn how to e import SPOT data from CD e import ERDAS 7 x GIS and Generic Binary Data files e export an image file in the ERDAS 7 x LAN format e create a TIFF file e view raw data values using the Data View option e view image data information using the magelnfo utility Approximate completion time for this tour guide varies depending upon the data you are importing or exporting Before
80. 59 Sel catalogo PIelerences uu ua uds um uiuo aue dd ee eot eee bode oe 9 Vd a LR OR ead eee ea ose oa 59 Create an Image Calalog ves doe eee tboe ds seb EEERE E A E ROARGA RORUE ECCE X De 3 as Rs 61 FOG MIOMA METER TERT TOIT 61 Perform Graphical QUGTIGS o usu 662042 ds rasa es CePA eee es EX EUR Er E RUE qn e gum Ede dH qo 62 2 199200 RRNRRPERPRERTEETPr 62 iv ERDAS IMAGINE SURG PED 63 View Information 64 Modify Views m naana aa HUP 65 AICHive Dalasi tenet ne ee heh Ree ee eS bee ee ewe eee eS bee ee es 66 Chapter 3 Map COMPOSE xou uam zx seer d 6 9b a HdOR EU diu d qs X3 Vd arb SE RR d ara 69 INITOGUCUION PP EPTCr r wwwrPPRm 69 Cregie a MIP A rrrrrrrrrrrPT 69 otart Map GCoOHDOSBE sorier xod au dew dra dowd See Pau tee ds dine did bon e qc rcs e 70 Prepare tne Data Layers eua end ee eed bees CACHER CR SOR RECO EUR Ue eee oe Rd 72 Draw th Maps alites icce ciut Rot PEAS sid e ERE ERS dde dr un Ce D aas diens oes d d ee Sere 72 Adjust the Size of the Map Frame 1 has 75 Adjust the Position of the Map Frame lille 76 Edil The Map Flame 26204 xac itkin YQ vacare ow Pale Erw wear Orde ag cube goes be bea i c 77 Delete the Map Frai xe mmm 6 RHEE mon Rn Chee RR TRIES RE UC Ue CAE Ee ee 77 Add a Neatline and Tick Marks rrr rrr hhh huh 78 Chang
81. 7 Pre H3 imr z gt examples merge PC img Eg hldgs Cancel Eg infos Hel XI Eg lanier dms A preview of m the image displays here E File Type IMAGINE Image imq ad p greyscale 523 Rows x 555 Columns x 1 Bandis 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on loplakebed img 3 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The loplakebed img file is displayed in the Viewer 600 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Viewer 1 loplakebed img Layer 1 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel This image is a subset from imagery taken by the Shuttle Imaging Radar SIR A experiment It is L band with 25 m pixels This scene is the shore of Lop Nor Lake in the Xinjiang Province Peoples Republic of China This is an area of desiccated overflow basins surrounded by a series of parallel wind scoured sedimentary ridges The speckle in this image is obvious In the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel click on the Viewer icon to open another Viewer Viewer From the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Tile Viewers to position and size the Viewers so that you can see the side by side Viewers on the screen This helps you to view and evaluate the resultant image after each filter pass and then decide if another pass is needed to obtain the desired results Click on the Radar icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel dp Radar The Radar menu op
82. 8 Display Single icon 64 Display thematic data 15 Divergence 477 Dot Grid Interpretation 542 E Edge Enhancement dialog 608 Electrostatic plotter 90 Ellipse icon 33 Ellipse measurement 12 Enhancement 627 in graphical models 352 radiometric 252 spatial 246 spectral 256 Enterprise Geodatabase 123 Erase icon 45 ERDAS Field Guide 279 599 622 ERDAS IMAGINE start 95 628 ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel xxi 70 92 128 159 340 457 484 491 501 227 ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer 72 74 363 ERS 1 623 Evaluate 130 486 Export ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index LAN data 165 statistics 167 Export Column Data dialog 111 Export ERDAS 7 5 LAN Data dialog 166 Eye Target Edit dialog 56 F Feature space 456 to image masking 473 Feature Space image 464 display 1mage 466 Feature Space to Image Masking dialog 473 Feature Space viewer 466 Field of View FOV 56 Fill Style Chooser dialog 641 Filter 247 Prewitt Gradient 609 Filter Options dialog 231 Final Analysis Report 555 Final Analysis Wizard 552 Form View dialog 64 Formula dialog 132 489 Fourier Analysis menu 215 Fourier Editor 216 Fourier Transform create 213 Editor 213 start 216 using tool bar icons 231 Fourier Transform dialog 215 Fraction File 557 Frame area 73 Frame Sampling Tools 521 FS to Image Masking 473 Function Definition dialog 349 355 360 Function icon 300 Fuyo 623 Fuzzy tolerance 645 G gen file generic data 175 GCP 17 calculating 145 delet
83. A Job Status dialog opens to report the state of the job When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is Done click OK Open a Viewer and display anier img Open a second Viewer and then open the Select Layer To Add dialog by clicking on the Open icon in the Viewer tool bar In the Select Layer To Add dialog enter the name of the directory in which you saved tasseled img press Return on your keyboard and then click fasseled img in the file list to select it Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Under Layers to Colors use layer 1 as Red layer 2as Green and layer 3 as Blue Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Use the Indices Function Tour Guides Image Interpreter The image tasseled img shows a degree of brightness greenness and wetness as calculated by the Tasseled Cap coefficients used e Layer 1 red the brightness component indicates areas of low vegetation and high reflectors e Layer 2 green the greenness component indicates vegetation e Layer 3 blue the wetness component indicates water or moisture When you are through close the Viewers by selecting Session Close All Viewers from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar Next you apply a mineral ratio from the Indices function to a Landsat TM image Such ratios are commonly used by geologists searching for specific mineral deposits in the earth RA For more information on
84. Annotation TerraModel Help Fourier Transform Editor Use a Rectangular Mask 228 10 11 The resulting image has a pronounced diagonal striping in addition to the original striping NOTE Remember to select another circle center coordinate before trying each new window The rectangular mask allows you to mask a rectangular area of the fft layer This is similar to the circular mask in that it allows you to edit non central regions of the Fourier image Make sure the fft file you created in the previous section Use a Circular Mask is displayed in the Fourier Editor In the Fourier Editor menu bar select Mask Rectangular Mask The Rectangular Mask dialog opens _ Select window Window Function Ideal function here UL V as EN Central sam oo0 K Enter coordinates of rectangle here OK Cancel Help In the Rectangular Mask dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Ideal Enter an upper left u UL U of 80 and an upper left v UL V of 80 Enter a lower right u LR U of 255 and a lower right v LR V of 255 Click OK in the Rectangular Mask dialog The top left and bottom right corners of the fft layer are black To mask the other two corners you must repeat this procedure Select Mask Rectangular Mask In the Rectangular Mask dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Ideal Enter an upper left u UL U of 80 and an upper left v UL
85. Chooser semple 1 boundary ai for the selected Sample X Back Next gt This dialog is used to assign files that are associated with each of the Samples to their respective Sample Cell ul 540 ERDAS IMAGINE Assigning the Rectified Samples Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools Sample Node Files Sample Boundary The Sample Boundary is a polygon AOI file that traces the boundary of the Selected Cell This file is automatically created and by the Project Manager after Sample Selection It is a required file Imported Sample An Imported Sample is a native IMAGINE format image that provides high resolution view of the representative sample The inclusion of an Imported Sample in the project is optional as long as you can provide a Rectified Sample Rectified Sample A Rectified Sample is an orthorectified version of the Imported Sample The Rectified Sample will be used to perform the high resolution interpretation of the Sample Cells This file is required by the Sampling Process The Rectified Sample files must be manually assigned to the appropriate samples Dot Grid Interpretation The Dot Grid Interpretation is an annotation file ovr that is the result of a Dot Grid Interpretation of the high resolution sample This file created by the Dot Grid Tool This file is required for this sample to be included Dot Grid Final Analysis Polygon Interpretation The Polygon Interpretation is the output file of a Polygon Interp
86. Click in the bottom right side of the map composition to indicate where you want to place the text The Annotation Text dialog opens Move your pointer into the Annotation Text dialog and type the following lines under Enter Text String At the end of the first line press Return to left align the text 89 M Map Composer Save the Map Composition San Diego California lt return gt Environmental Sensitivity Analysis You may click the ASCII File button to import the text from an existing ASCII text file Click OK in the Annotation Text dialog to place the text The Annotation Text dialog automatically closes Save your map composition by clicking the Save icon d in the Map Composer tool bar You can also save a composition by selecting File Save Map Composition from the Map Composer menu bar Print the Map Composition ERDAS IMAGINE supports many output devices including electrostatic plotters continuous tone color printers and PostScript devices The printers you can use vary depending on your system configuration These steps illustrate how to print to a PostScript printer Click on the Composer icon from the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Composer Select Print Map Composition from the Map Composer menu or select File Print from the Map Composer viewer menu bar The Map Composer menu displays The Compositions dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer Seen ap Conpostion
87. Delete After Processing usr data Hew Delete Undo TERR Close Back Next gt Pinisit Help Add Additional Files to the Batch Job 1 Click Next gt in the Edit Commands Create Variables panel 2 Inthe Select Files to Process panel click the Select Files to Add button and add all files with in the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory that start with the letters n using the Multiple File Selection tab RA If you need to review how to add multiple files see Add Multiple Files on page 190 Use the popup list to select the column to modify Use the Select button to i add files to the list The Delete button can be used to remove selected rows lr from the list There must be at least one name in the list below to proceed E Lm lanier img e nctump img a Inaspectimg Indem imq identified in the Inhydro img Inlakes immq Selection Pattern Amen window Input i Bl Bla Show Full Path Close lt Back Hext gt Finish Help i These are all the files that begin with In and are located in the directory lt 2 __3 EE TERES E Start Processing 1 Click the Next gt button to open the Select When to Process Commands panel 2 Make sure the Start Processing Now option is selected then click Finish to start the Batch job with the new variable 206 ERDAS IMAGINE Check the Output The double Job Status dialog opens Working on Inaspect img 1 o
88. Directory vol Serometrice 5 W vol HemIBme z distribution Aerometric Piha CDROM cel Help File Type IMAGIHE Image img Fi 24 Files 0 subdirectories 10 Matched 95076456F Bytes Free _CDROM Cancel Help B In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on 2 2 img Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog In the Layers to Colors box make sure Red is 1 Green is 2 and Blue is 3 Click the Clear Display option to disable it this ensures that currently displayed files are not cleared in the Viewer Click the Fit to Frame option to enable it Click the Background Transparent option to enable it Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file 2 2 img displays in the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Mosaic 9 Repeat steps 1 through 8 opening 2 3 img 2 4 img 3 2 img 3 3 img 3 4 img 4 2 img 4 3 img and 4 4 img in the same Viewer you used for 2 2 img When finished you should be able to see all nine files in the Viewer Im Viewer 41 d 4 img Layer T1 GLaver Zi Laver 3 Hle Utility View AOI Raster 1 81834 35 2034115 32 You will see patterned color differences in some of the images Some spots in some of the photos will appear brighter or darker than the rest of the image In order to adjust these color differences you will use the Mosaic Color Balancing option in the Mosaic Tool 10 In the
89. Double click the Hypotheses Rules Variables Identify possible bridges model variable Roads Terrain Categorization slope from model DEM Tree Density model Aerial Photo Identify possible bridges model N In the Variables tab double click Identify possible bridges model The Variable Props dialog for the variable Identify possible bridges model opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides This variable also uses a Graphic Model IMAGINE Expert Classifier V m Variable Props mobility factors ckb Variable Mame I TERME TEES stem eae e EESTI sy J Optional Variable Type Raster i Data Type Integer ii Raster Variable Options Imagery Featulie Graphic Model Program phic Model gmd identity bridges gmd g Edit Model Output ni PROMPT i Layer Layer 1 Use cen Value Define Model Input Hades with Vanables Row Input Node Made Type variable Definition 1n PROMPT LISER Raster Roads 2 n24_PROMPT_USER Raster 3 Click the Edit Model button in the Variable Props dialog The model used to identify potential bridges identify bridges gmd shows the expert rule n24_PROMPT USER n2 PROMPT USER CONDI Hle Edit Model Text Process s amp w o u e x Jaje 2 sj Terrain Categorization CONDITIONAL Bridges emory n17 Custom Integer n19 PROMPT USER ONA n15 memory IMAGINE Expert Classifier V
90. E va 2 y ei S a 9 8 a is a 79 ae a Woe a a m St C ELA 2 C a y 999m d t wae H e gu ML aay NO 2 EN tog uM amp s s i M 2 2 ME LN m a ogi ME 2 2 uL eus un R e 2 Remove Contents From viewer ve You can also choose several mapped layers at once to display in a viewer by using your control key to select more than one feature class 122 ERDAS IMAGINE Open An Enterprise Geodatabase Tour Guides Select Layer To Add File Vector Options Look in E examples kd ergelib gnutimelib lib3ds 1 1 0 G National mdb w arldCantainer Cauntries34 gdb Mational mdb w arldCantainer w orldCities gdb National mdb w arldCantainer w arldCities gdb Mational mdb w arldCantainer w arldCities 1 gdb National mdb w arldCantainer w erldCities 2 gdb Vector Querying and Editing File name national mdb_worldcontainer_werldities gdb Files of type ArcGIS Geodatabase gdb 93 69 162 21 Geographic fLat Lon Clarke 1866 gm RE Ww OG Cod m loj xi Click the Open Layer button in a new viewer In the Files of Type pull down menu choose ArcGIS Geodatabase gdb as your file type Notice that this adds a Connect button to the dialog Click Connect and in the Look in pull down menu select Database Connections 123 Vector Querying and Editing Select GeoDatabase Feature Clas
91. EITHER arg gt IF tests J ON INDEX lt test gt arg arg PICK number argl1 an Select the Conditional Functions here CONDITIONAL testi argl test2 argz Next you use a conditional statement to create a new file that contains only the environmentally sensitive areas In the Function Definition dialog click on the Functions popup list and select Conditional Click on CONDITIONAL in the box below Functions The CONDITIONAL function is placed in the function definition window at the bottom of the dialog Type the following statement in the definition box replacing the previously created condition statement CONDITIONAL n3_landcover_RC 0 0 n3 landcover RC 4 4 n1 slope RC 1 3 n2_floodplain 1 2 n3_landcover_RC 1 1 NOTE The file names can be added to your function definition simply by clicking in the appropriate spot in the function definition and then clicking on the file name in the list of Available Inputs 349 ui Spatial Modeler Define Output Raster Layer 350 This creates a new output file with the class values 0 4 Each class contains the following Table 16 2 Conditional Statement Class Values 0 developed 1 undeveloped land flood plain gt 25 percent slope riparian amp wetlands Areas with a class value of 4 are the most environmentally sensitive and are therefore unsuitable for
92. ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel click on the DataPrep icon DataPrep The Data Preparation menu displays 11 In the Data Preparation menu select Mosaic Images The Mosaic Tool viewer opens 12 Click Close in the Data Preparation menu to clear it from the screen 313 ui Mosaic Add Images for Mosaic 2 3 314 In the Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Add Images icon 8i The Add Images for Mosaic dialog opens Wa Add Images for Mosaic X Image Filename img air phato 1 imq Fr 3 meter imq 4 2 imag 4 3 img il 4 4 imag air phato 1 imq air phato Z imq all spotp_ B7 img all spotp 92 img badline s img E examples Method ndviduaiFie Z Image Area Options C Use Entire Image C Crop Area Compute Active Area C Individual AGI Set Close Help In the Add Images for Mosaic dialog under Image Filename select 2 2 img In the Add Images for Mosaic dialog make sure the Use Entire Image button is selected and then click Aad The file 2 2 img displays as image number 1 in the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer Repeat steps 2 and 3 adding 2 3 img 2 4 img 3 2 img 3 3 img 3 4 img 4 2 img 4 3 img and 4 4 img to the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer When you are finished adding the nine images the Mosaic Tool viewer should look like the following ERDAS IMAGINE Mosaic Mosaic Tool 1 No File m aj 6 Salm ala 5 Click Close in
93. F taur sampling loudoun trv loudoun_ tm arid shp Li senta L Pets LSaiected Samples cuvsampiig loudeun icudcun selected chr e ip seme s d Fente OOOO i dem Sample 4 la in Sample 2 E Sample 5 b E Sample 11 ls dem Sample 5 la in Sample 13 E Sample 14 b E Sample 1 gg Sample 12 ET L L E F Sa mple Level We are now ready to perform the Sample Level functions Functions 1 Click Next on the Select Samples step of the Sampling Wizard The Set Up Sample Node Level Files step is displayed 2 Click Next on the Setup Sample Node Files step of the Sampling Wizard The Assign Sample Node Files step is displayed l Single Sampling Project Sample Node Assign Files Use this step to assign existing files to the File Descriptors at the Sample Node level Some files originating from other sources must be manually associated with their appropriate File Descriptors in the Project Manager list of files to manage This step helps you make these assignments Select the Tile Sample and File Descriptor for which pou wish to make an assignment This popup list contains and then use the File Chooser browse to the existing file you want to associate with the selected 5 ample all of the samples for the selected Tile Image Tile Loudoun TM Samples Sample 1 This list contains File Descriptor Sample_Boundary ui all of the file descriptors File
94. Function Properties 1 In the Model Maker viewer double click on the Function object 2 Click on the Clear button to start our function definition from scratch 3 Inthe Functions popup list select Conditional Tour Guides 445 Spatial Modeler Execute the Model Change Raster Properties 446 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 In the list of functions select EITHER lt arg1 gt IF test OR arg2 OTHERWISE this should be the second item on the list In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of arg In the Calculator portion of the Function Definition dialog click on the Okey In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt test gt Under Available Inputs click on n1 ortho 2 In the Functions popup list select Relational In the list of functions select this should be the first item on the list In the Calculator portion of the Function Definition dialog click on the 0 key In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt arg2 gt Under Available Inputs click on n1_ortho 1 In the Calculator portion of the Function Definition dialog click on the key Under Available Inputs click on n1_ortho 2 Your Function Definition dialog should now contain the following EITHER D IF n1_ortho 2 0 OR n1 ortho 1 n1 ortho 2 OTHERWISE Click on the OK button Select
95. Guides 609 ul IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V E Viewer 1 edgeuf img Layer 1 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help sjwinju a a uj e Ix ala 3 If necessary start another Viewer In Viewer 2 select File Open Raster Layer 4 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog click the file edgess img then click OK This is the edge filtered file derived from the speckle suppressed file Viewer 2 edgess img Layer 7 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help a E L Nj TV a 5 Inthe ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Tile Viewers to position and size the Viewers so that you can see both of them at once on the screen The results should clearly show a more visible lake bed in the image that was speckle filtered edgess img As an experiment you may now want to take the unfiltered edge enhanced image edgeuf img and pass it through the same Speckle Suppression process done previously Comparing the result of this experiment with edgess img should show whether it is better to perform speckle suppression before or after edge enhancement 610 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Radar Interpreter You can experiment with other edge enhancement filters or proceed to the next section When you are finished comparing the images select File Clear in Viewer 1 and Viewer 2 Enhance Image Tour Guides The IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module provides thre
96. He EEUU ITE TOTO TOITIITETTTTTTTEIT 190 Execute Multiple Files Multiple Commands c creer es 193 v4 P Vo 193 Hun First Command aacscsdedosdckw SIR 308 A 3 ROREE OS Reo ERE EOS ERY SER Ow oe TRG RO Sabe Pes 195 Hur NEXECOMMANG 2x unus e rk d dor O SAPER EENE ANE REGEM GE ee ee dus 9 dS wet 196 Run Another Command 2x used eR LEE SDEEIEWGURGU dae dade RR OLARG RR e RP ZERO Aw dees based 197 QCcI A EI MPCP 198 Modify Variables s iux x nih aci RR 008 3 AO ROO WHEE OAK OS P LR wR CR OR RR ES RODEO Rr DO 198 Selec NOU FM Seu sede dan t deed een eet eee ened bees up Pd Da qed eee eg qd 200 wise E U PRRTTCCERTDETITTETTUCTTITTI fede TT a eb anes Ye eens be ae ee eee 201 Work With VanlabDieS 2426654028 ee Oe be bide ded ee Reve dod bee cbs evsidedees V 202 Create a New Variable 2 0 naaa eee eee eens 202 dicti APER 202 BIarL Bale VVEZJI accacadoeacade dm EuPIRPETTOASRSRSSQELUSRS t esa en TTE EX s Reuse RE 203 Create a New Variable llle eller 204 Add Additional Files to the Batch Job 1 ee eee eae 206 Start PYOCCSSING g0ccudeededetadwus ad dbadgo4ea bd PEs bag es ba bed bd kde eed bad oe hades 206 Check the Output Directory i eesis eR bed RR dx Rp Ek Un m bk se Dun x Eg 3k kn abo em bbs 207 Additional Information i222 92 5 3 4 Wedasd Ea vecuesiscew we P3 CaS eee es 207 Dave Load ODIOHS da eua cda ntre eea P WONG EU ES E GINE Gd pater
97. IMAGINE Edit the EML Tour Guides Spatial Modeler 5 Locate SIMAGINE_HOME examples spots img in bold above on line 25 and change it to arg2 6 Locate c temp merge_small img in bold above on line 26 and change it to arg3 ud nU La T HESSEN Hle Edit View Find Help I GIESESIGI ID NEAREST NEIGHBOR AOI NONE arg1 LE OLD NEAREST NEIGHBOR AOI WONE arg2 hll FILE DELETE_IF_EXISTING 4 GNORZ 0 ATHEMATIC 8 BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER arg 3 L The code now has arg1 arg2 and arg3 7 Select File Save or click on the Save Current Document icon in the Editor 1 Select File New or click on the New icon in the Editor Ia 2 Select File Open or click on the Open icon a 3 Inthe Load File dialog type eml for the File Name and press Return on your keyboard This searches for EML scripts in the directory 4 Select 8bit_res_merge eml and click OK in the Load File directory The eml file is located in IMAGINE HOME scripts where IMAGINE HOME is the location of ERDAS IMAGINE on your system The following EML script displays in the Editor 387 Spatial Modeler component res merge frame res merge title Resolution Merge geometry 140 120 250 230 statusbar filename hi_res_pan filename outputname button ok filename multi_spec title above center Multispectral File info Select the multispectral input file short
98. IMAGINE Radar Interpreter The Adjust Brightness dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 8 When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 100 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically 9 Select File Open Raster layer in the Viewer menu bar 10 Navigate to the appropriate directory then select bright img Viewer bright img Layer 7 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help ai 6 2 2 34 5 4 Rafal al 5 E F a si F dipe gS n ne d CN xe i 2 i E AIA ig M r y n X Ja tv WA 4 eT E 11 After processing is completed you must view and evaluate the resultant image and decide if another pass is needed to obtain the results you want See Chapter 5 Enhancement in the ERDAS Field Guide for theoretical information Ad j ust Slant This section does not take you through an actual demonstration of the Slant Range Ran ge Adjustment function since the full image is required However when using this function you follow the next series of steps The Slant Range Adjustment function applies only to radar data 1 Select Adjust Slant Range from the Radar Interpreter menu The Slant Range Adjustment dialog opens ul 622 ERDAS IMAGINE Enter sensor information here Indicate Surface Definition here Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Slant Range Adjustment
99. Image Matching 297 Import 159 629 Input 296 Intersection 297 Line Selection 102 Lock 34 Low Pass Filter 231 Marquee 102 Measurement 12 Modeler 340 371 Mouse Linear Mapping 31 Open 7 15 72 104 136 137 254 303 321 340 343 606 608 Output 301 Index 659 Index 660 Output Image 301 Paste 358 Polyline 13 50 Print 374 Query 63 Radar 601 Region Grow 462 Roam 21 Run 32 222 352 357 Save 90 351 357 Select Area for Zooming 62 Shift Bias 30 Statistics 478 Text 86 Tools 23 100 115 Vector 95 628 643 Viewer 109 114 135 248 290 303 321 601 Visual Query 62 Window 352 Zoom In 16 IHS 38 IHS to RGB 260 261 IHS to RGB dialog 261 Image invert 253 reverse 253 Image Catalog 61 add information 61 create 59 Image Commands tool 153 Image Drape viewer 53 Image Enhancement menu 612 Image Files dialog 177 Image Interpreter 9 237 339 495 functions Convolution 608 Neighborhood 608 Image Interpreter icon 215 239 246 Image Interpreter menu 215 239 246 Image matching 308 Image Matching icon 297 Image resampling 9 Image Stacking 308 Image Tiles 525 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index ImageInfo dialog 65 177 278 606 ImagelInfo utility 176 edit 176 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module using the IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module 599 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module dialogs 599 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module functions Brightness Adjustment 621 Edge Enhancement 608 Luminance Modification
100. In this tour guide the transformation coefficients are calculated from the GCP Tool and are automatically recorded in the Transformation tab Preparation A minimum number of GCPs is necessary to calculate the transformation depending on the order of the transformation This number of points is t 1 t 2 2 Where t is the order of the transformation If the minimum number of points is not satisfied then a message displays notifying you of that condition and the RMS errors and residuals are blank At this point you are not allowed to resample the data Change Order of Transformation To change the order of the transformation use the Polynomial Model Properties dialog available from the Geo Correction Tools Using this dialog select the Parameters tab at the top of the dialog This tab allows the polynomial order to be altered 145 Polynomial Rectification Calculate Transformation Matrix from GCPs Digitize Check Points 146 The Auto Calculation function is enabled by default in the GCP Tool The Auto Calculation function computes the transformation in real time as you edit the GCPs or change the selection in the CellArray With the Automatic Transform Calculation tool activated you can move a GCP in the Viewer while watching the transformation coefficients and errors change at the top of the GCP Tool You may want to turn off the Auto Calculation function if your system or computation is taking too l
101. Input File imm Output File img Output Options af out Resolution gt gp Data Type Same as Input Fl Input 10 none Output Fiat Single Ignore Zero in Output Stats 2 Info ensor Info Select row or Depression Angle nn 2 Deg column here Beam Width non E Deg Height o 00 Meter i Surface Definition Click here for a list of ee ee Eee eee SPHEPDHI Mage Sphere of Hadas SIARKI sph eroid typ es LARGE of nass Tanier IB GDODODO se spheroid Bey v In the Slant Range Adjustment dialog under Input File enter the name of the input file Under Output File enter the name of the output file in the directory of your choice Under Data Type select the data type for the Output File by clicking on the popup menu The default is Float Single which is recommended to save disk space but still retain precision Under Sensor Info you must enter sensor specific information that is obtained either from the data header information or from the data distributor Use the Data View option from the Import Export dialog or Tools View Binary Data from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to read the image header data Under Apply to select Row or Column See the previous section on Adjust Brightness for information about row and column selection Under the Surface Definition section e select Flat for shuttle or aircraft data such as SIR A or B or AIRSAR or e select Spheroid for s
102. Knowledge Classifier in regular non test mode from the Classification menu Tour Guides 571 ui IMAGINE Expert Classifier V p n T Best Classes Per Pixel Previnus Ek 0 n Click OK to TERRE LARGE EG HINWIS i generate the test W Produce Pesdhack image classification Area Window i Set Cell Size Minimum Set 4 Click OK in the Knowledge Classification dialog to start the test classification A status bar opens When the classification has completed the test classification image is displayed in the Viewer Viewer 7 EEXP 006190 img Layer 1 IL Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help s u c u al2 ss s Jw aja 5 Click OK to dismiss the status bar when the classification is finished 6 Inthe Knowledge Engineer dialog click on the Start Classification Pathway Feedback Mode t The Classification Path Information dialog is opened along with a cursor in the Viewer 572 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V je Classification Path Information a ji Map ia 243046 1968 3799975 0000 meters Details about the class under the cursor displav here Row gt Class Name Class Value Confidence diii uum oO l E FIULEIcSACE FE 3 7 Move the cursor into the orange and red areas in the Viewer which correspond to the orange Residential class and the red Commercial Services class
103. Limits dialog 469 Line join 108 reshape 108 split 108 Line measurement 12 Line of constant range 621 Line Selection icon 102 ERDAS IMAGINE Index Line Style Chooser dialog 81 99 106 Link box tool 139 Link symbol 20 Link Unlink Instructions dialog 20 367 Linked Cursors dialog 466 List of Recent Files dialog 7 Lock icon 34 Lookup table LUT graph rotate 32 shift 32 Lookup table LUT values change 26 modify 28 reset 28 Low High Pass Filter dialog 219 Low Pass Filter icon 231 M Magnifier window 16 Magnify image see Zoom Map area 73 create 70 prepare data layers 72 steps 69 edit 92 file map 92 name 71 outside margin 79 print 90 to file 91 save 90 scale 71 size 71 title 86 units 71 73 page 73 Map Composer icon 70 92 start 70 viewer 71 Map Composer menu 70 92 Map frame 73 adjust size 75 Tour Guides 663 Index 664 create 72 delete 77 dimensions 73 edit 77 position 74 76 reference to image in Viewer 76 scale 74 76 select 77 size 74 Map Frame Data Source dialog 73 Map Frame dialog 74 77 Map Path Editor 93 Map projection 10 135 160 167 265 State Plane 135 Marquee icon 102 Mask 473 Matching Options dialog 297 308 315 320 Matrix dialog 354 Measurement icon 12 Measurement Tool viewer 12 Menu Classification 457 484 501 522 560 Data Preparation 128 Fourier Analysis 215 Image Enhancement 612 Image Interpreter 215 239 246 Map Composer 70 92 Radar 601 Radar I
104. Nautical Miles Click here to E ENT center scale bars on each other W Miles j Yards Select length of Maximum Length AM 5 1 Inches i scale bars here Apply Redo Close Help 5 Inthe Scale Bar Properties dialog under Units select Kilometers and Miles by clicking the appropriate checkboxes 6 Setthe Maximum Length to 2 0 inches Press Return on your keyboard 7 Click Apply in the Scale Bar Properties dialog The scale bars display where you drew the box in the Map Composer viewer 8 If you are satisfied with the appearance of the scale bar click Close in the Scale Bar Properties dialog Otherwise you may make adjustments in the Scale Bar Properties dialog and click Redo to apply them 1 If you need to move the scale bars first select them by clicking on one of the scale bars To move simply drag the selection box to the desired position Remember to click outside the selection box to deselect the scale bars 83 M Map Composer Create a Legend Click here for A legend is a key to the colors that are used in a map Legends created in the Map Composer are actually groups of elements that are generated automatically to your specifications Next you create a legend explaining the four colors used in the overlaid environmental sensitivity analysis You must have a map composition open that contains thematic data The Annotation tool palette should also be open imn Click on the Le
105. Now perform an inverse Fourier transformation so that you can view the original image and see what effect this edit had on it You must save your edits before performing an Inverse Transform Operation 1 Inthe Fourier Editor click the Run icon on the tool bar or select File Inverse Transform from the menu bar El The Inverse Fourier Transform dialog opens 222 Enter a new name for the img layer here Be sure to use a directory in which you have write permission Output File img EIE ABEL I infor ras files zone887 bright img despeckle1 img despecklez imt despeckle3 img Output Defautt i Ignore Zero in Stats OK Cancel Help ERDAS IMAGINE Apply Other Filters Fourier Transform Editor In the Inverse Fourier Transform dialog under Output File enter a name for the new output file such as inverse TM1 img This file has an img extension by default Be sure to use a directory in which you have write permission Click OK to create the new file A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the file is created click OK and then display the file in a Viewer Your file should look similar to the following example Viewer inverse TMI img Layer 7 For the other edits performed in this tour guide you can save the fft layer and perform an inverse Fourier transform at
106. O a Z wWl amp VA Class gt Signature Mame Calor Ried Green Blue Value Order 3 Inthe Classification menu click Close to remove this menu from the screen 4 Inthe Signature Editor select View Columns The View Signature Columns dialog opens Wa Yiew Signature Columns xol Column These rows should not be selected Statistics Apply Close Help 5 Inthe View Signature Columns dialog right click in the first column to access the Row Selection menu Click on Select All 6 Shift click Red Green and Blue in Column boxes 3 4 and 5to deselect these rows These are the CellArray columns in the Signature Editor that you remove to make it easier to use These columns can be returned at any time 7 Inthe View Signature Columns dialog click Apply The Red Green and Blue columns are deleted from the Signature Editor 8 Click Close in the View Signature Columns dialog 458 ERDAS IMAGINE Use AOI Tools to Collect Signatures Tour Guides Advanced Classification The AOI tools allow you to select the areas in an image to be used as a signature These signatures are parametric because they have statistical information Select AOI Tools from the Viewer menu bar The AOI tool palette displays AD Select tool E x CF Oo v z Polygon tool idi pS or A Ea E Dom us Gm Region growing seed tool Use the Zoom In tool Ql on the Viewer tool bar to zoom in
107. OK in the Sensor Merge dialog The Sensor Merge dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 10096 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically In the menu bar of Viewer 1 select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 8 9 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter In the Select Layer To Add dialog click on the file flood tm147 radar img Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Under Layers to Colors select 1 for Red 2 for Green and 3 for Blue Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog Viewer 7 flood tm147 radar img Layer_1 Layer 2 GLay a Fle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help M tu Y In Viewer 2 select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog click the file merge img Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Under Layers to Colors select 1 for Red 2 for Green and 3 for Blue 10 Click OK 617 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V Apply Texture Analysis 618 1 12 13 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Examine the difference between the two files When you are finished comparing the images select File Clear
108. Once you have assigned the ancillary data classes to the Target Classes you may minimize the Ancillary Data Tool and the Ancillary Class Assignments dialogs In the Working Classes CellArray on the Class Grouping Tool right click in the row labels Select Criteria from the Row Selection menu that appears The Selection Criteria dialog is displayed 513 ui Advanced Classification Wa Selection Criteria Columns Functions Compares Click Majority to specify the selection criteria T odd lt a gt l contains Criteria Majority im sl Select Subset Add Remove Clear Help 2 Inthe Columns area click Majority to set the selection criteria 3 Inthe Class Grouping Tool select the Water Target Class by placing the carat gt in the Water Row Make sure that the carat gt is in this row 4 Inthe Selection Criteria dialog click the Select button All of the classes that best represent the selected Target Class are highlighted 5 Inthe Class Groups area of the Class Grouping Tool click the Save As New Group button The Selected Classes are added as a new Class Group suse fon EL Row rome Name Sim Cont Classes LI Canf T Click here to save mm x T o o 2 10 Change the name the classes as I Majority 8 3 8 8 a 85 of the new group a new group to Majority E 6 Change the name of the new group to Majority This will help keep t
109. Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog 4 Click the Fit to Frame option to enable it 5 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file air photo 1 img displays in the Viewer Viewer 7 air photo i img Layer 7 13671 30 05 304167 28 State Plane GRS 1380 6 Click on the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel to create a second Viewer 290 ERDAS IMAGINE Mosaic Viewer 7 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the second Viewer selecting air photo 2 img this time d we Ya a MEAS av K LH 1 3 a k MI Toy od B F i e E pe ke f xr 8 Position the Viewers side by side by selecting Session Tile Viewers from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar You can resize each Viewer so that they take up less screen space by dragging any corner of the Viewer 9 In the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel click on the DataPrep icon DataPrep The Data Preparation menu displays 291 ui Tour Guides Mosaic ij Data Preparation X Create Surface i Subset Image Click to start the Mosaic Tool Unsupervised Classification Hepraject Images Recalculate Elevation Values Imagizer Data Prep Make APF TOC 10 In the Data Preparation menu select Mosaic Images The Mosaic Tool viewer opens ex Mosaic Tool 7 No File Menu bar Edit Process wow Jo Ba simi slelaja CEPECA Files to be mosaicked are displayed on the
110. Options tab at the top of the dialog Confirm that Zoom by is set to 1 00 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file Insoils img is displayed in the second Viewer In the first Viewer select View Link Unlink Viewers Geographical The Link Unlink Instructions display Move your pointer to the second Viewer The pointer becomes a Link symbol a Move the pointer to the first Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Compare Images Unlink Viewers Tour Guides Viewer The No Link symbol displays as the cursor in the first Viewer Clicking in this Viewer discontinues the link operation To link the Viewers click anywhere in the second Viewer The two Viewers are now linked A white cursor box opens over the image in the second Viewer indicating the image area displayed in the first Viewer Y ou can move and resize this cursor box as desired and the image area in the first Viewer reflects each change This is similar to the magnification box you used earlier Drag the cursor box in the second Viewer to a new location The image area selected in the second Viewer is displayed in the first Viewer Drag the scroll bars in the first Viewer to roam in the image The white cursor box in the second Viewer moves as the image area in the first Viewer changes You could also use the Roam icon in the Viewer tool bar to roam over the image Just move the hand across the Viewer image to change the view In either Viewer select
111. Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar After all the careful checking for division by zero you get the same error The reason you still get the same error is that Modeler evaluates the entire statement at once As it turns out the error is generated when you do an Integer division by zero So in order to avoid the integer division and the resulting error you can use floating point arithmetic to set the output pixel value You can force the use of floating point arithmetic by simply declaring our input Raster to be of type Float Click OK to dismiss the Error dialog Click OK to dismiss the Modeler status dialog In the Model Maker viewer double click on the input Raster object ERDAS IMAGINE Change Raster Properties Tour Guides Spatial Modeler In the lower central portion of the Raster dialog in the Declare As popup list select Float Click on the OK button Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar The model now runs successfully to completion without any errors However if you view the resulting image veg index img you notice that it is relatively dark and does not contain much detail Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector This happens because even though you are calculating a floating point ratio you are still outputting an integer result So all resulting output pixel values are being truncated to integers This includes all pixels where the pixel v
112. RE ds SW ee Seo Deedee ebb bbe ede nee ed ede ee REESE 331 Query VieWsned DSldos pce ee aper ewe nest ened eet arbre tta tetibad Geb goa tate bees setae eyed 332 Add Area Column to the CellArray 2 0 0 0 ee ee eee eee eens 333 Query the Viewshed Layer 2 0 ee eee eee eee eee ee 334 ui weedoe ted oe eters aes ob ode eeentee teense end bapakee RAER 335 Section lll IMAGINE Professional sua teens baw hx B u XCEOE RR HERS RUE EURO E E RE n 337 Chapter 16 Spatial Modeler ss daas uds RcGGsascug wme sw u Ganda 59 339 IMTTOGUCUION Mr 339 Start Model MaKBF ecea ces tee eben arce ad uon ee m abs dra QUE adi dob 1 5 E ee CE M RRCOL V a icm A c x 340 Create Sensilivity LaVe s uua uae dm aoo wd Eo E ROS xxx RUE Eur d uia wai wie v e OR Oe s 340 Define Input Slope Layer lille rra 342 Display Slope LAVET MADRE 343 Select Area tO USE acueducto ad eruat aaa educ dura ed Ed db qubd aes Burda s 344 hecode Classes ouaaum4 uds mue E RERA CIIM EEI ER EVE Seana dee eae ee VIE REA S SEE T 345 Define Input Flood Plain Layer 1 0 0 cc RR Ras 347 Define Input Land Cover Layer 0 20 cc eee ee eee eens 347 Be FNS FUNG COUN cx sx treats oe we ade a mh ce ger ats pt ee wn Sh cs 8 en Ee ae ey eo 349 Define Output Raster Layer 0 ee eee eee hs 350 Save and Run Ihe Model 2th coun eas eee een oe beds ge ER ei eee ek od eee Seen ee seers dd ae 351 RUN NE WOGE 232x293 300R iriri RRES RERE ba dee
113. Random Selection v Ignore zeroes Select the iori raw rs ae aad AE IE I amd Selection with Strata radio button The Sampling Grid file displays here Browse to the Stratum File m created in the Recoding the Grouped File step Click OK to open the Sampe a Selection Tool 2 Select the Selection with Strata radio button 3 Make sure that the Sampling Grid filename part displays the Joudoun tm grid shp file ERDAS IMAGINE 536 Frame Sampling Tools 4 Make sure that the Stratum filename part displays the loudoun_strata img file If it does not Lar click the Browse button and browse to the file Select loudoun strata img from the list of files and click OK 5 Click OK in the Statistical Sample Selection dialog to open the Sample Selection Tool The Sample Selection Tool is opened W Sample Selection Tool f tour sampling loudoun tm oudoun tm grid BE x File Utility View Vector Sample Selection Report Help E mgg Gc uud amp ff B The Sampling Grid loudoun tm grid shp The Stratum File loudoun strata img I300z95 69 4312591 82 UTM wes 84 F Tour Guides 537 Frame Sampling Tools Manually Selecting Cells 1 Using the Manual Zoom tool ql zoom in on the upper portion of the Sampling Grid Ws Sample Selection Tool f tour sampling loudoun_tm loudoun mii nm x File Utility View Vector Sample Selection Report Help Gd SI X amp Q whe oT eB
114. T 8 aodplsin img 1 saf S81 lema unsigned 4 t 1 t nyperspectraLimg s s Si atnematic unsigned 8 t a lndcoverimg 1 S5s Ses emat Junsianed 4 13 14 aj 63 ui Image Catalog View Information Click the Zoom In icon al in the Graphical Query viewer tool bar Place the Zoom In tool over one of the black dots in the map in the Graphical Query viewer and click until the dot is magnified to a yellow box Click the Select icon NI in the Graphical Query viewer tool bar With the Select tool click on the yellow box you just magnified Note that all of the other images located in the Graphical Query viewer are characterized by red boxes The corresponding filename is highlighted in the Image Catalog Click the Display Single icon im in the Image Catalog tool bar The selected image displays in a Viewer Repeat steps 2 through 6 selecting a red box on the map to display another image Note that when the box is selected it turns yellow If necessary click the Roam icon iy in the Graphical Query viewer tool bar and then drag the image in the Graphical Query viewer to manipulate the image view If you reset the display be prepared to start back at step 2 on page 62 NOTE Magnified boxes that are deselected are red in color selected boxes are yellow In the Image Catalog tool bar click the Display Another icon al to display the image you selected in step 7 in a se
115. Terrain Surface Interpolation 288 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER FOURTE Mosaic Introduction This tour guide gives you the steps for mosaicking two or more image files to produce one image file The mosaicking process works with rectified and or calibrated images Here you are shown how to mosaic air photo images as well as LANDSAT images Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 45 minutes Mosaic Usin 9 Air In this section you use a template to mosaic two air photo images Photo Images The two files to be mosaicked are air photo 1 img and air photo 2 img These data files are air photo images of the Oxford Ohio area ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open 1 Inthe Viewer select File Open Raster Layer or click the Open icon 5 Tour Guides 289 ui Mosaic The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click here Click here to access n D e Tile the raster Files Permissions options Filename imt aoa Stereo SAR TourRef subset Al TM 1 img Click here TM striped img atlanta to select XS truecolor sub img 2 ront the file imagines air photo 2 img examples autologres img Eg bldgs Eg info Eg lanier dms Preview A window File Type IMAGINE Image imq d greyscale 1110 Rows x 1108 Columns x 1 Bandis 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select air photo 1 img from the file list 3 Click the Raster
116. This section describes how to edit a map composition when you want to use another image in Paths an existing map frame or if the original image you used has been moved to another directory map File When you create a map or a graphic using Map Composer a file is created with the map extension This file contains all of the specifications for your composition such as size position of the image name of the image annotation etc When you display or print a map composition the software reads this map file and recreates the map you originally composed So although you place an image in a composition you are actually only referencing it The name of the image you are using is listed in the map file Therefore when that image is enhanced or changed in any way the image in the map composition also changes because it is the same image It is necessary to edit a map file if you wish to move an image that has been used in a map composition to a new directory Editing Annotation The annotation in a map composition can be edited interactively with the Annotation tools in the Annotation tool palette using the same methods you used to place the annotation when You must have a saved map composition map file l Click the Composer icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel cam Composer The Map Composer menu displays New Map Composition Open Map Composition Print Map Composition Click here to Print Plot
117. Two dialogs are displayed the Ancillary Data Tool dialog and the Ancillary Class Assignments dialog In the Ancillary Class Assignments dialog select File Set Ancillary Data Layer The File Chooser opens Select loudoun_Ic img from the IMAGINE HOME examples directory Click OK A Performing Summary progress meter appears When the summary is complete click OK to dismiss the progress meter The summary process will do three things populate the Ancillary Class Assignments CellArray with information from the ancillary data file e provide summary values relating the ancillary data file to the file being grouped in the Ancillary Data Tool CellArray e add three new column Diversity Majority and Target 96 to the Working Groups CellArray in the Class Grouping Tool For a more detailed explanation of each of these dialogs and their contents please see the ERDAS IMAGINE On Line Help In the Ancillary Class Assignments CellArray the rows represent the classes from the ancillary data file loudoun lc img and the columns represent the information from the being grouped loudoun maxclass img ERDAS IMAGINE 512 S Click here to relate the Ancillary Data classes to the Target Classes in the image being grouped T Collecting Groups Using the Majority Approach 1 Tour Guides a es ss 22 Tgegus 0 E ierse Advanced Classification In the Ancillary Class Assignments CellArray scroll
118. V of 255 Enter a lower right u LR U of 255 and a lower right v LR V of 80 Click OK in the Rectangular Mask dialog The top right and bottom left corners of the fft layer are now black also making the fft layer look like a cross ERDAS IMAGINE Fourier Transform Editor Viewer 7 recmask img Layer 7 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel File Edit Mask The resulting image is visibly smoother than the original Use a Wedge Mask The wedge mask option is often used to remove striping in imagery that appears in the fft layer as radial lines Most of the striping in the Landsat image you are using is manifested in the fft layer as the bright nearly vertical line that passes through the origin l Ifitis not already displayed open the original fft layer in the Fourier Editor 1 e TM 1 fft 2 With your cursor in the Fourier Editor click in the center of one of the bright areas that make up the line You need to enter this information in the dialog For this example you use 35 186 3 Select Mask Wedge Mask The Wedge Mask dialog opens 1 Select window Window Function Hanning function here Center Angle Wedge Angle TW Central Gain p 00 4 Inthe Wedge Mask dialog for the Center Angle enter the following expression to calculate the center of the wedge based on the coordinate that you selected atan 185 36 Tour Guides 229
119. Vector oiceaketoahe death uy dx ur ad XE ieu dod e can deco deaeas ea eS 625 Chapter 21 IMAGINE VOCIOR ccc ceeceeegee seer eeeseneeeuettee horse ee aves eneeeeeetsesees 627 IN TTOGUCUOR 2ic rie cece the sd buses eee eb ee E heehee dee ehen eee ee eee eke CEs 627 COPY Vector Dad uus ceive eke tow e 3739 curo dee ee EE Ee eee VE Po V Ru uL ee ee 628 Manip late INTO FUCS MC rwrrrrrwrww mm 630 Change Vector SyImDboloOV nho ie whew ne URS bbe FOE a CER WIR B RR RO E is n 637 Add Pattern Polygon Fill na nn aana RII RI RR RR c 46a 640 BUIG TODOIODy 23 5345 ma uz Dd ESSI E E Ud dra EC Ed E ew E eee 643 Clean Vector Layer 2n ct chee eee eed RR eR Rd da REOR MUR ni REO d na 645 dini qu BE TFT 647 Tour Guides xiii xiv ERDAS IMAGINE List of Tables Table P 1 ERDAS IMAGINE Documentation Functions llle XX Table P 2 Session Menu Options x sua dob rx Rx y sans Ph xo Roc x SOU OOS HERE OHO RS deae xxii Table P 3 Main Menu Options llle less eee xxiii Table P 4 Tools Menu Options uic ar soos pod OR R3 HE SKE REEDS Row Rx XC e TR GAS XXIV Table P 5 Utility Menu Options 0 0 0 0 aa eee xxvi Table P 6 Help Menu Options llle xxvii Table 2 1 Image Catalog Preferences 2er 59 Table 12 1 Table 16 1 Table 16 2 Table 16 3 Table 16 4 Table 20 1 Table 20 2 Table 20 3 Tour Guides Film
120. View Link Unlink Viewers Geographical to unlink the Viewers The Link Unlink Instructions display Move the pointer to the other Viewer The unlink cursor displays D E vs Click anywhere inside the Viewer to unlink the Viewers In the menu bar of the second Viewer select File Close The second Viewer closes Viewer Raster Menu Options Create an AOI Layer 5 Inthe first Viewer select File Clear to clear the Viewer These options allow you to define an AOI in the image excluding other parts of the image Specific processes can be applied to this AOI only which can save considerable time and disk space The option to use a specified AOI for processing is available from many dialogs throughout ERDAS IMAGINE This exercise tells you how to create an AOI layer that can be saved as a file and recalled for later use NOTE Each Viewer can display only one AOI layer at a time Display Janier img in a Viewer You must have an image displayed in the Viewer to create an AOI layer 1 Select File New AOI Layer from the Viewer menu bar ERDAS IMAGINE creates an AOI layer 2 Select View Arrange Layerstrom the Viewer menu bar to verify that the AOI layer has been created The Arrange Layers dialog opens and should look similar to the following example This signifies that an AOI layer was created PEE aoipp2151 Ao lanier img Layer 4 pun lanier imQrL ayer 3 lanier imQrL ayer z Click here when yo
121. W Create Feature Space Images ET E nj x Input Raster Layer img Levels Slice Equalize Aves Bii erm ino Color Gray Scale Length Output Root Mame Enter germtm img output to a Viewer Feature Space Layers FS Imaqe Quitput File Names Anis Layer YAxis Layer aeimim2atepimg maea Maea emim 2 4fpimg aea Laver 4 Lever A Laver 61 Lever 3 Lavera germtm 3 5 fsp img Layer 3 Click here to Bach A0 Cancel Hen n create image 7 Click on germtm 2 5 fsp img 2 Inthe Create Feature Space Images dialog under Input Raster Layer enter germtm img This is the image file from which the Feature Space image is generated Under Output Root Name the default name is germtm This is the root name for the Feature Space image files that are generated Verify that the directory where the Feature Space image files are saved has write permission 3 Inthe Create Feature Space Images dialog click the Output to Viewer option so that the Feature Space image is displayed in a Viewer 4 Under Feature Space Layers click the number 8 in the FS Image column in the CellArray to select the germtm 2 5 fsp img row You may need to scroll down to get to FS Image number 8 The output Feature Space image is based on layers two and five of the germtm img file Layers two and five are selected since water is spectrally distinct in this band combination
122. X and Film Y Coordinates llle 272 Class Values for n3 landcover RC lees 348 Conditional Statement Class Values ce eller 350 Training Samples of Chaparral and Riparian Land Cover 376 Complete Criteria Table sellers 379 Coefficient of Variation Values for Look averaged Radar Scenes 603 Speckle Suppression Parameters llle 605 Filtering Sequence llle ss sh s a sons 606 List of Tables xvi ERDAS IMAGINE Preface About This Manual The ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides manual is a compilation of tutorials designed to help you learn how to use ERDAS IMAGINE software This is a comprehensive manual representing ERDAS IMAGINE and its add on modules Each guide takes you step by step through an entire process The tour guides are not intended to tell you everything there is to know about any one topic but to show you how to use some of the basic tools you need to get started This manual serves as a handy reference that you can refer to while using ERDAS IMAGINE for your own projects Included is a comprehensive index so that you can reference particular information later There are several sections to this manual These sections are based upon the way in which ERDAS IMAGINE is packaged The following sections are composed of the tour guides you go through in a step by step fashion to learn detailed information about the
123. Yellow These are the random points that have been assigned a reference class value Click OK in the Change colors dialog to accept the default colors The Add Random Points utility generates random points throughout your classified image After the points are generated you must enter the class values for these points which are the reference points These reference values are compared to the class values of the classified image In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select Edit Create Add Random Points The Add Random Points dialog opens W Add Random Points X Search Count 1024 Number of Paints Enter 10 here The Distribution Parameters should be Random Distribution Parameters Random C Stratified Random C Equalized Random Use Minium points Minimum Ponts 10 Select Classes Click here to start the process ERDAS IMAGINE 3 7 Tour Guides Advanced Classification In the Add Random Points dialog enter a 10in the Number of Points number field and press Return on your keyboard In this example you generate ten random points However to perform a proper accuracy assessment you should generate 250 or more random points Confirm that the Search Count is set to 1024 This means that a maximum of 1024 points are analyzed to see if they meet the defined requirements in the Add Random Points dialog If you are generating a large number of points and they are not colle
124. a Viewer open 1 Select File Open Raster Layer trom the Viewer menu bar The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Tour Guides 213 Fourier Transform Editor Click here to view the raster options Click here to select the file TM 1 img Raster Options Filename imq Directory TH_1 img wolk examples StereoSAR_TourMat rescale 4 i 7 SterenSAR TourRef rescale vol Stereo SAR TourRef subset t atlanta roots TM strped img gt imagines As truecolor sub img gt examples air photo 1 img Eg hidgs Eg info i lanier dms File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 312 Rows x 5812 Columns x 7 Bandis Recent Goto Rename Click here to display Deis the file CDROM 1 Cancel 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on TM 1 img 3 Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and then select Gray Scale from the Display as popup list 4 The Display Layer section updates so that you can select which layer of the file to display Accept the default of Layer 1 5 Click OK to display the image file in the Viewer Viewer 1 TM_1 img Layer 1 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel x lal DV NOTE You do not have to display a file before computing the fft layer This step is included to show you the image before any Fourier editing is performed ERDAS IMAGINE Create FFT Output
125. a conditional statement In this example you use data from a thematic raster layer and a continuous raster layer to create a new output layer The input layers include a Landsat TM file and a slope file This model performs similar to a parallelepiped classifier but uses slope and image statistics in the decision process The output file contains four classes chaparral in gentle slopes chaparral in steep slopes riparian in gentle slopes and riparian in steep slopes For information on the parallelepiped classifier see Chapter 17 Advanced Classification on page 455 The model you create looks like this All Griteria n3 slope ppdclass Before beginning the ERDAS IMAGINE Classification tools were used to gather training samples of chaparral and riparian land cover This was done to determine the minimum and maximum data file values of each class in three of the seven TM bands 4 5 3 These values are listed in the following table 375 Spatial Modeler 376 Table 16 3 Training Samples of Chaparral and Riparian Land Cover Chaparral Riparian Slopes below class value 3 are less than 8 percent and therefore are characterized as gentle Slopes in class value 3 or above are greater than 8 percent and are characterized as steep These values are used in the criteria function You must have Model Maker running with a new Model Maker viewer displayed Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool
126. all current Batch jobs Scheduled Batch Job List hemelkswansont imagine840 batchr t Status starts as Row Jab Mame tart Time start Date User WAITING i fianier_reproj WAITING 1509 21 Oct 1999 kswanso homez 5 You can use the scroll bar to see the complete path of the Job File The Scheduled Batch Job List dialog may be opened any time by selecting Session View Off line Batch Queue from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar When the job begins the Status changes from WAITING to ACTIVE When the job has finished the Status changes from ACTIVE to DONE When the job is done the log file can be viewed by first selecting the job in the Scheduled Batch Job list dialog and then clicking the Log button This is useful for checking to see if your Batch command ran successfully on all of the input files ERDAS IMAGINE Batch Processing The log displays in a lanier reproj log Dir ihometkswansont imagine840ibatchitoastih a text editor Hle Edit View Find js njuje s e aj 10 21 1999 15 09 13 vol products imagine ver RMS error 0 124794 pixels with polynomial ord Resampling image vol atlanta root imagine ex Computing stats of usr data lanier reproj im 10 21 1999 15 10 00 reprojectprocess complete j 10 21 1999 15 10 00 vol products imagine ver RMS error 0 124794 pixels with polynomial ord Resampling image vol atlanta root imagine ex Computing stats of usr data lnclump reproj i 10
127. and 3 In the Camera Model Properties dialog under Principal Point enter 0 004 for X and accept 0 000 as the default for Y Then enter 152 804 for the Focal Length NOTE From the camera calibration certificate there may be several possible types of the Principal Point coordinates The Principal Point of Symmetry is preferable In Units under Principal Point accept the default of Millimeters NOTE The X and Y Principal Point coordinates Focal Length and Fiducial Film coordinates must all be entered in the same units For this example make sure that the Account for Earth s curvature checkbox not selected v You should only account for the Earth s curvature when using small scale images or when it is necessary to take this factor into account Alternately activating and deactivating this option and then clicking Apply allows you to observe changes to the RMS error Accounting for the Earth s curvature slows down the rectification process Click on the Fiducials tab at the top of the Camera Model Properties dialog The Fiducial options display 269 Orthorectification Click here to view the Fiducials options General Fiducials Orientation Projection Fiducial Type viewer Fiducial Locator 3 Status Unsolved 1 2 1 123 x 4 4 LITE IPS amp n Error 4 3 5 Image x Image Film x Film Click here to select this Fiducial Type ra c e ar n a a Pointe __ 24
128. and click the Up button four times to move it below the Color column 5 Now select Area and click the Up button until it is between Color and Histogram 6 Click OK to apply these changes to the CellArray The Column Properties dialog closes Help Row ass Mames Color Area Histogratr Red Green Blue Opacity a a 322628 14507 LEE _ ali l Permeter 555159 300 3 9 0 7 Hidden Region o 773245 sms o Y Y 1 8B 3 Visible by One Observer 1402 07 E sum o mr 1 a a 7 Select File Save in the Raster Attribute Editor to save all edits to the CellArray You can now easily view the size and location of visible and hidden areas in the viewsheds Query the Viewshed Layer 334 1 Click an area inside the Viewer The corresponding class is highlighted in the CellArray of the Raster Attribute Editor dialog 2 When you complete your query of the data select File Close in the Raster Attribute Editor to dismiss the dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Viewshed Analysis Finish 1 Click Close in the Viewshed dialog 2 Select File Close in the Viewer 3 Select File Close Image Drape in the Image Drape viewer Tour Guides 335 Viewshed Analysis 336 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides ERDAS IMAGINE EEr e Ta pa is a Pm E amp hd b sk o rh Jl v E bt MANC SECTION 111 IMAGINE Professional TA 337 ui Secti
129. and it should contain the images in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory Select View Graphical Query Viewer or click the Visual Query icon amp in the Image Catalog tool bar The Graphical Query viewer opens Click the Select Area for Zooming icon E in the Graphical Query viewer tool bar The pointer becomes a crosshair With the crosshair draw a bounding box that covers the entire continental United States When the mouse button is released the United States is magnified in the Graphical Query viewer Note that more detail is presented as the backdrop is zoomed ERDAS IMAGINE Run Query Tour Guides Image Catalog Hle Edit View iss umma MN Lr EAE x L UT y 7 oa NGC eer ue Mee See Click the Query icon fea in the Graphical Query viewer tool bar The files of images located within the designated query area the continental US are highlighted in yellow in the Image Catalog Tiny rectangles on the map in the Graphical Query viewer mark the location of these images mage Catalog SHOMETibm ict catalog Hle Edit View le m6 E ne n 8 Record Filename Layers Rows Cols Type Pixel Recora Filename Layers Rows Cols Type Pixel Eotererocrs ims soo 480 fathematic unsigned E 2 TM striped img 1001 801 athematic unsigned 8 E 3 slfeasinesimg i se 5 z shemati unsigned 8 t fmm f _s91 58 sinematic unsigned 8 t
130. any time The steps for doing so are not repeated here However the result is shown so that you can see how each edit affects the image In the Fourier Editor click the Open icon on the tool bar or select File Open from the menu bar DUM B In the Open FFT Layer dialog under FFT Layer enter the name of the first fft layer you displayed e g TM_1 ff Click OK to display the selected file in the Fourier Editor When the file displays select Mask Filters from the Fourier Editor menu bar Tour Guides 223 ui Fourier Transform Editor 5 Inthe Low High Pass Filter dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Butterworth This is a smoother function than the Ideal Use a radius of 80 00 just as with the Ideal 6 Change the Radius to 80 00 7 Click OK in the Low High Pass Filter dialog The fft layer and the resulting image are shown in the following picture Ble Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TemaMode Help File Edit Mask 3 0 w 2 wn ej 1 2 This filter eliminated much of the image content because the radius was too small 8 Try this same exercise using a Radius of 300 00 rather than 80 00 The resulting image looks like the following example 224 ERDAS IMAGINE Fourier Transform Editor Viewer Butterworth300 img Layer 7 Fourier Editor TM 1 fft Layer 1 He Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Hle Edit Mask
131. apply this new style to the vector layer in the Viewer 642 The polygons in Zone 15 are redrawn with the pattern fill as in the following example 1 Viewer 7 zone88 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help sie a 2 9 js 5 Raa of Pattern fill is shown here ERDAS IMAGINE Build Topology Tour Guides IMAGINE Vector 12 In the Symbology dialog select File Save As 13 14 15 16 The Save Symbology As dialog opens c 5aveSymbologv As Save Symbology enone as evs ZA SMS all file name here zoned evs B m info ras files zone887 tours mt In the Save Symbology As dialog enter a name for the symbology file such as Zone88 evs in the directory of your choice If you use the same root name as your coverage then this is the default symbology file when you open this vector layer later Click OK to save the file Click Close in the Symbology dialog Select File Clear from the Viewer menu bar After you have created or edited a vector layer you must clean or build it to create or maintain the topology and reset the tabular information If possible it is always better to run Build instead of Clean Clean is required only if lines intersect at locations other than nodes or if there are dangling lines that you wish to automatically delete This is not the case in this exercise so you run Bui
132. band pair you can easily see if the signatures represent similar groups of pixels by seeing where the ellipses overlap on the Feature Space image e When ellipses do not overlap the signatures represent a distinct set of pixels in the two bands being plotted which is desirable for classification However some overlap is expected because it is rare that all classes are totally distinct When the ellipses do overlap then the signatures represent similar pixels which is not desirable for classification 475 Advanced Classification Plot Histograms 476 7 Inthe Signature Objects dialog click Close 8 Deselect the signatures for Agricultural Field_1 and Forest 1 The Histogram Plot Control Panel allows you to analyze the histograms for the layers to make your own evaluations and comparisons A histogram can be created with one or more signatures If you create a histogram for a single signature then the active signature which is next to the is used If you create a histogram for multiple signatures then the selected signatures are used 1 Inthe Signature Editor move the gt prompt to the signature for Agricultural Field 1 by clicking under the column 2 Inthe Signature Editor menu bar select View Histograms or click on the Histogram icon The Histogram Plot Control Panel and the Histogram dialogs open W Histogram Plot Control Panel E x Plot Options Enter 5 here Signatures Bands
133. cover the vectors then double click within the rotation box to magnify that area The Rotate Magnify Instructions box dismisses and both the raster and vector layers are magnified in the Viewer RA For other methods of zooming into an area of interest see Animated Zoom Box Zoom and Real time Zoom starting on page 18 In the Viewer menu bar select Vector Viewing Properties The Properties dialog opens 105 Vector Querying and Editing Hold on this popup list to select Other 32 Attribute ZONEset J Psi 3 J Pimak Bounding B Click here to display Sipe haa points In the vector v Enors Selection Color layer then hold here to edit the poin t style J sipimi a g Display the Selected Subset Only O BMus pe Lones EN Ei _ Attribute based symbology Tics 5 e g Symbology nones Set Apply Save save As z Close Help Click here and then hold here to edit the nodes 2 Inthe Properties dialog hold on the popup list next to Arcs and select Other The Line Style Chooser dialog opens 3 Inthe Line Style Chooser dialog change the Width to 2 00 points and hold on the Outer Color popup list to select White 4 Click Apply and then Close in the Line Style Chooser dialog 5 Click Points in the Properties dialog to display points 6 Hold on the popup list next to Points and select Other to change the style they are more visible The Symbol Chooser d
134. cursor passes over are highlighted This provides a much better selection but there is still some speckling in the selection 9 Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and then click on one of the unselected pixels Note this adds all of the pixels to the currently selected classes in the Working Group 10 Now hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click on one of the highlighted pixels All of the pixels that belong to the same class as this pixel are removed from the selection NOTE The Shift and Ctrl keys may also be used to select and deselect classes directly in the Working Classes CellArray Filling in the Holes and Removing the Speckle The initial step in any collection method will leave either holes unselected classes that are islands within the class or speckles selected classes that are islands outside of the majority of the selected classes To increase the accuracy of your Class Groups you will need to fill the holes and remove the speckle 11 Continue to collect the water classes of this lake using the Shift and Ctrl keys Use the Toggle Highlight button amp to turn off the highlighting and see the actual pixels you have selected ui 506 ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification Include the class if e adding the class fills the holes in the existing selection e adding the class supplements the edges of the existing selection e removing the class opens significant holes in the selection o
135. dmtm img This is a Landsat TM image of San Diego California Under Output File enter subset_no_snap img in a directory where you have write permission Click OK to begin the Subsetting process A Job Status bar displays indicating the progress of the subsetting operation Modeler running model subset pmi Job State Done Title bar tells lenem Bie 28 Percent Done 100 0 100 is running updates here OK Conca Help Depending on your eml Preferences under Session Preferences User Interface amp Session Keep Job Status Box when the Job Status bar shows 100 indicating that the job is 10096 done you must either click OK to close the dialog or the dialog closes automatically 241 Image Interpreter Displaying the Subset with the Original Data 1 The original image should still be displayed in the Viewer 2 Select File Open from the menu bar on the Viewer The Select Layer to Add dialog displays Click here to l open a list Click here T of recently to access the IE or nnoto 24 Goto accessed files Raster Options 5m Pom ems tab 9H spotp 87 img Rename at spotp 92 img products badlines img 2 imagine Pee gt version eldoatm img gt canton eldodem img gt root flare img gt examples flare imr Eg Textures File Type IMAGINE Image imm d truecolor 331 Rows x 331 Columns x 7 Bandis 3 Click the Recen
136. down until you find the Low Intensity Residential class Click in the Urban column of the CellArray to assign this class to the Urban Target Class The X will move from the Water column or the first column in the CellArray to the Urban column Repeat this step for the High Intensity Residential and Commercial Industrial Transportation classes Wa Ancillary Class Assignments ia et mj x File _ Ancillary Classes water Agriculture Forest Utban Histagram Wa Vale Red Green Blue Opacity Blue Opacity Else eles mensyResdenid __ wer x imem 21 3 o 0 __1 LowIntensiy Re a ee a a Px 9L ceseireess o12e8 017254 3 rx J O 1l 9L semono 3 X J C o o eisewe oiseoeoisene 3 Px 1 19 eom 3 ap a eee 31 SO 0 231373 0 231373 0 231373 1 Continue arranging the Xs in the Ancillary Class Assignments so that they properly relate the classes from the ancillary data file to the Target Classes If the ancillary data classes do not have labels leave them in the Water column In most cases this approach would be the first step you took in the grouping process As a first step this process would result in a completely grouped image that had no Similarities and no Conflicts between Target Classes We have already begun collecting Class Groups and this will cause some conflicts between Target Classes
137. eldodem img displays in the Viewer Click the Open icon again in the Viewer tool bar The Select Layer To Add dialog reopens In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select the file eldoatm img Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog In the Raster Options click the Clear Display checkbox to turn it off This allows eldoatm img to display on top of eldodem img Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog Now both eldodem img and eldoatm img are displayed in the same Viewer with the eldoatm img layer on top Select Utility Image Drape from the Viewer menu bar An Image Drape viewer displays with the overlapping images in it Click this icon to Click on this icon to open a file in the open the Observer Image Drape viewer Positioning tool Click on this icon to open the Sun Positioning tool 53 ui Viewer Change Options 1 Select Utility Options trom the Image Drape viewer menu bar The Options dialog opens Click on this tab to edit DEM Fog Background background options J Exaggeration Terrain Color l J Click to apply your at Viewing Range z7600 000 changes and close this Elevation Units Meters tz dialog j Render Back Sid TOW Click to apply no changes and close this dialog 2 Click on the Background tab in the Options dialog 3 Inthe Background options hold on the popup list next to Background Color and select Gold
138. ensure that at least 80 of every Sample Cell created by the Grid Generation Tool falls within the bounds set by the Mask File 6 Click OK to create the Sampling Grid and return to the Sampling Project Wizard A Progress meter appears and tracks the progress of the Grid Generation Process 7 When the Create Assign Sampling Grid step reappears click Next The Select Samples step is displayed Note that the Project Manager is updated to include the Sampling Grid file you just created Tour Guides 535 Frame Sampling Tools ia Sampling Project Manager Ez i mi x File Process Help fe mmn uve Bs p 0 2 File Descriptor File Path and Name Date C88 county forests spf shy Loudoun TM The new sampling grid file gram files imagine 8 6 examples loudoun_maxclas i F taur sampling laudoun strata img was placed Ina directory named loudoun tm F teur sampling leudoun Em loudoun tm grid sh All of the Tile Node Level files are created in a Tile Level directory which bears the same name as the Tile itself The Statistical Sample Selection dialog allows you to choose which files you would like to open Selecting the to aid you in the selection of the Sample Cells which will be interpreted for the MOI Samples 1 Inthe Select Samples step of the Sampling Wizard click the Select Samples button The Statistical Sample Selection dialog displays i Statistical Sample Selection 1 j x C
139. enter LAN and move the cursor out of the text field ERDAS IMAGINE automatically appends the default gen file extension Use a descriptive name that helps you to recognize the type of inputs saved in the file 175 ui Import Export Preview the Image Click OK in the Save Options File dialog These inputs are now saved and can be used again when appropriate To load the gen file at a later time click on the Load Options button in the Import Generic Binary Data dialog In the Import Generic Binary Data dialog click on Preview A Job Status dialog displays When the Job Status bar shows 100 indicating that the job is 100 done the dialog closes automatically A Viewer automatically opens and displays the file lanier2 preview img The preview file extension is added to indicate that this is a decimated preview file not suitable for processing Open another Viewer window and display the file Janier img You see that the two files are similar in appearance The difference in these files is that lanier img has map projection information and lanier2 preview img does not This is because when anier img was exported to a lan file the map information was exported to lanier pro which is a format used in ERDAS 7 5 The map projection data in Janier pro was not imported with the Generic Binary Data importer However the imported image does contain statistics similar to the statistics exported to lanier sta because statist
140. error and residuals The Control Point Error for the X and Y values is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the GCP Tool NOTE The GCP Tool requires a minimum of three GCPs to run the model and at least six GCPs to make the model accurate and stable 6 Click Save in the Camera Model Properties dialog Choose Your Path 276 Resampling vs Calibration Resampling Resampling is the process of calculating the file values for the rectified image and creating the new file All of the raster data layers in the source file are resampled The output image has as many layers as the input image ERDAS IMAGINE provides these widely known resampling algorithms e Nearest Neighbor e Bilinear Interpolation e Cubic Convolution e Bicubic Spline Calibration Instead of creating a new rectified image by resampling the original image based on the mathematical model calibrating an image only saves the mathematical model into the original image as a piece of auxiliary information Calibration does not generate new images so when the calibrated image is used the math model comes into play as needed For example if you want to see the calibrated image in its rectified map space in a Viewer the image can be resampled on the fly based on the math model by selecting the Orient image to map system option in the Select Layer To Add dialog A major drawback to image calibration is that the processes involved with the calibrated ima
141. example if your study area covers the states of North and South Dakota you could save a view of just that area You can either enter the coordinates manually into the Area Definition dialog or you can select an area by drawing a box in the Graphical Query viewer The upper left and lower right coordinates are the coordinates of the area currently viewed in the Graphical Query viewer You can save these coordinates to a bounding box file bbox Click Save in the Area Definition dialog The Defined Areas dialog opens Files Filename bbox Directory rnet doacsztaur Enter the directory and file name here Eg infor File Type catalog Area Definition File bbox i 206 Files 3 subdirectories 0 Matched 147825K Bytes Free Image Catalog In the Defined Areas dialog under Filename enter the name USA in the directory of your choice and then click OK Click Cancel in the Area Definition dialog to close it In the Graphical Query viewer click the Roam icon and then drag on the image to view a different area In order to recall the view you saved as USA bbox select File Area Definition in the Graphical Query viewer and then click Open in the Area Definition dialog The Defined Areas dialog opens In the Defined Areas dialog under Filename click on USA bbox Click OK in the Defined Areas dialog The Defined Areas dialog closes and the coordinates in the Area Definition dialog change Click Apply and then
142. files are dependent upon one of the Root Node files Sample Node Level steps are performed on the high resolution representative samples of the Image Tiles These Samples are interpreted for the MOI Sample level files are dependent upon one of the Image Tiles 525 Frame Sampling Tools To Add a New File Enter the Descriptor for the new file W Select the type of file to add Click Add gt gt Modify the location of the new file in the project hierarchy 526 Click the Set Up Root Node Files button on the Single Sampling Wizard Palette to open the first step of the Single Sampling Wizard The Single Sampling Wizard opens Each step in the Wizard has text that explains the current step and either allows you to set up the file assignments or click buttons to launch the appropriate tools Click the Setup Files button in the Setup Root Node Files step of the wizard The Root Node Define File Descriptors dialog is displayed ii Single Sampling Project Root Node Define File Descriptors File jm xi To Edit an Existing File File Descriptor Root Level Files to Manage Final Results Select a descriptor from the list of root level files Modify the location of the existing file EN EN in the project Down Bottom hierarchy Click to set the relationship between the selected file and the other files in the project Set Process Associations cre tee This dia
143. fm stuter fm stuff l Aras files ras files _ Click here to see SPOT test img raw data values and SPOT testpreviewimg f header information Directory bar tour Click this OK Close Data View Hel popup list to eee peres w change directories Under Output File ERDAS IMAGINE automatically enters lanier img as the file name If you try to save the file in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory an Attention message warns you that anier img already exists If the Attention dialog displays click No This prevents the original Janier img file from being overwritten In the Import Export dialog enter Janier2 img as the Output File in the directory of your choice In the Import Export dialog click OK The Import Generic Binary Data dialog opens This dialog requires you make many inputs that define the data structure for ERDAS IMAGINE In some cases you can get the information for these inputs from the header data of the file using the Data View option from the Import Export dialog but you may have to rely on prior knowledge or assumption for the information You must enter the correct inputs for the data you are importing The defaults for this dialog are not acceptable for importing Click on the Data View button in the Import Export dialog The DataView dialog opens The data as initially displayed may not appear to be very useful The following steps result in a display from which you can
144. for Y NOTE The default Output Cell Sizes are based on the triangulation The smaller the pixel size the larger the output file size Click the Ignore Zero in Stats checkbox to activate it Click OK in the Resample dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the process is 10096 complete click OK Display GeoModel img in a Viewer to view the resampled orthoimage 277 Orthorectification Calibrate the Image ECIBEEEBEEE e You must have completed the steps to rectify ps napp img on pages 265 through 276 In the Geo Correction Tools click on the Calibrate Image icon A Calibrate Image warning box displays indicating that performing image calibration requires the termination of the Geo Correction Tool and reopening the image in the Viewer Click OK in the Calibrate Image warning box The Geo Correction Tool and all its associated dialogs close The file ps napp img closes and then reopens in the Viewer with the Orient Image to Map System option turned off To apply the calibration to the image in the Viewer redisplay the output image with the Orient Image to Map System option turned on NOTE Once calibrated this image cannot be reused in the orthorectification process using the information coordinates files provided Calibration must be deleted Edit Delete Map Model in the Imagelnfo dialog for this file to be used again f
145. for a reference point the color of the point in the Viewer changes to yellow If you were performing a proper accuracy assessment you would be using ground truth data previously tested maps aerial photos or other data In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select Edit Show Class Values 499 ies Advanced Classification 10 11 12 13 14 15 The class values for the reference points appear in the Class column of the CellArray In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select Report Options The Error Matrix Accuracy Totals and Kappa Statistics checkboxes should be turned on The accuracy assessment report includes all of this information Uem See Chapter 6 Classification of the ERDAS Field Guide for information on the error matrix accuracy totals and Kappa statistics In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select Report Accuracy Report The accuracy assessment report displays in the IMAGINE Text Editor In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select Report Cell Report The accuracy assessment report displays in a second ERDAS IMAGINE Text Editor The report lists the options and windows used in selecting the random points If you like you can save the cell report and accuracy assessment reports to text files Select File Close from the menu bars of both ERDAS IMAGINE Text Editors In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select File Save Table to save the data in the CellArray The data are saved
146. have ERDAS IMAGINE running l Click on the DataPrep icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel gen DataPrep The Data Preparation menu opens Create New Image Create Surface Click here to start ___ Subset Image the Unsupervised Image Geometric Correction Classification utility Mosaic Images Unsupervised Classification Reproject Images Close Help Generate Thematic Raster Layer 1 Select Unsupervised Classification from the Data Preparation menu to perform an unsupervised classification using the ISODATA algorithm The Unsupervised Classification Isodata dialog opens Input Raster File Enter germtm img Input Raster File mg here Jgermtm img 12g Enter germtm isodata img Enter 24 for the here maximum number of times the process runs Enter 10 here to generate 10 classes This should Maximum Iterations Z 7 ie signatures be set to 950 Convergence Threshold 50 fF Gassify zeros Click here to start the process OK Batch Aoi Cancel Help l 2 Click Close in the Data Preparation menu to clear it from the screen 128 ERDAS IMAGINE Choose Processing Options Tour Guides Classification In the Unsupervised Classification dialog under Input Raster File enter germtm img This is the image file that is classified Under Output File enter germtm isodata img in the directory of yo
147. icon Select it as you would an annotation element When a GCP is selected you can drag it to move it to the desired location You can also click on any GCP coordinate in the CellArray to enter new coordinates e To select GCPs in the CellArray click in the Point column or use any of the CellArray selection options in the right mouse button menu right hold in the Point Z column Deleting a GCP To delete a GCP select the GCP in the CellArray in the GCP Tool and then right hold in the Point column to select Delete Selection 144 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Polynomial Rectification Compute Transformation Matrix A transformation matrix is a set of numbers that can be plugged into polynomial equations These numbers are called the transformation coefficients The polynomial equations are used to transform the coordinates from one system to another The Transformation tab in the Polynomial Model Properties dialog shows you a scrolling list of the transformation coefficients arranged in the transformation matrix To access the Polynomial Model Properties dialog and the Transformation tab click the Display Model Properties icon in the Geo Correction Tools El The coefficients are placed in the transform editor in two ways the Transformation tab CellArray is automatically populated when the model is solved in the GCP Tool e using the CellArray located in the GCP tool to enter them directly from the keyboard
148. in the classified image file germtm superclass img Select File Close from the Accuracy Assessment dialog menu bar If you are satisfied with the accuracy of the classification select File Close from the Viewer menu bar If you are not satisfied with the accuracy of the classification you can further analyze the signatures and classes using methods discussed in this tour guide You can also use the thematic raster layer in various ERDAS IMAGINE utilities including the Image Interpreter Raster Editor and Spatial Modeler to modify the file Using the Grouping Tool Setting Up a Class Grouping Project Starting the Class Grouping Tool 500 This section shows you how to use the Class Grouping Tool to assign the classes associated with an Unsupervised Classification and group them into their appropriate target classes This tour is intended to demonstrate several methods for collecting classes not to provide a comprehensive guide to grouping an entire Landsat image In this example we will take a Landsat image that has been classified into 235 classes using the ISODATA and the Maximum Likelihood classifications These 235 classes will be grouped into a more manageable number of Land Use categories ERDAS IMAGINE should be running Copy the file Joudoun maxclass img from the IMAGINE HOME examples directory into a directory in which you have write permission ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification Tassifler 1
149. inverse img compared to the original file Original image File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation Sunak nets MEPISEEEHEEBEEET EA 10 When you are through close all three Viewers by selecting Session Close All Viewers from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar 11 Click Close in the Radiometric Enhance menu NOTE Do not close the Image Interpreter menu as you continue using it in the next section Tour Guides 255 ui Image Interpreter Apply Spectral Enhancement 1 Inthe mage Interpreter menu click on Spectral Enhancement The Spectral Enhancement menu opens Principal Comp Click here to select iS OUR IGT Decco Tasseled Cap Decorrelation Stretch Tasseled Cap RGB to IHS IHS to RGB Indices Hatural Color Close Help In this section you use the following Spectral Enhancement functions e Tasseled Cap e RGB to IHS e HS to RGB e Indices Use Tasseled Cap 1 Inthe Spectral Enhancement menu select Tasseled Cap The Tasseled Cap dialog opens 256 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Image Interpreter fasseled Cap Enter input file here Input File img Output File img j mers dal emmmm A sl From Inquire Box Output Options Ca etch to Unsigned amp bit Coordinate Type subset Definition put o Unsugwui S m Zune pUnmsigeeg 2 hf iv Ignore Zero in Stats Humb
150. layer and resulting image look similar to the following Z Viewer E PEETRE RETE TE M M M MT Fourier Editor TM 1 fft Layer 1 File Edit Mask ajoj mje xfa ej 7 2 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Djaja NE Fourier Transform Editor 236 ERDAS IMAGINE Image Interpreter Introduction Subsetting an Image Tour Guides Image Interpreter is a group of over 50 functions that can be applied at the touch of a button to images with parameters you input Most of the Image Interpreter functions are algorithms constructed as graphical models with Model Maker These algorithms are common enhancements and utilities that have been made easily accessible through the Image Interpreter NOTE Some of these functions are found in other parts of ERDAS IMAGINE but are also listed in Image Interpreter for convenience The models used in Image Interpreter functions can be edited and adapted as needed with Model Maker from Spatial Modeler or the Spatial Modeler Language See the Spatial Modeler section of this manual for a description of the relationship between Spatial Modeler Language Model Maker and Image Interpreter See Chapter 11 Geographic Information Systems of the ERDAS Field Guide for more information on modeling Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 50 minutes Many images used in IMAGINE cover a large area while the actual area being studied ca
151. layer by letting the software identify Unsu pe rvised statistical patterns in the data without using any ground truth data Classification ERDAS IMAGINE uses the ISODATA algorithm to perform an unsupervised classification The ISODATA clustering method uses the minimum spectral distance formula to form clusters It begins with either arbitrary cluster means or means of an existing signature set and each time the clustering repeats the means of these clusters are shifted The new cluster means are used for the next iteration The ISODATA utility repeats the clustering of the image until either a maximum number of iterations has been performed or a maximum percentage of unchanged pixel assignments has been reached between two iterations Tour Guides 483 ui Advanced Classification Preparation Generate Thematic Raster Layer 484 Performing an unsupervised classification is simpler than a supervised classification because the signatures are automatically generated by the ISODATA algorithm In this example you generate a thematic raster layer using the ISODATA algorithm You must have ERDAS IMAGINE running Click on the Classifier icon 255er in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel to start the Classification utility The Classification menu opens Ws Classification X Unsupervised Classification Supervised Classification Click here to start the Unsupervised Threshold Grouping Tool
152. model is set to 0 99 8 Click Close in the Rule Props dialog 9 Click Close in the Variable Props dialog l Inthe Knowledge Engineer dialog click the Run icon or select Evaluate Test Knowledge The Knowledge Classification Test Mode dialog opens on the Select the Classes of Base Interest panel c Knowledge Classification Test Mode SELECT THE CLASSES OF INTEREST Available Classes Harrow Road Hat solid open ground qa shallow solid open ground steep solid open ground 3 Extreme slope no qo Water nn qo soft Ground no go Closed Forest no qo Medium Density Forest slc Open Forestry ga Remove Remove ali Hext Previous Selected Classes Harrow Road Hat solid open ground qa shallow solid open ground steep solid open ground 3 Extreme slope no qo Water nn go soft Ground na go Closed Forest no qo Medium Density Forest slc Open Forestry ga You want to see results for all of the classes therefore you can proceed to the next panel 2 Click the Next button in the Knowledge Classification Test Mode dialog The Select the Input Data for Classification panel opens 591 ui IMAGINE Expert Classifier V 592 SELECT THE IHPUT DATA FOR CLASSIFICATION Variable Value Roads Use the scroll LAYER clayert E ida the ius cet value Y assigned to Info Select road coverage A variables E g roads img J IMA
153. nb Output n1 spots OK Clear Cancel Help 4 Click on the OK button in Function Definition dialog Execute the Model 1 Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar Tour Guides 441 Spatial Modeler View the Results 442 j The model should run to completion without error this time Click on the OK button to dismiss the Job Status dialog The other advantage our model has by properly treating the output of the GLOBAL MAX function as a Table is that it works whether the input image has only a single band or hundreds of bands Remember that with multispectral data the Table generated by the GLOBAL MAX function has an entry for each band representing the maximum value in each band respectively When we multiply a Raster by a Table each band in the Raster is multiplied by the corresponding entry in the Table This allows our model to work on all bands at once without having to loop through each band Click the Viewer icon to open a new Viewer Click the Open icon then navigate to the directory where you saved the file sharp dmtm img 1 Select the file stretched img then click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to open it in the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Eliminate Division by Zero Create the Model Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help OUS IZ 27 md When you are finished click File
154. nf Layers 7 al2 Type Continuous 64 Data Type Unsigned 8 hit Pyramid Layers Absent e Mean 66 643 64 sid Dev 9 515 1 skip Factor Y 1 Last Modified Thu Mar 12 00 14 21 1992 Upper Left x 233085 0 Lower Right X 248415 Pixel Size x 30 0 Unit meters Projection UTM Zone 17 spheroid Clarke 1666 Datum Undefined 5 Look over the information listed in the dialog Upper Left Y 3807070 0 Lower Right Y 3791740 0 Pixel Size v 30 0 Gen Model Man Info The functions in the ImageInfo menu bar in the tool bar are described in the On Line Help Since this is a write protected file none of these values can be changed If you want to practice editing image information with this dialog you can copy anier img to the directory of your choice and change the write protections Then open the writable file in the ImageInfo dialog and click on Edit to use the editing functions 6 Select File Close from the ImageInfo menu bar when you have read the information in the dialog ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER NINE Batch Processing Introduction Tour Guides The ERDAS IMAGIN Batch Wizard allows you to process one or more files with one or more commands at any time from immediately to many years in the future This is useful if you have a process that requires a long time to run and you want to run it when your system is at minimum utilization e g during the night It is also useful if you wish to run a repetitive
155. observer 326 Select Multiple Viewsheds ERDAS IMAGINE Viewshed Analysis An observer marker is automatically placed in the center of the Viewer containing eldodem img 6 Inthe Function tab of the Viewshed dialog click the popup list next to Output Type to select Multiple Viewsheds Add First Observer 1 Click the Observers tab in the Viewshed dialog The Observers tab of the CellArray displays Viewshed 1 linked to Viewer 1 Function Observers Row Show Color X Y ASL AGL Range Azimuth FOY MDCT arrssves aaziorr a7 206100 000 300000 0 00 seo o0 S Save Specify the observer s position in these columns 2 Click in the cell of the X column to enter 471950 88 then press Return on your keyboard 3 Click in the cell of the Y column to enter 442101 1 47 then press Return on your keyboard 4 Click Apply in the Viewshed dialog The viewshed layer is generated and displays in the Viewer Tour Guides 327 Viewshed Analysis File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Senas g s Nalala her The area of the viewshed is marked by acircle Add Another Observer 1 Click Create in the Viewshed dialog A new observer is added to the CellArray Viewshed 1 linked to Viewer 1 Function Observers Row Show Coler x v Ast AGL Range Azimuth FOV EN OO f a o aonar 206100 30 00 sooooo ooo soooja S
156. of 10 00 Therefore the image 1s black except for a small white circle in the center Fourier Editor TM Mfft layer I tell e File Edit Mask a0 uje w nje e 7 220 ERDAS IMAGINE Select a Different Filter Save the File Tour Guides Fourier Transform Editor Removing this much of the layer removes much of the content of the image so you may want to undo this edit and try again Select Edit Undo from the Fourier Editor menu bar The image is restored to its original state Select Mask Filters In the Low High Pass Filter dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Ideal Enter a Radius of 80 00 Click OK in the Low High Pass Filter dialog All frequencies outside the radius of 80 are attenuated and frequencies inside the radius are unaffected The fft layer looks similar to the following example Fourier Editor TM Mffi layer D D File Edit Mask s nl aje Rojee 7 Select File Save As from the Fourier Editor menu bar The Save Layer As dialog opens 221 Fourier Transform Editor Enter a new name for the FFT layer here save as Tft TMiImwpass fft gl J infos ras files Foneda TM 1 fft tour OK Cancel Help 2 Inthe directory of your choice enter a name for the new fft layer such as TM1lowpass fft 3 Click OK to save the file Apply an Inverse Fourier Transformation WY
157. of All Inputs x User defined AOI r Map Senes File msh USGS Maps Database Map Senes Flenamne Cash C Change Output Map Projection Output Cell Size feet x 15 000000 Y 18 000000 F output Data Type unsigned 6 bit K ok Cancel Help 3 Inthe Output Image Options dialog under Define Output Map Area s make sure that Union of All Inputs is selected and click OK Run the Mosaic 1 Inthe Mosaic Tool viewer select Process Run Mosaic The Run Mosaic dialog opens iZ Run Mosaic 04 Output File Mame img Pa Output a E Look Up Tabl Enter the name of C utput a Lommon Look Up T able the output file here D Compress Output to Eompressed dutput File Hame std m y hic Mutputs e All C Selected H Ignore Input Values Output Background Value 5 E Click this check box to activate it er ats note Value Lok Batch Help 3 2 Inthe Run Mosaic dialog under Output File Name enter AirMosaic in the directory of your choice the press Return on your keyboard 302 ERDAS IMAGINE Display the Mosaic Tour Guides Mosaic Click the Stats Ignore Value checkbox to activate it Click OK in the Run Mosaic dialog A Job Status dialog displays showing the progress of the function Click OK when the Job Status dialog reads that the function is 10096 complete NOTE The Job Status dialog may close automatically dependi
158. of Type popup list select MrSID sid Select the high resolution file that overlaps Sample 1 loudoun_highres2 sid and click OK Repeat steps 7 through 16 for each of the Samples Dot Grid Interpretation will overlay a grid of dots on the portion of the high resolution image contained within the Sample You will label these dots so that they correctly identify the underlying features The labeled grid is used to calculate the percentage of the MOI occurring within that portion of the Stratum File ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools Placing the Dot Grid 1 Click Next on the Sampling Wizard The Interpret High Resolution Samples step is opened 2 In the Sample popup list select Sample 1 3 Click the Perform Dot Grid Interpretation icon to open the Dot Grid Tool The Create Dot Grid dialog is opened Mi Create Dot Grid t xX Files Ref Image File ram files imagine 8 5 examples loudoun highresz sid ag Edit existing dot arid file Dot Grid File F taur sampling loudaun tm sample 1 sample 1 do m Use ADI file fw t tour sampling Inudoun tm sample sample 1 ba d Select Fixed Rotation Approach Grid Extent Placement Rotation Select Manual Placement Tile Manual fe Fixe Degrees Automatic Random Enter 30 here Size and Spacing Set Extent and Number of dots compute spacing C Set Number of dots and Spacing compute extent
159. of the Breakpoint Editor and select Red Each of the three histogram graphics in the Breakpoint Editor can be expanded up to full size by selecting the appropriate histogram from the popup menu at the top of the Break Point Editor The parts of the histogram graphic are described in the following illustration 29 ui Viewer Histogram Edit Tools The highest frequency represented The Y axis represents both the frequencies of the histogram and the range of output values for the lookup table The histogram of the J input values white Histogram Source 4 AOI Whole Image Auto Apply does not change Apply To wv AOI Image File 4 Lookup Table Apply All Load Save Close Help The lookup table graph with breakpoints small squares The histogram of the output values red changes as you manipulate the lookup table graph The X axis represents the range of values for 8 bit data the range is O to 255 3 Click on the popup list at the top of the Breakpoint Editor and select RGB All three histograms redisplay in the Breakpoint Editor 4 Experiment by dragging the breakpoints of the lookup table graphs in the different color guns Red Green and Blue 5 Click Apply All in the Breakpoint Editor to view the results of your changes in the image 6 To undo the edits you just made select Raster Undo from the Viewer menu bar Adjust Shift Bias l Inthe Breakpoint Edito
160. option is enabled Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The output mosaic file displays in the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Mosaic File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel 7 Inthe ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Tile Viewers to position the Viewers side by side 8 Compare the input mosaic images in the first Viewer to the output mosaic image in the second Viewer You can resize the Viewers by dragging on any of their corners Viewer 2 wasia mosaic img Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 7 a Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help su 0 ela o gt i w ejapo siwimiulaja sil e Ix sra nl Tour Guides 311 Mosaic Mosaic Color Balancing Using Color Infrared Aerial Photos 312 In this section of the tour guide you mosaic color infrared aerial photograph images of eastern Illinois USA The color red in the photos represents vegetation with deep reds representing healthy vegetation The nine files to be mosaicked are 2 2 img 2 3 img 2 4 img 3 2 img 3 3 img 3 4 img 4 2 img 4 3 img and 4 4 img ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open In the Viewer select File Open Raster Layer or click the Open icon E The Select Layer To Add dialog opens select Layer To Add Files Permissions Raster Options I A Filename imq
161. palette then click the Lock icon a Click three times in the Model Maker viewer to place the two input Raster graphics and the one output Raster graphic Click on the Criteria icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click in the Model Maker viewer to place the criteria graphic between the input and output Raster graphics Click on the Connect icon NS Connect the input Raster graphics to the criteria and the criteria to the output Raster graphic Click the Lock icon to disable the lock tool N Click the Select icon ERDAS IMAGINE Define Input Raster Layers Define Criteria Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Double click the first Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog click on the Open icon under File Name 7 a In the File Name dialog under Filename select the file dmtm img and click OK The File Name dialog opens Click OK in the Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n1_dmtm is written underneath the Raster graphic Double click the second Raster graphic The Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog click on the Open icon under File Name 7 a In the File Name dialog select the file slope img and click OK The File Name dialog opens Click OK in the Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n2 slope is written underneath the Raster graphic Double click the Criteria graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Criteria dialog opens
162. pspaywun iz E E Cen Hew Dpinig x Cancel Me column In the Column Attributes dialog click New to add a new column to the CellArray The options on the right side of the dialog are now enabled so that you can define the parameters of the new column For the column Title enter ZONING Press Return on your keyboard For Type click on the popup list and select Integer ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 10 11 12 13 14 15 Vector Querying and Editing For Precision click on the popup list and select Single For Display Width accept the default of 12 Click OK in the Column Attributes dialog to create the new column The Attributes CellArray now has a new column called ZONING This new column is placed to the right of the last column Click in the header of this new column ZONING to select it The column is highlighted in blue With your cursor in the Record column right hold Row Selection Select All With your cursor in a column header right hold Column Options Import The Import Column Data dialog opens Import From Enter ASCII LI n L file name here bd ras files zone887 zoneB8subset 20deg fft e deg img 2 deg img rrd 2 deg rrd tour i In the Import Column Data dialog enter the name of the ASCII file that you created in the Export Column Data dialog in step 5 i e Zoning dat Click OK The Attribu
163. save the model The Save Model dialog opens 2 Enter a name for the model Be sure you are saving in a directory in which you have write permission Tour Guides 351 Spatial Modeler Run the Model Enhance SPOT Data 352 z Enter the name of the As Graphical Model model here gmd tour_model qmd K i 4 infos ras files zone887 Click OK i OK Cancel Help Click OK in the Save Model dialog You can now run this portion of the model to see if it works correctly In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Run icon or select Process Run from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to run the model El While the model runs a Job Status dialog opens reporting the status of the model When the model is finished click OK in the Job Status dialog To enhance the detail in the SPOT data you run a convolution kernel over it before it is combined with the sensitivity layer This portion of the model includes a Raster input a Matrix input a Function and a Raster output Follow the next series of steps to create this portion of the model in a new Model Maker viewer After you have verified that this portion runs correctly you paste it into the first Model Maker viewer NOTE Refer to the model pictured on page 353 when going through the following steps Click the new Window icon in the Model Maker viewer tool bar or select File New to create a new Model Maker view
164. set up a preference for this feature Select either of the Interactive Zoom icons Position the cursor in the Viewer and hold the middle mouse button Move the mouse forward to zoom in on the image The image magnifies at a constant rate depending on how far forward you move the mouse Hold the middle mouse button and move the mouse backward The image reduces at a constant rate depending on how far downward on the image you move the mouse Tour Guides 19 P Viewer Display Two Images Link Viewers Two or more Viewers can be geographically or spectrally linked so that when you roam in one image that area is simultaneously displayed in the linked Viewer s Types of Linking e Geographically linked the same image area displays in all linked Viewers e Spectrally linked enhancements made to an image are also made in other Viewers if that same image or portions of it are displayed in other Viewers lanier img should be displayed on top of Insoils img in a Viewer window at a magnification of 2 Drag on a lower corner of the Viewer so that it occupies the entire left half of the screen In the Viewer menu bar select View Split Split Horizontal The Viewer is divided in half horizontally to form two Viewers In the tool bar of the new Viewer click the Open icon B In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on the file Insoils img The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click on the Raster
165. showing the scale in different units A scale bar is actually a group of elements that is automatically generated to your specifications In this section place two scale bars in your map composition showing scale in kilometers and miles Then center them under the map frame You can create scale bars only for map frames containing georeferenced data You must have a map composition open and it must contain georeferenced data The Annotation tool palette must also be open To place scale bars select the Scale Bar tool El from the Annotation tool palette Move the cursor into the Map Composer viewer and the cursor changes to the scale bar positioning cursor Drag the mouse to draw a box under the right corner of the map frame in the Map Composer viewer outlining the length and location of the scale bar s You can change the size length and location later if needed When you release the mouse button the Scale Bar Instructions dialog is activated ERDAS IMAGINE Reposition Scale Bars Tour Guides Map Composer Scale Bar instructions i N e T in the mapframe with the scale you want to use for the scale bar Cancel 4 Follow the instructions in the Scale Bar Instructions dialog by clicking in the map frame to indicate that this is the image s scale you are showing The Scale Bar Properties dialog opens Click here and here to select units Representative Fraction Units E Kilometers J
166. signatures are selected then they are all used by default In the Signature Editor menu bar select Classify Supervised to perform a supervised classification NOTE You may also access the Supervised Classification utility from the Classification dialog The Supervised Classification dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Select Attribute Options Tour Guides Click to define attributes Advanced Classification Click to create m efinciclice ie W Supervised Classification E B a distance file hara Output File img iv Output Distance File germtm superclass img Filename img germtm distance img E b Fuzzy Classification Best Classes Per Pixel Click to select Feature Space Attribute Options for sig natures Decision Rules Non parametric Rule Feature Space Enter Overlap Rule Parametric Rule Click germtm_distance img ick to select here Unclassified Rule Parametric Aule Maximum Likelihood Masimum i kelihood Parametric Rule Classify zeros Use Probabilities Click to start the process Batch ADI Cancel Help In the Supervised Classification dialog under Output File type in germtm_superclass img This is the name for the thematic raster layer Click the Output Distance File checkbox to activate it In this example you are creating a distance file that can be used to threshold the classified image file Under Filena
167. table py Select color i Auto Apply eM Qese Breakpoints Help The Contrast Tool This tool enables you to enhance a particular portion of an image by dividing the lookup table into three sections low middle and high You can enhance the contrast or brightness of any section using a single color gun at a time This technique is very useful for enhancing image areas in shadow or other areas of low contrast The brightness value for each range represents the midpoint of the total range of brightness values occupied by that range The contrast value for each range represents the percent of the available output range that particular range occupies As one slider bar is moved the other is automatically adjusted so that there is no gap in the lookup table This tool is set up so that there are always pixels in each data file value from 0 to 255 You can manipulate the percentage of pixels in a particular range but you cannot eliminate a range of data file values 2 With your pointer over the image in the Viewer right hold Quick View Inquire Cursor The Inquire Cursor dialog opens and an Inquire Cursor is placed in the Viewer Tour Guides 27 Viewer Manipulate Histogram 10 Map 24m35 0000 Y 3801670 0000 meters Projection UTM Clarke 1866 10500 m aieiai miee IER In the Viewer drag the intersection of the Inquire Cursor to the lake Move the Inquire Cursor over the wa
168. task many times such as executing the reprojection command to reproject hundreds of images Some of the ERDAS IMAGINE functions that can be included in a Batch job are e classification e rectification e radar processing e Image Interpreter e import export reproject Most of the processing dialogs in ERDAS IMAGINE such as Importers Exporters Image Interpreter functions Data Preparation functions and others have a Batch button This button is used to place the command in the Batch queue instead of actually performing the operation Off line processing allows unattended operation enabling you to log off if you wish The Batch wizard is distributed as part of the IMAGINE Essentials module but can be used with functions from other modules Consequently some portions of this chapter may not compute successfully unless you also have an IMAGINE Advantage license because functions from that module are used in the examples On systems where off line processing is not available the options for processing at a later time are not available On Microsoft Windows NT your account must have administrator privilege to schedule jobs at a later time Approximate completion time for this tour guide varies depending upon the data you select for Batch processing Under Windows NT a job cannot be scheduled beyond the end of the current month 179 ui Batch Processing Set up Start the Task Scheduler on NT and 2000
169. the Select Layer To Add dialog when it opens These assignments can also be changed in the Select Layer To Add dialog for specific files With the Preference Editor still open click on the Category list and select Viewer The Viewer preferences display Drag the scroll bar on the right of the dialog down to see all of the Viewer preferences These preferences control the way the Viewer automatically displays and responds each time it is opened Click on Help in the lower right corner of the dialog The On Line Help for the Preference Editor opens ERDAS IMAGINE View Category Help Tour Guides Viewer 3 Preference Editor Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help daBack gt Q3 2 c Seach XjFavortes history E ce E S Address lE C Frogram FilestMAGIHE 8 e helpihtmlsessioanipreFerence editor htm van inks e Preference Editor This dialog opens when you select Session Preferences from the ERDAS IMAGIME icon panel This is the newer default version of the Preference Editor The older version is still available through the Use Preference Editor Dialog preference under the User Interface amp Session category This dialog can be resized The Preference Editor enables you to set a variety of parameters that affect the way ERDAS IMAGINE runs The Preference Editor allows you to customize IMAGINE for your own use or for everyone at your site How IMAGINE Reads Preference Fil
170. the graphical model Most syntax errors occur in Function definitions In general you generate a script so you can relate the line number given in the error message back to a particular Function object in the model In the Model Maker viewer double click the Function object CONVOLVE Examine the function definition to determine the error In this case you determine the function definition still has an argument prototype kernel that needs to be replaced with an actual argument In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of kernel Under Available Inputs click on n2 Summary Your Function Definition dialog now looks like the following ERDAS IMAGINE Execute the Model Check the Results Tour Guides Spatial Modeler CLUMP layer 4 CLUMP layers 8 COHVOLVE raster kem CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster CORRELATION raster IC The input COVARIANCE raster n2 Summary COVARIANCE raster IGN replaces DELROWS dsctable sie kernel AE COHVOLVE n1 dmtm n2 Summary OK Clear Cancel Help Click OK in the Function Definition dialog Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar j The model should run to completion without error this time Click on the OK button to dismiss the Job Status dialog Click the Viewer icon to open a new Viewer
171. this Canvas Status bar displays single line help 12 Click Close in the Data Preparation menu to clear it from the screen In the Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Add Images icon The Add Images for Mosaic dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE 2 Tour Guides Begin by selecting this file and this radio button Mosaic Wa Add Images for Mosaic X Image Filename img wasial mes img e tm_860516 img TM striped img tm amp tlanta img venezuela img vgis 3l meter img wasial mszs img wasiaz mss imug wasia3 tring A5 tmuecolor sub img 3 examples ka Method Individual File r Image Area Options Select this file second and this file third C Use Entire Image C Template ADI C Individual ADI Click here to add each of the selected files In the Add Images for Mosaic dialog under Image Filename select wasia1_mss img In the Add Images for Mosaic dialog click the Compute Active Area button under Image Area Options to enable it and then click Add The file wasia1_mss img displays as image number 7 in the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer Repeat steps 2 and 3 adding wasia2_mss img and wasia3_tm img to the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer Note that in step 3 the Compute Active Area button is already enabled When you are finished adding the three images the Mosaic Tool viewer should look like the following 307 Mosaic Stack Images Match Images
172. this area of ground with one or more vehicles They need to use the landcover information along with other ancillary data to help determine which areas can be traversed easily and which cannot Methodology Given these data sets we can start to envisage expert rules that are based on these data and data derived from them to determine the ease of crossing a particular area ERDAS IMAGINE must be running l Click the Classifier icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Classitier The Classification menu opens Accuracy Assessment Feature Space Image Click here to start the Feature Space Thematic Knowledge Engineer Knowledge Engineer Close Help Tour Guides 575 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V 2 Click Knowledge Engineer in the Classification menu An empty Knowledge Engineer dialog opens Knowledge Engineer File Edit Evaluate a s eel x t o e wu Hypotheses Rules l Variables Ao Open a Knowledge Next you can open the mobility factors ckb knowledge base to examine what expert rules Base are used and how their components were created 1 Inthe Knowledge Engineer dialog click the Open icon or select File Open The Open Classification Knowledge Base dialog opens 2 Navigate to the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory and select the file mobility factors ckb IMAGINE HOME is the directory where ERDAS IMAGIN
173. this file Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 2 hours 455 Advanced Classification Perform This section shows how the Supervised Classification tools allow you to control the Supervised classification process Classification You perform the following operations in this section e define signatures e evaluate signatures e process a supervised classification Define Signatures The ERDAS IMAGINE Signature Editor allows you to create manage evaluate and edit using Signature signatures sig extension The following types of signatures can be defined Editor e parametric statistical e nonparametric feature space In this section you define the signatures using the following operations e collect signatures from the image to be classified using the area of interest AOI tools e collect signatures from the Feature Space image using the AOI tools and Feature Space tools Preparation ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and a Viewer must be open 1 Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar or click the Open icon on the Viewer tool bar to display the image file to be classified The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Select Layer To Add X File Raster Options Multiple isplay as True Color OF Layers to Colors Cancel Click here to select Low Help Recent Set values to ECCE 4 5 3 i Gnentimage to Map System Goto the raster options
174. this transformation see Chapter 5 Enhancement in the ERDAS Field Guide In the Spectral Enhancement menu select Indices The Indices dialog opens c dices Enter input Input File img Output File img Enter output fle here mme ji mem fle here Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Box Click to select sensor type Click to select this option Function scroll list Function definition displays here for selected function sensor Landsat TM Select Function Data Type FERROUS MINERALS Ddput o nsigned G bit MINERAL COMPOSITE HYDROTHERMAL COMPOSITE Function band 5 7 band 7 band 5 band 4 band 3 7 band 1 Batch AOL Cancel View Help 2 Under Input File enter tmAtlanta img 3 Enter mineral img in the directory of your choice as the Output File 4 Under Select Function click MINERAL COMPOSITE in the scrolling list ie m eich to unsigned 8 bit Zune pUnsigneg 2 hf ka 259 Image Interpreter Choose RGB to IHS 260 This index is a composite of three mineral ratios e Clay minerals band 5 band 7 e Ferrous minerals band 5 band 4 e Tron oxide band 3 band 1 NOTE Notice how the selected function is defined beside the Function label underneath the Select Function scroll list Under Output Options turn on the Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit checkbox by clicking on it Click OK in the Ind
175. through 7 under Run Speckle Suppression Function to apply the Speckle Suppression function iteratively to the output images using the following parameters for passes 2 and 3 Table 20 2 Speckle Suppression Parameters Coef of Coef of Pass Input file Output file V Var ar m m Multiplier 1 loplakebed img despecklel img 0 275 2 despecklel img despeckle2 img 0 195 2 3 despeckle2 img despeckle3 img 0 103 7X7 You MUST enter a new output file name each time you run a speckle suppression filter In this exercise name each pass sequentially e g despeckle1 img despeckle2 img despeckle3 img etc Tour Guides 605 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V Use Histograms to Evaluate Images 606 Speckle Suppression Filters The Speckle Suppression filters can be used repeatedly in as many passes as needed Similarly there is no reason why successive passes must be done with the same filter The following filtering sequence might be useful prior to a classification Table 20 3 Filtering Sequence pie Sigm Sigma Filter S a Multipli Window Value er NA 3x3 NA 5x5 Local Region 3 NA NA 7X 7or9 x9 Next the ImageInfo method of histogram display is explained Histograms Viewing the histograms of an image is often helpful in determining the need for filtering the type of filter to use and the results of filtering You can see a histogram of an image through e Tool
176. to Water and then press the Return key on the keyboard In the Raster Attribute Editor hold on the Color patch for Water Select Blue from the popup list After you are finished analyzing this class click Cancel in the Viewer Flicker dialog and set the Opacity for Water back to 0 Press the Return key on the keyboard Change the Color for Class 2 in the CellArray to Yellow for better visibility in the Viewer Change the Opacity for Class 2to 1 and press the Return key on the keyboard This class is shown in the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Utility Flicker to analyze which pixels were assigned to this class The Viewer Flicker dialog opens Turn on the Auto Mode in the Viewer Flicker dialog The flashing red pixels in the germtm img file should be the pixels of this class These are forest areas In the Raster Attribute Editor click inside the Class Names column for Class 2 You may need to double click in the column Change this name to Forest then press the Return key on the keyboard In the Raster Attribute Editor hold on the Color patch for Forest and select Pink from the popup list ERDAS IMAGINE Use Thresholding Preparation Tour Guides 10 Advanced Classification After you are finished analyzing this class click Cancel in the Viewer Flicker dialog and set the Opacity for Forest back to 0 Press the Return key on the keyboard Repeat these steps with each class so that you can see how the
177. tolerance can be calculated using this formula scale of inches per coverage unit 0 002 For example an input source map at a scale of 1 600 with coverage units in feet would have a fuzzy tolerance of 1 52 X 0 002 0 1 The dangle length value is based on the length in map units of the longest overshoot that exists in the coverage The value specified removes any dangling lines that are less than or equal to the value you specify Any lines longer than the length specified remain in the coverage To measure the dangle length needed for your coverage you can use the Measurement Tool to measure lines in the coverage Click OK in the Clean Vector Layer dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the clean is completed click OK in the Job Status dialog unless your Preferences are set to clear the Job Status dialog upon job completion ERDAS IMAGINE Index Tour Guides Index Symbols gen file generic data 175 preview img file import preview 163 sig file signature file 456 Numerics 3D Surfacing dialog 282 3X3 Edge Detect 247 3X3 Edge Detect dialog 248 A Accuracy assessment 496 Accuracy Assessment dialog 496 Add Image icon 61 Add Images for Mosaic dialog 294 Add intermediate hypothesis 566 Add Random Points dialog 498 Affine Model Properties dialog 150 Air photo images 289 AIRSAR 623 Animated Zoom 18 Annotation 69 borders 69 color 69 desele
178. tool from the Vector tools palette 5 12 To begin digitizing the field below the original polygon left click inside of the existing polygon Continue to left click to add vertices until you have digitized the entire field Your line should end up within the same polygon in which you started and look like this 13 Double click to close the polygon The new polygon should look like this 14 Again note that the columns in the Vector Attributes Table update to show the area and perimeter of the new polygon Hle Edit View 2191738 358 7 87 280 1 2183787 270 8258 783 1 A727212 304 11608438 8 118 ERDAS IMAGINE Vector Querying and Editing 15 Next you will reshape this polygon so that it contains more of the field To do this you will need to select the Replace Polygon tool from the Vector tools palette Es 16 Again start your digitizing by left clicking inside of the polygon you want to reshape Continue left clicking to add vertices to the polygon Your line should end up within the same polygon in which you started and look similar to this 17 Double click inside of the starting polygon to reshape the existing polygon to include the newly digitized area Your new polygon should look like this 18 The Area and Perimeter values in the Vector Attributes table reflect the dimensions of the polygon Hle Edit View 2191738 358 7 87 280 1 2183787 270 8258 783 1 10518788 372 1515
179. ul I Ta 4 P7 z gt 7991 36 34 522336 90 State Plane Clarke 1666 Now you can take the file germtm tif and create a world file using the Image Command Tool Start the Image Command Tool 1 From the Tools menu of ERDAS IMAGINE select Image Command Tool Image File immg mE Changes Raster Pypo contnueus Cumis MERIH RIS ODE Cunumdis PuPAHHO Layers OBBHUS Dems PurAHHO Layers Cines Map BIDS OBIBHUS DOsmeis Map fone Bg PRHIG io Warki PUE Cans Map PUDIBCODH Options DHT Renal PANES Ti OK Paich Cancel Help a IE Ir E a E a a 2 Inthe Image Commands dialog click the Open icon ul 156 ERDAS IMAGINE Image Commands The Image File dialog opens Files Permissions Select the file Filename tif Directory k germtm tif fusridata _Recent germtm tif f usri t data File Type rF e i truecolor 1024 Rows x 1024 Columns x 6 Bandis c HU 3 Navigate to the directory in which you saved the file and select the file germtm tif 4 Click OK in the Image File dialog to transfer the information to the Image Commands dialog The Image Commands dialog updates accordingly and the Map Model to World option is activated The Image File displays i this window 1 Change Raster Type contnueus jw _ Compute Statistics plans Compute Pyramid Layers Oplians 1 Delete Py
180. you can import data from a peripheral device such as a tape drive or a CD ROM drive you must configure the device in ERDAS IMAGINE ae Refer to the current ERDAS IMAGINE Installation Guide for configuration instructions This section takes you through the steps to import SPOT data Since each individual has different types of SPOT data these steps are only an example If your Session Log is not already open select Session Session Log from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The Session Log displays real time messages about what is happening throughout the import process Following these messages closely helps you understand what is happening Click on the Import icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Import 159 Import Export The Import Export dialog opens Select Import 2 L Click here to or Export here Import Export see alist of data types l Type sPoT Default file extension is Media cD ROM shown in Input CDROM Output File img Click here parentheses Luxe toselect media Click here to ddesktophost EN select configured Srt J j Filename part input device hhi Enter the output imagine8307 directory and file imaginen name here Click to see kswanson the raw data values Directory bar of the input file s Cose M Data view Help Olick on this o Popup list to change directories The Import button is enabled when the dialog first op
181. you how to set up a Sampling Project and how the project manager allows you to manage and track the files used in the Frame Sampling process You perform the following operations in this section e Create a Sampling Project e Assign the Project Files e Recode the Grouped File e Create a Sampling Grid e Select the Samples for Interpretation e Use the Dot Grid Tool to Label the Samples e Compute the Final Analysis and Fraction Files ERDAS IMAGINE must be running The first step in the Frame Sampling process is to create the sampling project E TT Tassifler Click on the Classifier icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel The Classification menu displays ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools wa Classification x LInsuperviged Classification Supervised Classification Threshold Fuzzy Convolution Grouping Tool Click here to open Accuracy Assessment the Frame Sampling Tools menu Feature Space Image Feature Space Thematic Knawledge Classifier Knawledge Engineer Frame Sampling Tools Spectral Analysis Grid Generation Sample Selection Dot Grid Analysis Poligon Analysis Click here to open the Project Manager 3 Click the Project Manager button on the Frame Sampling Tools menu The Open Create a Sampling Project dialog opens W Open Create a Sampling Project Click here t
182. your changes Double click on the text string you just edited The Text Properties dialog opens which allows you to edit position and align the text 2 Name Element_349 ee Edit text Text string here Environmental Sensitivity Analysis Keyboard Enter text Position Alignment Specify string X Y horizontal position here EM and vertical alignment Center here Bottom Angle 0 000000 Units Radians Wi Horizontal F Type Paper i z Units Points 4 size 20 00 In the Text Properties dialog under Position drag across the X value to select it Type 7 5 2 to calculate the center of the map Press Return The value 3 75 is returned Change the Y value to 9 5 and press Return on the keyboard Under Alignment the Vertical default should be Bottom Click the Center radio button under Horizontal This indicates that position 3 75 x 9 5 that you just entered is to be the bottom center of the text string Click Apply in the Text Properties dialog to center the text Click Close in the Text Properties dialog Deselect the text by clicking elsewhere in the background of the Map Composer viewer 87 P Map Composer Place a North Arrow Map Composer contains many symbols including north arrows These symbols are predrawn groups of elements that are stored in a library Other symbols include school church marsh landmark and many others You must have a map composition and t
183. 000 1 7177108 24264 061 e4u 814 2530 p 2 l _3 __2 __3 i18 UJ 12 Create a New Table 1 Inthe Table Tool click on the New icon n A second Table Tool displays The new Table Tool CellArray is blank 2 Inthe new Table Tool select File New The Create New Table dialog opens 632 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Enter the directory path Info Directory Path Current Column List SERRE New Table to Create name here Enter the new table name here Click here to update the Table Tool Dismiss IMAGINE Vector Current columns are displayed here Click here to add a new column 3 Inthe Create New Table dialog enter the name of an Info Directory Path in which you have write permission or click on the Open icon to select the directory to put the new table in The table list for the path you selected displays in the Create New Table dialog 4 Inthe Create New Table dialog under New Table to Create enter the name ZONE88 NEW PAT and then click Add The New Column dialog opens Column Hame ZONE88 ID After Column NONE EXISTS ui Column Type integer m Annal Click here to add boni VAGUE fe the new column to the column listin Display with a fF the Create New r D emend Dechnab Places Table dialog Enter the new column name here Click here to select the column type 5 Inthe New Column di
184. 1 313 3 38534 253U af 90694 250 e47531 531 3 38854 23U 3 g88234 25 47660 6093 3790056 750 37980056 73 ed 585 353 3790962 000 3798562 00 eA 584 353 3f38423 223U afga4d23 25 eA 715 034 3fga221 75 3fg8221 75 3fga2z2a 23 eA 570 213 af 90694 000 3 38534 Ul 11 If you like you can save these points as a Point Coverage arcinfo or an Annotation Layer ovr by selecting File Save As from the 3D Surfacing dialog menu bar Perform Surfacing l Inthe 3D Surfacing dialog click the Perform Surfacing icon 5 The Surfacing dialog opens The extent and cell size defaults are filled in automatically based on the source ASCII file Tour Guides 285 Terrain Surface Interpolation Display the Surface 286 X Output File ima Surfacing Method surface img Lae Non linear Rubber Sheeting Enter the path P Output Information and name of the output file here Columns 511 Rowe 512 Cell Size x 30 000000 Cell Sizer 30 000000 B v Make Cells Square Output Corners 233100 000000 E LR 240405 959375 E The information in these fields is automatically Click here to select the surfacing method Click to enable ner AIL 3807073 000000 LF r 3731755 000000 generated d Fa this checkbox Background 00000 igrae Zero in tuu Stats v Output Data Type Unsigned 16 bit Click OK to run Contour Map optional the Surfacing program gt Create a Eo
185. 21 1999 15 10 23 reprojectprocess complete 10 21 1999 15 10 23 vol products imagine ver RMS error 0 124794 pixels with polynomial ord Resampling image vol atlanta root imagine ex Computing stats of usr data lnaspect reproj 10 21 1999 15 10 35 reprojectprocess complete 10 21 1999 15 10 35 vol products imagine ver IRMS error 0 124794 pixels with polynomial ord Resampling image vol atlanta root imagine ex Computing stats of usr data lndem reproj img 10 21 1999 15 10 44 reprojectprocess complete 10 21 1999 15 10 44 vol products imagine ver RMS error 0 124794 pixels with polynomial ord Resampling image vol atlanta root imagine ex Computing stats of usr data lnhydro reproj i 10 21 1999 15 10 53 reprojectprocess complete 10 21 1999 15 10 53 vol products imagine ver RMS error 0 124794 pixels with polynomial ord Resampling image vol atlanta root imagine ex Execute Multi p e This procedure is most useful for very complex operations on multiple files involving many Files Multiple commands where the output from one command becomes the input to a succeeding command Commands In the following example you are going to perform three operations on each of the Lake Lanier related files in the ERDAS IMAGINE examples directory v It is important to note that some processes depend upon the physical extents of the imagery or the number of bands or data types etc You must be aware of both the requirements o
186. 211 in the Inquire Type Man _ units feet BOX aalo Snap to Raster Box Color g apply Fittoaor cose Help Click on the Snap to Raster checkbox to uncheck this option This will tell the Subset function to use the exact coordinates you enter for the Inquire Box Enter the following coordinates into the Inquire Box dialog ULX 1698385 570 ULY 288632 691217 LRX 1702282 557434 LRY 284900 708704 Click Apply on the Inquire Box dialog The Inquire Box moves to the new coordinates ERDAS IMAGINE Image Interpreter 6 Usethe Zoom Tool to zoom in on the Area of Interest The image in your Viewer should look something like this Note that the corners of the Inquire Box are not snapped to the pixel centers Subsetting an Image Without Snapping 1 Click on the Interpreter icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Interpreter The Image Interpreter menu opens Each of the buttons in the Image Interpreter menu displays a submenu of Image Interpreter functions Tour Guides 239 ui Image Interpreter if Spatial Enhancement displayanother dialog Radiometric Enhancement with additional spectral Enhancement options Hyperspectral Tools ES Image mterpreter 3 that these butor 47 that these buttons Fourier Analysis Topographic Analysis GIS Analysis Utilities Click here to see an On Line Help file descri
187. 3 351 19 Click File Close from the Viewer menu bar When asked if you would like to save your changes click Yes The Attributes dialog automatically closes Tour Guides 119 ies Vector Querying and Editing Open a Personal Geodatabase 1 Ina new viewer click the Open Layer button and select ArcGIS Geodatabase gdb from the pull down menu in Files of Type 2 Click on the Connect button that appears in the Select Layer To Add dialog to connect to the geodatabase Select Layer To Add E x File Vector Options Look in E examples Ht OF J anutimelib ZA info Cancel lib3ds 1 1 0 Help arthobase _ panorama E Textures Recent 1 virtualais 7 zane88 Goto C LocalFile island arc gdb Connect File name Files af type ArcGIS Geodatabase gdb m E Rhode Island A National mdb Mame National mdb Add Show of type Feature classes Cancel 3 Select the directory where your personal geodatabase is stored Select the mdb file you wish to use and click Add 4 Thelist of feature datasets appears in the dialog Select the dataset you wish to use and click Add 120 ERDAS IMAGINE Vector Querying and Editing Select GeoDatabase Feature Class to Add M ame W erldContainer Add Show of type Feature classes Cancel 5 Next a list of feature classes will appear Choose the one you want to add and click Add Selec
188. 438 projection xo une Lower Right X 1732436 25155987 Lower Right Y 257911 96885121 information File Pixel Size X 81 00000007 Pixel Size Y 81 00000007 Unit feet Gen Model Man Info Genreferenced to State Plane Projection Info Stern inne Pare Daium Note the information in the Map Info section and that the Projection Info section shows that the map is georeferenced to State Plane When you are finished click File Close in the ImageInfo dialog Click File Close in the Viewer containing dmtm1 tif In this section you import the anier lan file that you just exported This file could be imported using the ERDAS 7 x LAN import function However you are using this file to learn how the Generic Binary Data dialog works This function is designed for importing data types for which there are currently no specific ERDAS IMAGINE importers In the Import Export dialog click on Import Click on the Type popup list and select Generic Binary Select File from the Media popup list Under Input File select lanier lan Change directories if needed by clicking on the directory bar 171 Import Export Data View 172 ERDAS IMAGINE J automatically i LE enters this Import Export output file Type Generic Bin Fu name with Ines ary ri img extension Media Hie i Input File Output File img mes lai mmmm a E NETED Paine Stuff gt ane Stuff j select input file
189. 5 Output N mp Type Auto i Pattem fusridata Input root imagez sat W Delete Before Processing Delete After Processing Use the Set button to edit the replacement Hew Delete iig pattern and give the Output a different Close lt Back Next gt Pis Help name Notice that the Output variable as well as the Tempf1 variable described above are of the Type Auto This means the software is responsible for creating the file names that are substituted for the variables at run time Tour Guides 199 Batch Processing Select Input Files 200 By default the software uses the output directory that you specified in step 2 under Execute Multiple Files Multiple Commands on page 196 For the file name it uses a combination of the root name of the input file and the last specified output file in this example mage2 Click the Set button Click in the Pattern window and edit the text string to change mage2 to inverse and then click OK Templates variable BandCount variable function CellHeight Cell Width ColumnCount f DataType Change this portion of the Ext Pattern to the new name inverse FileBottom FileLeft NOTE If your input files have the same root name e g 03807701 nec 03807701 nwc change Input root to Input name in the Pattern window This includes the extension and thus preserves the uniqueness of the file name Click
190. 512 00000024 00000040 00000056 00000072 l 00000088 Data field 00000104 40768 displays 100000120 17988 actual data 00000136 16704 values B00000152 16194 5 Inthe DataView dialog click on Data Type and select Unsigned 32 bit 6 Inthe DataView dialog click on Byte Order and select Intel Tour Guides 173 Import Export Enter Image Dimensions 174 7 Setthe Offset to 16 and check that the Format is Decimal The DataView dialog is updated Unsigned 32 bit data is selected because the number of columns and rows are four bytes each Number of columns Number of rows Tape File Structure p F Record il Record Size s F Offset e fF Jj Sete Scan 00000064 100000080 00000096 1100000112 00000128 100000144 00000160 Hle fnetimorticiafexportfarray 1 docs docs tourfanier lan Size 18325520 Bytes Last Modified Mon Sep 27 14 13 33 1999 D 0 1214468364 1296713264 1094992192 1111703362 c DafaView netimorticialexport arravi docsitiocsitourllanier lan Offset equals 16 because number of columns begins in byte 17 0 1248353656 1330795065 1145324354 1145653315 Data Type Unsigned 32 bit a Format Decimal _ Byte Order intel 00000016 1C 00000032 e 100000048 1106247660 1179076941 1128264997 1094861635 1 In the Import Generic Binary Data dialog next to File Header Bytes enter 128 This is the nu
191. 590 Since you cannot immediately identify roads over water you must instead look at roads in close proximity to water This could be done by buffering performing a Search function on the roads and overlaying this with the location of water pixels However many roads simply run alongside lakes or rivers and do not necessarily therefore constitute a choke hazard Instead it is better to identify roads that occur in close proximity to at least two discrete water bodies i e one on either side of the bridge Therefore identify bridges gmd first identifies all water pixels from the landcover classification These locations are fed into two processes The first finds all locations that are in close proximity to water by using a 5 x 5 circular moving window These are then overlain with road locations from Roads and Terrain Categorization variables to identify roads in close proximity to water At the same time the water pixels are run through a Clump process to produce uniquely numbered discrete water bodies A Focal Diversity function is then used at each location determined to be a road in close proximity to water to determine how many of these discrete water bodies are close by If more than two water bodies are identified then that road is flagged as being a potential bridge or other choke point This information is then used in the Bridges landings Choke Point expert rule This provides a clear example of how the IMAGINE Expert Classifie
192. 611 Sensor Merge 611 Slant Range Adjustment 622 Speckle Suppression 599 Wallis Adaptive Filter 611 Import binary data 171 column data 113 decimated image 162 generic data 171 Landsat TM 162 SPOT data 159 subset 164 Import Column Data dialog 113 Import Generic Binary Data dialog 172 Import icon 159 629 Import Options dialog 163 283 Import SPOT dialog 160 Import Export dialog 160 165 621 623 Index 259 Indices dialog 259 Input icon 296 Input Slope Layer 342 Inquire Box Coordinates dialog 164 345 Inquire Color dialog 11 Inquire Cursor 150 style 11 Inquire Cursor dialog 10 27 150 463 Inquire Shape dialog 12 Interpolate dialog 34 Intersection icon 297 Inverse Fourier Transform dialog 222 ISODATA 127 483 661 Index 662 J Jeffries Matusita 477 JERS 1 623 Job Status dialog 162 248 303 309 321 465 630 K Kernel 247 CellArray 248 library 247 Keyboard shortcut 7 Knowledge Base test 570 Knowledge Base Editor dialog 560 Knowledge engineer 559 add hypothesis 560 add intermediate hypothesis 566 ANDing criteria 583 copy and edit rules conditions 568 enter rules for hypothesis 562 enter variable for rule 563 graphic model option 579 pathway feedback 594 prompt analyst 592 set up output classes 559 test knowledge base 570 use with spatial logic 585 L Label point 100 LANDSAT images 304 Legend 84 columns 85 position 84 85 specify contents 85 Legend Properties dialog 84 Level of Detail 324
193. 9 ha Stationarity Stratum 6 0 00 B EoL 3 m8 0 00s 0 0 ha Stratum 37X 36 0 293 7 ha 100 00 293 7 ha Stratum 8 0 63 15 8 57 1 ha 100 00 57 1 ha Stratum 3 40x 3g 538 2 ha 50 00 2690 1 ha Stratum 10 0 48 25 6 149 2 ha 1080 00 143 2 P 4 F The Final Analysis Report gives a wealth of information about the Sampling project up to this point It can indicate which of the strata are undersampled and which of the strata lack stationarity Both of these issues must be addressed to achieve an accurate estimation of the land covered by the MOI Frame Sampling Tools Two Analysis Problems Stationarity and Undersampling The first few iterations of any Frame Sampling project serve mainly to reveal where the project breaks down The Final Analysis Report reveals two of the biggest stumbling blocks for any project stationarity and undersampling Stationarity Stationarity or Spatial Stationarity is the measure of the MOI consistency in each stratum A low Stationarity value means that the stratum reported relatively consistent MOI content percentages during the resampling iterations Undersampled strata Not every stratum will be include areas that are sampled with high resolution imagery and some of those strata that are included will only have a very small percentage of the actual area that is sampled not enough to make an accurate estimate of the MOI These areas are said to be Undersampled Resolving the Problems There a
194. AGINE Expert Classifier V Ei The Knowledge Classification dialog opens in Test Mode at the SELECT THE CLASSES OF INTEREST panel along with a new Viewer where the test classification is displayed AII active enabled classes are selected by default c Knowledge Classification fest Mode TOE LEAR IL Classes are SELECT THE CLASSES OF INTEREST Residential and Available Classes Selected Classes Commercial Residential Residential Services Commerical Services Commerical Services Add All Remove Remove All 2 Leave the two classes Residential and Commercial Services selected in the Selected Classes section of the Knowledge Classification dialog 3 Click Next to go to the next panel of the Knowledge Classification dialog If the Prompt User option had been selected instead of entering file names for the variables an intermediate panel SELECT THE INPUT DATA FOR CLASSIFICATION would appear here to allow entry of file names The Select Classification Output Options panel allows you to set the number of best classes per pixel set an output area and set an output cell size The defaults are used here since you only have two classes and small images that are the same size and have the same cell size Also note the grayed out options for Output Classified Image Output Confidence Image and Output Feedback Image These images are made temporary files in Test Mode but can be selected as output files when running
195. Apply and then Close in the Arrange Layers dialog The file lanier img is redisplayed in the Viewer without the AOI layer When images are displayed in ERDAS IMAGINE a linear contrast stretch is applied to the data file values but you can further enhance the image using a variety of techniques The file lanier img should be displayed in a Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Raster Contrast Brightness Contrast The Contrast Tool dialog opens Adjust brightness here Click here to reset to original Adjust contrast contrast here Click here or here to apply changes In the Contrast Tool dialog change the numbers and or use the slider bars to adjust the image brightness and contrast Click Apply The image in the Viewer is redisplayed with new brightness values Click Reset and Apply in the Contrast Tool dialog to undo any changes made to the Viewer image Click Close in the Contrast Tool dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer Use Piecewise Linear Stretches 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select Raster Contrast Piecewise Contrast The Contrast Tool dialog for piecewise contrast opens oa Contrast Tool For lanier img Adjust contrast and brightness here Qr 100 Range specifications Specify range 4 tow From E To of lookup table aoe is to modify here v Middle From 37 jr To v High From z E To Set lookup l table ranges i Click here to reset here aw to the original lookup
196. C Program Files IMAGINE 8 5shelpshardcopy s SML pdf Microsoft Internet Explorer i l l ES iS mi x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help EJ Bak gt 2 a Gisearch Favorites c j History E ct E Address lE C Program Files IMAGINE 5 5 helpihardcopy SML pdf Go Links MNiCAS BSS Bli gt oles ARR eds BOB Bookmarks Symbnails icles XR a El Section Introduction to Sh A i Section II SML Function Sy gt H Function Types Arithmetic peL Modeler Function Cate T H Analysis Addition Edy Arithmetic um L Addition Subtraction Subtraction m Negation m Multiplication Neg T Division j cds A MOD Modulus yi Multiplication bel HFactorian b amp Bitwise Division Boolean HL Calor MOD Modulus H Conditional H Data Generation Factorial tt Descriptor H Distance H Exponential Focal Scar For more information see standard Rules H Global Matrix x Ja ae iem 4 22553224 FIA E 4 ipu You can use DE C O gee the mee eres to adjust the zoom l toa Comoros reading level Click here to link 438 to the Standard Rules page 5 After reading the topic click on the hyperlink to open the Standard Rules page The Standard Rules for Combining Different Types topic displays 6 Scroll down to the Object Types section While this section contains some very useful information it gives no i
197. C Set Spacing and Extent compute number of dots Square Extent of dot grid ann ES amp Units ann y units Dat Caunt Number of Dots 15 columns 15 ES rows 225 Dot Spacing en n Lits f o o0 y upita All units in meters camel Heb 4 Inthe Approach group select the Manual Placement radio button This will have the program randomly place the Dot Grid within the Sample 5 Select the Fixed Rotation radio button Enter 30 in the Fixed Rotation number field 6 Click OK The high resolution image displays in the Dot Grid Tool An AOI is placed in the image to demarcate the boundary of the Sample A square indicates the location of the Dot Grid Tour Guides 543 Frame Sampling Tools ul 544 AO marking the Sample Boundary Square indicating the Dot Grid location iZ vot arid Tool aT File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation Dot Grid Help oH M AXIQGQ EG BS f gm i T ar P ia z 3E Ld cs d n Rm n wo wf eid hd Re E ua aa yy Sat A s ud i a s B Double click inside the square to create the Dot Grid ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools Dot Grid Tool W Dot Grid Tool R8 ni xj File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation Dot Grid Help Gg 9 xk ee O f mA GHL 4 P 4 A hs id 5 OP aS wi ike a ye Nag US S s Pa S a D i s LL P s ou s Dot Grid Overview Main View Zoom View 34 cm Rd G
198. Cancel in the Area Definition dialog The Graphical Query viewer redisplays the view you saved as USA bbox Hle Edit View MESES 2 CERE DEI VUE Vis aan SIRE ICA NAS SOK AS e quic Archive Data The following steps detail how data are archived You must have a non rewinding tape device already configured in order to archive data Select the image in the Viewer by clicking on its Record number in the Image Catalog The file is highlighted in yellow ERDAS IMAGINE Image Catalog i 2 Inthe Image Catalog select File Archive or click on the Archive icon in the tool bar The Archive dialog opens Image S IMAGINE HOME sexamplessfeldoatm img size 744210 bytes Click here to Space Available 000000 set up the tape x Assist archive Tape Selection Log New Tape in Database Media Type tape 8mm i Click here to F e Count select the media type Enter the location of the tape here Follow steps 3 through 6 for initial setup only In the Archive dialog click Log New Tape in Database to set up the tape to be used Click on the Media Type popup list and select either tape 8mm or tape exabyte Enter the Location of the tape This is simply a note to yourself indicating where you store the tape or which tape you are using e g top shelf or tape 16 Click Log Tape in Database to add this tape to the list of available tapes A message displays with the identification number th
199. Classes W Class Grouping Tool iol x Menu Bar File Edit Colors Groups Targets Tools Help tes EJ ED God m Tool Bars id Selection le e c T 2l Class Ww E T Histogram Working Group CellArray 4 Similarity Conflict Class Groups Load Save Row Group Mame ttClasses Save As New Group Class Groups CellArray Target Classes Setup Target Classes is Fini Value Color Click Here to Set up the Target Classes Class Name Hiro Target Classes CellArray l Click the Setup Target Classes button above the Target Classes CellArray the Edit Target Classes dialog opens Wa Edit Target Classes Target Class Mame Target Classes Add gt Remove z Cancel Help 2 Place the Cursor in the Target Class Name field and type Water Click the Add gt button Water now appears in the list of Target Classes Add Agriculture Forest and Urban classes Y ou may add as many additional classes as you wish 502 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Advanced Classification Once you have finished adding Target Classes click the OK button on the Edit Target Classes dialog NOTE You may return to this dialog and add more Target Classes at any point during the Grouping process The Target Classes you have added appear in the Target Classes CellArray Click here to change the He e Target Color Water PT o pehmiutue L4 1
200. Click on the Classifier icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel The Classification menu displays wa Classification x Unsupervised Classification Supervised Classification Threshold Click here to start the Reg Gants Sut rte Grouping Tool MR Grouping T aal Accuracy Assessment Feature Space Image Feature Space Thematic Knawledge Classifier Knawledge Engineer Frame Sampling T aal Spectral Analysis 2 Select Grouping Tool from the Classification menu to start the Signature Editor The Select image to group dialog opens 3 Browse to the directory into which you copied the file loudoun_maxclass img Select it from the list of files and click OK The Class Grouping Tool and a Viewer displaying the selected image file open 4 Toview the entire image right click in the Viewer and select Fit Image to Window from the Quick View menu Class Grouping Tool Terminology Classes are individual clusters of pixels with similar spectral characteristics These clusters are the result of the unsupervised classification Target Classes are the final landuse or landcover categories for which you are interpreting Class Groups are the saved groups of classes that represent a single target class Working Groups are composed of the currently selected classes which are highlighted in the Viewer Tour Guides 501 Advanced Classification Set Up the Target
201. E menu bar 2 Select File Open from the ImageInfo menu bar or click the Open icon on the tool bar ry The Image Files dialog opens This dialog allows you to select a file for which information is displayed in the ImageInfo dialog Image Files Files Permissions Filename imq Directory genmim imtg hardcopy data img t vul hyvperspectral img atlantaJ Select intensity img C root i landcover img imagine lanier img examples lanier home img bldqs infos al i lanier dms File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 312 Rows x a12 Columns x 7 Bandis 3 Under Filename select lanier img 4 Click OK in the Image Files dialog The information for lanier img displays in the ImageInfo dialog Tour Guides 177 Import Export 178 Menu bar Tool bar Click on this popup list to select the layer for which to display info Map and Projection Info display only for georeferenced data Using Imagelnfo is a good way to find out if an image is georeferenced Status bar displays single line help File Edit View aloja za t Y fee vui sn gram Pixel data File History Hle Info Layer Info Statistics Info Hle Projection Info Layer Hame Last Modified Width Block Width Compression Hin Median Layer 1 Thu Mar 12 00 14 16 1992 al2 Height 64 Block Height Hone ac Max 66 Mode skip Factor x Humber
202. E resides on your system 3 Click OK in the Open Classification Knowledge Base dialog to load the file The knowledge base of mobility factors opens 576 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Hle Edit Evaluate ajala AA Tae eee Major Road em Highway category em Minor Road Narrow Road Flat solid open ground Hat solid open ground qa solid open ground shallow solid open ground 6 steep solid open ground Sic Extreme slope no qo Water nn nn Examine the This knowledge base was created by defining as many of the variables as would be needed as Knowledge Base possible For example roads are going to be the easiest areas to traverse so a variable was needed to define where roads are that can be used 1 Inthe Knowledge Engineer dialog click on the Variables tab The variables for the mobility factors ckb knowledge base display Double click the Hypotheses Rules Variables Roads variable to see its properties m T Terrain Categorization slope from model DEM Tree Density model Aerial Photo Identify possible bridges model 2 Inthe Variables list double click the Roads variable The Variable Props dialog opens Tour Guides 577 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Derive Slope Values 578 The Variable Variable Name Optional Type is Raster i Variable Type Raster Wi Data Type Integer iW Raster Variable Options Raster Variable Options are set to Sel
203. EC RR LE E Rotate Angle zs 00 E Initialize Positive Rotation Direction Reflect Options Counter Clockwise Clockwise R H B Y pm ER ds Select one of the direction these options to rotate 7 to flip images 4 Change the Rotate Angle to 25 5 Select the desired Reflect Option in the Affine Model Properties dialog then click Apply and Close 6 Click on the Resample icon in the Geo Correction Tools ERDAS IMAGINE Check Results Tour Guides The Resample dialog opens Enter file name Hesample for the new Output File img Resample Method georeferenced al Bilinear Interpolation image file Output Map Information Projection Unknown Polynomial Rectification Click here to select the Bilinear Interpolation resampling method Click here to exclude zero file values in statistics for output file other Output map Humber rows 213 Humber columns 312 projection is Unknown Output Comers Output Cell sizes Recalculate Output Defaults sd W Ignore Zero in Stats OK Batch Cancel Help 7 Inthe Resample dialog under Output File enter the name tmAtlanta rotate img 8 Under Resample Method click the popup list and select Bilinear Interpolation 9 Click gnore Zero in Stats so that pixels with zero file values are excluded when statistics are calculated for the output file 10 Click OK in the Resample dialog to start the resampling pr
204. ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides ERDAS IMAGINE 8 6 v A 5 j ah oi P z s E E F e PE us a x 1 1 amc SR S d hh 1 Jur Wan ii Ww d E p f ge uu Xe stoke D ym Lo a s P Mihi s Copyright 1991 2002 by ERDAS LLC All Rights Reserved ERDAS Proprietary Delivered under license agreement Copying and disclosure prohibited without express written permission from ERDAS LLC Leica Geosystems GIS amp Mapping Division 2801 Buford Highway NE Atlanta Georgia 30329 2137 USA www gis leica geosystems com Toll Free 877 463 7327 Phone 404 248 9000 Fax 404 248 9400 User Support 404 248 9777 Acknowledgments ERDAS would like to extend our thanks to the following data providers U S Geological Survey EROS Data Center Sioux Falls SD City of Oxford OH GeoOne Inc ESA EURIMAGE Rome Italy Distributed by NRSC Warning All information in this document as well as the software to which it pertains is proprietary material of ERDAS Inc and is subject to an ERDAS license and non disclosure agreement Neither the software nor the documentation may be reproduced in any manner without the prior written permission of ERDAS Inc Specifications are subject to change without notice Trademarks Copyright 2002 Leica Geosystems GIS amp Mapping Division All rights reserved ERDAS ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Essentials IMAGINE Advantage IMAGINE Professi
205. F n5_memory nz smooth water Execute the Model 1 Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar 2 Usethe Viewer and the Swipe tool to compare the original mobbay img and the new smooth water img 452 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation Compare the image on the left above with the image on the right The image on the right has been visibly smoothed in the areas of water You can see this more clearly if you use the Swipe utility in the Viewer see below Using the Swipe Utility 1 Open one file in the Viewer 2 Open the second file in the Viewer making sure to uncheck the Clear Display checkbox in the Raster Options tab of the file selector 3 Select Swipe from the Viewer Utility menu The Viewer Swipe dialog opens W Viewer Swipe Swipe Position Automatic Swipe T AutoMede Speet 300 Drag this slider 4 Grab the Swipe Position slider and drag it left and right while observing the Viewer As you move the slider to the left the top image is rolled back to reveal the underlying image Tour Guides 453 ui Spatial Modeler 454 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER SEVENT Advanced Classification Introduction Supervised vs Unsupervised Classification Tour Guides W yid m P En a Br ub Classification is the process of sorting pixels into a finite number of individual class
206. File edit the composition Se Edit Composition Paths Map Series Tool Map Database Tool Close Help 92 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Map Composer In the Map Composer menu select Edit Composition Paths The Map Path Editor displays E In the Map Path Editor select File Open or click the Open icon g The Compositions dialog opens In the Compositions dialog under Filename select the map file you wish to edit e g tour map Click OK in the Compositions dialog The information for the selected map file displays in the Map Path Editor c Map Path Editor BE Map metimarticiaexport array dacs docsrtourztourGd map Frame Layer Layer Information 0 Composition 1 Annotation 1 MapFrame modeler_output il Mame met morticia export array1docsdc In the Map Path Editor under Frame click MapFrame modeler output img The type of Layer and Layer Information displays for the image Note the path name for this image located under Layer Information in the Name section Under Frame click on Composition Under Layer Information type the new file name or directory name in the Name text entry field Click Apply in the Map Path Editor The changes you made are applied to the map composition After you make each individual edit to each frame or layer you must click Apply 10 If you do not want the changes you have just made click the Reset button 93
207. File Tour Guides Fourier Transform Editor l Click the Image Interpreter icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Interpreter The Image Interpreter menu displays spatial Enhancement Click here to Radiometric Enhancement EJ use the Fourier Spectral Enhancement Analysis tools HyperSpectral Tools Fourier Analysis Topographic Analysis GIS Analysis Utilities Close Help 2 Select Fourier Analysis from the Image Interpreter menu The Fourier Analysis menu opens Click here to gt Fourier Transform Click here to create an FFT Fourier Transform Editor 44 start the ayer Inverse Fourier Transform Fourier Editor Fourier Magnitude Periodic Noise Removal Homomorphic Filter Close Help 3 Select Fourier Transform from the Fourier Analysis menu The Fourier Transform dialog opens 215 Fourier Transform Editor Enter input Enter output image file ft file name name here here Humber of Rows al2 Number of Columns al2 Select Lavy Select layers to use here OK Batch Cancel Help In the Fourier Transform dialog under Input File type in TM 1 img Layer 1 of this file is badly striped In this example you work with only one layer to make the processing go faster However the techniques you use are applicable to multiple layers The name for the Outpu
208. Forest Target Class L il Urban Names Now that the Target Classes are set up you will assign Target colors Displays the number of Class Groups in the Target Class Click in the Color Block next to the Water Target Class Select Blue from the Color popup menu Continue assigning colors to the Target Classes until colors have been assigned to each of them Raw Value Color The carat gt indicates the currently selected Target Class Class Mame HGroups Agriculture 0 0 0 0 503 Advanced Classification Collecting Class Groups Using the Cursor Point Mode 504 The main goal of a Class Grouping project is to gather classes of pixels which have common traits into the same Target Classes To do this you must select the classes and them save them to Class Groups Class Groups are as the name suggests groups of classes that share similar traits usually these are classes that are in the same land use category The Class Groups are themselves members of the Target Classes into which the image is being stratified There are numerous ways to collect Class Groups This tour will demonstrate how to use the Cursor Point Mode the AOI Tool and the Ancillary Data Tool to collect Class Groups In the Viewer right click and select Inquire Cursor from the Quick View menu The Inquire Cursor dialog displays In the X field enter 280135 655592 Enter 4321633 145953
209. GB img see special instructions below intensity hue and saturation values converted to red green and blue values appears similar to mineral img The intensity and saturation red and blue values have been contrast stretched for better interpretation ui 262 ERDAS IMAGINE Image Interpreter File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation xe e FHKE Aqu oo tue FN 3 NEL Pu DET e a ar E 1 s E es 3 ore XE xs x i In the Open Raster Layer dialog when displaying lHStoRGB img be sure to load Layer I as Red Layer 2 as Green and Layer 3 as Blue This is because the order of the layers was reversed in the transformation 2 When you are through comparing the files close the Viewers by selecting Session Close All Viewers in the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar 3 Click Close in the Image Interpreter menu The mage Interpreter and Spectral Enhancement menus close Tour Guides 263 ui Image Interpreter 264 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER TWELVE Tf Orthorectification ids Introduction Rectify a Camera Image Perform Image to Image Rectification Tour Guides Adm Rectification is the process of projecting the data onto a plane and making it conform to a map projection system Assigning map coordinates to the image data is called georeferencing Since all map projection systems are associated with map coordinates rectification involves georeferencing The orthorectification process removes the geom
210. GE Terrain Categorization supervised img This panel enables you to identify the files to be used as variables which were set to the Leave Undefined Prompt Analyst state Use the vertical scroll bar to see the variables and their corresponding files In this Knowledge Base the Roads variable is associated with roads img the Terrain Categorization variable is associated with supervised img the DEM variable is associated with 30meter img and the Aerial Photo variable is associated with mason ap img Click Next in the Knowledge Classification Test Mode dialog The Select Classification Output Options panel opens Change the Best Classes Per Pixel value to 2 oes D i T Best Classes Per Pixel PEEVIBUS CHEMI Donfuiencs nage dmg WD Peries Confdeuce hae SS zl OK W Produce Pesuiack image Confirm that the Cell Size is set to Minimum Change the Best Classes Per Pixel value to 2 Confirm that the Cell Size is set to Minimum Click OK in the Select Classification Output Options panel of the Knowledge Classification Test Mode dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Evaluate River Areas Tour Guides IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Job Status dialogs open tracking the progress of the expert classification c Modeler running model EEXP MODE 002141 Job state Computing stats file EESP WORK_001446 Percent Done 16 0 100 ox Cancel Help When the job is complete click OK in the J
211. Graphical Query viewer is initially displayed This must be one of the files named in catalog cov Archive Media The name of the default media used by the archive function of the catalog Water Color The default color used for all of the area outside of the polygons in a coverage which is assumed to be water Land Color The default color used to fill the polygons in an area coverage Border Color The default color used to draw the border around each of the polygons in an area coverage Line Style The default style used for lines in a line coverage Point Symbol The default symbol used for points in a point coverage Symbol Color The default color used for point symbols in a point coverage Symbol Size The default size of point symbols in points in a point coverage Footprint Color The default color used for image footprints Footprint Selected The default color used for selected image footprints Color Footprint Fill Style The default style used to fill image footprints Show Map Grid Used to control the display of the map grid at startup Grid Color The default color used for the Lat Lon grid Show Grid Labels Used to control the display of the text grid labels Grid Label Color The default color used for the map grid text labels Level of Detail Maximum level of detail to use when displaying maps e g local global Show Map Enable to display the map outlines at startup Outlin
212. I Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Click the Open icon and navigate to the examples directory Select the file dmtm img from the list then click the Raster Options tab Deselect the Clear Display option Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The multispectral file dmtm img lends the color to the resulting file bit res merge TG img From the Viewer menu bar select Utility Swipe Move the slider bar back and forth to see how the two images compare When you are finished close the Swipe utility 393 Spatial Modeler Check the spots img image ui 394 The panchromatic image spot img is the image that lends the detail to the image you created bit res merge TG img Click the Viewer icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel to open a new Viewer Click the Open icon and navigate to the examples directory in the Select Layer To Add dialog Select the file spots img then click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file spots img displays in the Viewer Note the detail in the image ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler P File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help 7 When you are finished evaluating the images select Session Close All Viewers from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar Close the editors Save changes to your eml file Gbit res merge TG eml Close the gmd file do not save changes Using Vector Layers in Your Model Vector Layersas a Mask Tour Guides Vect
213. IMAGINE Advanced Classification Select the Polygon Tool M 8 In the Class Grouping Tool toolbar click the Use Current AOI to Select Classes button amp All of the classes that are contained within the currently selected AOI are highlighted in the Working Groups CellArray 9 Using the techniques outlined in Using the Cursor Point Mode on page 504 fill in the holes in the selections for these lakes 10 In the Class Groups CellArray make sure that the carat gt is in the row for the Water 1 class im and click the Union button This adds the Water 1 Class Group to the classes that are currently selected in the Working Classes CellArray Tour Guides 509 Advanced Classification 11 In the Class Groups CellArray click in the Water 1 cell This group represents the open water land use category so change the Group Name to Open NOTE The Target Class Name is already a stored part of the Class Group name so there is no need to repeat it in the Class Group name 510 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Advanced Classification Definitions of Boolean Operators The Class Grouping Tools provides four boolean operators that allow you to refine the selections in your Class Groups ul N 2 Intersection of Sets The intersection of two sets is the set of elements that is common to both sets cal Union of Sets The union of two sets is the set obtained by combining the members of each set
214. IMAGINE Tour Guides 2 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V The Hypo Props Hypothesis Properties dialog opens with untitled ckb in the title bar a default hypothesis name New Hypothesis and the Color is set to Grayscale Type the new class name i Mame here W Create an Output Class Specify the color Orange Change the default hypothesis Name to the first class name Residential Since you want Residential to be an output class the Create an Output Class checkbox is left checked You are going to give colors to each of the classes Click the Specify radio button in the Color section Then use the pulldown menu to select Orange as the color for this class Selecting Colors for Output Classes If a color is not specified for an output class it is automatically made grayscale As additional grayscale output classes are added grayscale values for each of the grayscale classes are automatically updated and stretched evenly across the range from white to black This occurs even if some other classes are assigned specific colors Now click the Apply button in the Hypo Props dialog A green rectangle with the hypothesis name Residential and chip color appears in the edit window and an outline of the rectangle appears in the knowledge tree overview window You probably noticed that there are diagonal lines through the hypothesis rectangle in the edit window These lines remain until conditions have been added
215. IMAGINE Text Editor ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Viewer Use these menu bar and tool bar items to save and edit report Raster Attribute Edit Class Names ALTAVISTA SANDY LOAM 2 64 APPLING SANDY LOAM 2 63 APPLING SANDY LOAM 6 104 APPLING SANDY LOAM 10 154 AUGUSTA LOAM CARTECAY amp CHEWACLA SOILS CECIL SANDY LOAM 2 6 CECIL SANDY LOAM 6 10 CECIL SANDY CLAY LOAM 6 104 CHESTATEE STONY SNDY LOAM 15 25 CHEWACLA LOAM FREQ FLOODED GWINNETT CLAY LOAM 6 10 ERODED GWINNETT CLAY LOAM 10 25 ERODE HIWASSEE LOAM 2 6 HIWASSEE LOAM 65 1042 HIWASSEE LOAM 10 15 HIWASSEE CLAY LOAM 2 10 ERODED LOUISBURG SANDY LOAM 10 25 MADISON SANDY LOAM 2 63 MADISON SANDY LOAM 6 104 MADISON SANDY LOAM 10 15 MADISON SANDY LOAM 15 25 MADISON SNDY CLAY LOAH 6 10 3 E MADISON SNDY CLAY LOAH 10 15 E MUSELLA COBBLY CLAY LOAM 65 154 MUSELLA COBBLY CLAY LOAM 15 35354 PACELOT SANDY LOAM 15 25 PACELOT ORTHENTS C 10 25 3 5 ER0 _ SS ea 6 To save the report in the Text Editor menu bar select File Save As The Save As dialog opens 7 Enter a name for the report such as soilsreport txt 8 Click OK in the Save As dialog The file name is written in the title bar of the Text Editor window 9 Inthe Text Editor menu bar select File Close 10 Select File Close from the Raster Attribute Editor Save your changes to the Raster Attribute Editor if you like 11 In the Viewer tool bar click the Erase ic
216. INE Expert Classifier V To a certain degree canopy closure can be inferred from the type of tree cover For instance if the cover is coniferous then it is more likely that you have a close canopy and close trunks However this is more difficult to state for mixed and other types of tree cover Consequently this particular hypothesis also looks at panchromatic aerial photography to try and determine crown closure However you cannot determine crown state on a per pixel basis Instead the Tree Density model variable using the Aerial Photo and Terrain Categorization variables as inputs executes a graphical model texture gmd 2 Click the Variables tab in the Knowledge Engineer dialog Hypotheses Rules Variables Roads Terrain Categorization Double click Tree Slope from model Density model DEM a Tree Density model Aerial Photo Identify possible bridges model 3 Double click to select the Tree Density model variable The Variable Props dialog for the Tree Density model variable opens Variable Name 1 Optional Variable Type Raster Data Type Integer Graphic Modelis selected ype Wi ype integ A for the variable option Raster Variable Options phic Model qmd texture gmd wl Edit Model Output n5 PROMPT 1 idi Layer Layer 1 Use Cell Value Define Model Input Hades with Vanables nl PROMPT LlSER Raster ne PROMPT LISER 4 Note that the Raster Variable
217. Image dialog and select lanier img from the IMAGINE HOME examples directory Files Permissions Filename imq Directory Select lanier img vol examples lanier imc A lanier home img t vul lanier home 1 imtg atlanta lanier home 2 imtg gt ront lanier home 3 imtg gt imagine lanier home_confidence img examples lanier home confidence 1 im bldis H infos Eg lanier dms F File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 312 Rows x a12 Columns x 7 Bandis A preview displays 7 Click OK in the Select Image dialog to add anier img to the Variable Props dialog 8 Click the Layer dropdown list and select zLayer 4 9 Click Apply then Close in the Variable Props dialog The Rule Props dialog updates Hule Props untitled ckb ne ii T RR Now that you have Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions specify 355 TERANE bal E TIE Variable change its List of Conditions Relation and Value AND Variable Relation j Value Confidence C rara LL Apply Close Help 10 In the Rule Props dialog click in the cell below Relation and select gt 11 Click then select Other from the Value cell change the Value to 21 then press Return on your keyboard Tour Guides 567 ui IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Copy and Edit 568 12 Now using step 3 through step 11 above add layer 2 of lanier img as the second variable 13
218. Inthe Table Tool click the Open icon or select File Open from the menu bar 5l The Open Info Table dialog displays Click here to select ZONE88 PAT Enter the info directory path info 1 inetimorticiafexportfarray 1 docs pz Table List Total 4 4 ZONES8 AAT 4 ZONEB8 BND ZONESS PAT J ZONESS TIC Click here to select the info directory path Click here to open the selected info table 5 Inthe Open Info Table dialog click the Open icon to select the info directory path Tour Guides 631 ui IMAGINE Vector The Enter the info directory path dialog opens 6 Under Directory check to be sure that the directory to which you copied ZONE88 is listed If it is not type that directory path in under Filename and press Return on your keyboard 7 Inthe file list under Filename click info and then click OK The directory path and table list for info display in the Open Info Table dialog NOTE You can double click on any table name to browse the table contents before clicking OK to open that table 8 In the Open Info Table dialog under Table List click ZONEG88 PAT and then click OK The information for ZONE88 PAT displays in the Table Tool CellArray fable fool ZONES8 PAT File Edit Utilities Relate View S oj oj al ws 3 e el Row AREA PERIMETER ZONEG8 ZONE80 ID ZONING a 47ossse3zoo tensa CTC 230174000 SCG 2 55378840 000 47338 053 2791427
219. Knowledge Engineer dialog 2 Move the vertical scroll bar down until you see the Water no go hypothesis 584 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V m Extreme slope em Tidal Water oe River Water em Turbid Water 1 e Turbid Water 2 om Wetland em Forested Wetland em Low texture Mint The Water no go hypothesis is a simple expert rule that states that if the Terrain Categorization variable shows that a location is water it is impassable 3 Note the hypothesis below Water no go Soft Ground no go Similarly the Soft Ground no go hypothesis is a simple expert rule that states that if the Terrain Categorization variable shows that a location is a type of wetland it is impassable Introduce Spatial The three forest hypotheses are more complicated and show how spatial operators can be used Logic to the within the IMAGINE Expert Classifier to create a spatially aware classifier rather than a Knowledge Base traditional per pixel classifier 1 Use the vertical scroll bar to scroll down to the various forest hypotheses em Low texture High Texte em Medium Texture m High Texture The expert rule is that open forest canopies are easier to traverse than closed forest canopies because space between trunks is not as large with a closed canopy 1 e trees are older and have large trunks However it is difficult to determine canopy closure on a per pixel basis Tour Guides 585 IMAG
220. Map Composer 11 When you are satisfied with your changes save the file by selecting File Save from the Map Path Editor menu bar Aa For more information about cartography see Chapter 12 Cartography of the ERDAS Field Guide ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER FOUR Vector Querying and Editing Introduction Query Vector Data Copy Vector Data Tour Guides 1 The IMAGINE Vector capabilities are designed to provide you with an integrated GIS package for raster and vector processing The Vector tools in ERDAS IMAGINE are based on the ESRI data models therefore ArcInfo vector coverages ESRI shapefiles and ESRI SDE vectors can be used in ERDAS IMAGINE with no conversion This tour guide explains how to edit vector layers The data used in this tour guide are in the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory Replace IMAGINE HOME with the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is installed on your system e g usr imagine 650 A Digitizing Template is supplied in the information packet for ERDAS IMAGINE V6 6 For more information about IMAGINE Vector see Chapter 21 IMAGINE Vector M This tour guide covers the following topics e creating new vector layers e changing vector properties creating attributes Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 55 minutes NOTE The following section covers only the native Vector functionalities in ERDAS IMAGINE If you have the IMAGINE Vector module pleas
221. Mosaic 6 Inthe Choose AOI dialog under AOI Source select the Viewer button and click OK 7 An Attention dialog opens warning you that cutlines can be lost if projection is changed Click Yes in the dialog The cutline is highlighted in red in the Mosaic Tool viewer canvas E Mosaic Tool 1 No File Hle Edit Process e ofa sempers vial 5j Sioje o cial 8 Click the Function icon in the Mosaic Tool viewer IX The Set Overlap Function dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Mosaic xr No Cutline Exists Click these options Cutline Exists Select Function N Cut f Feather se Cut f Feather by Distance Click Apply Distance Apply Close Help 9 In the Set Overlap Function dialog under Intersection Type select Cutline Exists 10 Under Select Function select Cut Feather 11 In the Set Overlap Function dialog click Apply and then Close 12 NOTE The cutline viewer will automatically zoom to whatever is in the mosaic tool In order to only show the overlapping area in the viewer you need to click scale canvas to fit selected objects Define Output Images 1 Inthe Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Output icon to activate the output mode 2 Inthe Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Output Image icon E The Output Image Options dialog opens Tour Guides 301 ui Mosaic c Output image Options Make sure Union is Define Output Map Area s selected Union
222. NIR The Data Type popup list should now be enabled so select Float The Table Definition dialog should look as follows 413 Spatial Modeler Make sure Output is selected 4 Descriptor Custom Read Output Click Output to Output Options Descriptor or Attribute awer iga amps j Show Table in Session Log W Output to Descriptor or Attribute Choose an existing Output to a New Raster Existing Layer _ vector layer Existing Layer Type vector Layer Select zone88 pe Fie zonee8 J Prompt Feature Type POLYGON Name a new Attribute Attribute MEAN NIH SIG EN F Data Type Integer ag Data type is integer OK Cancel Help 8 Click OK in the Table Definition dialog Your model should now look like the following n4 Output 414 ERDAS IMAGINE Execute the Model and Check the Results Debug Your Model Eliminate Incomplete Definition Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar El When the Job Status dialog is 100 complete click OK Click the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar In the Viewer select Open Vector Layer from the File menu In the Select Layer To Add dialog select the copy of Zone88 you created and click OK From the Viewer s Vector menu select Attributes In the Attribute CellArray scroll to the right to see the newly created MEAN NIR field
223. Note that when the cursor is placed on a pixel for one of the classes the path for the class is highlighted in the Knowledge Engineer dialog and in the overview window In complex knowledge bases this feature is useful for telling at a glance which hypothesis was used to classify the point of interest Ic R File Edit Evaluate S e s g a REGALO The class currently under the cursor is oT highlighted in TON CEU Engineer dialog Hypotheses Rules Variables l High IR and Low Visible Bright Within City High IR and Low Visible 8 Click the Close button to dismiss the Classification Path Information dialog 9 Select the gray Disable Node icon then click on the Commercial Services hypothesis graphic to disable it Tour Guides 573 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V The Commercial hypothesis path is grayed out This means the class is not considered when a test classification is run or in the regular Knowledge Classifier if the knowledge base has been saved with the class disabled File Edit Evaluate aala A Ix Jal si o ol Vegetated Within City im Commercial Services is disabled Vegetated Within City High IR and Low Visible Bright Within City l High IR and Low Visible 10 To enable the Commercial Services class once again click on the Commercial Services 11 12 13 14 574 hypothesis graphic with the yellow Enable Node i
224. ORR mn ees xxi ERDAS IMAGINE Men Bal 4 22 dug d dono dro robo E EDAR EE ER dox RR edd Popper acs s xxi Biere gap tne ey ede ey de ete E te ee hae we ee ee H XXX More Informalton HelD rsrsrsrsrs eee eee is OSE PEE Ge 3n ee ES eee ee ee XXX Section IMAGINE Essentials a6 uus xmi RE ee REE Bee ee ee we ws 1 Chapter 1 VICWEP saras ta wae eee eke ee eee ee ee eee ew 19 39 06 19 eee ee eee e ewe ees 3 MOOGI CON cece 2 acu aceRAEEIGGESSESSGIEdEXE5aGgegxE R3 d rs Rae Oe S BUE S d ERG eee EE 3 Display Preferences 6 64 os 2h ESE OE SUE SURE EORR Rune x dE RUE See eee ws KE EORR C ice E 3 Check Band to Color Gun Assignments 0 0 000 ccc ccc eee 3 Check Viewer Preferences 0 0 ee hes 4 Check Preference Editor Help 0 0 cc eee eee ee eee eens 4 View Category Helps aua at uina oma Ee cee ae a boani nens ER aed uo s EUR dn ries 5 Display ah Mag M r Mrrrrmrmm 6 Display OPON MRM 8 Utility Menu ODUONS 22299 19 206 2 ru 2 E Rh acuirurd s diro a ibcuw Ron enina nan IB Ue n 10 Use Inquiry Functions 0 0 cc hah 10 Change Inquire Cursor Style asse ke ke Rege ek desea wes CREER oe eae e Be oe eRe ee ee 11 Take Measurements 000 eee hh ee eee hrs 12 View Menu ODIIORS o o 3 mus br ROE 3E CE ob EGRE LUCUS AE Ie CREW eode So dcdo de ge deb Shee RD Doe a 14 Arrange Layers Brr
225. Options for the Tree Density model variable is set to Graphic Model The model that provides information for the Tree Density model variable is texture gmd 5 Click the Edit Model button in the Variable Props dialog The Spatial Modeler viewer opens which displays the model fexture gmd 586 ERDAS IMAGINE Check Buildings Hypothesis IMAGINE Expert Classifier V forest areas n5 PROMPT USER This model texture gmd is a model that looks at every location that has been determined to be tree cover from the Terrain Categorization variable and analyzes both the air photo DN value at that location and the DN values in surrounding locations using a 3 x 3 moving window to determine local texture This spatial variable is then used in the Close Forest no go Medium Density forest slow go and Open Forestry go hypotheses to determine the relative density of the tree canopy and thereby determine the relative ease of vehicular passage Select File Close from the Spatial Modeler viewer Click Close in the Variable Props dialog displaying properties for the Tree Density model variable The Buildings no go hypothesis is a simple expert rule that states that if the Terrain Categorization shows that a location is a type of urban area it is impassable Confidences are kept low on these rules so that they do not override the Wide Road and Narrow Road hypotheses That is roads within urban areas are still traversable
226. Output File img convol e img ze Coordinate Type Data Type Kemel Library klh default klh T 3x3 Edge Enhance Map Input Unsigned amp bit Output Unsigned 8 bit Wi E 4 3x3 Low Pass acknowledgements 3x3 High Pass arrows 3x3 Horizontal colors 3x3 Vertical From Inquire Box Ignore Zero in Stats 3x3 Summary Edit selected etc ET kernel or create new one Select Input Output Files Select Kernel Tour Guides uum p i iz Subset Definition E Edges By Handle z Reflection Fi Normalize the Kemel UL X 233085 00 L LR AD 246415 00 F ULY 3807070 00 E LR Y 3791740 00 i Click here to add this function to a batch file Click here to apply this function to an area of interest This interactive Convolution tool lets you perform convolution filtering on images It provides a scrolling list of standard filters and lets you create new kernels The new kernels can be saved to a library and used again at a later time NOTE Do not close the Image Interpreter menu as you continue using it in the next section In the Convolution dialog under nput File enter lanier img Under Output File enter convolve img in the directory of your choice It is not necessary to add the img extension when typing the file name ERDAS IMAGINE automatically appends the correct extension NOTE Make sure you remember in which directory the output file is saved This is importan
227. Page Setup dialog 373 Paragraph styles 522 Paste icon 358 Pattern Polygon Fill 640 Personal Geodatabase 120 Point measurement 12 Polygon Interpretation 541 Polygon measurement 12 Polyline icon 13 50 Polynomial Model Properties dialog 138 145 148 Position Parameters dialog 56 PostScript 374 PostScript device 90 Preference Editor 3 241 eml 3 saving changes 6 viewer 4 Preview Options dialog 161 162 Preview window xxx 33 38 86 88 641 Prewitt Gradient filter 609 Print dialog 14 374 Print icon 374 Print Map Composition dialog 91 Prior Data 529 Projection Chooser dialog 274 Properties dialog 98 105 Q Query coordinates 11 pixel information 10 Query icon 63 Quick View menu 16 27 150 254 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index R Radar icon 601 Radar Interpreter menu 602 Radar menu 601 Radar Speckle Suppression dialog 602 604 612 RADARSAT 623 Radiometric Enhance menu 252 Raster Attribute Editor 33 36 38 39 130 131 364 482 486 488 495 Raster dialog 340 342 345 347 350 354 377 Raster options 290 Rayleigh distribution 603 Read Points dialog 282 Real Time Zoom 19 Recode 340 345 347 496 using Criteria 345 Recode dialog 345 347 Rectangle measurement 12 Rectangular Mask dialog 228 Rectification 17 image to image 135 265 steps 135 265 verifying 149 Red Mouse Linear Mapping dialog 31 Reference GCC File dialog 275 Region Grow icon 462 Region Grow Options dialog 461 Region Growing Properties dialo
228. Parameters dialog under Observer Position enter 3000 in the AGL Above Ground Level number field 3 Click Apply and then Close in the Position Parameters dialog Tour Guides 57 Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER TWO Image Catalog Introduction Set Catalog Preferences Tour Guides In this tour guide you can learn how to e set catalog preferences create an Image Catalog e add information to a catalog e perform queries e view the information in a catalog e modify the views information save and restore a specific area of coverage e archive data e add custom maps Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 15 minutes ERDAS IMAGINE should be running It is not necessary to have a Viewer open In the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Preferences The Preference Editor opens In the Preference Editor under the Category list select Image Catalog The default preferences for the Image Catalog display The following table lists and describes the various catalog preferences Table 2 1 Image Catalog Preferences Preference Function Catalog Directory The default directory that the catalog uses to save and open catalogs Default Catalog The name of the catalog that is opened by default when the Image Catalog starts 59 Image Catalog Table 2 1 Image Catalog Preferences Continued Canvas Backdrop The backdrop file ArcInfo coverage that is displayed when the
229. Project Manager is updated to include the new Interpretation file ERDAS IMAGINE The green checks indicate that sufficient steps have been completed to perform Final Analysis Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools ia Sampling Project Manager File Process Help 5 2 m Bond File Descriptor File Path and Name Sample Boundary ampling Loudoun THS ample 1 5ample 1 bour 2 Imported Sample e a j 3 Hectified Sample aram filez imaaine 6 examples loudoun_highres The Dot Grid 4 JratGrid Interpretatio ur sampling loudoun_tm sample_1 sample user file is added to the Project Manger fy courty forests spf Row su Loudoun Th ib Sample 1 fgg Sample 10 fgg Sample 13 in Sample 4 fgg Sample 2 gg Sample 5 fgg Sample 7 ge Sample B fgg Sample 3 fgg Sample 8 fgg Sample B in Sample 14 fgg Sample 11 fgg Sample 15 bs ien Sample 12 Although a Final Analysis can be run at this point the accuracy of the analysis will be affected by the limited number of samples that have been analyzed 4 Continue to interpret the Samples until they have all been labeled Experiment with the Size and Spacing of the Dot Grid as well as the Automatic Placement and Rotation options 551 Frame Sampling Tools The Project Manager will indicate that all of the Samples have been interpreted and Final Analysis may be performed by placing green check marks in the Tree View lu Sampling Project Manager
230. STER of the model have been set to PROMPT USER In the Variable Properties dialog the PROMPT USER Input Node that was the output in the model has been defined as the Output and the following CellArray has been used to define which variables should be used to supply which Input Node In this instance clicking in the Variable Definition cell gave the list of defined variables from which DEM was selected Select the spatial model phic Model gmd _ Edit moder node that represents the a calculated variable Output nz PROMPT Layer use cett value Output Define Model Input Nodes with Variables Row Input Made Mode Type Variable Definition nl PROMPT LISER Raster DEM Select variables as inputs to the spatial model in the CellArray here LL ERDAS IMAGINE Build Hypotheses Tour Guides IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Thus a variable has been defined that calculates values on the fly as needed from another variable in this case slope is derived from a DEM Click the Close Model icon or select File Close from the Spatial Modeler viewer i The Spatial Modeler viewer closes Click Close in the Variable Props dialog Since you have looked at how the two main types of input variable can be defined now you can look at how each hypothesis is built in the knowledge base The knowledge base mobility_factors ckb displays Fle Edit Evaluate em Major Road 1 e Highway category E
231. Scale o 00000000 LP ed I L Common center for all layers Center X 701 0000000 E M EP Piman a Y op Pg Pv Center Y 688 00000000 Reset Center Point Pixel Value 243 456 T29 a72 Distance fram Center Point p Preview Accept Accept for All Revert impute Setting Compute for All Close Help Rever parameters to values as of last preview or saved values The first image 2 2 mg is displayed If 2 2 img did not need color balancing you could skip it and use the Arrow Keys or the Drop Down Menu in the top left corner to choose another image Choose the surface method you want to use in order to color balance the image You may choose from Parabolic Conic Linear or Exponential Unless you are using Linear as your surface method you can click on Common center for all layers in order to use the same center point in each layer of the image For image 2 2 img select Conic and enable Common center for all layers Click Compute Setting and click on Preview The preview viewer displays the color balanced image Click Accept after previewing the color balanced image to accept it for mosaicking 319 Mosaic Match Images 320 The computed settings are based on the surface method chosen The Image Profile box at the top right of the Mosaic Color Balancing dialog depicts the chosen surface method as a red line plotted against a profile of the pixel values shown as a green line betwe
232. Services Services E lolx Action View aimee eom i T Tree Name Description stes Select ih Services Local i Frovides R Started Automatic Pr operties Select Task Manages a Manual from the Sch edu ler from o Smart Card Helper Provides s Manual Services Sa System Event Motifi Tracks syst Started Automatic di the Services ae Task Scheduler Enables a Automatic lalog dialog ay TCPLIP NetBIOS Hel Enables su Started Automatic Sa Telephony Provides T Started Manual 24 Telnet Allows a re Manual Sa Uninterruptible Pow Managesa Manual m k E N Scroll through the Services window and select Task Scheduler then click the Properties button on the Services menu to startup and open the Task Scheduler Properties dialog Read the help for the services control panel when using it for the first time The help button is located on the Services menu bar ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Batch Processing Task 5cheduler Properties Local Computer ajx General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name Schedule Display name Task Scheduler Description Enables a program to run at a designated time Path ta executable C AWINNT system32 M S Task exe Service status Start Stop Select Automatic Startup type Automatic y Automatic Resume fou can specify the start parameters that apply when vou start the service fram here St
233. Tasseled Cap eee hh hrs 256 CiECKCSUINS gc zou eder Id odes ne Gee ee 36 odds eee ee IE TqUEERSId PE Id EN ENS 258 Use the Indices Function 0 ne rans 259 ONODSCTHHOIBWO IPIS uen saspe der rarum uePESETISUTOPRRSid DCa eng rS beeed eee trees ed Gaeta Sedna 260 Choose IHS to RGB lee hh ns 261 VIEWING ResUl cu 4 1 qoe essaie donee 993 2 473 359 3 Pe ae Pee ea was dar 3 9 9 9 deis UH E 4 261 viii ERDAS IMAGINE Chapter 12 OFIBOFecHTI callo s sue we x a on eRe Eee RUNE E eee eee Beets eee 265 MUOGUCU N Pr R m nRBm 265 Heclifya Camera Image 22a eo egg 3 ERE ie Pie CR Re ns Oe SEG Bodo ER RE eae s 265 Perform Image to Image Rectification 22i 265 Check for Map Model oseeeeeee hh hrs 266 pice Ola FNC file oi wee once doh tees 2 eee ed wade ene ee ed Gee eee ree ee aero ee Eee 267 Perform Geometric Correction 1 0 0 0 ee hs 268 Set Camera Model Properties n n 0 0 ce eee eee eee es 269 ze seere rna EErEE E ae TETTE 269 Entet Fini OOM OS owsa ka a OD TET TEILTE OO TITEL OT LT T E Aas 272 Change ProjeCuOn ccc oc e urere n dre ema oa me cR POS erue Acerca dri area a 273 Name the Geometric Model 0 ccc eee eee eens 274 Start the GCP Tool and compute RMS Error 20 0 0 cc ee eens 275 COO Se VOUT PU cc ducted 2 ers ened ore ead et we ne area aie ek ee Se eh Brae Seed ret ee eater 276 Resample the Image 0 cc eee ee
234. The Criteria statement now reads AREA gt 5000000 Click Select to compare the attributes in the Attributes CellArray against this criteria Statement Only those records that meet the criteria are selected and highlighted in the Viewer and Attributes CellArray 103 Vector Querying and Editing 10 1 12 13 14 15 Now you further refine the criteria by limiting the selection to only those polygons that are both greater than 5 000 000 square feet and in zone 4 In the Selection Criteria dialog click the and button Under Columns click ZONING Under Compares click In the numeric keypad click 4 The Criteria statement now reads AREA gt 5000000 and ZONING Click Select in the Selection Criteria dialog All polygons greater the 5 000 000 square feet and in zone 4 are selected in the Viewer and in the Attribute CellArray Click Close in the Selection Criteria dialog In the Viewer click outside of the polygons within the Viewer to deselect everything Click Close in the Vector tool palette Select File Close from the Attributes dialog Select File Clear from the Viewer Edit Vector Layers 104 For this section display a Landsat TM raster layer then overlay the vector layer you have been using ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and you should have a Viewer open Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar or click the Open icon on the t
235. The values in this column represents the mean pixel value from band 4 near infrared of germtm img for each of the polygons in zone88 Model Maker facilitates creating a model to accomplish your task but it may still take some effort to get your model running successfully Model Maker works hand in hand with Modeler Model Maker is used to create models graphically To execute these models Model Maker creates an SML script which it hands off to Modeler for execution Modeler does all of the syntax and error checking so finding an error in your model is not a single step operation The following exercises demonstrate some of the common errors encountered in building new models In building a model Model Maker provides prototypes for function arguments to be replaced with actual arguments In this exercise you see what happens if you forget to replace a prototype You must have ERDAS IMAGINE running Click the Modeler icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel HH LLLI Modeler 415 Spatial Modeler Create the Model 416 The Spatial Modeler menu opens Select Model Maker Model Maker j Model Librarian Close Help Click Model Maker on the Spatial Modeler menu A blank Spatial Modeler viewer opens along with the Model Maker tool palette Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 2 Click to place a Raster object in the upper left corner of the Model Maker viewer Click
236. W Clear Display Set view Extent v Fit to Frame No Stretch Click on Data Scaling Background Transparent Fit to Frame zoom by 1 00 Using Nearest Neighbor Help display the image 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select germtm img This is the image file that is going to be classified 3 Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and then set the Layers to Colors to 4 5 and 3 red green and blue respectively 456 ERDAS IMAGINE Open Signature Editor Tour Guides Advanced Classification 4 Click the Fit to Frame option to enable it 5 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file germtm img displays in the Viewer 1 Click on the Classifier icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Tassifler The Classification menu displays wa Classification x Unsupervised Classification Click here to start the Supervised Classification Signature Editor TEUER Fuzzy Convolution Grouping Tool Accuracy Assessment Feature Space Image Feature Space Thematic Knawledge Classifier Knawledge Engineer Frame Sampling Tools Spectral Analysis 2 Select Signature Editor from the Classification menu to start the Signature Editor The Signature Editor opens 457 Advanced Classification Wa Signature Editor No File File Edit View Evaluate Feature Classify Help g
237. Yellow class 3 to Tan and class 4 to Red When you have selected the desired color for a class click Apply and then Close in the Color Selector dialog Then redisplay the Color Chooser for the next class by moving your cursor to that color patch and right holding a specific color or Ofher Click in the Class Names column of class 1 Type Undeveloped Land Press Return on your keyboard Your cursor is now in the class name field of class 2 Type Floodplain for class 2 Press Return Type 25 Percent Slope for class 3 Press Return Type Riparian and Wetlands for class 4 Press Return New class names go in this column __2 al _4 4 1 __3 zm z Hle Edit IO Kil El Layer Number n F eo T curi cles Names Histogram 0 0 0 MMMM Undeveloped Land 132387 l Floodplain 2831 23 Percent slope 6461 Riparian and Wetlands 17473 i C L C C C C Do faster Attribute Editer sensitivity spotimgCiLaver_f Help Opacity T 3 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Test the Output Tour Guides The following steps describe how to compare your output with the one delivered with ERDAS IMAGINE You must have completed the Spatial Modeler tour guide up to this point creating sensitivity spot img in the process The file sensitivity spot img should be displayed in a Viewer Display the file IMAGINE HOME examples modeler o
238. a map composition 1 Inthe Viewshed dialog click Save The Save Viewshed Image dialog opens Type the name of the viewshed image here in the l T directory of your choice Lican son etit infos vs words Foneddsubset Odeq img Odeqlowpass img AirMosaic img IMAGINE stuff OK Cancel Help 2 Ina directory where you have write permission type vs_tour img in the Viewshed File window 3 Click OK to dismiss the Save Viewshed Image dialog Tour Guides 331 ui Viewshed Analysis A Viewshed Analysis progress meter appears while the image is saved 4 Click Close to dismiss the Viewshed dialog Query Viewshed In this section use the Raster Attribute Editor to query the viewshed layer in the Viewer Data Create Class Names for Viewshed Regions 1 Select Raster Attributes from the Viewer menu bar The Raster Attribute Editor opens c faster Attribute Editer intervis OAjmo0fes4Chaver a Hle Edit Help Addacolumn __ E Gai sn BE E Layer Number 1 fF for class names Rom Color Green Blue Oen Opacit 35 ee ee 8847088 o 3 Im 2 i l 2 Select Edit Add Class Names from the Raster Attribute Editor menu bar A new column is added to the front of the Raster Attributes CellArray 3 In Row 1 ofthe Class Names column enter Perimeter and press Return on your keyboard 4 In How 2 enter Hidden Region and press Return on your keyboard 5 In Row 3
239. adar image The objective is to make the two images look alike by using the Speckle Suppression function With all speckle suppression filters there is a trade off between noise reduction and loss of resolution Each data set and each application has a different acceptable balance between these two factors The IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module Speckle Suppression filters have been designed to be versatile and gentle in reducing noise and resolution 599 ui IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V In this section you also calculate the coefficient of variation for an image This variable is required to fine tune many Speckle Suppression filters When processing radar imagery it is very important to use the Speckle Suppression functions before other image processing functions to avoid incorporating speckle into the image Preparation ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select File Open Raster Layer or click the Open icon in the tool bar E 1 The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Select Layer To Add Click here to pem display the file Files Permissions l Raster Options Filename img Directory Click here to i rval examples Click here to foplakebed img e 01 examples Steal lel select the file Inslope img Goto ia d l Insoils img Rename neeae logres img i MTS loplakebedsig357 imi L gt imagine CDROM loplakebedsig35
240. added Change the name to Forest_2 then press Return on the keyboard In the Signature Editor hold in the Color column next to Forest 2 and select Pink Click Close in the Inquire Cursor dialog and the Region Growing Properties dialog Now that you have the parametric signatures collected you do not need the AOIs in the Viewer Select View Arrange Layers from the Viewer menu bar The Arrange Layers dialog opens 463 Advanced Classification Create Feature Space Image x button to delete the germtm img Laver 4 AOI layer 2m germtm img Laper 5 germtm img Layer 3 Click here to apply the changes you have made to the Viewer Wee In the Arrange Layers dialog right hold over the AOI Layer button and select Delete Layer from the AOI Options menu Click Apply in the Arrange Layers dialog to delete the AOI layer You are asked if you want to save the changes before closing Click No In the Arrange Layers dialog click Close The ERDAS IMAGINE Feature Space tools allow you to interactively define areas of interest polygons or rectangles in the Feature Space image s A Feature Space signature nonparametric is based on the AOI s in the Feature Space image Use this technique to extract a signature for water Select Feature Create Feature Space Layers from the Signature Editor menu bar The Create Feature Space Images dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE 464 Advanced Classification
241. age Your annotated model should look like the following example usridataltour_model gmd a 6 Hle Edit Model Text Process almi olala lees xis Sensitivity Analysis Model n1_slope_RC n2 floodplain n3 landcover RC n amp spot Enhanc the SPOT image using summary filter CONDITIONAL CONVOLVE gt n4_sensitivity E EITHER n4 sensitivity IF n11 Integer n spot summary n12 sensitivity spot 3 Save the model by selecting File Save from the menu bar ul 370 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Generate a Text Script Tour Guides The graphical models created in Model Maker can be output to a script file text in SML Select Tools Edit Text Files from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar and then edit these scripts using the SML syntax Re run or save the edited scripts in the script library SML is designed for advanced modeling and encompasses all of the functions available in Model Maker as well as e conditional branching and looping e complex data types e flexibility in using raster objects To generate a script from a graphical model follow these steps The graphical model must be open In the Model Maker viewer menu bar select Process Generate Script The Generate Script dialog opens script Name mul tour model mul gl Enter a new LT file name here info ras files z ne Click here to generate the script ooo o 8B 0 008 The Sc
242. age Interpreter Select File Open Raster Layer from the menu bar of the Viewer you just opened The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename enter the name of the directory in which you saved convolve img and press the Return key on your keyboard In the list of files click on convolve img and then click OK The output file generated by the Convolve function convolve img displays in the second Viewer In the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Tile Viewers to compare the two files side by side Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel When you are finished comparing the two files select File Clear from the menu bar of each Viewer Select Crisp from the Spatial Enhancement menu The Crisp dialog opens 249 Image Interpreter Enter input file here Enter output Input File img Output File img file here rmm espa Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Box z 4 Map ULx 399272 00 LR x 44520320 E l Hie ULY 1374697 21 LR Y 133204681 Click here to Data Type Output options add this function put W Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit Click h to a batch file Quim p Unsigneg 2 nd ki Ignore Zero in Stats IC ere to i i apply this function Click here to view or edit the o Batch AOI to an area of interest graphical model Cancel View Help for this fu
243. aintained Click either the Interactive Zoom In or the Interactive Zoom Out icon al a Click on a location on the image The Viewer recenters the image to that location and zooms in or out in a simulated animation by a factor of 2 Animated zoom also works with View Zoom In by X and Out by X Box Zoom is used to select a boxed area in the image When zooming in or out by using the zoom recentering icons the boxed image enlarges or reduces within the Viewer Display anier img in the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Real time Zoom Viewer Select Session Preferences In the Preference Editor dialog select Viewer from the Category list Click to select Enable Box Zoom Click User Save then Close in dialog and go back to the Viewer Click the Interactive Zoom In icon Click and drag a box in the image The selected area of the image is magnified to fit the Viewer Select the Interactive Zoom Out icon Click and drag a box in the image The area displayed in the Viewer is reduced to fit in the box Space surrounding the reduced image is populated with available imagery When you select either of the Interactive Zoom tools you can to zoom into and out of images in real time by holding the middle mouse button and moving the mouse upward and downward over the image NOTE You can also hold down the Control key and press on the left mouse button to zoom in real time Display anier img in the Viewer There is no need to
244. alog next to Column Name enter ZONE88 ID 6 Nextto Column Type click on the popup list to select Integer 7 Click OK in the New Column dialog 8 Click OK in the Create New Table dialog The new table is entitled ZONE88 NEW PAT and has a column entitled ZONEG98 ID 633 IMAGINE Vector Copy From One Table to Another Add a Column to the Table 634 Column associated with new table New Table to Create YONEGG NEW PAT ZONEG AAT ZOHES8 BHD ZONEB8 PAT New table name Z ONEGG TIC Add Delete Edit Dismiss NOTE If you create a new table by clicking File New in an existing table the existing table is used as a template and the column definitions of the existing table are listed in the Create New Table dialog as the default columns of the new table In the ZONE88 PAT Table Tool click in the column title of ZONE88 ID to select that column The column is highlighted in blue In the ZONE88 PAT Table Tool right hold in the column title ZONE88 ID to select Column Options Copy In the ZONE88 NEW PAT Table Tool click on the column title ZONEG8 ID to select it and then right hold Column Options Paste The ID numbers for ZONE88 ID are entered into the new table and the ZONE88 ID column is highlighted in blue In the ZONE88 NEW PAT Table Tool select Edit Add A Column from the menu bar The Add Column dialog opens This dialog is similar to the New Column dialog In the A
245. aluating and modifying VIS IR data for input to a 4 band composite image or in preparing a 3 band ratio color composite Speckle in imaging radar can be mathematically modeled as multiplicative noise with a mean of 1 The standard deviation of the noise can be mathematically defined as 4 VARIANCE WENN Coefficient of Variation Standard Deviation of the noise gt It is assumed that imaging radar speckle noise follows a Rayleigh distribution This yields a theoretical value for standard deviation SD of 52 for 1 look radar data and SD 26 for 4 look radar data The following table gives theoretical coefficient of variation values for various look averaged radar scenes Table 20 1 Coefficient of Variation Values for Look averaged Radar Scenes Number of e HELEN Ce Coefficient of Looks ipe Variation Value scenes 1 52 2 37 3 30 4 26 6 21 8 18 In the Radar Speckle Suppression dialog click the checkbox for Calculate Coefficient of Variation All the other options in the dialog are disabled except for the Subset Definition and Moving Window If desired you could specify a subset area of the image for which to calculate the coefficient of variation 2 Under Moving Windows confirm that the Window Size is set to 3 3 Click OK in the Radar Speckle Suppression dialog 603 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V Run Speckle Suppression Function 604 The Radar Speckle Suppress
246. alue in band two is larger than the pixel value in band one these are all set to O instead of retaining values such as 0 25 0 833 or 0 498 In order to maintain the information being calculated all you have to do is change the type of output file being generated In the Model Maker viewer double click on the output Raster object In the Raster dialog in the Data Type popup list select Float Single Click on the OK button Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar If you view the resulting output image now you see the full detail from the computations which are available for further analysis 447 Spatial Modeler Use AOls in Processing Create AOI 448 Area Of Interest AOI processing can be used to restrict the area processed of individual images or of the model as a whole AOIs can be used as masks to cookie cut the desired portions of images When and how the mask is applied may not be of much interest in a model utilizing point operations However in models doing neighborhood operations when the AOI is applied yields differing results For example if you cookie cut the input image with an AOI before doing an edge detection filter the model produces artificial edges around the AOI In this case you want to do the edge detection on the original input image and cookie cut the results with the AOI Besides using AOIs as processing masks Vector layer inputs may also be used I
247. alue represents the probability of that pixel containing the MOI Viewer t1 loudoun tm forest fractimg Layer 0 Tour Guides 557 Frame Sampling Tools 558 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER NINE T E EAS IMAGINE Expert Classifier LI Introduction Create a Knowledge Base Set Up the Output Classes Start the Knowledge Engineer Tour Guides This chapter is designed to introduce you to the IMAGINE Expert Classifier The IMAGINE Expert Classifier is composed of two modules the Knowledge Engineer and the Knowledge Classifier The Knowledge Engineer provides the interface for an expert with first hand knowledge of the data and the application to identify the variables rules and output classes of interest and create the hierarchical decision tree The Knowledge Classifier provides an interface for a non expert to apply the knowledge base and create the output classification This set of exercises guides you through the basic process of creating a new knowledge base from scratch The Knowledge Engineer tools and their uses are presented In this tour guide you can learn how to e add hypotheses e enter rules for hypotheses e edit variables for the rules e copy and edit existing rules e test a knowledge base Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 30 minutes For the purpose of this exercise suppose that you are determining Residential and Commercial Services map classes from imagery and existin
248. an external rrd file Click OK in the Pyramid Layers Options dialog c Pyramid Layers Options Pyramid Layer Options Kemel Size exe i Click OK External Filo Click the Batch button in the Image Commands dialog The command to create pyramid layers is added to the Record Commands for Automation panel The pyramid layer generation starts and a Job Status dialog displays When the process is done click OK If you examine the contents of the Record Commands for Automation panel at this time you notice that the commands explicitly name the input and output files The next procedure converts the input and output file names into variables so that these commands may be applied to a larger set of input files 197 Batch Processing Create Variables 1 Onthe Record Commands for Automation panel click the Next button The Select Type of Command Processing panel displays Select the Modify commands automatically option 2 Onthe Select Type of Command Processing panel click the Next button The Edit Commands Create Variables panel displays Now the files have been replaced by variables Input Temp1 and Output Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined Commands Variables E HOME etcimodelsmhistoeq pmdl me
249. anced Classification Evaluate Contingency Contingency Matrix The Contingency Matrix utility allows you to evaluate signatures that have been created from AOIs in the image This utility classifies only the pixels in the image AOI training sample based on the signatures It is usually expected that the pixels of an AOI are classified to the class that they train However the pixels of the AOI training sample only weight the statistics of the signature They are rarely so homogenous that every pixel actually becomes assigned to the expected class The Contingency Matrix utility can be performed with multiple signatures If you do not have any signatures selected then all of the signatures are used The output of the Contingency Matrix utility is a matrix of percentages that allows you to see how many pixels in each AOI training sample were assigned to each class In theory each AOI training sample would be composed primarily of pixels that belong to its corresponding signature class The AOI training samples are classified using one of the following classification algorithms e parallelepiped e feature space e maximum likelihood e Mahalanobis distance NOTE The classification decision rule that is going to be used in the actual image classification should be determined so that it can also be used in the Contingency Matrix utility In the Signature Editor select all of the signatures by Shift clicking in the first row of the Class c
250. and knows where to place output files 3 Inthe Variables tab of the Edit Commands Create Variables panel click the New button The Variables tab changes to accommodate a new variable Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined The new variable Commands Variables is added to me list s Namen NEW VARIABLE now you Su po HEW VARIABLE y pply oo User F properties J Priis heime Preceding J Osieis Sitor P DOESSIDS Hew Delete Undo Close lt Back Next gt PHUSH Help 4 Inthe Name section of the Variables tab type the name OutputDir 5 Click the Type dropdown list and choose Auto 6 Inthe Pattern window type the path to the directory and folder that you want generated files to be saved in Your Variables tab looks like the following Tour Guides 205 Batch Processing Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined Commands Variables Hame OutputDir OutputDir Type Auto i All output files are Pattern Set going to be stored in Delete Before Processing the output directory
251. ap Width s Specify map desktop 10 10 100 114 l size here Map Height 8 In meters or in inches Hesktop 10 10 197 2527 Hesktop foxgloves Hesktop woodduck tf imaginea30 imagineaan Display Scale 1 Units d Background Click here DEW to make Use Template a new map OK Cancel Help select a Map Composition 70 ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer 3 Inthe New Map Composition dialog under New Name type a unique name for your map such as tour map Be sure that you have write permission in the directory where you are creating the new map 4 Drag across the value in Map Width to select it 5 Type 7 5 and then press the Return key on your keyboard 6 Drag across the value in Map Height to select it 7 Type 10 0 and then press the Return key on your keyboard Most printers have a small margin on all sides of a sheet that are unprintable Therefore even though you output your map to 8 5 x 11 0 paper you must specify a smaller size here for the actual live area of the map This ensures that no part of the map occupies that unprintable area and it leaves a margin around the edge of the composition 8 Accept the Display Scale 1 of 1 00 and inches for the Units 9 Click OK in the New Map Composition dialog A blank Map Composer viewer displays along with the Annotation tool palette NOTE The tool palette that displays on your screen may look different from the f
252. apter 16 Spatial Modeler for information on editing and running a model in Model Maker 2 Exit the Model Maker by selecting File Close All 3 Click OK in the Crisp dialog to start the process A Job Status dialog opens indicating the progress of the function 4 When the Job Status dialog shows that the process is 10096 complete click OK View Results 1 Display panAtlanta img in a Viewer Tour Guides 251 Image Interpreter 2 Display crisp img the output file generated by the Crisp function in the other Viewer 3 Note the differences between the two images crisp img appears to be sharper Viewer 1 panAilanta img Layer 1 Viewer 2 crisp img Layer 1 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help sis naaie alni Na b Li la i ined 2 Te pe PEL 24 AT 4 Usethe Zoom In tool in the Viewer tool bar to zoom in for a closer look at the crispening of the image in crisp img 5 When you are through close all the Viewers at once by selecting Session Close All Viewers from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar 6 Click Close in the Spatial Enhancement menu NOTE Do not close the Image Interpreter menu as you continue using it in the next section Apply Radiometric Enhancement 1 Inthe Image Interpreter menu select Radiometric Enhancement The Radiometric Enhance menu opens 252 ERDAS IMAGINE Apply Brightne
253. ard The Check File Integrity step is displayed 7 Click Next on the Wizard to perform with the project integrity check The Final Analysis process will perform some preliminary checks to make sure that a Final Analysis can be performed 8 Click on the View Warnings button The Warning Messages dialog is displayed Was Warning Messages Gg X Tile Loudoun TM is ready for analysis All selected samples for Tile Loudoun TH will be included Any problem that prohibits a Final Analysis will be displayed at the top of this list of messages 9 Click Close to exit the Warning Messages dialog 10 Click Next in the Final Analysis Wizard The Single Sampling Parameters step is displayed i Single Sampling Parameters N X Several options must be set before the analysis can proceed Clicking Next will begin the analysis This step may take a few moments Select Hectares Confidence Intervals from this list Number of Iterations 10000 z Reports Enter forest fract Units Hectares ha Y as the File Suffix Fraction Files hA File Suffix forest fract Leaving unchanged could overwrite previous files Click Next i x Next gt Cancel i 554 ERDAS IMAGINE Project Files Undersampled Strata Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools 11 Select Hectares from the Units popup list as the units in which to perform all the calculations 12 Enter forest fract as the suffix for the Fraction File This wil
254. are multilevel Classification nonparametric e parametric In this example use both nonparametric and parametric decision rules L See Chapter 6 Classification of the ERDAS Field Guide for more information on decision rules Tour Guides 479 Advanced Classification 480 Nonparametric If the signature is nonparametric 1 e Feature Space AOL then the following decision rules are offered e feature space e parallelepiped With nonparametric signatures you must also decide the overlap rule and the unclassified rule NOTE All signatures have a nonparametric definition due to their parallelepiped boundaries Parametric For parametric signatures the following decision rules are provided e maximum likelihood e Mahalanobis distance e minimum distance In this tour guide use the maximum likelihood decision rule Output File The Supervised Classification utility outputs a thematic raster layer 1mg extension and or a distance file 1mg extension The distance file can be used for post classification thresholding The thematic raster layer automatically contains the following data e class values e class names e color table e statistics e histogram The image file also contains any signature attributes that were selected in the Supervised Classification utility In the Signature Editor select all of the signatures so that they are all used in the classification process if none of the
255. ark water bodies Apply Close Help Display amp Ol Styles When you have finished use the link cursor to identify any other areas in the image that need to be excluded such as other dark bodies of water isolated bright urban areas or bright areas of sun glint Create a polygon around each of the areas you wish to exclude from color balancing and click Apply Use the arrow keys or the drop down box to select the next image 2 3 img Continue identifying AOIs to exclude through all nine images Click Apply after excluding areas in each image Click Close in the Set Exclude Areas dialog when finished Click the Set button in the Matching Options dialog Mosaic The Set Color Balancing Method dialog opens Set Color Balancing Method Color balancing can be performed automatically or manually The automatic approach calculates color correction surface settings based on a default surface method specified in Preferences The manual approach allows the user to interactively adjust and visually verify the color balanced results image by image Correction Method jJ Automatic Color Balancing Manual Color Manipulation o 2 Choose Manual Color Manipulation and click OK The Mosaic Color Balancing dialog opens 318 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Mosaic Mosaic Color Balancing 2 2 img v Gd Surface Settings Image Profile Offset 0 00000000 Surface Method Parabolic v
256. art drawing a line over the vectors and either double click or middle click once depending on how your Preferences are set to terminate the line 102 ERDAS IMAGINE Use the Criteria Function Tour Guides Vector Querying and Editing The features that intersect the line are selected in the Viewer and in the Attribute CellArray 9 In the Viewer click outside of the polygons to deselect everything 10 Click Close in the Options dialog This function allows you to specify the criteria upon which the automatic selection of CellArray rows is based 1 With your cursor in the Record column of the Attributes CellArray right hold How Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria dialog opens Columns Functions AREA row IM PERIMETER mod lt a gt lt b gt Select items here ZOnEse abs lt a gt to create criteria ZONE88 ID int a statement here ZONING even lt a gt oddj lt a gt max lt a gt lt h gt ah re select Subset Add Remove Clear Close Help Next you create a criteria statement to select only those polygons that have an area greater than 5 000 000 square feet In the Selection Criteria dialog click on AREA under Columns AREA is now written in the Criteria statement box at the bottom of the Selection Criteria dialog Under Compares click on gt The greater than symbol displays in the Criteria statement Use the numeric keypad to enter the number 5000000
257. art parameters 5 Services Action View eg eS D E gt ey Server Provides R Started Automatic 4 Smart Card Manages a Manual ay Smart Card Helper Provides s Manual S System Event Motifi Tracks syst Started Automatic a Task Scheduler Enables a Automatic Sa TCP IP NetBIOS Hel Enables su Started Automatic 4 Telephony Provides T Started Manual i Telnet Allows a re Manual 4 Uninterruptible Pow Manages a Manual af 5 Click the Start button in the Services dialog In the Tax Scheduler Properties dialog select Automatic as the Startup Type in the General menu then click the This Account checkbox in the Log On menu Enter your account name and password confirm your password and then click OK ClickStartbutton to start the Scheduler NOTE The ability to run Batch at a later time is built using the Windows scheduler which is part of the at command Refer to the Windows help to learn more about the use of the at NOTE Microsoft Windows NT If you are submitting jobs for processing later and you are using mapped network drives then you need to ensure that these maps are in place when the Batch job runs Typically a mapped drive is only available to the current user unless the Reconnect at Logon option was checked on the Map Network Drive dialog when the drive was mapped 181 Batch Processing If this option
258. ary files can be controlled to some degree by user preferences By default Spatial Modeler is shipped to maintain the highest degree of precision at the expense of disk space The default data type for both temporary and intermediate files is double precision floating point which uses 8 bytes to store a pixel value Depending on your needs you can cut the size of your temporary files in half Set Preferences 1 Select Session Preferences from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar 2 Inthe Preference Editor select the Spatial Modeler category Tour Guides 381 Spatial Modeler 3 Set Float Temp Type to Single Precision Float 4 Set Float Intermediate Type to Single Precision Float Spatial Modeler by default also does not constrain the area your model processes so temporary files extend to the union of all your input images If for example you are doing an operation on two input images and your results are only valid in areas where both images exist then setting the following preference may significantly reduce your temporary space requirements 5 Set Window Rule to Intersection Also to ensure the temporary files get created on a disk drive where space is available check the following preference 6 Inthe Preference Editor select the User Interface amp Session category 7 Setthe Temporary File Directory to a local disk with sufficient free space In some cases you may be able to adequately predict the output data range of a calcu
259. at should be placed on the tape for later retrieval The new tape number is displayed in the scrolling list of available tapes Click the tape from the list Click Device to select the actual tape device to which you archive A list of configured tape devices displays In the Select Configured Devices dialog click the device to which you archive It must be configured as a non rewinding device 10 Click Select to select the device 11 In the Archive dialog click Archive to archive the selected image Tour Guides 67 9 Image Catalog 12 You are instructed to place the selected tape in the selected device Click Continue when the tape is loaded You are informed when the process is complete NOTE For subsequent images omit steps 3 through 6 ERDAS IMAGINE Ly zi 3 ix CHAPTER THREE Map Composer Introduction The ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer is an editor for creating cartographic quality maps and p presentation graphics Maps can include single or multiple continuous raster layers thematic GIS layers vector layers and annotation layers Map Composer s extensive annotation capabilities allow you to automatically generate text legends scale bars grid lines tick marks borders symbols and more You can select from over 16 million colors multiple line styles and over 60 text fonts Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 40 minutes Create a Map In this tutorial you create a map using th
260. ated steps in a process like the Installation of IMAGINE or Advanced Classification The Digital Hardcopy Documentation also contains programming reference material such as the ERDAS Macro Language Reference Manual which helps you design your own IMAGINE dialogs These documents may be found in the IMAGINE HOME help hardcopy folder To read the IMAGINE Digital Hardcopy Documentation you must install Adobe Acrobat Reader 4 0 or higher and follow all installation instructions provided by the software especially those regarding internet browser and Acrobat integration Following is a list of Digital Hardcopy Documentation that is available with ERDAS IMAGINE software e ERDAS Field Guide FieldGuide pdf e ERDAS IMAGINE Configuration Guide ConfigGuide pdf e ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides TourGuide pdf e ERDAS Macro Language Reference Manual EML pdf e ERDAS Spatial Modeler Language Reference Manual SML pdf e ERDAS IMAGINE Read Me First document e ERDAS IMAGINE V8 6 Release Notes e FLEXIm End Users Guide enduser pdf e What s New in ERDAS IMAGINE V8 6 The IMAGINE On Line Help Documentation is set up as a network of HTML files that are displayed in your default internet browser and provide quick informative chunks of information on all of the IMAGINE dialogs as well as additional explanatory notes and diagrams This HTML database includes JavaScript applets that provide an expanding and collapsing Table of Contents Index
261. atellite data ERS 1 Fuyo JERS 1 RADARSAT etc Click OK in the Slant Range Adjustment dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 10096 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically After processing is completed you must view and evaluate the resultant image and decide if another pass is needed to obtain the desired results 623 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V 624 ERDAS IMAGINE Ld fh ri ERDAS IMAGINE a i EmA La b du rA n r 4 5 Pm at 1 A z F E T A ij Lo E ke 3 B A i fa i A LET J v E d SECTION V IMAGINE Vector Tour Guides Section V IMAGINE Vector 626 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER TWENTY nay N IMAGINE Vector S Introduction The IMAGINE Vector capabilities are designed to provide you with an integrated GIS package for raster and vector processing The vector tools in ERDAS IMAGINE are based on the ESRI vector data model therefore ArcInfo vector coverages ESRI shapefiles and ESRI SDE vectors can be used in ERDAS IMAGINE with no conversion By integrating raster and vector data into one system you can compile a complete data base of your study area You can overlay vectors onto current and accurate raster layers to update your vector information including attributes You can also use vectors to define an area of interest for an operation such as classif
262. ath il Close lt Back Hext gt Finish Help 6 Select the Add Files button This opens the File Selector dialog Click the File Type popup list and select TIFF NOTE If you are working on the Windows platform files can be added to the Input list by dragging and dropping from Explorer 7 Select another TIFF file and then click the Multiple Files Selection tab 8 Click the Use the following Selection Pattern checkbox The default wild card displayed in the Selection Pattern field selects all TIFF files in the specified directory You may modify the wild card as needed Select Batch Files Files Permissions Multiple File Selection You can use this panel to select multiple files to be added E to the selection of files to process Clicking on the checkbox Recent i below will enable the Selection Pattern which is used to Click the Use the enter a wild card pattern that describes the files to be o foll Sel selected The pattem may contain and to match any oltowing selection characters When the pattem is set press OK to continue The Kanani OK button will not be enabled until a file has been selected Pattern checkbox on the File tah Deipip CDROM E Use the following Selection Pattem Selection Pattern cel The Selection Pattern bp CT ti ein is based on the file you choose for input cu Tour Guides 187 Batch Processing 9 Clickthe OK button on in the Mu
263. ation Path Information dialog A graphical model clean up mobility gmd is supplied for removing the salt and pepper classification pixels from the final land use map This model uses a focal majority but avoids altering the road and water classes Select File Close in the Viewer containing the classification Select File Close in the Knowledge Engineer dialog The knowledge base mobility factors ckb is an example of how a knowledge base can be built to take into account spatial rather than or as well as spectral per pixel relationships to derive land use information It also shows how commonly repeated tasks can be automated for repeating within an organization or to repeat the same methodology at other organizations instead of running several separate spatial models and trying to integrate the results the entire process is captured in one knowledge base that can be easily applied to other data and other locations with consistent results 595 IMAGINE Expert Classifier 596 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides SECTION ERDA E zi S IMA IMAGINE Radar Interp i EF gere GINE D d reter TM FA n m x 597 ui Section IV IMAGINE Radar Interpreter 598 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Introduction LI E 5 al y B i E v TEM FE z n F A x E i P i b TEN r T 1 s a pa F LN M TM E F A EM a a Building a mode
264. ave 2 X Mm 472474 4415343 08 2171 00 30 00 3000 00 0 00 360 00 Gear Center Create Delete Close The second observer is added in Row 2 Click Create 2 Click in the cell of the second observer s X column to enter 472474 65 then press Return on your keyboard 3 Click in the cell of the second observer s Y column to enter 4419343 08 then press Return on your keyboard ul 328 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 4 Click Apply in the Viewshed dialog Viewshed Analysis The second viewshed layer is generated and displays in the Viewer File Utility View AOI SUBELE Cumt 4 Portions of the two viewsheds intersect evidenced by the overlap of the red circles e gl s Naas E i E Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help 5 Click the Function tab in Viewshed dialog to view the legend The Function tab opens displaying the legend of the viewshed Viewshed 7 linked to Viewer 1 Function Observers Output Type Multiple Viewsheds tts Position Units Meters i Spokes n Lr Height Units Meters i iiernvais 2 Distance Units Meters i ei mee f Meters i Use Earth Curvature Start ne E Meters Maxima Search ooo E Meters Calor Definition Hidden Visible by 1 Observer ME iile by 2 Observer IN Perimeter l The legend displays here in the Function tab There are two basic kinds of output The Viewsh
265. ayer to Add dialog Deselect the Clear Display option Click OK to open subset snap img in the Viewer on top of dmtm img The subsetted image displays in the Viewer The pixels line up with the pixels in the original image 245 ui Image Interpreter 8 9 Apply Spatial Enhancement 1 2 Apply Convolution 1 246 Because the Inquire Box was snapped to the centers of the pixels before the image was processed the pixels in the output file will line up exactly with the pixels in the original image Click Close on the Viewer Click Close on the Utilities menu ERDAS IMAGINE should be running with a Viewer open In this section you use the convolution and crisp Spatial Enhancement functions to enhance images Click on the Interpreter icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Interpreter Select Spatial Enhancement from the Image Interpreter menu and the Spatial Enhancement menu opens The Image Interpreter menu opens Convolution Hon directional Edge Focal Analysis Texture Adaptive Filter Statistical Filter Resolution Merge Click here to see j an On Line Help file describing this Help dialog Select Convolution from the Spatial Enhancement menu and the Convolution dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Enter input file here Image Interpreter Select kernel from this scroll list Enter kernel to use Enter output file here
266. b List dialog If you wish you can check the files you just generated in a Viewer NOTE You may also wish to change your preferences back to the default of Compute Pyramid Layers in the Image Files General category of the Preference Editor This section deals with modification of automatically created variables for the purpose of generalizing a command file A new variable is helpful in the case of an application requiring multiple inputs The automatically created variables always consist of a single Input a single Output and as many Temp variables as necessary If you are creating a Batch command file that can be used by others it is much more readable if the Temp variables are replaced by variable names that are meaningful When creating variables it is important to know the distinction between User variables and Auto variables The value of a User variable is derived from the Select Files to Process panel You must provide the appropriate value for each User variable in the CellArray The value of an Auto variable is generated by the software from parameters specified in the pattern window of the Set dialog If you recall you worked with the dialog generated by pressing the Set button the Edit Replacement Pattern dialog in Modify Variables on page 198 In the following example you are going to create a variable OutputDir which enables another person to enter an output directory of his or her choice for files processed by Bat
267. b oo hd SESS bbs SoS EA ose E 352 Enhance SPOT Dala 2c 2 2 x wi codes ends oe RE dae we ewe we AOS RUE eee Oe ae od ur we ees 352 Defne Mpu SPOT ESVOE sssini dewey ate Rr dear aie de dn note x tied sa Bnd gm a ne i eb ec wa hh 354 Define Input Convolution Kernel 0 0 ee RR sn 354 b wn ssecinmPTT P n m 355 Define Output Raster Layer 0 ee ee eee hh hrs 356 Save and Run the Model xni dier oti teta dee Ged eons wor desis Ros P d Lc Gee aoe Ron ics 357 Fudge Model 2 uaerzariit ces EE PRI ERE IIEENI Ed EM EIER EE ES Ree eee nd bd ee 357 Combine Models 4 223 6m denotes drea eon needed oc Hope domum Rec dues Geop dde aoi dos 357 Combine Sensitivity Layer with SPOT Data rrr rrr 358 x ERDAS IMAGINE Define Input Scalar sac avs eom orari HER dX 3 8 eed dp orania E een dde aids nidi 359 Deline FUNCHON MPPMTTCP 359 Define Output Raster Layer 0 eee eee eee eens 361 Save and Run Ine Model csaa ss eai neta Rare Row det Soins wha A aed n ara eked ene a ae a 363 DISDIAYV NCW Lay iai uas d uiok ents oes drei 2 ra Se dn ied eee ed Ce hee ee iR wr dis diria 363 AOS COO M Tr 364 TesrThe OUIDUT eeu eso E uas ee See dur Ss Sees ieee awe de aura eee eee qe ee es 367 Add Annotation to a Model si ccc aur EXER ERREEESa E ERR heeded CRE we REE ER ER 368 Ad aA DUC cg aie accor ce oe ee oH
268. bar select View Arrange Layers The Arrange Layers dialog opens In the Arrange Layers dialog drag the Insoils img box on top of the lanier img box Click Apply then Close in the Arrange Layers dialog Select Raster Attributes from the Viewer menu bar The Raster Attribute Editor displays The objective is to select a class that covers a section of lanier img that you would like to see through nsoil img Then you can make that class transparent ERDAS IMAGINE Manipulate CellArray Information Tour Guides Viewer Select the class to become transparent either by clicking in the Viewer or in the Row column of the CellArray In the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray right hold on the color button in the Color column of the selected class and drag to select Other from the popup list that displays The Color Chooser dialog opens Standard Custom RGB IHS n 0 452 ro NN aa c oos JF o _ cha fo NEN oo o NN Use Color J Use Opacity Auto Apply changes Click here and enter 40 or Click checkbox use the slider bar at right to set to use opacity the number field to 40 In the Color Chooser dialog click on the Use Opacity checkbox At O which stands for Opacity change the number to 40 opacity percentage of 40 using either the number field or the slider bar Click Apply in the Color Chooser dialog The selected color becomes partially transparent allowing you to see anier img
269. bing this dialog 2 Select Utilities from the Image Interpreter menu and the Utilities menu opens Change Detection Functions Operators RGB Clustering Adv RGB Clustering Layer Stack subset Create File Rescale MOS Click here to see Degrade an On Line Help Replace Bad Lines file describing this Vector To Raster dialog Reproject Close Help 3 Select Subset from the Utilities menu and the Subset dialog opens 240 ERDAS IMAGINE Enter input file here Bint img m Tour Guides Image Interpreter subset ou Input File img Output File 1mg Enter output file here subset no snap imq Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Bos Map TwoComers Four Comers File UL 163841 6 25 LR X 1702304 25 E Click here to import UL 288610 87 LR 204884 97 H coordinates ux pm ux foo from the Inquire Box in the Viewer A 0 00 LL 0 00 Data Type Input Unsigned 8 bit Output Unsigned 8 bit Output Continuous Output Options Number of Input layers Ignore Zero in Output Stats Click here to start dentis 7 the Subsetting process Use a comma for separated list e 1 3 5 or enter ranges using a te 2 5 J i Du Cancel Help _ Under Input File in the Subset dialog enter
270. ble P 3 Main Menu Options Continued Selection Functionality Image Interpreter Open the Image Interpreter menu Image Catalog Open the Image Catalog dialog Image Classification Open the Classification menu Spatial Modeler Open the Spatial Modeler menu Vector Open the Vector Utilities menu Radar Open the Radar menu VirtualG IS Open the VirtualGIS menu OrthoBASE Open the OrthoBASE Startup dialog Stereo Analyst Open the Stereo Analyst Workspace Tools Menu 3 Click on the word Tools in the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The Tools menu opens Edit Text Files Edit Raster Attributes View Binary Data View IMAGINE HFA File Structure Annotation Information Image Information vector Information Image Command Tool Coordinate Calculator Create Display Movie Sequences Create Display Viewer Sequences Image Drape The following table contains the Tools menu selections and their functionalities Table P 4 Tools Menu Options Edit Text Files Create and edit ASCII text files Edit Raster Attributes Edit raster attribute data View Binary Data View the contents of binary files in a number of different ways xxiv ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Table P 4 Tools Menu Options Continued View IMAGINE HFA File Structure 6 the contents of the ERDAS IMAGINE hierarchical files Annotation Information View information for annotation files inc
271. buffer 111 i Vector Querying and Editing Create Attributes 112 10 1 12 Click anywhere in Viewer 2 then select Vector Paste from the Viewer 2 menu bar The selected vectors are displayed in Viewer 2 In Viewer 2 click outside of all lines and points of the vector layer to deselect everything In the Attributes dialog select File Close In the menu bar of Viewer 2 select File Save Top Layer In the menu bar of Viewer 2 select Vector Attributes The Attributes dialog displays but it is empty because this new layer has no attribute data It must be cleaned or built You can also create attributes using the Edit Create Attributes option of the Attributes dialog Use this method now then run Build later In the Attributes dialog select View Point Attributes to select point attributes for display In the Attributes dialog select Edit Create Attributes The Attributes CellArray fills with the basic point attributes Next you create a new column in the Attributes CellArray for the ZONING attribute that you exported from the original Attributes CellArray In the Attributes dialog select Edit Column Attributes The Column Attributes dialog opens Column Attributes Columns Specify column PoINT_x L parameters here POINT Y ail AREA PERIMETER Type nteger 7 ZONESSSUBSET ZONESSSUBSET ID Precision Single iW Decgne PRaDOS OF Click hereto
272. cal axis The same settings are applied to the vertical axis 10 Click the Vertical Axis tab to verify neatline and label information for the vertical axis 79 Map Composer 11 Click Apply in the Set Grid Tick Info dialog to place the neatline and tick marks on the map 12 If you are satisfied with the appearance of the neatline click Close in the Set Grid Tick Info dialog Otherwise you may make adjustments in the Set Grid Tick Info dialog and click Hedo to apply them Your map should look similar to the following EX Utility View Annotation stabUpdate Inquire Cursor Change Text Line The text and line styles used for neatlines tick marks and grid lines depend on the default Styles settings in the Styles dialog You can either set the styles before adding this annotation to your map or you can change the styles once they are placed in the map Next set the line style to 1 point for the neatline and tick marks and the text size to 10 points for the tick labels 1 Select the group of ticks tick labels and the neatline by clicking on any of the number labels outside of the map frame A selection box displays around the entire group 2 From the Map Composer viewer menu bar select Annotation Styles The Styles dialog opens 80 ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer Hold on this popup list to select Other Line Style Fil Style MN Text Style AaBbCc Bl Symbol Style Bl 3 In
273. ce Setup dialog select GCP File under Collect Reference Points From and then click OK The Reference GCC File dialog opens 3 Inthe Reference GCC File dialog under Filename select ps camera gcc The reference points in this file were obtained from USGS 1 24 000 scale topographical maps using a digitizer 4 Click OK in the Reference GCC File dialog A Chip Extraction Viewer the second Viewer a link box and the GCP Tool open GCP fool Input ps napp img Reference ps camera gec Hle View Edit Point amp Point ID Colr Xinput Vinptt gt X Ref YRe ZRet Type 1 GCP 1 E 1401 178 2101 550 544657 837 3740713 772 118 872 Control GCP 2 Ea 850 187 2214 532 542301 251 3740224473 132 588 Control GCP 3 m 808 021 5713726 541383 315 37472B50 584 188 365 Control GCP 4 E 1270 101 1e71 888 544030 350 3744286400 147 218 Control J GCP 9 1687 299 530 5043 ada 87 255 3f472853 531 193 105 Control al L 1 E o V V These file coordinates were These reference coordinates previously measured and saved are from the ps camera gcc file in the source file ps napp img 5 Inthe GCP Tool click on the Calculate 1con zi NOTE The orthorectification models do not have the option of Automatic Transform Calculation Tour Guides 275 Orthorectification Clicking this icon solves the model and calculates the RMS
274. ced points Supported input data include e ASCII point files e Arc point and line coverages e ERDAS IMAGINE ovr layers e existing raster images IMG All input data sources must have X Y and Z values Surface Interpolation calculates Z values at spatial locations where no Z samples exist in the input data source The output is a continuous raster image that contains Z values calculated from the interpolation process The ERDAS IMAGINE Surface Tool uses a TIN interpolation method At each point where there is a known value that known value remains unchanged in the output surface Where the value is not known it is interpolated from the surrounding known values Two TIN interpolation methods are available in the Surface Tool Linear and Nonlinear The Linear interpolation method which makes use of a first order polynomial equation results in the TIN triangles being defined as angular planes The Nonlinear interpolation method which uses a fifth order polynomial results in a smooth surface In this case the TIN triangle areas are not considered to be planes but areas that have rubber sheet characteristics The Linear interpolation method is quicker and the results more predictable However the Nonlinear interpolation method produces more continuous results from irregularly distributed data sets where the observed phenomena has a rolling nonangular surface characteristic Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 15 minut
275. cel Help Click here to start copy 3 Inthe Copy Vector Layer dialog under Vector Layer to Copy select the file named zone88 4 Under Output Vector Layer enter zone88 in the directory of your choice This should be the directory from which you started ERDAS IMAGINE ERDAS IMAGINE Vector Querying and Editing 5 Click OK in the Copy Vector Layer dialog A Job Status dialog displays to track the progress of the function When the Copy ArcInfo coverage process is complete the files are copied and you are ready to proceed with this tour guide 6 Click Close in the Vector Utilities menu to dismiss it Display Vector ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open You must have completed Layers the section Copy Vector Data on page 95 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select File Open Vector Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Enter vector Confirm that the layer to Files vector Options 1 directory listed display here Filename arcinfo Directory here IS the fol examples Recent directory in which you Goto Rename Delete copied zone88 imagine CDROM Click here to examples Eg info Cancel display the E lanier dms Hep vector layer Hle Type Arc Coverage A E dza Files 2 subdirectories 4 Matched 412587K Bytes Free 2 Under Filename select zone88 from the directory in which you saved it in the last section 3 Cl
276. cel in the List of Recent Filenames dialog 4 In the Select Layer To Add dialog click on the Goto button A dialog with a listing of the most recent directories you have opened displays You can individually select these directories or enter the name of a new directory and then click OK to display that directory quickly in the Select Layer To Add dialog 5 Click Cancel in the Select a Directory dialog NOTE The Recent and Goto buttons in the Select Layer To Add dialog are helpful for quickly locating and displaying a file or directory you work with often Tour Guides 7 Viewer Display Options Filename Part The framepart under Filename is called a filename part A filename part is a tool used to select specific files for use in an ERDAS IMAGINE function A filename part consists of e a text field for entering the file name by typing it in or clicking on the file from the scroll list e a scrolling list shows the name of all files with the default extension in the selected directory Files can be selected by clicking on the name in the list In the filename part of the Select Layer To Add dialog click on the file Janier img This is a Landsat TM image of the Gainesville Georgia area including Lake Lanier Information about this file is reported in the bottom left corner of the Select Layer To Add dialog This true color image has seven bands 512 columns and 512 rows The Raster Options display Click this
277. cess First you display the image to be rectified and an image that is already georeferenced ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and a Viewer open Click the Viewer icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel to open a second Viewer The second Viewer displays on top of the first Viewer Tour Guides 135 Polynomial Rectification 136 4 In the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Tile Viewers to position the Viewers side by side In the first Viewer s tool bar click the Open icon or select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click here to select Raster Options Select the tmAtlanta file c Select Layer Jo Add Files Pennissiggs Raster Options erame img small tm imtg spots img spotxs img File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 312 Rows x a12 Columns x 6 Bandis oto Pn Deis In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on the file tmAtlanta img This file is a Landsat TM image of Atlanta This image has not been rectified Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog The Raster Options display in the Select Layer To Add dialog CDROM Cancel Help UNT A preview of the image displays here ERDAS IMAGINE Start GCP Tool Polynomial Rectification Click thi list Click OK when Display as Gray Scale A 9K Recent j Display Layer Goto PRE Disp
278. cess could take up to 15 minutes depending upon your hardware capabilities In the Job Status dialog click OK when the process is 10096 complete Proceed to the Use Unsupervised Classification section to analyze the classes so that you can identify and assign class names and colors 129 Classification Evaluate Classification Create Classification Overlay Display Files 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 130 After a classification is performed you can use a classification overlay or recode the classes to evaluate and test the accuracy of the classification In this example you use the Raster Attribute Editor to compare the original image data with the individual classes of the thematic raster layer that was created from the unsupervised classification germtm isodata img This process helps identify the classes in the thematic raster layer You may also use this process to evaluate the classes of a thematic layer that was generated from a supervised classification ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and you should have a Viewer open Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar to display the germtm img continuous raster layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click on this file tab to see the raster options Click here to select germtm img In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select germtm img Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Files
279. ch For this exercise you have selected a number of files that you want to reproject First you have to start the application from which you launch the Batch Wizard ERDAS IMAGINE must be running Click the Interpreter icon From the mage Interpreter menu select Utilities From the Utilities menu select Subset The Subset dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Start Batch Wizard Tour Guides Batch Processing Output File tif You can use the Select Subset dialog to Inaspect img as generate TIFF the Input File files ULX 233085 00 LR amp 248415 00 fF ULY 3807070 00 LR Y 3791740 00 Input Unsigned 16 bit Output Unsigned 16 bit iW Output Thematic i Output Options Number of Input layers 1 Ignore Zero in Output Stats select Layers Use a comma for separated list i e 1 3 5 or enter ranges using a i e 2 5 In the Subset dialog click the Open icon underneath Input File In the Input File dialog navigate to the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory Choose the file Inaspect img from the examples directory Click OK in the Input File dialog to transfer the file to the Subset dialog Click the Open icon underneath Output File In the Output File dialog navigate to the directory of your choice Click the File Type dropdown list and select TIFF In the Filename window type Inaspect then press Return on your keyboard The tif extension is appende
280. cilitates defining the conditional statement within the function These recodes are done at the same time the files are defined in the Raster dialog ou must have Model Maker running NOTE Refer to the model pictured on page 341 when going through the following steps 1 Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 2 Click on the Lock icon 340 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler uj a 3 Click in the Model Maker viewer in four different places to place three input Raster graphics and one output Raster graphic 4 Select the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette ol 5 Click in the Model Maker viewer window to place a Function graphic on the page between the three inputs and the one output Raster graphic 6 Select the Connect icon in the Model Maker tool palette Al 7 Connect the three input Raster graphics to the Function and the Function to the output Raster by simply dragging from one graphic to another Your model should look similar to the following example 8 In the Model Maker tool palette click the Lock icon to disable the lock tool 9 Click the Select icon Tour Guides 341 Spatial Modeler N 10 In the Model Maker viewer menu bar select Model Set Window to define the working window for the model The Set Window dialog opens Set Window Set Window To Intersection 4 Mop y fis From denuse Box Click on this popup list to select Intersection
281. ck Close in the Properties dialog An Attention dialog displays asking if you want to save your changes to a symbology file Click No In the Viewer menu bar select Vector Tools The Vector tool palette displays In the Vector tool palette move the selector over each of the icons to view the single line help that describes them in the lower portion of the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Vector Enable Editing 107 Vector Querying and Editing 108 10 11 12 In the Viewer click on a line that you want to edit The selected line is highlighted in yellow and it is enclosed in a rotation box You can simply hold and drag the entire box to move the line You can hold and drag any of the handles on the box to enlarge or reduce the size of the line or you can rotate the box In the Vector tool palette click on the Split tool e Your pointer is now a white crosshair when you move it back into the Viewer Click somewhere on the selected line to split it into two lines A node is placed where you clicked Click again on the line you split Only that part of the line is selected since it is now two lines Shift click on the other part of the split line Now both parts of the line are selected In the Viewer menu bar select Vector Join The node is removed and the two lines form a single line again With the line still selected select Vector Reshape from the Viewer menu bar The vert
282. classification germtm superclass img ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and you must have germtm superclass img displayed in a Viewer Tassifler Click on the Classifier icon Classification utility in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel to start the The Classification menu displays Select Threshold from the Classification menu to start the Threshold dialog The Threshold dialog opens 491 Advanced Classification Select Classified and Distance Images 492 1 ij Threshold germtm superclass img Viewers I Li mj xj File View Set Histograms Process Help Ehi Square Parameters Confidence Level 0 050 cWisquse 12590 HBande B Classification e Maximum Likelihood Click Close in the Classification menu to clear it from the screen In the Threshold dialog select File Open or click the Open icon 1 to define the classified image and distance image files The Open Files dialog opens ia Open Files ES Type in the correct Cera ae ee REDE x path name and ge img ge img then press Return here Baf errin superclass img germim distance ima r germtm distance ing germtm Isadata imq germtm superclass img s aMEGgermtm distance imq a germtm Isadata imq A germtm superclass img Click here to load files 5 tow E tow i In the Open Files dialog under Classified Image open the directory in which you previously saved germtm_superclass img by
283. click on View and make sure that Point Attributes is selected 110 ERDAS IMAGINE Export Zoning Attributes Tour Guides Vector Querying and Editing 17 In Viewer 1 click on the Zoom Out by 2 icon Click on the Ellipse Marquee icon in the Vector tool palette Shift drag to draw a circle over the vector layer in Viewer 1 The lines and points completely contained within the circle are selected in the Viewer and in the Attributes CellArray You are going to export the ZONING attributes for the selected rows and import them into the new vector layer you are creating in Viewer 2 Click the ZONING column header in the Attributes CellArray to select that column use the bottom scroll bar to view the ZONING column The ZONING column is highlighted in green With your cursor in a column header of the Attributes CellArray right hold Column Options Export The Export Column Data dialog opens Export To dat Enter a name Click here to for the ASCII zoning 1 options export data iE to an ASCII LL infor Cancel file ras files zone88 Help zoneB8subset tour Ej In the Export Column Data dialog enter a name for the ASCII file you are creating such as zoning The dat extension is added automatically Click OK in the Export Column Data dialog Select Vector Copy from the Viewer 1 menu bar The selected lines and points are copied into the paste
284. click on the word Opacity at the top of the Opacity column to select the Opacity column Right hold on the word Opacity and select Formula from the Column Options menu The Formula dialog opens I Formula lt COSCS Columns Functions Formats Click here to Pineda enter a 0 in aci b the Formula Llass Mames Hed Green Blue Click here to min ca b apply a 0 value to the Opacity pns column Click here to close this dialog 3 In the Formula dialog click 0 in the number pad A Qis placed in the Formula field Tour Guides 489 Advanced Classification Use the Flicker Utility 490 10 11 12 13 In the Formula dialog click Apply to change all of the values in the Opacity column to 0 and then click Close In the Raster Attribute Editor hold on the color patch under Color for Class 1 in the CellArray and change the color to Yellow This provides better visibility in the Viewer Change the Opacity for Class 1 in the CellArray to 7 and then press Return on the keyboard This class is shown in the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Utility Flicker to analyze which pixels have been assigned to this class The Viewer Flicker dialog opens Turn on the Auto Mode in the Viewer Flicker dialog The flashing black pixels in the germtm img file are the pixels of this class These areas are water In the Raster Attribute Editor click inside the Class Names column for Class 1 Change this name
285. con or right click on the hypothesis graphic and select Enable Save the knowledge base by selecting File Save As Navigate to a directory in which you have write permission and name the file ResComm Class ckb Click OK in the Save Classification Knowledge Base As dialog Select File Close from the Knowledge Engineer dialog which is now entitled ResComm_Class ckb to finish ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Create a Portable This exercise is going to give you practice creating and using a portable knowledge base In this Knowledge Base example you use a knowledge base to determine areas most suitable for cross country travel Data Data available for the project includes the following e alandcover classification supervised img e a DEM 30meter img e amap of minor and major roads roads img e a near infrared degraded air photo with 30m resolution mason ap img The file supervised img shows a typical landcover classification derived from Landsat TM data a portion of the Landsat scene is provided as tm 860516 img along with the signature file tm 860516 sig which was used to produce a maximum likelihood classification The image shows the distribution of broad landcover categories such as different types of forestry human made features water and open ground However it does not show the land use of each pixel or how each pixel could be put to use Consider a scenario whereby someone wishes to traverse
286. cond Viewer To view all of the information for the image in your first Viewer in one convenient form highlight that file in the Image Catalog by clicking on the Record number of that file The file is highlighted in yellow In the Image Catalog dialog select View Form View or click the Catalog Default icon BI The Form View dialog opens listing the characteristics of the file you selected In the bottom left corner of the Form View dialog there are up and down arrows Click twice on the down arrow noting that the information in the Form View dialog corresponds with the highlighted file in the Image Catalog Click Close to close the Form View dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Modify Views Tour Guides Image Catalog Another way to view information on individual files is to use the ImageInfo dialog Select View Image Info from the Image Catalog or click the Info icon Be The ImageInfo dialog opens Select File Close from the ImageInfo dialog In the Graphical Query viewer select File Area Definition The Area Definition dialog opens Enter the coordinates manually here Upper Left Lower Right Apply or a 205 Ex 7656 E Open Y azzo f Y js2 oF Save F ollow these select area by clicking and dragging to Cancel instructions here NINE draw a box in the graphical viewer Help The Area Definition dialog lets you store the extent of particular areas of interest for quick retrieval For
287. corner of the dialog click the checkbox Temporary Raster Only Click OK in the Raster dialog Double click the Vector object in the lower left corner of the model The Vector dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE 402 Add Function Properties Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Cell Size select a n vector Layer i Vector Layer Hame arcinfo mem a Loo E es JE Poen inl Processing Window Use Default Specify j Prompt for File at Run Time Select zone88 in the From Inquire Box ULxX 709035 0106 LR x 740858 9263 E ULY 502529 4288 LR Y azz242 4462 i examples directory Cell Value 4 Use Record Humber Wi r Custom Recode emi PIG Area of Interest Declare as iy Integer Fl Choose AOI Rasterize To Memory Only iW OK Cancel Help Feature Type POLYGON Click the Open icon under Vector Layer Name 1 In the Vector Layer Name dialog navigate to the examples directory and select zone8 Click OK in the Vector Layer Name dialog Click OK in the Vector dialog to accept the Vector Layer Name Double click the final Function object The Function Definition dialog opens 403 ui Spatial Modeler Add Raster Properties 404 10 Available Inputs Select the n5 memory u CONDITIONAL testi agi Conditional n9 zone8 EITHER argil IF lt test gt OR 1 INDEX te
288. ct 82 edit 92 grid lines 69 78 group elements 78 legend 69 line style 69 lines 80 scale bar 69 style 80 change 80 symbol 69 647 ui Index text 69 80 font 69 point size 80 tools grid line 79 legend 84 map frame 73 scale bar 82 select map frame 77 symbol 89 tick mark 69 79 Annotation Text dialog 86 89 AOI 22 456 472 selecting signatures 459 AOI Cutline icon 299 AOI Styles dialog 24 AOI tool palette 23 293 299 459 Archive dialog 67 ArcInfo vector coverage 95 627 Area Definition dialog 65 Area Fill dialog 35 Arrange Layers dialog 15 22 38 78 463 468 471 Attention dialog 107 Attribute Options dialog 481 Attributes viewer 101 110 112 B Band Combinations dialog 50 Band to color gun assignment 3 Batch add multiple files 190 create new variable 202 modify commands automatically 203 modify commands manually 185 multiple files multiple commands 193 multiple files single command 183 188 process later 188 process now 183 save load options 207 single file single command 182 use commands as they are 182 Batch scheduler NT 180 Bicubic Spline 9 148 276 648 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index Bilinear Interpolation 9 148 276 Box Zoom 18 Breakpoint Editor 28 Brightness 27 adjust 26 Brightness Adjustment dialog 621 Brightness Inversion dialog 253 Build 643 Build Vector Layer Topology dialog 644 C Camera Model 265 Camera Model Properties dialog 268 Canvas 295 Catalog icon 61 Ca
289. ct Edit Column Properties to rearrange the columns in the CellArray so that they are easier to view The Column Properties dialog opens Type String I Hieray BOB Alignment Left i this column Formula A B More Click here to 4 Default only Apply on OK Auto Apply move the selected column up Click here to rearrange columns Display Width In the Column Properties dialog under Columns select Opacity then click Up to move Opacity so that it is under Histogram Select Class Names then click Up to move Class Names so that it is under Color Click OK in the Column Properties dialog to rearrange the columns in the Raster Attribute Editor The Column Properties dialog closes The data in the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray should appear similar to the following example 131 ui Classification faster Attribute Editor germim_fsedata imgCLaver_ au Hle Edit A Ci Kil El Layer Humber n F pm Histogram Opacity Color 0 RUN nce a m 2 eass Cas 2 li c a mmm ces E s055 rm oss 4 irs 3 aia 140930 1 Class il Analyze Individual Before you can begin to analyze the classes individually you need to set the opacity for all of Classes the classes to zero 1 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor click on the word Opacity at the top of the Opacity column to select all of the classes 2 Inthe Raster Attribu
290. cted before 1024 pixels are analyzed then you have the option to continue searching for more random points NOTE If you are having problems generating a large number of points you should increase the Search Count to a larger number The Distribution Parameters should be set to Random Click OK to generate the random points The Add Random Points dialog closes and the Job Status dialog opens This dialog automatically closes when the process is completed A list of the points is shown in the Accuracy Assessment CellArray ij Accuracy Assessment germtm_superclass img Vieu erg File Edit view Report Help ini x a A Pont Name X Y _ Y j Class Reference a DH r44724 00 53853 50 745284 00 710964 00 755844 00 445503 50 467 703 50 Si Si Si 474023500 Si Si Si i f6o524 00 698164 00 T41844 00 Fob004 00 696324 000 461625 50 43786350 44962350 45682350 498983 EDD sj SoS S 5 o S o 5 St iS a n an E Co In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select View Show All All of the random points display in the germtm img file in the Viewer These points are white Analyze and evaluate the location of the reference points in the Viewer to determine their class value In the Accuracy Assessment CellArray Reference column enter your best guess of a reference relating to the perceived class value for the pixel below each reference point As you enter a value
291. ction Select Brightness Inversion trom the Radiometric Enhance menu The Brightness Inversion dialog opens In the Brightness Inversion dialog enter loplakebedsig357 img as the input file Enter reverse img in the directory of your choice as the Output File Turn on the Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit checkbox under Output Options Click OK in the Brightness Inversion dialog to start the process A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function Open a Viewer and display inverse img Right hold within the Viewer and select Fit Window to Image trom the Quick View menu The Viewer changes size to bound the image data Select View Split Split Vertical from the Viewer menu bar A second Viewer opens In the second Viewer click on the Open icon this is the same as selecting File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar y d The Select Layer To Add dialog opens From the Select Layer To Add dialog open the file reverse img In the second Viewer select View Split Split Vertical from the Viewer menu bar A third Viewer opens With your cursor in Viewer 3 press Cfrl r on your keyboard this is just another way to open a raster layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens From the Select Layer To Add dialog open the file loplakebedsig357 img ERDAS IMAGINE Image Interpreter 9 Resize the Viewers on screen so that you can see all three Viewers Note the differences between reverse img and
292. ction here Enter center coordinate here Central Gain 9 00 F Enter radius here OK Cancel Help This option is the same as if you were to click on the Circular Mask icon on the tool bar ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Fourier Transform Editor In the Circular Mask dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Butterworth Enter 58 for the Circle Center U and 199 for the Circle Center V Enter a Circle Radius of 20 Click OK in the Circular Mask dialog to edit the fft layer The bright spot disappears This edit does not affect the appearance of this particular image very much since it is such a small area and because the edited area is quite far from the center of the image where most of the image content is contained However this technique can be used to remove spikes caused by errant detectors and other types of periodic noise that are manifested by concentrated areas of high or low frequency in the fft layer As an experiment you create two circles of low frequency to see how they affect the image In the Fourier Editor select Mask Circular Mask In the Circular Mask dialog enter a Circle Center U of 44 and a Circle Center V of 57 Enter a Circle Radius of 20 00 and a Central Gain of 10 00 Click OK in the Circular Mask dialog The fft layer and resulting image look like the following example Viewer 7 cma img Layer 7 J Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector
293. culator click 0 The Criteria should now read Red gt 0 This criteria selects all classes in the CellArray with an area that is greater than 0 Click Select in the Selection Criteria dialog to select these rows in the CellArray All rows except 0 12 and 34 are selected 1 e highlighted in yellow These rows are not selected because the opacity for each of these categories 1s 0 Click Close in the Selection Criteria dialog With your cursor in a Class_Names title box right hold Column Options Report The Report Format Definition dialog opens 43 M Viewer Title Enter report title aster Attribute Editor and header here Enter text to Footer precede the page Aa f yaaaa number on the bottom dici of the report Page Size was 5 F Height 55 1 Height i Specify statistics Statistics to include here Count Minimum Mean Maximum Standard Deviation Click here to generate a report OK Cancel Help In the Report Format Definition dialog under Title add for Insoils img to the default text string Under Header add for Insoils img to the default text string Under Statistics click on each checkbox to include all available statistics in the report Click OK in the Report Format Definition dialog to generate the report A Job Status dialog opens indicating the progress of the function When the function is complete the report displays in an
294. d automatically Click OK in the Output File dialog Click the Batch button in the Subset dialog In the Select Type of Command Processing panel of the Batch Wizard dialog click the Modify commands automatically checkbox Then click Next gt The Edit Commands Create Variables panel displays 203 Batch Processing The Input and Output variables are automatically assigned Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined Commands Variables if a 1 P m 4 E EET Qose Back Next gt feiss Help 3 Click the Variables tab on the Edit Commands Create Variables panel Click on the Output variable to observe its properties Click the Output variable to observe its properties Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined Commands Variables Type Auto i Pattern met morticia export array1 idor sat W Delete Before Processing Delete After Processing Hew Delete tinh Close Back Hext gt PHUSH Help Notice in the Pattern window of the Variables tab that the path to the Output fil
295. d for all subsequent mouse driven editing options However you can change this window at any time The Minimum Affected Frequency option allows you to enter the minimum frequency value that is affected by the filter Setting this value to a number less than 10 00 might eliminate very low frequency data that are crucial to the content of the image In the Filter Options dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select deal Click OK The first tool you use is the Low Pass Filter tool Click the Low Pass Filter icon on the Fourier Editor tool bar n With your cursor in the center of the Fourier Editor drag toward the right until the u coordinate in the status bar reads 80 Then release the mouse The image is filtered as soon as the mouse is released This is equivalent to the second filtering operation you performed using the menu bar tools You can select Edit Undo at any time to undo an edit Select File Revert to undo a series of edits The Low Pass Filter tool remains active until you either select another tool or click the Select tool Next you use the High Pass Filter tool Select Edit Filter Options from the Fourier Editor menu bar 231 Fourier Transform Editor 232 10 In the Filter Options dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Hanning Click OK in the Filter Options dialog Click the High Pass Filter icon on the tool bar With your cursor in the center of
296. dar Interpreter module 599 Import Column Data 113 Import Generic Binary Data 172 Import Options 163 283 Import SPOT 160 Import Export 160 165 621 623 653 Index 654 Indices 259 Inquire Box Coordinates 164 345 Inquire Color 11 Inquire Cursor 10 27 150 463 Inquire Shape 12 Interpolate 34 Inverse Fourier Transform 222 Job Status 162 248 303 309 321 465 630 Knowledge Base Editor 560 Legend Properties 84 Limits 469 Line Style Chooser 81 99 106 Link Unlink Instructions 20 367 Linked Cursors 466 List of Recent Files 7 Low High Pass Filter 219 Map Frame 74 77 Map Frame Data Source 73 Matching Options 297 308 315 320 Matrix 354 Model Librarian 372 New Column 633 New Map Composition 70 New Vector Layer 109 114 Open FFT Layer 217 Open Files 492 Open Info Table 631 Options 54 102 110 Output Image Options 301 Overlay True Color on Surface 52 Page Setup 373 Polynomial Model Properties 138 145 148 Position Parameters 56 Preview Options 161 162 Print 14 374 Print Map Composition 91 Projection Chooser 274 Properties 98 105 Radar Speckle Suppression 602 604 612 Raster 340 342 345 347 350 354 377 Read Points 282 Recode 345 347 Rectangular Mask 228 Red Mouse Linear Mapping 31 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index Reference GCC File 275 Region Grow Options 461 Region Growing Properties 24 461 Relate Manager 635 Report Format Definition 43 Resam
297. dd Column dialog next to Column Name enter NEW ZONING Next to Column Type click on the popup list to select Integer Click OK in the Add Column dialog The NEW ZONING column is added to ZONE88 NEW PAT ERDAS IMAGINE Relate the Tables Tour Guides Enter the new Zoning info in this column IMAGINE Vector Let s say that you want to compare the Zoning information in ZONE88 PAT with some new zoning information that you have just received First you would need to enter the new zoning information in the NEW ZONING column of the ZONE88 NEW PAT Table Tool Follow the example and enter imaginary numbers which somewhat differ from the ZONING numbers into the NEW ZONING column Enter the numbers by clicking in each cell typing the number and pressing Return on your keyboard NOTE For this example it would suffice to only enter numbers for rows I through 13 To enter numbers select Edit Enable Editing Table Tool ZONE88_NEW PAT Hle Edit Utilities Relate View ajoj Of a wu e lt ony ZOMEa88 ID EW ZONING Pa ra m m E E mj may onj ca ce ra l co l on E ij ra r Co i ra 4 5l l eeu 8 3 15 11 12 X If you had an ASCII file with the new data in it you could use the Column Options Import option In the ZONE88 NEW PAT Table Tool click the Save icon to save your changes fd In the ZONE88 NEW PAT Table Too
298. dd Images The Add Images for Mosaic dialog opens Wa Add Images for Mosaic X Image Filename img air phato 1 imq pr Select this file 30meter img 4 2 Img 4 3 1mg i 4 4 img air photo 1 ing air photo 2 ing all spotp_ 8y img atl spotp 92 img badlines img Method Individual File Image Area Options C Use Entire Image C Crop Area C Compute Active Area and then click the accompanying Set button 294 ERDAS IMAGINE Mosaic 4 Under Image Filename select air photo 1 img 5 Under Image Area Options click the Template AOI button and then click the accompanying Set button The Choose AOI dialog opens Mi Choose ADI E X ou may use na AUI select one from a Viewer or select one previously saved in a file Select an ALI Source Click on this radio button C Mone C Viewer Enter the appropriate path and file name here Click here when finished 6 Inthe Choose AOI dialog under AOI Source select File 7 Under AOI File select template aoi from the directory in which you saved it 8 Click OK in the Choose AOI dialog 9 Select Edit Image List from the Mosaic Tool viewer The Mosaic Image List displays 10 Click Add in the Add Images for Mosaic dialog The data for air photo 1 img display in the Mosaic Image List CellArray and a graphic of the image displays on the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer Tour Guides 295 Mosaic 11 In the Add Image
299. development Classes 3 1 are also environmentally sensitive but proportionally less so Further analysis determines whether classes 3 1 are eligible for development Take a moment to check over the conditional statement you just entered to be sure it is 100 accurate The model does not run 1f the information has not been entered accurately Click OK in the Function Definition dialog The Function Definition dialog closes and CONDITIONAL is written under the Function graphic In the Model Maker viewer double click the output Raster graphic The graphic is highlighted and the Raster dialog opens Under File Name type the name sensitivity img for the new output file NOTE Be sure that you specify a directory in which you have write permission Click the Delete if Exists option so that the output file is automatically overwritten when the model is run again Click on the File Type popup list and select Thematic Click OK in the Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n4 sensitivity is written under the output Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer Your model should look similar to the following example ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Mew Model Hle Edit Model Text Process BERCE 3 e ea s 4 zial nl slope RC n2 floo dplain landcover RC n4 sensitivity Save and Run the Model 1 In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Save icon or select File Save As from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to
300. dialog opens Modeler running model EGMD 008221 Job State Done Percent Done 100 0 ET 100 OK Sanna Help You receive an error like the following 436 ERDAS IMAGINE Check the On Line Help Tour Guides Spatial Modeler C9 Assignment to incompatible object type OK OK to All The next step is to figure out what this error means Click OK to dismiss the Error dialog Click OK to dismiss the Job Status dialog When a model is executed an Assignment statement is generated for each Function object in the model The error is telling you that one of the Function objects in the model is generating a different object type than what you have it connected to You know that in one of our Function objects we using the GLOBAL MAX function and in the other you are just doing arithmetic At this point you can use the online documentation to help out Click Help Help for Model Maker Click on the hyperlink to the Spatial Modeler Language Reference Manual in the third paragraph The on line manual is in Adobe portable document format SML pdf It will open in a new browser window In the Navigation Pane click on the beside Section II SML Function Syntax to view all topics included in that section Click on the Arithmetic topic to open that page in the Acrobat viewer 437 Spatial Modeler Click here to expand Section Il Click here to display the Arithmetic page E
301. dms f the image displays here File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 1143 Rows x 1171 Columns x 3 Bandis In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on wasia1_mss img Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Click the Clear Display option to disable it this ensures that currently displayed files are not cleared in the Viewer Click the Background Transparent option to enable it Check to be sure that the Fit to Frame option is enabled Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file wasia1_mss img displays in the Viewer Repeat steps 1 through 7 opening wasia2 mss img and wasia3 tm img in the same Viewer you used for wasia1_mss img ERDAS IMAGINE Mosaic 9 When finished you should be able to see all three files in the Viewer Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel The Data Preparation menu displays W Data Preparation X Create Surface Subset Image Select Mosaic Images a Image Geometric Correction Unsupervised Classification Hepraject Images Recalculate Elevation Values Imagizer Data Prep Make RPF TOC 11 In the Data Preparation menu select Mosaic Images The Mosaic Tool viewer opens Tour Guides 305 ui Mosaic Add Images for Mosaic 306 Mosaic Tool 7 No File jo seee PEPECDER Menu bar Files to be mosaicked are displayed on
302. e Target Column Dismiss zONERB8 ID Help NOTE At this point you can click Save in the Relate Manager dialog to save the relates to a table for future use Click OK in the Relate Manager dialog ZONESG8 PAT is now related to ZONE88 NEW PAT ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Vector Hle Edit Utilities Relate View Ol D ee alal el el amp x Row OMEGG t OMEGS ID ZONING RA zGNMEB8 ID RA NEW ZONING ra P3 o in E cay may __2 al _3 __4 __3 i10 Z 4 in E j may Pa ra m Mij l cn co Po co l Mij Oo ony E coy may D E D I This relationship makes it possible for you to compare the different zoning information NOTE Selecting Utilities Table Merge enables you to permanently merge the two tables together 12 Select Relate Drop in the related Table Tool to drop the related columns Change Vector Symbology Display a Layer ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and a Viewer open 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select File Open Vector Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Tour Guides 637 ui IMAGINE Vector should be the p file type i Click here to Vector Options display the Hilename arcinfo Directory ius vector layer inet amp 4D examplas Recent ETT T l A EH Click here to net Rename
303. e Yours likely looks different from the one pictured here s Viewer 1 Threshold Mask r iol x File Utility View AOI Raster Help s B D amp eo AA VNIQQ HP 1 5 EU wo do CD UOSO ER T RS A n 696751 95 468044 22 State Plane Clarke 1866 Z ERDAS IMAGINE Use the Flicker Utility Process Threshold Tour Guides Advanced Classification In the Viewer menu bar select Utility Flicker to see how the classes were thresholded The Viewer Flicker dialog opens Wa Viewer Flicker X Automatic Flicker AutoMode Speed 300 Manual Flicker When you are finished observing the thresholding click Cancel in the Viewer Flicker dialog In the Viewer select View Arrange Layers The Arrange Layers dialog opens In the Arrange Layers dialog right hold over the thresholded layer Threshold Mask and select Delete Layer from the Layer Options menu Click Apply and then Close in the Arrange Layers dialog When asked if you would like to save your changes click No In the Threshold dialog select Process To File The Threshold to File dialog opens In the Threshold to File dialog under Output Image enter the name germtm_thresh img in the directory of your choice This is the file name for the thresholded image Click OK to output the thresholded image to a file The Threshold to File dialog closes Wait for the thresholding process to complete and then select File Close f
304. e 144 657 Index 658 number required 145 placement 143 select 144 GCP Matching dialog 146 GCP Tool 275 CellArray 143 GCP Tool Reference Setup dialog 275 Generate Script dialog 371 Geo Correction Tools dialog 138 148 268 Geologic discrimination 618 Geometric correction 137 268 Geometric Correction Tool starting 137 Georeferencing 135 265 Global value 36 Graphical model 250 adjust class colors 364 annotation add 368 edit 368 select 369 style 368 define function 349 355 359 define input 342 354 359 define output 350 356 361 display output 363 edit 251 generate text script from 371 print 373 run 352 357 save 357 title 368 using scalars in 358 view 250 Graphical Query viewer 62 Graphics presentation 69 Grid Generation Tool 534 Grid Labels 545 H High Pass Filter icon 232 Histogram 606 Histogram dialog 476 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Histogram graphic 29 Histogram icon 476 Histogram manipulation 28 Histogram Plot Control dialog 476 Hypothesis add intermediate 566 rules for 562 Hypothesis properties dialog 561 j Icons Add Image 61 AOI Cutline 299 Catalog 61 Classification 559 Classifier 457 484 491 501 522 Column 40 Composer 70 90 92 Copy 357 Create New Signature 460 Create Rule Graphic 562 Cutline Selection viewer 298 DataPrep 305 Digitize Points 34 Display Single 64 Ellipse 33 Erase 45 Function 300 High Pass Filter 232 Histogram 476 Image Interpreter 215 239 246
305. e Column Properties dialog to change the order of the columns The Raster Attribute Editor now looks similar to the following example faster Attribute Editer sensitivity spotimg Ciaver_f This is class 1 notice the Hle Edit Help di 8 0 m T 8 eter mee fr IF Row Color Class_Mames Histogram Opacity v il 1 cm 5 Next change the colors and class names 6 Tochange the color of the class 1 with your pointer over the color patch for that class right hold Other The Color Chooser dialog opens 365 Spatial Modeler 366 Drag this dot to select a color on the color wheel Drag this slider bar upward enhance the RGB to 10 11 12 Wa Color Chooser x Standard Custom Auto Apply changes J o pori i V Lise Color Use Opacity fa L Pati Bs IHs fpl DES 8 Sae G 0 835 zo 1 Rename T B 009 to i Delete Close Help Enter RGB values here or move the slider bars A preview of the selected color displays here This dialog gives you several options for changing the class colors You can move the black dot on the color wheel use the slider bars select colors from a library under the Standard tab or enter RGB values Experiment with each of these methods to alter the class colors of classes 1 through 4 Change class 1 to Green class 2 to
306. e ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel The Classification menu displays xi Unsupervised Classification Supervised Classification Click here to start the Threshold Accuracy Assessment Utility Fuzzy Convolution N Grouping Tool Accuracy Assessment Feature Space Image Feature Space Thematic Knowledge Classifier Knowledge Engineer Frame Sampling Tools Spectral Analysis 2 Select Accuracy Assessment from the Classification menu to start the Accuracy Assessment utility The Accuracy Assessment dialog opens 496 ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification Wa Accuracy Assessment No file Viewers 1 File Edit View Report Help oe Point Name X m Clase Reference Check the Accuracy The Accuracy Assessment CellArray contains a list of class values for the pixels in the classified Assessment image file and the class values for the corresponding reference pixels The class values for the CellArray reference pixels are input by you The CellArray data reside in the classified image file e g germtm_superclass img 1 Click Close in the Classification menu to clear it from the screen Bl 2 Inthe Accuracy Assessment dialog select File Open or click the Open icon B The Classified Image dialog opens Classified Image File Multiple Look in E tour fes Select germtm su perclass i mg germtm distance img fro
307. e Fl Display Layer M Gren brans to Map Sysiem E Cear Display a Sei VERY Exieni E Fit to Frame _ No Stretch Data Scaling 3 Background Transparent Iam hys ias ip Using Nearest Heighbor i Help Can LOK Recent Delete _CDROM __Cancel_ Hep Select Fit to Frame 7 Click the Display as dropdown list and select Gray Scale 8 Click the Fit to Frame checkbox 9 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file dmtm1 tif displays in the Viewer The various shades of gray denote different classes of land cover Viewers dmtm1 tif Layer 1 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel el alale V 4 Check Map Information 1 Click the ImageInfo Icon on the Viewer tool bar 170 ERDAS IMAGINE Import Generic Binary Data Tour Guides Import Export The ImageInfo dialog for dmtm1 tif opens Hle Edit View s c e z a kE en 4 General Projection Histogram Pixel data Layer Name Layer 1 File Info Last Modified Fri Oct 8 10 10 04 1333 Humber nf Layers 1 Width 391 Height 3591 Type Thematic Layer Info Block Width 591 Block Height 13 Data Type Unsigned 8 bit Compression Hone Pyramid Layers Present Min Max 30 Mean 15 531 UE O Median 16 Mode 1 sid Dev 6 669 skip Factor x 1 skip Factor Y 1 Last Modified Fri Oct 8 10 10 01 1999 Note map and Upper Left X 1684646 25151670 Upper Left Y 305701 96889
308. e Text Line Styles 0 0 0 cc hans 80 Make Scale Bars i 26 2 625 e2h oe eons eeceunpratehusuveaes beens ee 112272 E 82 Create a Leg 144 54 dona m dr dcr n9 HEEL RE E Eee d indo acd od o ar od be EDGE eee E d 84 Adda Map Tile iube d a a REEL OE d 3rd Eh e 3 ER PEE EOS ang E Pr WEE dob eee es 86 Place a NOMAN AlIOW 23 ceca se unused ansk ORE EU m hows ol ote oe eee dO wwe eases ne eS de 88 Wrile DescripliVe TEX uad aon dex CESS he ee EHE EROR BOR CUR SHE CRUS Gd UR ORG ners un d 89 Save the Map Composition 0 0 0 cc eee Rr 90 Print the Map Composition es 90 Edit COMDOSINON Pans uu wu odo theese 61319 06 Cra 9 uad dr D bdo ci B8 ue d ecd b sun qi d e rad did 92 Chapter 4 Vector Querying and Editing 0000 ens 95 TOOU ION RP EE ERE eae Bw eee bee ee ole ee Be ee 95 Ouery Vector Dala 323b E EHE UE ees EP QUE pres ee ee hee cee eee eee eee se 95 COP Veco Dale c24 eceue bee 4 ode ews Se See ca sass ode bee ee ee E E ses oy ee 95 Display Vector Layers 0 ee eee ee eens 97 Change VESIOFPTOBDOI IBS saades sor dae aaneen aie aie a oa awe E ud d uS ERES CREME Reese Sacs 98 Display Attributes in the Viewer 0 rn 100 VOW ADUS vice Se cee e de oe oe Se wes des eee eee ease ees ITI PSESIG eee esse ees 100 Use the Marquee Tools to Select Features n n anaana anaana a ee eee eee 102 Use the Critena PUNCO sse T 103 Edil Vector EdVelS uo erinan a
309. e bep sq mem a 207 scudmM e J P 208 Section Il IMAGINE Advantage ll es 211 Chapter 10 Fourier Transform EditOor c ee ees 213 Tour Guides vii INTFOGUCHION amp RPTRTPRERCOCPERRTTCPCPPP E A m 213 Create ah LaVvelrs cee gidavettctustageqdaverereewteuedeeteetaveeeecses E a 213 Create FFT Output File 0 0 0 ene eee nent eens 215 Start the Fourier Transform Editor es 216 Edit Using Menu OptionS aono eis ee eee APPR SRE o oe ee Sw UR Ro Pe Ee 219 Use Low Pass Filtering 0 ee ee eee ee ene rra 219 Select a Different Filter ic uuu dh dee x Heap arte do mde onc waned ween arn as we eR Gree ek eee dus 221 Dave thle FIO cp eet eee c 221 Apply an Inverse Fourier Transformation 0 eee rn 222 Apply Other Filters 2 0 0 RR RA RH Rh rra 223 Use a CCW NGSK 22 4 ane siete dh dem as ea bode ay ee ree eae Benet Beene eee A 226 Use a Rectangular Mask 0 ee hans 228 Use a Wedge Mask ccc hh hh rans 229 Edit Using Mouse Driven Tools 0 02 cee n 231 DSe EOWSPaSS INGUIN scce re eens bbe re Sao aban e ne beats ed seen bau ee bid ue qp dcus 231 Use High Pass Filtering 0 ccc RR RR rans 231 Apply a Wedge Mask 4v maa dee wes bed Ed oe oboe BGS A ERR tub ES a een rA YU oe yd eee eee 233 COMbING EUS 4 2 curcs 4 ga Age dt w
310. e file modeler output img in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory This file contains SPOT panchromatic data overlaid with an environmental sensitivity analysis file In creating this map you use these basic steps e plan the map e start Map Composer e prepare the data layers e draw the map frame e adda neatline and tick marks e make scale bars e create a legend e adda map title e place a north arrow e write descriptive text e print the map This tour guide also contains information about editing map frames deleting map frames and editing map compositions Tour Guides 69 ui Map Composer Start Map You must have ERDAS IMAGINE running Composer 1 Start Map Composer by clicking the Composer icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel EL Composer The Map Composer menu displays aaa IILI AIII LIII IILI III ILII III IIIA IISI III II IIIA IIIS Map Composer Click here to Hew Map Composition create a new map Open Map Composition Print Map Composition Print Plot File Edit Composition Paths Map Series Tool Map Datahase Tonl Close Help 2 In the Map Composer menu select New Map Composition to create a new map composition You can also create a new composition by selecting File New Composition from the Viewer menu bar The New Map Composition dialog opens Hew Hame map Type a name l for your map E here M
311. e for a rule to be true hypothesis rule conditions 1 Double click the Slope from model lt 4 condition The Rule Props dialog opens Tour Guides 583 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Value mustbe Name GERRI TT less than or equal to 4 Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions s Specify i35 F List of Conditions AND OO ie Relation Value Confidence Epe rom mode e g e 2 Solid open ground D a TRUE ud i PpiHy Close Help In the List of Conditions CellArray the slope calculated by the Slope from model variable must be less than or equal to 4 degrees and i e AND note the far left column of the CellArray the Solid open ground variable must be true before this rule can be true 2 Click Close in the Rule Props dialog The rule Flat solid open ground is defined by an intermediate hypothesis Solid open ground 3 Inthe Knowledge Engineer dialog click the horizontal scroll bar and move it to the right until you can see the intermediate hypothesis Solid open ground m em Grass Scrub Grass Scrub Intermediate rules hypothesis conditions The intermediate hypothesis Solid open ground uses the Terrain Categorization variable to identify various types of open ground cover Check Other You can check the other hypotheses listed along the left side of the Knowledge Engineer dialog Hypotheses 1 Position the horizontal scroll bar to the extreme left in the
312. e icon panel automatically opens ERDAS IMAGINE The ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel contains icons and menus for accessing ERDAS IMAGINE Icon Panel functions You have the option through the Session Preferences menu to display the icon panel horizontally across the top of the screen or vertically down the left side of the screen The default 1s a horizontal display The icon panel that displays on your screen looks similar to the following M4 ERDAS IMAGINE 8 6 Session Main Tools Utilities Help i Import The various icons that are present on your icon panel depend on the components and add on modules you have purchased with your system ERDAS IMAGINE The menus on the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar are Session Main Tools Utilities and Menu Bar Help These menus are described in this section NOTE Any items which are unavailable in these menus are shaded and inactive Session Menu 1 Click on the word Session in the upper left corner of the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The Session menu opens Tour Guides xxi xxii Preferences Configuration Session Log Active Process List Commands Enter Log message Start Recording Batch Commands Open Batch Command File View Offline Batch Queue Flip Icons Tile Viewers Close All viewers Click here to end vum the ERDAS IMAGINE Tools session Utilities Help Properties Exit IMAGINE Generate System Information Report CH S
313. e image enhancement categories e Wallis Adaptive Filter e luminance modification sensor merge Wallis Adaptive Filter The Wallis adaptive filter is designed to adjust the contrast stretch of an image using only the values within a local region defined by the window size which makes it widely applicable Three possible implementations of this technique are provided Bandwise IHS and PC e In the Bandwise operation the adaptive filter is passed over each band sequentially e In the IHS implementation the input RGB image is transformed into IHS space The adaptive filter is only passed over the intensity I component The image is then transformed back into RGB e In the PC implementation the input bands are transformed into principal components The filter is only passed over PC 1 An inverse principal component transform is then performed In this section you apply the Wallis adaptive filter function to an image and observe the results 611 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V Wallis Adaptive Make sure the IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module is running and display the file Filter radar glacier img in a Viewer Viewer 1 radar glacier img Layer 1 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help iwimiulele s sr Les e Mala al i 1 Inthe Radar Interpreter menu select Speckle Suppression The Radar Speckle Suppression dialog opens 2 Inthe Radar Speckle Suppression dialog en
314. e is so long that it does not completely fit within it This directory can be replaced with a new variable called OutputDir You can set the Pattern of the OutputDir variable to any directory you choose This makes your command shorter Create a New Since you know that you want your new variable to be named OutputDir and you know you Variable want it to replace the current path in the Pattern of the Output variable with it you can begin editing there 1 Make sure that the Variables tab displays the Output variable s details 2 Click in the Pattern window and remove the entire directory structure you want to replace Once you have eliminated it type in the following OutputDir 204 ERDAS IMAGINE Batch Processing Your Pattern window then looks like the following Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined Commands Variables Nd ToT N Type Auto ad Replace the original Pattem i OutputDir 5 Input root tif sat path with the new TUENDA E variable OutputDir Set Berari processi _ Delete After Processing Hew Delete Undo Close Back Next gt PHUSH Help You have to create the new variable OutputDir so that the variable Output does not generate errors in your Batch script
315. e see Section V IMAGINE Vector M on page 625 Move to the directory where you want to create your workspace Start ERDAS IMAGINE from this directory Make sure this is a directory in which you have read write permission Click on the Vector icon from the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel 95 Vector Querying and Editing The Vector Utilities menu opens Click here to copy sample vector layer Clean Vector Layer Build Vector Layer Topology Copy Vector Layer Extemal Vector Layer Rename Vector Layer Delete Vector Layer Display Vector Layer Info subset Vector Layer Mosaic Polygon Layers Transform Vector Layer Create Polygon Labels Raster to Vector Vector to Raster start Table Tool onal Attributes ASCII ta Point Vector Layer Close Help The vector utilities in this menu should NOT be run on open vector layers Close the layer you are using before running the utility and do NOT attempt to open the layer until the process is complete 2 Inthe Vector Utilities menu select Copy Vector Layer The Copy Vector Layer dialog opens Enter vector layer to copy here Enter new vector layer name here Copy Vector Layer a Vector Layer tn Copy arcinfo Output Vector Layer arcinfa 3 HHE lanier dms bldgs streets va bldgs zone88 examples Ej I i patch Can
316. e striping in the original image 1 Redisplay the original fft layer in the Fourier Editor if you have not already done so 2 The Hanning window is still selected from the previous section so you do not change it 3 Click the Wedge Mask icon on the tool bar 4 4 Using the following example as a guide with your cursor over the center of the line drag to the right until the lines of the wedge are about 20 degrees apart Release the mouse button Tour Guides 233 ui Fourier Transform Editor Hle Edit Mask Position your cursor in this area The image is filtered as soon as you release the mouse and similar to the following example The resulting image is also shown Viewer 7 20deg img Layer 7 a H Fle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Combine Edits You may combine as many edits as you like during an editing session Since the Fourier Transform and Inverse Fourier Transform are linear operations the effect of each edit on the resulting image is independent of the others Here you perform a low pass filter over the wedged fft layer that you just created 234 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Fourier Transform Editor 1 With the fft layer that you just created displayed in the Fourier Editor click the Low Pass Filter tool ni 2 With your cursor in the center of the Fourier Editor drag toward the right until the u coordinate in the status bar is about 200 The fft
317. e two Raster objects in the Model Maker viewer Double click this newly placed Matrix object In the Size popup list select 5 x 5 Click OK Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below n8 Low Pass in the Model Maker viewer Connect n2 mobbay and n3 Low Pass to the newly placed Function object Double click on the Function object From the analysis Functions select CONVOLVE raster kernel this should be the third item on the list 449 Spatial Modeler Add Raster Properties Add Function Properties 450 10 10 11 12 In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of raster Under Available Inputs click on n2_mobbay In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt kernel gt Under Available Inputs click on n3_Low_Pass Click OK Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below the Function object in the Model Maker viewer Connect the Function object to the new Raster object Double click the new Raster object Click Temporary Raster Only Click OK Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click to the left of n5 memory in the Model Maker viewer Connect n1 mobbay n2 mobbay and n5 memory to the Function object Double click on the Function object In the Functions popup list select Conditional In the list of functions select EITHER lt ar
318. e water inside the rectangular AOI to indicate where you want the region growing to take place A status meter displays in the status bar of the Viewer You may click Cancel to terminate the region grow process The meter dismisses when the region growing process is complete The area you selected in the Viewer is surrounded by a second bounding box and chaser lights Click Close in the Region Growing Properties dialog Select File Save AOI Layer As from the Viewer menu bar The Save AOI As dialog opens This dialog allows you to save the selected AOIs as a layer aoi extension that can be used again for other functions Enter a name for the AOI layer under Save AOI as the aoi extension is added automatically Pay special attention to the directory where the file is saved so you can find the layer later If you wanted to save specific AOIs only you could turn on the Selected Only checkbox in the Save AOI As dialog and only selected AOIs would be saved to a file 25 M Viewer Arrange Layers Adjust Image Contrast Click OK in the Save AOI As dialog This layer can now be used in any dialog where a function can be applied to a specific AOI layer You can also edit this layer at any time adding or deleting areas Select View Arrange Layers from the Viewer menu bar The Arrange Layers dialog opens In the Arrange Layers dialog right hold over the AOI Layer and select Delete Layer from the AOI Options menu Click
319. ea dees COLE Oee eae eee we we 308 RUN TG INIOS ANG ss a sadam dae de Ee OES Hae ee eee ew deh E Be ee 309 Display Output Image 3 ma Ra eres ba soos a do 9 dee ORS Bare ES Ee ee are dete eee s 310 Mosaic Color Balancing Using Color Infrared Aerial Photos 312 Add Images for Mosaic anaana hh 314 SOLEXCIUdO AGAS naa sistere a cur PRERSUqENPSMSSRIIUSSG PISO 14 eee se bee pup EI Sup 315 Mosaic Color Balancing 1 0 ehh 317 Tour Guides ix Mizueubin s nto ead ewe aeons baer ee es Re were eee Mice ad arta beh oe Par we 320 R n The NWIOSAIC 321 Display Output IMACS a us descen hase aw poe ee oe cni ae Re CERCA gee bea bw dee ee ee de eens 321 Chapter 15 VIEWSNEO ANGIVSIS 2440242205408 Been eet teen en E e 9A ee ee ORO 3 323 INTIOQUCUON Ar rr 323 Create a Viewshed 2246 bin ee eo ux Ed xu hae GER d mx s Rue a dE Ed PE Nw i bc 323 Add the Raster Image nannan cc hrs 324 Start an Image Drape Viewer and Set the Level of Detail 2 0 0 0 0 cece eee 324 Start the Viewshed Analysis Tool 0 0 0 eee rr 325 Add FIISLODSOIVE asd qaid wa ac ulia Ft de PREIS IRR ENRICO Mon Rl qa RUP oe didi ind tou dion d ER ds 327 Add Another Observer 0 0 0 0 0c cc lees ahhh rss 328 Link the Viewers and Set Eye and Target Positions llli 330 save ihe ViewShed i ss dee oh
320. echniques you have learned in the steps above Extract at least five signatures After you have extracted all the signatures you wish select File Save As from the Signature Editor menu bar The Save Signature File As dialog opens Use the Save Signature File As dialog to save the signature set in the Signature Editor e g germtm siged sig Click OK in the Save Signature File As dialog Once signatures are created they can be evaluated deleted renamed and merged with signatures from other files Merging signatures allows you to perform complex classifications with signatures that are derived from more than one training method supervised and or unsupervised parametric and nonparametric Next the following tools for evaluating signatures are discussed e alarms contingency matrix e feature space to image masking e signature objects e histograms e signature separability e Statistics ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification When you use one of these tools you need to select the appropriate signature s to be used in the evaluation For example you cannot use the signature separability tool with a nonparametric Feature Space signature Preparation You should have at least ten signatures in the Signature Editor similar to the following ii Signature Editor germtm siged siq E i mi x File Edit View Evaluate Feature Classify Help go D L L X wWl amp VA eeti T T 3L 3L 3 tok E s Fos
321. ecogb Doin O Peupseury Raster Oniv integer ki 4 Beni Recede Data seiur erue Click the Open icon and navigate to a directory where you have write permission In the Filename section of the File Name dialog type hilight germtm img for the output image name then click OK in the File Name dialog Click on Delete If Exists checkbox Click on the OK button in the Raster dialog Your completed model should like the following Spatial Modeler Execute the Model and Check Results 406 New Model Hle Edit Model Text Process o zjale s 4 gls CONVOLVE n3 zone88 EITHER n amp memory IF n10 hilight germtm Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar El A Job Status dialog opens tracking the progress of the function Click OK in the Job Status dialog when it reaches 10096 complete Next use the Viewer to examine your output image and locate the highlighted area Click the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar Click the Open icon and navigate to the directory in which you saved the output file hilight germtm img then click OK in the dialog to display the file ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler 5 Use the Zoom In tool to view the highlighted area Al Notice that the area you emphasized with the model is sharp while the area surrounding it is fuzzy Tour Guides 407 ui Spatial Modeler Add Attributes to Vector Layers Copy Vector Layers
322. ect All All features in both the CellArray and the Viewer are selected 9 With your cursor in the Record column of the Attributes CellArray right hold Row Selection Select None to deselect all features 101 ul Vector Querying and Editing Use the Marquee The marquee tool allows you to select a group of objects by dragging a box to contain them Tools to Select Features 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select Vector Options The Options dialog opens E Arc Snap Dist 30 0226 Dist 30 0226 Grain tolerance 30 0228 1E Click here to restrict selection to only those features within the marquee Bey __Gose_ Hep bound select By gt Intersect Contained In 2 In the Options dialog under Select By click the Contained In checkbox 3 Click Apply in the Options dialog When you use the marquee tools in the Vector tool palette now only the features completely contained within the boundary of the marquee are selected 4 Click the Marquee icon in the Vector tool palette 5 Drag to draw a rectangle in the Viewer When you release the mouse button the polygons and lines contained within the rectangle are selected outlined in yellow The corresponding attributes are selected in the Attribute CellArray 6 Inthe Viewer click outside of the polygons to deselect all features 7 Click the Line Selection icon in the Vector tool palette Pa Y I 8 Inthe Viewer click to st
323. ect File Save As from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to save the model E The Save Model dialog opens Enter a name for the model such as convolve gmd being sure that you specify a directory in which you have write permission Click OK in the Save Model dialog You can now run this portion of the model to see 1f it works correctly In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Run icon or select Process Run from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to run the model El While the model runs a Status box opens reporting the status of the model When the model is finished running click OK in the Status box You now use the Copy and Paste commands to combine these two separate models into one Make sure that both models you created are open In the menu bar of the second model you created select Edit Select All You can also select objects by clicking and dragging in the Model Maker viewer All objects contained within the selection box that you draw are selected Click the Copy icon in the tool bar of the same model or select Edit Copy from the menu bar to copy the selected objects to the paste buffer 357 Spatial Modeler Click the Paste icon in the tool bar of the first model or select Edit Paste from the menu bar to paste the second model into the first Model Maker viewer amp The second model is pasted on top of the first model Close the second Model Maker viewer by selecting File Close
324. ect Mean and click Apply The mean within the selected window of Profile 1 is depicted on the graph 8 Click Cancel in the Spectral Statistics dialog 9 Select File Close from the Spectral Profile viewer 48 ERDAS IMAGINE Display Spatial Profile Tour Guides Viewer Wavelength Axis Data tapes containing hyperspectral imagery commonly designate the bands as a simple numerical sequence When plotted using the profile tools this yields an x axis labeled as 1 2 3 4 etc Elsewhere on the tape or in the accompanying documentation is a file which lists the center frequency and width of each band This information should be linked to the image intensity values for accurate analysis or comparison to other spectra such as the Spectra Libraries To do this the band position information must be entered into a linkable format which is an Saf file An example of this format can be seen by using a texteditor or vi command to view one of the saf files in IMAGINE HOME etc Once this file is created it can be linked with the Spectral Profile by using the Edit Use Sensor Attributes option The Spatial Profile display function allows the analyst to view the reflectance s of the pixels along a user defined polyline The display can be viewed in either two dimensional one band or perspective three dimensional multiple bands mode To use this tool follow the steps below The file hyperspectral img should be displayed in a Vi
325. ect road coverage Imagery j The Leave select Image imt Layer CLayer 1 iW Undefined Prompt roadsimg a Jer cet valle Wi Analyst checkbox is enabled In the Variable Properties dialog you can see that the Variable Type is Raster and the Imagery option is selected because the input is an image This knowledge base is transportable you may want to pass it to a colleague in another office or reuse it yourself to automate a production process So rather than selecting a specific image to be used the Leave Undefined checkbox is selected and a prompt for the type of data that you want the end user to supply is typed in the Info window i e Select road coverage The same type of imagery variables have been defined for the landcover classification Terrain Categorization Digital Elevation Model DEM and air photo Aerial Photo Some of the imagery variables are used directly in rules such as the Terrain Categorization variable being used to identify open ground in the image Others are used indirectly to calculate variable values For example open ground e g grass scrub is also good for vehicles to cross but not if the ground is steeply sloping The fact that an area is open ground can be determined from the landcover classification the Terrain Categorization variable but you do not have an image that provides slope directly However you do have a digital elevation model the DEM variable which can be u
326. ed dot by clicking the Label Selection icon 4 The dot is filled with the color of the current label Not Used to indicate that it has been labeled Automatically Apply Labels 1 Click the Manual Label icon i to toggle on the Automatic Label mode The Automatic Label icon indicates that Automatic Label Mode is active 2 Make sure that the Not Used label is still set as the current label in the Labels CellArray 3 Select another of the dots that lies outside of the high resolution image extent The Not Used label is automatically applied to the dot as it is selected Tour Guides 547 Frame Sampling Tools 4 Repeat this process to label the dots outside of the image extent Label Multiple Dots 1 Click the Automatic Label icon to toggle on the Manual Label mode The Manual Label icon fm indicates that Manual Label Mode is active In the lower portion of the Main View there is an area covered by trees 2 Click on one of the dots in this portion of the image to select it 3 Shift click on the other dots that overlay this forested plot Select all the dots that UG A ibid cdd 4 Place the carat gt in the Forest label row to set it as the current label 5 Label the selected dots by clicking the Label Selection icon Use AO to Label Multiple Dots 1 Use the Manual Zoom tool a to zoom in on the large forested plot in the upper left portion of the Dot Grid 2 Open the AOI Tools by clicking on the AOI Tools ico
327. ed in Chapter 9 Rectification of the ERDAS Field Guide Tour Guides 9 Viewer 2 Utility Menu Options Use Inquiry Functions 1 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the file The file lanier img is displayed in the Viewer The name of the file and the layers selected are written in the Viewer title bar Click here to minimize the window c Wewer i laniering Clayer_ CLaver_S C Layer 3 a D Hle Utility View ADI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help op a a i ix ala ej The title bar shows the Viewer number and name of image displayed In the title bar hold and drag to move the Viewer Drag on any of the corners to resize the Viewer Single line help and coordinates Use the scroll bars display in this Status Bar to roam in an image The Utility menu on the Viewer enables you to access four separate groups of functions e inquiry functions e measurement tool e layer viewing e information Each function group is separated by a line in the pulldown menu You can query a displayed image for information about each pixel using the inquiry functions The file lanier img must be displayed in a Viewer Select Utility Inquire Cursor from the Viewer menu bar A white crosshair displays in the Viewer and the Inquire Cursor dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer Map projection spheroid Drag the crosshair listed here over the image in the Viewer or click here to move it N
328. ed outputs provide a binary analysis of visibility within the specified range In other words the image is color coded to show only visible or hidden areas The Height outputs provide a color coded map of the invisible areas indicating the amount of change in observer height required to see a given zone 329 ui Viewshed Analysis Link the Viewers and Set Eye and Target Positions 330 1 Using your mouse move the Eye of the Positioning tool on top of Observer 1 2 Move the Target on top of Observer 2 in the Viewer ayer 4 METTUS 5 notation erraModel Help apap E MS ped RELH Er wE rth boom Bova bate Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector An saus Ze A ul d The Eye of the position tool is placed on top of Observer 1 The Target of the position tool is placed on top of Observer 2 As you move the Positioning tool the 3D image in the Image Drape viewer is updated Observer 1 is now looking at the location of Observer 2 The 3D image is positioned so that the target is centered in the Image Drape viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Viewshed Analysis 3 Switch the Eye and Target of the Positioning tool in the Viewer Observer 2 is now looking at the location of Observer 1 Again the 3D image rotates to match the Eye and Target positions of the Viewer Hle Utility View Position Raster Save the Viewshed What can we do with a saved viewshed For example the saved viewshed can be used to create
329. ee fonns Y OK to copy from this Viewer N amp Cannnt copy from this Viewer Then position and size the selector boxes and PLI OK in the Map Frame dialog to accept 4 Click anywhere in the image in the Viewer to reference the displayed image to the new map frame The Map Frame dialog opens giving you options for sizing scaling and positioning the map frame Map Frame Click here to adjust the size of the map frame e Change Map and Frame Area Maintain scale Click here to adjust Change Scale and Frame Area Maintain Map Area the position of the 4 Change Scale and Map Area Maintain Frame Area map frame Click here to enter 22916 67 Dm the scale of the data in the map frame Click here to enter Upper Left Frame Coordinates map frame height and width in inches B x 1 00 Finches Click here to enter map frame X and Y coordinates A cursor box also displays in the Viewer This cursor box allows you to select the area you want to use in the map composition ERDAS IMAGINE Adjust the Size of the Map Frame Tour Guides Map Composer You can move the map frame in the Map Composer viewer window and the cursor box in the Viewer by dragging and resizing them with the mouse or you can move one or both boxes by manipulating the information in the Map Frame dialog You can also rotate the box in the Viewer if you want to change the orientation Next you move the map frame by sett
330. een eee eee ee tee eens 277 Calibrate the Image 2 ee eee rh 278 Chapter 13 Terrain Surface Interpolation es 281 INTIOQGUCTION SPP 281 Crealo a EcL PPP 281 Mpat an ASC NII 282 Perform SUMACINO 22 5 paeb nese oe eae pur 8666 RERHLCORPENEASSSATCE TC dee SS ARRARIR Gases PE 285 Display Ne SUMAC P 286 Chapter 14 MOSAIC o4 e220 5R Swe REAALSELE EREA oe eee eee eae eb ee ee 289 Pedo 289 Mosaic Using Air Photo Images lere es 289 Set INPUT MAJES sue auae uox deum dep ie ape 01927309 e trapo Tees d he ATER Bote o Br ct sc e Gross ORES o Ed 292 Create a Template euadere mem exon Dax ay bdo mend deed ades e Edd mg des 294 Identify Areas of Intersection aaaea rn 296 Draw d CUUIMG Ss usce n diae qrbrdo tud yd ata 93d RUP qoe dpud cda cad p doped d are E db 298 Define Output Images llle hrs 301 RUMI MOSAIC e E 302 Display ne MOSAIC batacce ates bone ee tee ees ea eae corsa edeee nd Ree ee eRe ek 303 Mosaic Using LANDSAT Images rrr hn nr 304 Display Input TAGS ERTEECERTE TTE gi pir hear muah se ahh TTL nde te aH Gun Bh a od ae 304 Add Images for Mosaic 0 cc hh rans 306 ORIA JEG ats ae eae ch dow te Tm 308 Maleh Mages sina a 664 hea Sie Ot ee SE bee ee enw ee
331. ef Geometric Model Select Geometric Model Select Polynomial Affine 1 Polynomial Rubber Sheeting Landsat Camera Spot Open Existing Model Use pripis Arai 2 Inthe Set Geometric Model dialog select Polynomial and then click OK The Geo Correction Tools open along with the Polynomial Model Properties dialog c Geo Correction Tools a j i t V PA mm Parameters Transformation Projection Polynomial Order 1 F Load CFF File Click Close Status Model has no solution 3 Click Close in the Polynomial Model Properties dialog to close it for now You select these parameters later The GCP Tool Reference Setup dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Polynomial Rectification Collect Reference Points From gt Existing Viewer sa Image Layer New Viewer se Vector Layer New Viewer sf Annotation Layer Mew Viewer se GCP Hle qcc sw ASCII File se Digitizing Tablet Current Configuration Click OK to Digitizing Tablet New Configuration accept the default e Keyboard Only 4 Accept the default of Existing Viewer in the GCP Tool Reference Setup dialog by clicking OK The GCP Tool Reference Setup dialog closes and a Viewer Selection Instructions box opens directing you to click in a Viewer to select for reference coordinates 5 Click in the second Viewer which displays panAtlanta img The Reference Map Information dialog opens showi
332. eg ce eee E dee ee as gre ae wer Bee eae Em ee Be a 368 EOIN AN TOR gece secur ee drake wl arte arnt oe Se ae ae ee ce es sean 368 Aod Text toa Function GrIapble seu es o ee das ord s RB apta RE Sor dort o Urs 369 xen mpm 369 Add Text to Other Graphics 6 0 2 0 0 doin dede c d crt etwas daa Modena adea eo d o dt 369 Generate a Text SCH at 2x odi ma aS EGG GU ordri snadra ES Ped EQEISJS2G9 9555 371 Print the MOUBL o 2565625 e dE REC tess E ara ELO A ceeded HACER E ur e HR n rb A ee od 373 Apply the Criteria Function ems ed oum ieee HEROES PS Rh me ee RUE Bee XR RU 375 Evaluate Training Samples lllleseeeeeee ehh 375 Define Input Raster Layers 3 2d xt He ara cae nt e OR aba ita de ot ee Tcu CA Bee e 377 Define Criteria m 377 Define Output Raster Layer n nananana aaa 379 Save the Model 0 ccc eee ee eee nett eee 380 Minimizing Temporary Disk Usage llle hih nns 381 Set Preferences llle ee eee eee ee eee ee eens 381 Making Your Models Usable by Others 00 0 cece 382 zinesssc oun heeded cng 3 oo sue op odd oe ou cede Use wae ee aes on be eee babe kes 382 Providing a User Interface to Your Model 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee ees 382 Open an Existing Model 0 ccc eee eee eee nets 383 Edi OC d TTPTPPTPTPPPPPTPPPTTPTE 385 zonis T 387 Set Session Comlima
333. elect the Text tool and then the Lock tool to add text to the first Function graphic Click on the center of the CONDITIONAL Function graphic toward the top of the graphic The Text String dialog opens Type the following words in the Text String dialog Create a sensitivity file by Press Return on your keyboard and then click OK in the Text String dialog Click under the first line of text to add another line In the Text String dialog type combining Slope Floodplain and Landcover Press Return on your keyboard and then click OK in the Text String dialog Repeat step 5 to add a third line of text using a conditional statement Click OK All three text strings display over the Function graphic but they are very large In the Model Maker tool palette click on the Lock icon to disable the lock tool and then click on the Select icon Click on the first line on the Function graphic to select it Shift click on the second and third lines to add to the selection Using the same procedure you used to change the point size and style of the title change these lines to 14 points Normal You may also want to adjust the positioning simply drag on the text Add the following lines of text to the CONVOLVE function 369 Spatial Modeler Enhance the SPOT image using a summary filter 2 Next add these two lines to the final output raster 012 sensitivity spot Overlay of sensitivity analysis on SPOT Panchromatic im
334. en the center point and end point in the image Results are best when the red line of the surface method matches the general trend of the green line of the image profile Repeat steps 3 through 6 for images 2 3 img 2 4 img 3 2 img 3 3 img 3 4 img 4 2 img 4 3 img and 4 4 img Click Close in the Mosaic Color Balancing dialog Click the Image Matching icon in the Mosaic Tool viewer In the Matching Options dialog under Matching Method select For All Images The Matching Options dialog opens Select Band by Band under Histogram Type Click OK in the Matching Options dialog Click on the Intersection icon in the Mosaic Tool tool bar H Click on the Set Default Cutlines icon E An attention box will appear Click Yes and continue In the Mosaic Tool tool bar click the Function icon f In the Set Overlap Function dialog under Intersection Type select Cutline Exists and Cut Feather then click Apply The Set Overlap Function dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE 9 Click Close in the Set Overlap Function dialog Run The Mosaic 1 Inthe Mosaic Tool viewer select Process Run Mosaic The Run Mosaic dialog opens UITITCOEENEN x Output File Mame img wasia maszaic imq Ei T Output a Common Look Up Table Enter the name of the output file here Compress Output to Eompressed dutput File Hame std a whieh Gutouts Selected Click here to run the mosaic E Batch
335. ens IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V Stereo SAR OrthoRadar Radar Interpreter Genenc SAR Node Close Help 7 Inthe Radar menu click Radar Interpreter The Radar Interpreter menu opens Select Speckle Suppression Click Radar Interpreter Close Help 8 Inthe Radar Interpreter menu select Speckle Suppression The Radar Speckle Suppression dialog opens Enter the name of the input file here Click here to calculate the Coefficient of Variation 602 c BadarSpeckle Suppression Tween ls l Input File immn Coordinate Type subset Definition BERHO Unsignent t bl Sunimi pUnmsigneg 9 hf ki Output Options Cub OT Vor MMH 285 vid 035 diii PHOCO DU iHi From Inquire Box 2 paiz PI Moving Window Use odd number only Window Size Piterni iep Tma LGR pi yorini i fe HHH E Calculate Coefficient of Variation a ignaro Zone d Tipis Enter window size here windows are always square ERDAS IMAGINE Calculate Coefficient of Variation Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter In the Radar Speckle Suppression dialog under Input File enter the file loplakebed img Next you calculate the coefficient of variation to be used in this function Coefficient of Variation The coefficient of variation as a scene derived parameter is a necessary input parameter for many of the filters It is also useful in ev
336. ens so that all of the prompts that display in the dialog are for importing data When you click on the Export button the prompts change to options for exporting data 3 Click on the Type popup list to select SPOT from the list of available importers 4 Confirm that the Media defaults to CD ROM Displayed under Input CDROM is a list of configured CD ROM drives 5 Click to select the device from which you want to import data If it is necessary to configure a new device see the current ERDAS IMAGINE Installation Guide 6 Under Output File enter a name for the output file in the directory of your choice You can click on the directory bar popup list or enter the directory name in the filename part to select a different directory 7 Click OK in the Import Export dialog 8 Watch the Session Log to see a report of the activities of the import process The Import SPOT dialog opens 160 ERDAS IMAGINE Check Preview Options Tour Guides Import Export Shows information about the selected image PERMITE Image 1 of 10 Name scene Media CD sFile Level 1B Format Standard SPOT Country FRANCE Bands 3 shows map projection Lab SPOT IM Rows 3001 information if available Facility CAP T Columns 3130 Map Projection Information Projection Unknown Units N A j ULX N A ULY N A LRY WA Previous Image Hext Image Calibrate Image Click to go to the next image on CD ifa multi
337. entering the directory path name in the text window and pressing Return on your keyboard Select the file germtm_superclass img from the list of files in the directory you just opened This is the classified image file that is going to be thresholded ERDAS IMAGINE Compute and Evaluate Histograms Tour Guides Advanced Classification 3 Inthe Open Files dialog under Distance Image open the directory in which you previously saved germtm distance img by entering the directory path name in the text entry field and pressing Return on your keyboard 4 Select the file germtm distance img from the list of files in the directory you just opened This is the distance image that was created when the germtm superclass img file was created A distance image file for the classified image is necessary for thresholding 5 Click OK in the Open Files dialog to load the files 6 Inthe Threshold dialog select View Select Viewer and then click in the Viewer that is displaying the germtm superclass img file 1 Inthe Threshold dialog select Histograms Compute The histograms for the distance image file are computed There is a separate histogram for each class in the classified image file The Job Status dialog opens as the histograms are computed This dialog automatically closes when the process is completed 2 If desired select Histograms Save to save this histogram file 3 Inthe CellArray of the Threshold dialog move the
338. eosystems com
339. epted pixels are considered contiguous Under Geographic Constraints the Area checkbox should be turned on to constrain the region area in pixels Enter 300 into the Area number field and press Return on your keyboard This is the maximum number of pixels that are in the AOI Enter 10 00 in the Spectral Euclidean Distance number field The pixels that are accepted in the AOI are within this spectral distance from the mean of the seed pixel Next click on Options in the Region Growing Properties dialog The Region Grow Options dialog opens 461 Advanced Classification Was Region Grow Options Ea M Include Island Polygons W Update Region Mean Buffer Region Boundary 6 Inthe Region Grow Options dialog make sure that the Include Island Polygons checkbox is turned on in order to include polygons in the growth region 7 Click Close in the Region Grow Options dialog Create an AOI 1 Inthe AOI tool palette click on the Region Grow icon AJ 2 Click inside a bright red area in the germtm img file in the Viewer This is a forest area A polygon opens and a bounding box surrounds the polygon indicating that it is selected a Yiewer 1 germtm img G Layer_4 Layer_5 CLayer 3 File Utility view AOI Raster Help 2 BE GG S3 mAAR RAAM KP 3 Inthe Region Growing Properties dialog enter new numbers in the Area and Spectral Euclidean Distance number fields e g 500 for Area and 15 for Spectral E
340. equired by the Frame Sampling process Prior Data The Prior Data file is any standard IMAGINE img file that contains information about previous locations of the particular feature class of interest or variation of the occurrence of the material of interest within the study area This information helps you choose which portions of the image to sample with high resolution imagery The inclusion of Prior Data in the project is optional Selected Samples The Selected Samples file defines the Sampling Grid Cells that have been selected for analysis with high resolution imagery This file is usually created with the Sample Selection Tool and is required by the Frame Sampling process Fraction File The Fraction File is created by the Final Analysis process 529 Frame Sampling Tools Recoding the Grouped File 530 2 Select Classified Tile from the File Descriptor popup list Lar Click the Browse button um and browse to the IMAGINE HOMEBE examples directory Select loudoun maxclass img from the list of files and click OK Click Next on the Single Sampling Wizard The Create Assign Stratum Files step displays in the Wizard The Grouped File we will use in this tour was created during the tour Using the Grouping Tool on page 500 If you have not already created the Grouped File you can click the Class Grouping Tool button Ql to launch the Grouping Tool Now that you have Grouped the Classified File into class groups it is
341. er The new Model Maker viewer opens Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette then click the Lock icon ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Spatial Modeler al Click twice in the Model Maker viewer to place the input and output Raster graphics Click on the Matrix icon in the Model Maker tool palette E Click in the Model Maker viewer to place the input Matrix graphic This is where you define the convolution kernel Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click on the Model Maker viewer to place a Function graphic on the page Place the Function graphic between the two inputs and the output Raster graphic Click on the Connect icon Al Connect the input Raster graphic to the Function the input Matrix to the Function and the Function to the output Raster This part of the model looks similar to the following example 353 Spatial Modeler Define Input SPOT Layer Define Input Convolution Kernel 354 10 1 IIIII In the Model Maker tool palette click the Lock icon to disable the Lock tool N Click the Select icon Double click the input Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer The graphic is highlighted and the Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog click on the Open icon under File Name 7 B In the File Name dialog under Filename click on the file spots img and then click OK The File Name dialog opens Click OK in t
342. er e the minimum and maximum for each layer in the signature or e a specified number of standard deviations from the mean of the signature If you wish you can set new parallelepiped limits and click OK in the Set Parallelepiped Limits dialog or simply accept the default limits by clicking OK in the Set Parallelepiped Limits dialog The new default limits display in the Limits CellArray Click Close in the Limits dialog In the Signature Alarm dialog click OK The alarmed pixels display in the Viewer in yellow You can use the toggle function Utility Flicker in the Viewer to see how the pixels are classified by the alarm Be sure that there are no AOI layers open on top of the Alarm Mask Layer You can use View Arrange Layers to remove any AOI layers present in the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 10 11 12 13 Advanced Classification Wa Yiewer 1 Alarm Mask E a x File Utility View AOI Raster Help 731044 00 469463 50 State Plane Clarke 1866 In the Signature Alarm dialog click Close In the Viewer 1 menu bar select View Arrange Layers The Arrange Layers dialog opens In the Arrange Layers dialog right hold over the Alarm Mask button and select Delete Layer from the Layer Options menu Click Apply to delete the alarm layer from the Viewer You are asked if you want to save the changes before closing Click No In the Arrange Layers dialog click Close 471 ui Adv
343. er Attributes A dot is present on the colorwheel itself indicating the current color of the selected class This color is also shown in the preview window in the lower right corner of the dialog In the Color Chooser dialog change the color of the selected class by dragging the dot on the colorwheel to another spot on the colorwheel Then click the Apply button The selected class changes color in both the Viewer image and the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray You can also change the class color using any of these methods a enter RGB red green blue or IHS intensity hue saturation values in the Color Selector number fields in the Color Chooser dialog or b click the Standard tab in the Color Chooser dialog to select from a list of predefined colors or c move the slider bars in the Color Chooser dialog In the Raster Attribute Editor select Edit Undo Last Edit The change you made in step 4 is undone Click Close in the Color Chooser dialog Select File Close from the Raster Attribute Editor If you have more than one file displayed in a Viewer you can make specific classes or entire files transparent In this example you make the overlaid soils partially transparent so that the Landsat TM information shows through Display lanier img over Insoils img in a Viewer Be sure that the Clear Display checkbox is disabled under Raster Options when you are in the Select Layer To Add dialog In the Viewer menu
344. er magnification or reduction to apply before printing here Reduce or Enlarge _ Print Page Numbers Specify portrait or landscape OK Cancel Help printing here The default setting specifies a 8 5 x 11 page size This is acceptable for most PostScript printers 2 Inthe Page Setup dialog adjust the size of the Page Margins to suit your preferences 3 Click OK 4 Inthe Model Maker viewer menu bar select File Show Page Breaks Dotted lines indicate page breaks according to the page size specified in the Page Setup dialog You may have to use the scroll bars on the bottom and side of the Model Maker viewer to see these page breaks 5 If your model takes up more than one page you may want to rearrange it so that it fits on a single sheet 6 Inthe Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Print icon or select File Print from the Model Maker viewer menu bar The Print dialog opens Printer lliSkena i OK Select to print Bo Pu LE cancer the entire model Hle Mame sav TE oj All Subset Select to print rember of Copies 1 E specific pages 374 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler In the Print dialog select the page s to print in the From and To boxes or select All to print the entire model Click OK to print the model Apply the Criteria Function Evaluate Training Samples Tour Guides The Criteria function in Model Maker simplifies the process of creating
345. er nf Layers Set Coefficients OK Batch Cancel View Click to set coefficients Enter output file here Click to select this option Under Input File enter lanier img That image is a Landsat TM image of Lake Lanier Georgia which was obtained by the Landsat 5 sensor Enter fasseled img in the directory of your choice as the Output File name Under Output Options turn on the Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit checkbox by clicking on it Click on Set Coefficients The Tasseled Cap Coefficients dialog opens a fasseled Cap Coefficients Coefficient Definition Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 Additive Eozrzo JF ozvza F 05000 Flo rzer Jejoorss jpnsom p o26 Je o7 p oss Flore F ossze_ fFlosae6_ JF 0 s210 p nom p nanee 33026 rosas JF 0 0232 F o 0s39_ f o 1937 lo sisz_ F o 0000_ f 0 7623 Je zar p ores JF 0 0069 F o a0s4 fFlo osrs Jf 0 022e F o 0000_ 0 0z20 F 0 0396 Output Options Sensor Landsat 5 TM ii Humber of Layers 7 OK Cancel Help 257 ui Image Interpreter Check Results ui 258 The coefficients that display are the standard default entries for Landsat 5 TM Tasseled Cap transformation For this exercise you use the default entries although you may change these entries at any time Click OK in the Tasseled Cap Coefficients dialog Click OK in the Tasseled Cap dialog to start the function
346. eral models and need to keep track of them all Next add a title and an explanation of each function to the model you just created You must have the model open NOTE Refer to the model pictured on page 370 when going through the next set of steps Select the Text icon in the Model Maker tool palette A Click near the center of the top of the model page to indicate where you want to place the text The Text String dialog opens c ext String Type these words in the Text String dialog Sensitivity Analysis Model Press Return on your keyboard and then click OK in the Text String dialog The text string you typed in step 3 displays on the page Click on the text string you just added to select it The string is reversed out white on black when it is selected On the Model Maker viewer menu bar select Text Size 24 The text string is redisplayed at the new point size If the text overwrites any of the graphics in the model you can simply click on it to select it and then drag it to a new location In the Model Maker viewer menu bar select Text Style Bold ERDAS IMAGINE Add Text to a Function Graphic Format Text Add Text to Other Graphics Tour Guides Spatial Modeler The text string is redisplayed in bold type NOTE If you want to edit a line of text simply double click it to bring up the Text String dialog again Correct your entry or type a new one In the Model Maker tool palette s
347. es Map Outline Color The default color used to display the map outlines Map Outline Style The default line style used for the map outlines e g solid dashed Restore Directory The default destination directory for restoring an image 3 Make any changes you wish to the catalog preferences by entering the new information in the fields and pressing Return on your keyboard 4 To save your changes and accept them as the new defaults click User Save 5 Click Close on the Preference Editor dialog to close the Preference Editor 60 ERDAS IMAGINE Image Catalog Create an Image ERDAS IMAGINE should be running Catalog l Click the Catalog icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel b cd Catalog The default Image Catalog opens a Image Catalog SHOME defauit ictCcatalog Hle Edit View soanen eem 5 o ofnent eMag 5 0 sor penati ansignea s 1 s ar pnoto ting aoe fate unsigned 5 t a sir pneto zims 31 190 efter unsigned s pamesimg a sre St penati nsigned 9 t mtm img 7 581 591 fathematic unsigned 8 E i 46T sss steneti unsigned E t aer 3ssjmenat _ unsigneu T6 ondplain img 1 581 5S81j hematic unsigned 4 E ermtm img 5 1 e4 1024 Jathematic unsigned 8 E yperspectral img 55 1 St fathematic unsigned 8 E andcover img 1 556 SB3 hemalic unsigned 4 E anier img PFT 5402 512 Jathematic u
348. es ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and a Viewer open Click on the DataPrep icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel The Data Preparation menu opens 281 Terrain Surface Interpolation Create New Image Create Surface Click here to start subset Image the Surface Tool Image Geometric Correction Mosaic Images Unsupervised Classification Reproject Images Hep 2 Inthe Data Preparation menu click Create Surface The 3D Surfacing dialog opens Hle Row Surface 3 Click Close in the Data Preparation menu to clear it from the screen Import an ASCII File 1 Inthe 3D Surfacing dialog click the Read Points icon Be The Read Points dialog opens ui 282 ERDAS IMAGINE Terrain Surface Interpolation Head Points Source File Type fasen File Source File Name dat Click this popup meas 5 C l and select ASCII File Enter the name of the source file here 2 Inthe Read Points dialog click on the popup next to Source File Type and select ASCII File 3 Under Source File Name enter Inpts dat This file is located in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory where IMAGINE HOME is the location of ERDAS IMAGINE on your system 4 Click OK in the Read Points dialog The Read Points dialog closes and the Import Options dialog opens E Click on this tab File to Import From to preview the Field Definition l Input Preview in
349. es Here and elsewhere IMAGINE HOME gt refers to the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is installed on your system Preferences are saved in these files e User preferences are saved in HOME imagine version vapreference Global preferences are saved in IMAGINE HOhME defaults apreference When IMAGIME starts it reads in this order 1 The default preferences set by ERDAS 2 your system s global preferences in IMAGINE HOME S defaulte Gprefrerence and then 3 your own preferences in HOME imagine version vapreference Fa Done inl im My Computer E 2 When you are through studying the Preference Editor help file select File Exit from the On Line Help file menu bar The On Line Help file closes 1 Click the Category Help button on the Preference Editor The On Line Help for this category Viewer opens Viewer 44 viewer Microsoft Internet Explorer i ml xl File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e Back gt 3 e a feach XjFavortes E hHistory D ct EM Address lE Ci FProgram FilestMAGINE 8 6thelp html pdFy viewer htm eGo Links si Viewer These preferences affect the Viewer New View Windows Appear On Under UNIS this preference controls the screen on which the ERDAS IMAGINE Viewers display It does not affect where the icon panel or dialogs display This preference is useful only with a multi headed system thatis on a computer with multiple CRT
350. es or categories of data based on their data file values If a pixel satisfies a certain set of criteria then the pixel is assigned to the class that corresponds to that criteria There are two ways to classify pixels into different categories e supervised e unsupervised Supervised classification is more closely controlled by you than unsupervised classification In this process you select pixels that represent patterns you recognize or that you can identify with help from other sources Knowledge of the data the classes desired and the algorithm to be used is required before you begin selecting training samples By identifying patterns in the imagery you can train the computer system to identify pixels with similar characteristics By setting priorities to these classes you supervise the classification of pixels as they are assigned to a class value If the classification is accurate then each resulting class corresponds to a pattern that you originally identified Unsupervised classification is more computer automated It allows you to specify parameters that the computer uses as guidelines to uncover statistical patterns in the data In this tour guide you perform both a supervised and an unsupervised classification of the same image file All of the data used in this tour guide are in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory You should copy the germtm img file to a different directory so that you can have write permission to
351. es have disappeared for the hypothesis and rule you have edited This is because at least one complete condition is now set Tour Guides 565 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Knowledge Engineer Fle Edit Evaluate sjaja 21 eeN aeee LL 2 Highway Map 7 The Variable m 2 Highway Map has been added to the tree Hypotheses Rules Variables Vegetated Within Cit Add an Intermediate Hypothesis Create a New Rule 566 In this section you add an intermediate hypothesis as well as its conditions Select the Create Hypothesis graphic tool and click on the rule Vegetated Within City An intermediate hypothesis New Hypothesis is attached to the rule linked by a New Hypothesis TRUE variable Double click the New Hypothesis rectangle to open the Hypo Props dialog In the Hypo Props dialog change the name to Vegetation and deselect the Create an Output Class checkbox since you do not want this to be an output class Click Apply then Close Using the Create Rule graphic tool place a New Rule on the Vegetation hypothesis Double click on the New Rule to open the Rule Props dialog and change the rule Name to High IR and Low Visible ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V 3 Click in the cell below Variable and select New Variable 4 Typethe name TM Band 4 in the Variable Name field 5 Change the Variable Type to Raster 6 Click the Open icon to open the Select
352. es that overlap the two images are highlighted in yellow 297 Mosaic Draw a Cutline Mosaic Tool No File File Edit Process ej fe eeN Elese Vial sj jajem aa Click this line The Mosaic Tool enables you to draw one cutline through all the images or a single cutline in an individual image In the Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Cutline Selection icon Oo Viewer 3 opens displaying the two images as they intersect ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Mosaic Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel pem e ujaj2 Zoom in here Use the Zoom In tool in the Viewer 3 tool bar to zoom in on the spot where you draw your cutline Do this by selecting the Zoom In tool and then clicking on the spot for which you want a closer view Select the Line tool from the AOI tool palette Dd Once in the Viewer the cursor becomes a crosshair In Viewer 3 draw the cutline by dragging inside the intersecting portion of the two images the portion marked by the AOI box i e on screen digitize the intersecting portion Middle click when finished NOTE When drawing cutlines it is best to trace linear landmarks such as rivers or roads This conceals any seams in the resulting mosaic NOTE If you do not have a three button mouse you can double click to close the polygon In the Mosaic Tool viewer click on the AOI Cutline icon The Choose AOI dialog opens 299 ui
353. ese files before processing begins This prevents problems arising from the existence of an old file The Delete After Processing checkbox is also automatically selected to remove these temporary files when processing finishes Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined F Commands variables The Temp1 variable is A E i Name automatically EN eo Tre fato i uae Patter rusridata S input root maet Set W Delete Before Processing Temp1 is deleted both W Delete After Processing cea after Hew Delete EEEE i Close lt Back Next gt Prisi Help 3 Select the Output variable This represents the name of the final output file The Delete Before Processing checkbox is checked automatically to remove these files before processing begins This prevents problems arising from the existence of an old file Batch Wizard Edit Commands Create Variables Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined The Output file is Cx Commands Variables np also automaticaly 77711 Kr ae enerated
354. essing image Commands No File a Image File tif Select the Compute J enue Ranier Pypo continuous iw Statistics option Ni SEU uM 3 Compute Pyramid Layers Opions Delete Pyramid Layers J Change Map Model POTS 1 Delete Map Model 1 Map Model to World File Sff Change Map Projection Options Delete Map Projection OK Batch Cancel Help Check the Compute Statistics checkbox on the Image Commands dialog Click the Batch button in the Image Commands dialog The Batch Wizard starts and the Select Type of Command Processing panel displays If you click the Finish button now the job runs on the selected file However it is more useful to automate the process to run on several files Select the Modify commands manually option in the Select Type of Command Processing panel Click the Next gt button to display the Edit Commands Create Variables panel Notice that the command visible in the window contains the full path of the selected file In order for the software to be able to make file name substitutions from a list there must be a variable into which the substitution is made This is done in the following step 185 Batch Processing Batch Wizard Edit Commands Create Variables Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on
355. etric distortion inherent in imagery caused by camera sensor orientation topographic relief displacement and systematic errors associated with imagery Orthorectified images are planimetrically true images that represent ground objects in their true real world X and Y positions For these reasons orthorectified imagery has become accepted as the ideal reference image backdrop necessary for the creation and maintenance of vector data contained within a GIS By performing space resection the effects of camera sensor orientation have been considered and removed By defining a DEM or constant elevation value ideal for use in areas containing minimal relief variation the effects of topographic relief displacement can be considered and removed For information on block bundle adjustment see the IMAGINE OrthoBASE M Tour Guide and the IMAGINE OrthoBASE User s Manual Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 30 minutes In this tour guide you orthorectify a camera image of Palm Springs California using a NAPP National Aerial Photography Program photo In rectifying the camera image you use these basic steps e display Camera image e start Geometric Correction Tool e enter the Camera model properties e record GCPs e resample or calibrate the image 265 Orthorectification ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer open You must have write permission in a file if you wish to calibrate it In a command she
356. etscape File Edit view Go Communicator Help 4 3 a3 4 Back Fanwsard Reload Home Use the slider bars to scroll through the navigation Contents Index Search pane Introduction to ERDAS IMAGINE Or m Q Annotmtierm on Line Manual m AO On Line Manual m Classification On Line Manual m Expert Classifier On Line Manual e HvperSpectral On Line Manual Click the to Ej Q IMAGINE Command and Function m QW IMAGINE Interface On Line Manual e Image Catalog On Line Manual EH e Image Interpreter On Line Manual FH e Impart Export On Line Manual e Map Composer On Line Manual open a book and browse its topics Click the to m OrthoBASE On Line Manual close a book m OrthoBASE Pro On Line Manual E e Radar Mapping Suite On Line Man and hide Its m IFSAR DEM On Line Manual topics amp j QV StereoSAR DEM On Line Manual m q amp OrthoRadar On Line Manual m QW Generic SAR Node On Line Manua m Rectification On Line Manual E lj Session On Line Manual MIBERDAS IMAGINE Icon Panel 7 Preference Editor 7 Preference Editar Old Click once to select atopic Double click to open a topic The 7 CD ROM Preferences currently displayed 2 Host Preferences I i i Printer Preferences topic is highlighted kd n x in the Table of E E I Contents a b Document Done t cio g earch Netscape 5 HET Bookmarks E Location C Ppetaram FileszIMAGIME 8 E hel
357. ewer with the Fit to Frame checkbox activated In the Viewer menu bar select Raster Profile Tools The Select Profile Tool dialog opens Click on the Spatial button in the Select Profile Tool dialog and then click OK The Spatial Profile viewer opens Hle Edit View Spatial Profile for hyperspectral img a m m Es tL Distance other 49 Viewer Analyze Data Click on the Polyline icon in the Spatial Profile viewer tool bar and then draw a polyline on the image in the Viewer Click to set vertices and middle click to set an endpoint Dd The spatial profile is displayed in the Spatial Profile viewer Select Edit Plot Layers trom the Spatial Profile viewer menu bar The Band Combinations dialog opens Click here and then here to add the layer to the plot Add Layers 2and 3to the Layers to Plot column by individually selecting them under Layer and clicking the Add Selected Layer button Click Apply and then Close in the Band Combinations dialog Layers 1 2 and 3 are plotted in the Spatial Profile viewer NOTE Moving the cursor around in the Spatial Profile viewer gives you the pixel values for the x and y coordinates of the layers In the Plot Layer box to the right of the tool bar in the Spatial Profile viewer click on the up arrow to view layers 4 and 5 Select Edit Plot Layers from the Spatial Profile viewer to again bring up the Band Combinations dialog In the Band Combi
358. extract the information needed to complete the generic import Data View is also available from the Utility menu on the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar ERDAS IMAGINE Import Export LAN File Format The LAN format has the following characteristics e the first 128 bytes of the file are header data e the number of bands is stored as a 16 bit integer in bytes 9 and 10 e the number of columns is stored as a 32 bit integer in bytes 17 20 e the number of rows is stored as a 32 bit integer in rows 21 24 With this knowledge you can look at the data values in these bytes to obtain the information needed to import the file as generic binary data 2 Inthe DataView dialog click on Data Type and select Unsigned 16 bit 3 Inthe DataView dialog click on Byte Order and select Intel 4 Setthe Offset to 8 and check that the Format is Decimal The DataView dialog is updated to look like the following c DafaView netimorticialexport arravi tdocsitiocsitourllanier lan Hle Edit o s Tape File Structure Unsigned 16 bit data File fnetimorticiafexportfarray 1 docs docs tour fanier an Offset equ als 8 because A selected because Size 1835520 Bytes number of bands Last Modified Mon Sep 27 14 13 33 1999 number of bands begins is two bytes in Pa el f Record il Record Size s F otrset fa F J Aui Som Number of bands Data Type Unsigned 16 bit Fl Format Decimal yi Byte Order intel 00000008
359. f 11 Computing stats file Inaspect tif Batch Processing DR Cancel Cancel All Help When the process completes click OK in the Job Status dialog Now you can check the output directory to see the files that have been stored there In this Directory example the directory holds TIFF files you created from image files using the Subset utility of Image Interpreter Using a UNIX shell or Microsoft Explorer navigate to the directory you specified as the Output Directory Check for the new TIFF files created from all files starting with n in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory winferm 66 fhome kswanson gt ls 1 tif rPu ru r l 4 49 germtm tif ru ru r l T 4 49 hyper P CIT rul ru rr 1836326 ils J ru rniuy rnriu il 313814 i js ru ru ru l 3 Incl ome tif ru ru ru l 3 83 ndem tif ru ru ru k S2 29 neliminate tif ru ru riu l k 919 14 0 EU ik tif ru ru ru l k 919414 D lalak b rur 1 919414 3 94 Inlandc SETTE ru rniuy rniu I 5257 06 0 3 04 Inprewitt tit ru ru ru l 319814 I 3 H4 Input tif rhW ri ru 1 919414 D 3 04 Inslope tif ru ru ru l 919414 Oc 4 44 Insoils tif puru p l k 1831352 Oc 4 56 pan tlanta tif Pu Pul r 1 kswanso 4420796 Oc 4 58 wasial mss tif 61 home kswansoan gt Additional Information Save Load Options Tour Guides The Edit Commands Create Variables panel and the Select Files to Process panel provide methods for saving and loadi
360. f the processes commands as well as the differences between the file types to be processed In many cases the data sets provided to multifile processing jobs must share common physical and ephemeral aspects Set Up 1 Select Session Preferences from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to open the Preference Editor dialog and select the Batch Processing category Tour Guides 193 Batch Processing Run Batch Commands in Record Mode NW DEM Exporter i TR Line Termination for Output Batch Files windows DOG Exporter ip Data View View Batch Queue Update Interval 10 000 E FIT Files 11 GCP Editor Show Status Bar On Batch Queue Dialog ml IMAGINE Image Files H Image Catalog Batch Job Directory PERSOHAL batch uo os eee Show Status Bar On Batch Wizard m Image Drape ImageInfo Knowledge Engineer Close User Save Global Save Category Help Help Batch commands should run in record mode 2 Ensure that the Run Batch Commands in Record Mode option is enabled checkbox checked This preference tells ERDAS IMAGINE to run the commands and record them simultaneously When running in Record Mode you are typically collecting a series of commands to automate Since the first command typically produces input for the next command it is desirable to have the command run as soon as it is placed into the current list of commands Once the command has completed the resulting file is available to be
361. ff the Arcs checkbox then click to turn on Points Click Apply in the Properties dialog Now points are displayed in the Viewer and lines are not These are the polygon label points In the Properties dialog click Points Arcs Polygon and then Apply so that lines and polygons are displayed and points are not Left hold for UNIX or left click for PC on the popup list next to Arcs and select Other to change the line style used The Line Style Chooser dialog opens Line Sie Chooser Standart Custom Change line width here em 0 0 14 Jnin Rounded i Apply Solid black Cap Rounded 7 S e Dashed White on Black Black with Arrow Ends b E Sha line Hb Black Railroad color here Width x Its fiep Current line lor de r style is E shown here W Auto Apply changes In the Line Style Chooser dialog change the Width to 2 00 points Left hold UNIX or left click PC on the Outer Color popup list and select Red Click Apply and then Close in the Line Style Chooser dialog The Line Style Chooser dialog closes The new line style is reflected in the Properties dialog Click Apply in the Properties dialog to change the displayed vectors in the Viewer The vectors are redrawn in the Viewer as thick red lines In the Properties dialog right hold on the popup list next to Arcs and select Other again The Line Style Chooser dialog opens Change the Outer Col
362. fication Layers to match Input Layer tmatianta img Layer_1 Reference Layer Matching Parameters Max Search Radius D r Search Window Size F x Click here to activate Threshold Parameters this checkbox Correlation Threshold 0 800 E Set the Correlation Threshold here Discard Unmatched Point Match All 3elected Points Reference from Input Input from Reference E Match Next Close Help In the GCP Matching dialog under Threshold Parameters change the Correlation Threshold to 8 and then press the Return key on your keyboard Click the Discard Unmatched Point checkbox to activate it Click Close in the GCP Matching dialog In the GCP Tool click the Create GCP icon and then the Lock icon Create 5 check points in each of the two Viewers just as you did for the GCPs NOTE If the previously input points were not accurate then the check points you designate may go unmatched and be automatically discarded When the 5 check points have been created click the Lock icon in the GCP Tool to unlock the Create GCP function Click the Compute Error icon in the GCP Tool to compute the error for the check points z The Check Point Error displays at the top of the GCP Tool A total error of less than 1 pixel error would make it a reasonable resampling 147 Polynomial Rectification Resample the Image Enter file name 15 To view the polynomial coefficients cl
363. file tab to display the raster options Change the layer to color band assignment here Display as True Color Ni Layers tn Colors Red a fp Green s f Blue 5h Lr M Gren brans to Map Nysiem W Clear Display Set View Extent J Ht to Frame J Hn Stretch J3 Data Scaling J Background Transparent Zoom by 1 00 fF Using Nearest Neighbor y Help gun and band 3 in the Blue color gun Note the display options in the Select Layer To Add dialog Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Click here to display the image in the OK Viewer Recent oto PROS Deis CDROM Cancel Help Under Layers to Colors display band 4 in the Red color gun band 5 in the Green color ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer Display Options Defaults The default settings of the Raster Options tab are briefly described below e Orient Image to Map System This checkbox is enabled if calibration is saved to the image file If there is no calibration this option is disabled When enabled the image is displayed using calibration Otherwise the calibration is ignored e Clear Display When this checkbox is enabled and a new image is loaded the image currently displayed in the Viewer is removed Disable this checkbox to overlay images e Fit to Frame lf this checkbox is enabled the image is magnified or reduced to fit the Viewer window at its current size e Data Scaling
364. files in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory are read only you may want to copy them to a new directory and change the file permissions Remember IMAGINE HOME is the variable name for the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE resides 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select File Open Raster Layer 6 ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer You can also open this dialog using either of these two methods use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl r us click on this icon in the Viewer tool bar The Select Layer To Add dialog opens c Select Layer Jo Add Type the file name Fles Permissions Raster Options in this l Filename img Directory x genntm img cot hardcopy data img vul Pow hyperspectral img atlanta intensity img root E l Filename landcover img imagine CDROM Click on this part gt examples V popup list to M anier_home img iS bldgs SSE change file types Eg infor t ip H j Eg lanier dms T E PUES Click here EA l ME review of the j Hle Type IMAGINE Image im Tae p A to select file ype age ima x L image displays truecolor 512 Rows x 512 Columns x 7 Bandis e here 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog click on the Recent button A dialog with a listing of the most recent files you have opened displays You can individually select these files and then click OK to display them quickly in the Select Layer To Add dialog 3 Click Can
365. form geometry 0 10 245 49 select getpref eml default data path img filetypedef raster on input if Bmulti spec amp hi res pan amp outputname enable ok else disable ok filename hi_res_pan title above center High Resolution Pan File info Select the high resolution pan input file shortform geometry 0 70 245 49 select getpref eml default_data_path img filetypedef raster on input if multi_spec amp hi res pan amp outputname enable ok else disable ok filename outputname title above center Output File info Select output file shortform geometry 0 130 245 49 select getpref eml default output path img filetypedef raster pseudotypes off creatable on newfile on input if Bmulti spec amp hi res pan amp outputname enable ok 388 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler else disable ok button ok title OK info Accept all info and issue the job geometry 35 190 82 25 on mousedown disable ok job modeler nq d erdas models 8bit res merge mdl meter state quote multi spec quote hi res pan quote outputname J unload j button cancel title Cancel info Cancel this process do not run the job geometry 140 190 82 25
366. fy Zeros option here because there are no background zero data file values in the germtm img file Click OK in the Supervised Classification dialog to classify the germtm img file using the signatures in the Signature Editor A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the process is 10096 complete click OK in the Job Status dialog oe See Chapter 6 Classification of the ERDAS Field Guide for information on how the pixels are classified Select File Close from the Signature Editor menu bar and from the Viewer 2 menu bar Click Yes when asked if you would like to save the changes to the Signature Editor ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification 5 Click Close in the Raster tool palette 6 Select File Clear from the Viewer 1 menu bar 7 Proceed to the e Perform Unsupervised Classification section on page 483 to classify the same image using the ISODATA algorithm e Evaluate Classification section on page 486 to analyze the classes and test the accuracy of the classification or The super classification image is pictured on the left and the distance image is pictured on the right Wg Viewer 1 germtm_superclass img Layer 1 ioj x M4 Viewer 3 germtm distance img CLayer 1 2 lei xl File Utility View AOI Raster Help File Utility View AOI Raster Help c BE D d amp eg 3 Perform This section shows you how to create a thematic raster
367. g Display Insoils img in a Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Raster Attributes The Raster Attribute Editor opens ERDAS IMAGINE Select colors here Colorwheel Enable transparent layers here Tour Guides Viewer Column titles Hle Edit Right hold here for a Select class to P t M edit here or by licking in the Viewer iid Expand the CellArray by dragging on any corner The CellArray in the Raster Attribute Editor 1s for manipulating the raster attributes and selecting classes to edit To change the color of a class you can select that class in two ways e with your cursor in the Viewer click on the class you want to edit or e with your cursor in the Row column of the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray click the class to edit You use both methods in the following examples Move your cursor inside the Viewer and click on an area That class is highlighted in yellow in the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray and the current color assigned to that class is shown in the bar underneath the Color column In the CellArray right hold with your cursor over the Color patch for the selected class and select Other The Color Chooser dialog opens Click here to make the new color display in the Viewer o 1 000 ro 00 A preview of E Use Color Use Opacity the selected color displays Auto Apply changes here 7 Viewer Make Layers Transparent Edit Rast
368. g 24 461 Relate Manager dialog 635 Report Format Definition dialog 43 Resample 9 148 276 Bicubic Spline 9 148 276 Bilinear Interpolation 9 148 276 Cubic Convolution 9 148 276 Nearest Neighbor 9 148 276 Resample dialog 148 151 277 RGB 38 RGB to IHS 260 RGB to IHS dialog 260 RMS error 145 Roam 20 Roam icon 21 Rotate Magnify Instructions box 105 114 Rotation box rot box 105 108 114 Rule Properties dialog 563 667 Index 668 Rules copy 568 Rules for hypothesis 562 Run icon 32 222 352 357 Run Mosaic dialog 302 309 321 S sig file signature file 456 Sample Node 541 Sample Selection Tool 537 Sampling Grid 529 534 Sampling Project 522 Save AOI As dialog 25 294 Save As dialog 45 Save icon 90 351 357 Save Layer As dialog 221 232 Save Model dialog 351 357 380 Save Options File dialog 175 Save Signature File As dialog 468 Save Symbology As dialog 643 Scalar dialog 359 Scale 73 Scale bar 82 Scale Bar Instructions dialog 82 Scale Bar Properties dialog 83 Script model annotation in 373 delete 372 edit 372 run 372 Select A Directory dialog 7 Select Area for Zooming icon 62 Select Layer To Add dialog 4 7 15 20 46 72 91 97 104 105 109 114 130 136 213 248 254 286 343 363 456 487 600 609 614 616 637 Select Profile Tool dialog 46 Selected Samples 529 Selection Criteria dialog 42 103 345 Sensor Merge 614 IHS 615 Multiplicative 615 Principal Component 615 Se
369. g mapped data The example classes are a subset of the Janier ckb provided in the examples directory This very simple two class example provides an opportunity to use and become familiar with the tools and processes of the Knowledge Engineer The Knowledge Engineer aids in the process of designing a knowledge base by allowing you to set up a framework which can be easily be edited and rearranged during the design process Click the Classifier icon and select Knowledge Engineer from the Classification menu 559 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Decision tree Overview section Knowledge Base component list Place Hypotheses into the Edit Window 560 1 E TT Classitier Signature Editor Unsupervised Classification supervised Classification Threshold Fuzzy Convolution Accuracy Assessment Feature Space Image Click here to start the Feature Space Thematic Knowledge Engineer Knowledge Classifier Knowledge Engineer Close Help The Knowledge Engineer dialog starts with blank slates in the edit window the decision tree overview section and the Knowledge Base component list Hypotheses Rules and Variables File Edit Evaluate lala eeN s I e u Hypotheses Rules Variables Select Edit New Hypothesis to add the first hypothesis ee al Help Edit window ERDAS
370. g under Input Raster File enter germtm img This is the image file that you are going to classify Under Output Cluster Layer enter germtm isodata img in the directory of your choice This is the name for the output thematic raster layer Click Output Signature Set to turn off the checkbox For this example do not create a signature set The Output Signature Set filename part is disabled The Clustering Options allow you to define how the initial clusters are generated Confirm that the Initialize from Statistics checkbox under Clustering Options is turned on This generates arbitrary clusters from the file statistics for the image file Enter a 10 in the Number of Classes number field Set Processing Options The Processing Options allow you to specify how the process is performed Enter 24 in the Maximum Iterations number field under Processing Options 485 ui Advanced Classification Evaluate Classification Create Classification Overlay Preparation 486 This is the maximum number of times that the ISODATA utility reclusters the data It prevents this utility from running too long or from potentially getting stuck in a cycle without reaching the convergence threshold Confirm that the Convergence Threshold number field is set to 95 Convergence Threshold The convergence threshold is the maximum percentage of pixels that has cluster assignments that can go unchanged between iterations This threshold prevent
371. g1 gt IF test OR arg2 OTHERWISE this should be the second item on the list In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt arg1 gt Under Available Inputs click on n5 memory In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt test gt Under Available Inputs click on n1 mobbay In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt arg2 gt Under Available Inputs click on n2 mobbay Your Function Definition dialog should now contain the following ERDAS IMAGINE Add Raster Properties Tour Guides 13 Spatial Modeler EITHER n5 memory IF n1 mabbay OR n2 mabbay OTHERWISE n5 memory is the filtered image n1 mobbay has the AOI mask and n2 mobbay is the original image Click OK Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click below the new Function object in the Model Maker viewer Connect the Function object to the Raster object Double click on the output Raster object Navigate to a directory where you have write permission and enter smooth water img for the output image name Click on the Delete If Exists in case you need to run the model more than once to get it working properly Click on the OK button Your model should look like the following 451 Spatial Modeler Hle Edit Model Text Process Ie n1 mobbe n2 mobbay CONVOLVE Sms EITHER n5 memory I
372. ge is slowed down significantly if the math model is complicated One minor advantage to image calibration is that it uses less disk space and leaves the image s spectral information undisturbed It is recommended that image calibration be used only when necessary due to the drawbacks of the process If you would like to resample the camera image proceed to Resample the Image on page 2771 If you would like to calibrate the camera image proceed to Calibrate the Image on page 278 ERDAS IMAGINE Resample the Image Tour Guides Orthorectification Resampling requires an input file and a transformation matrix by which to create the new pixel grid In the Geo Correction Tools click on the Resample icon amp The Resample dialog opens Enter the output file name here Click on this popup list to select Cubic Convolution Output Map Information Projection UTM Units meters Humber rows 956 Humber columns 1003 Output Comers LRA 5435507 000000 LRY 37339313 000000 Change the output cell sizes here pus a Cell Sizes a Y 10 000000 FE 2 Recalculate Output Defaults E Ignore Zero in Stats OK Batch Cancel Help Click to enable this option In the Resample dialog under Output File enter GeoModel img in the directory of your choice Under Resample Method click on the popup list and select Cubic Convolution Under Output Cell Sizes enter 10 for X and 10
373. gend icon in the Annotation tool palette Move the cursor into the Map Composer viewer and the cursor changes to the legend positioning cursor Click in the Map Composer viewer under the left side of the map frame to indicate the position of the upper left corner of the legend Click in the map frame to indicate that this is the image you want to use to create the legend You are reminded to do this with the following dialog Legend instructions a N e I in the mapframe with the layer you want to use for the legend Cancel The Legend Properties dialog opens with the Basic properties displayed The class names are listed under Legend Layout Legend Properties Basic d Columns Color Patches EM itle propedics e eaaa Middle click here to select multiple r OWS Click here to change the class name to SPOT eer fyolfatianta rootimagine examples modeler_output img Layer_1 Legend Layout Add Descriptor Panchromatic Legend Units Points i ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer 5 Under Legend Layout click in the Class Names field entitled Class 5 of Row number 6 6 Type SPOT Panchromatic Press Return on your keyboard 7 Under Legend Layout move your cursor to the Row column and click on Row 2 then middle click on Row 6 to select the classes to display in the legend Rows 2 and 6 and the rows in between them are highlighted in yellow These are the only entries that are used i
374. h column in the CellArray narrower and then reduce the width of the entire Click on the Column icon in the Raster Attribute Editor T The Column Properties dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Click here to select the Color column Generate Statistics Tour Guides Viewer Column Properties Type Color _ Show RGB Alignment Center Click here to Ei activate this function Perret Permeablity POY Ha suitablity DU Value DU Hame Display Width Top Bottom New DET niis In the Column Properties dialog select Color under Columns and activate the Show RGB checkbox Click OK in the Column Properties dialog In the Raster Attribute Editor place your cursor on the column separator in the header row between the Color and Red columns The cursor changes from the regular arrow to a double headed arrow You can now change the size of the Color column Drag the double headed arrow to the right to make the Color column wider Repeat this procedure dragging the double headed arrow to the left to narrow the other columns In the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray select the entire Red column by clicking in the Red title box The entire column is highlighted in blue With your cursor in the Red title box right hold Column Options Compute Stats The Statistics dialog opens Viewer Column selected Column statistics The Statistics for the column selected are reported Column Stat
375. hare common physical and ephemeral aspects Select Session Preferences from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to open the Preference Editor dialog and select the TIFF Image Files category 1 bit Image Compression Hone ial bit Image Compression Hone ial RAW Image Files Other Image Compression Hone ial RPF Image Files Raster Import General Edits Allowed zi Raster Processing SDTS Raster Exporter Laste Ma gos J Spatial Modeler World File Access Read ial User Interface amp Sessio Georeferencing falbacks Vector Raz Close User save Global Save Category Help Help Make sure that edits are allowed Ensure that the Edits Allowed option is enabled checkbox checked If you want this to be the default click User Save Click Close Now you are ready to start the Image Command Tool which provides Batch access to many of the functions that the Image Information tool provides interactively Select Tools Image Command Tool trom the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to open the Image Commands dialog Click the File Open icon on the Image Commands dialog In the File Selector dialog click the Files of Type popup list and select TIFF Select a TIFF file and click OK The options on the Image Commands dialog are now enabled NOTE If you do not have a TIFF file one is created in the exercises of Chapter 7 Image Commands on page 153 ERDAS IMAGINE Start the Batch Wizard Tour Guides Batch Proc
376. he Preference Editor Click on the Classifier icon from the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Tassifler The Classification menu opens signature Editor Unsupervised Classification supervised Classification Threshold Click here to start the Fuzzy Convolution Unsupervised Classification oe Feature Space Image Feature Space Thematic Knowledge Classifier Knowledge Engineer Close Help 2 Click on Unsupervised Classification from the Classification menu The Unsupervised Classification Isodata dialog appears 167 Import Export 168 10 11 Select the input file here E Output Cluster Layer Filename tif Name the output file here Clustering Options aize from Statistics Use Signature Means Humber of Classes m E Initializing Options Color scheme Options Uncheck the Output Signature Set Filename checkbox Processing Options skip Factors DEM Iterations le fF Jioc Convergence Threshold on50 l J3 assify zeros OK Batch AOI Cancel Help Change the number of classes to 30 Click the Open icon by Input Raster File ov g In the Input Raster File dialog click dmtm img then click OK The Input Raster File dialog opens The raster file dmtm img is located in the IMAGINE HOME examples directory Click the Open icon next to Output Cluster Laye
377. he Annotation tool palette open If the Styles dialog is not currently open select Annotation Styles from the Map Composer menu bar The Styles dialog opens Line Style E Fil Style M Hold on this popup list to select Other Text Style AaBbCc Bl Symbol Style SR B In the Styles dialog hold the popup list next to Symbol Style and select Other The Symbol Chooser dialog opens Symbol Chooser Click here to Standard custom select from a North Arrows Horth Arro list of north a is ui arrows north arrow 1 W Use Color B Change the J d north arrow 2 l size here Select this north arrow Size SEXE a Units paper Alpes iW Close north arrow 3 rJ north arrow 4 north arrow 5 4 north arrow 6 W Auto Apply changes In the Symbol Chooser dialog click on the popup list and select North Arrows Select north arrow 4 from the North Arrows list The preview window at the bottom right corner of the Symbol Chooser dialog displays north arrow 4 In the Symbol Chooser dialog change the Size to 36 points a size of 72 points is equal to one inch and press Return on the keyboard The preview window at the bottom right corner of the Symbol Chooser dialog displays the north arrow as it looks in the map composition ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer Click Apply and then Close in the Symbol Chooser dialog to make this the default symbol Note that the North Arrow i
378. he GCP marker to make it easier to see Digitize at least two more GCPs in each Viewer on tmAtlanta img in the first Viewer and panAtlanta img in the second Viewer by repeating the above steps The GCPs you digitize should be spread out across the image to form a large triangle i e they should not form a line Choose colors that enable you to see the GCPs in the Viewers After you digitize the fourth GCP in the first Viewer note that the GCP is automatically matched in the second Viewer This occurs with all subsequent GCPs that you digitize After you digitize GCPs in the Viewers the GCP Tool CellArray should look similar to the following example 143 ee Polynomial Rectification c GCP Fool Input mAtlanta img Heference panAtlanta img Hle View Edit yl P ze m Ix a z DAI Control Point Error S 0 1835 vj 2az5 Total 0 3002 Fonte Paint ID Color XInput input Color X Ref Y Ref Type acre JMEN a eoa NN 400904701 1368057868 control 3 ENEE o 144293 BENN 432235059 136026483 mm i6353 343551 BENH 409931 886 134548133 O 277599 360544 BENH 428210054 134050100 EM gt rj GCP 4 J GCP 5 aal L GCP 3 E E Control Selecting GCPs Selecting GCPs is useful for moving GCPs graphically or deleting them You can select GCPs graphically in the Viewer or in the GCP CellArray e To select a GCP graphically in the Viewer use the Select
379. he Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n1 Spots is written under the input Raster graphic In Model Maker you have access to built in kernels or you can create your own In this exercise use the built in 5 X 5 summary filter Double click the input Matrix graphic The Matrix Definition and Matrix dialogs open ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Select Built In Custom Matrix Read w Output Built In Kernel Summary y size oxo Fi Click here to select the kernel Selected kernel shown here Click here to E Normalize Matrix During Execution select the size OK Cancel Help 2 Inthe Matrix Definition dialog click on the Kernel popup list and select Summary 3 Click on the Size popup list and select 5x5 The kernel displays in the Matrix dialog 4 Click OK in the Matrix Definition dialog The Matrix Definition and Matrix dialogs close and n8 Summaryis written under the Matrix graphic in the Model Maker viewer Define Function 1 Double click the Function graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Function Definition dialog opens Tour Guides 355 ui Spatial Modeler Define Output Raster Layer Click here and it opens i here Functions Analysis n1 spots n3 Summary CLUMP layers 4 CLUMP layer 8 CONVOLVE raster kem CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster CORRELATION raster IC COVARIANCE
380. he mouse to view the coordinates of the fft layer so that you know what information to enter into the dialogs In the next series of steps you use some of the menu bar editing options Then in the next section you perform many of those same edits using the mouse driven tools Use Low Pass Low pass filtering allows you to attenuate the high frequency components of the image but Filtering allows the low frequency components to pass through 1 Select Mask Filters from the Fourier Editor menu bar The Low High Pass Filter dialog opens Select filter to use here Filter Type Low Pass i Window Function Ideal Select window function here i Low Frequency Gain co o nm Set window High Frequency Gan p oo radius here OK Cancel Help Tour Guides 219 Fourier Transform Editor Filter Types When the Filter Type is set to Low Pass its function is the same as the Low Pass Filter icon on the tool bar When the Filter Type is set to High Pass its function is the same as the High Pass Filter icon on the tool bar You use these mouse driven tools later in this tour guide 2 Inthe Low High Pass Filter dialog click on the Window Function popup list and select Ideal An ideal window function produces a sharp transition at the edge of the filter 3 Change the Radius to 10 00 4 Leave all other parameters as is and click OK A low pass filter is applied to all values outside of the radius
381. he parametric signatures are used In the Signature Editor select all of the parametric signatures In the Signature Editor menu bar select Evaluate Separability The Signature Separability dialog opens Set this number aed E Layers Per Combination Combinations 20 Pairs Per Combination 45 Distance Measure C Euclidean Divergence Click here ne C Jefferies Matuzita Output Form i ASCII CellArray Report Type Summary Report C Complete Report Click here to Use Class Probabilities start process In the Signature Separability dialog set the Layers Per Combination number field to 3 so that three layers are used for each combination Click Transformed Divergence under Distance Measure to use the divergence algorithm for calculating the separability Confirm that the Summary Report checkbox is turned on under Report Type in order to output a summary of the report 477 Advanced Classification Check Statistics 478 The summary lists the separability listings for only those band combinations with best average and best minimum separability In the Signature Separability dialog click OK to begin the process When the process is complete the IMAGINE Text Editor opens displaying the report Wa Editor Dir l mj x File Edit View Find Help O wW St Signature Separability Listing File f temporarium qermtm ziged zig Distance measure
382. he sensor and the output raster it produces Select Adjust Brightness from the Radar Interpreter menu The Brightness Adjustment dialog opens Input File img Output File img Enter input file l fevotaniraiar a sil Ea Trevotanaradaring gf roma z Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Box Select subset l Data Type Output Options Apply to Row A Column Input Unsigned 16 bit Output Float single Fa Ignore Zero in Stats Click to select output data type Enter output file name here Select column here In the Adjust Brightness dialog under Input File enter the name of the input file flevolandradar img Under Output File enter the name of the output file bright img in the directory of your choice Under Subset Definition select a subset of the file if you want to apply the function to a portion of the image rather than the entire image Select the Data Type under Output file The default is Float Single which is recommended to save disk space Under Apply to in the Output Options select Column You can often tell whether the data are stored in rows or columns by looking at the image header data or by consulting documentation supplied with the data Use the Data View option from the Import Export dialog or Tools View Binary Data from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to read the image header data Click OK in the Adjust Brightness dialog 621
383. he spot where you click is the bottom left corner of your text string The Annotation Text dialog opens ex Annotation Text Enter Text string Environmental Sensitivity Analysis Type text string here Keyboard ASCII File Move your pointer into the Enter Text String area in the Annotation Text dialog Type Environmental Sensitivity Analysis in the text field Click OK in the Annotation Text dialog to place the text in the map composition The text string is now displayed in the map composition Click on the text string in the Map Composer viewer to select it From the Map Composer menu bar select Annotation Styles The Styles dialog opens In the Styles dialog hold on the popup list next to Text Style and select Other The Text Style Chooser dialog opens In the Text Style Chooser dialog change the text Size to 20 points The preview window at the bottom right corner of the Text Style Chooser dialog illustrates the change in point size ERDAS IMAGINE Position Text Tour Guides Map Composer In the Text Style Chooser dialog click on the Custom tab In the scrolling list of font names scroll to the top of the list and select Antique Olive The preview window at the bottom right corner of the dialog illustrates the selected font Click Apply in the Text Style Chooser dialog to change the selected text in the map composition Click Close in the Text Style Chooser dialog if you are satisfied with
384. hee ae gee eee dee oe 2 oe Ease Ee ed ete cn ee SS Se 234 Chapter 11 Image INlCrprelel 2 846 essen see eee eee ee ROR SOROR ERA Oe PTR See GR CR PON aL 237 INTFOGUCUON pce seen che Eee ere eee en eee Peete ERE See Eee ee Se Boe oe es 237 Subsellhg an Iage c s cece heehee PRE EE eee RC De RU ee ne eee eee 237 Selecting an AOI to Subset 1 0 eee hh 238 Subsetting an Image Without Snapping 0 0 ce eee eens 239 Displaying the Subset with the Original Data llli II 242 Subsetting an Image With Snap to Raster 0 eee eens 244 Viewing the Snapped Subset 0 0 cc eee nns 245 ADDIy Spatial Enhancement 22m daw dev edd CVE xx Hw ROE uL Peace eee gom x 246 POOW CONVOINNON s Le aos PERS creed ae tee a she bee etpauceteoekbe FPES USO E RS 246 Select Input Output Files llle hrs 247 DeCleCURGCING P rrrrrrrrPPET 247 GC KUNG FIG M m 248 hlee dO serer ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee 249 Use the View Option acu acoge cocum DR n ce anes ome e cdi ox Gee a 250 VEW RE UNS pada C T rrrrrwm 251 Apply Radiometric Enhancement eee hh han 252 Apply Brightness Inversion a uude deir e qe dde cc de diee dr aec aes qj clo d oet ei Ge e eR d el 253 au MP PPP nrrrrrrr 254 VIEW Cari eSi so sacks node pene Sees ex diu as ewe eee ete eee d eS rd d d 254 Apply Spectral Enhancement cerle herr hhhhhhhhhhhnn 256 Use
385. his option Enter contrast multiplier here In the Wallis Adaptive Filter dialog under Input File enter the file despeckle4 img Under Output File enter the name enhanced img in the directory of your choice Under Data Type click Stretch to Unsigned 8 Bit Under Moving Window confirm that the Window Size is set to 3 Rough images usually require smaller window sizes 3 x 3 whereas smooth or cleaner images can tolerate larger window sizes Set the Multiplier to 3 00 Click OK in the Wallis Adaptive Filter dialog The Wallis Adaptive Filter dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 10096 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically In the menu bar of Viewer 2 select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens 613 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog select the file enhanced img and then click OK 3 Examine the differences between the two files 4 When you are finished comparing the images select File Clearin Viewer 1 and Viewer 2 Apply Sensor Merge Next you apply the Sensor Merge function to an image and observe the results This package of algorithms enables you to combine imagery from different sensors Examples of this would be radar with TM imagery or multifrequency radar with aeromagnetic data Three different families of
386. ht click on the file and select Properties In the Attributes section of the General tab make sure Read only is not checked Click OK in the Properties dialog Open testdem img in the Viewer This is a DEM file of the Gainesville Georgia area corresponding to the lanier img data you have been using If it is not already displayed select AOI Tools from the Viewer menu bar to open the AOI tool palette The AOI tool palette displays The AOI tools are used to define the area s to be edited Click on the Ellipse icon in the AOI tool palette and then drag near the center of the Viewer image to draw an elliptical AOI measuring about 1 to 2 in diameter 33 M Viewer EI When the mouse button is released the AOI is surrounded by chaser lights and a bounding box Interpolate 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select Raster Interpolate The Interpolate dialog opens EIE 7 Point Paint ID X y ayer d Click this icon Yo to digitize points Click this icon to lock the designated tool Al lt lt 20 Use fan i buffer points and inside a01 i digitized points _ Exclude Value Computation Range m E Min 872 000 Max 1310 000 E Function Potynomial ia Buffer Distance EF Polynomial Order 2 E Buffer Points 10 Ef Apply Close Help l Digitize Points Digitizing points helps you to control the overall surface generated by the raster editing function However you should digitize poi
387. ialog opens of the points so that Symbol Chooser Standard Custom Select symbol A to use here Black crosshair E Use Color g o CALCE Black North Arrow 2 Double Line Units paper Alpts i Close Help E Auto Apply changes 7 Inthe Symbol Chooser dialog under Menu click Black Filled Circle 8 Hold on the Use Color popup list and select White 9 Change the Size to 4 00 points 106 Select symbol color here A preview of the selected symbol displays here ERDAS IMAGINE 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 Use Editing Tools and Commands 2 3 Tour Guides Vector Querying and Editing Click Apply and then Close in the Symbol Chooser dialog The new style is reflected in the Properties dialog although you cannot see it because it is a white symbol against a white background In the Properties dialog click Nodes then hold on the popup list next to Alf and select Other to change the style of nodes The Symbol Chooser dialog opens Change the Size of the symbol to 6 00 points Hold on the Use Color popup list and change the color of the symbol to something that is visible over germtm img such as Magenta When you have selected a color click Apply and then Close in the Symbol Chooser dialog Click Apply in the Properties dialog The vectors and points are drawn in white and the nodes appear in the color you selected in step 13 Cli
388. ication or enhancement The IMAGINE Vector capabilities are divided into these levels e Native vector capabilities that are native to ERDAS IMAGINE These functions provide vector and attribute display and query using multiple selection tools as well as vector creation and editing IMAGINE Vector module an add on module for ERDAS IMAGINE that provides you with additional vector utility tools and importers exporters of various vector formats The utility tools include coverage clean build transform create label raster to vector and vector to raster conversion and a table tool for an INFO database The importers exporters handle the following data formats DFAD DGN DLG DXF ETAK IGES SDTS TIGER and VPF This tour guide mainly discusses the IMAGINE Vector module Depending on the package you are using you may not be able to perform all of the steps The Native capabilities are discussed in Chapter 4 Vector Querying and Editing on page 95 This tour guide covers the following topics e copying vector data e manipulating information attributes e displaying vector layers e changing vector symbology e building and cleaning layers The data used in this tour guide are in the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory Replace IMAGINE HOME with the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is installed on your system e g usr imagine 650 Tour Guides 627 IMAGINE Vector Copy Vector Data 628 A Digiti
389. ices dialog to start the process A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is Done click OK Next you use the RGB to IHS function red green blue to intensity hue saturation and the reverse IHS to RGB function to enhance the image information obtained by this mineral ratio The purpose of this function is to produce an input file for the IHS to RGB function Select RGB to IHS from the Spectral Enhancement menu The RGB to IHS dialog opens AGB to IHS Input File immn Output File img Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Box mq uspo Fax 5mm JF Hie mo of Layers 3 Red 5h iF Green e iF Blue n iF Ignore Zero in Stats OK Batch AOL Cancel View Help Enter the mineral ratio output from the previous exercise mineral img as the Input File Enter RGBtolHS img in the directory of your choice as the Output File Click OK in the RGB to IHS dialog A Job Status dialog displays reporting the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is Done click OK ERDAS IMAGINE Image Interpreter Choose IHS to RGB Now you convert the IHS image back into an RGB image 1 Select IHS to RGB from the Spectral Enhancement menu The IHS to RGB dialog opens Input File imm Output File img RGBtoIHS img gl IHStoRGB img gl Coordinate Type
390. ices of the line display similar to the following example Vertices Each vertex is marked by a black dot in the example above Drag one of the vertices to a new location to reshape the line Select Vector Undo from the Viewer menu bar to undo this edit The line is restored to its original shape and it is deselected NOTE To delete a vertex you can Shift middle click To add a vertex middle click ERDAS IMAGINE Create New Vector Layer Tour Guides Vector Querying and Editing Click the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel A new Viewer opens In the new Viewer Viewer 2 select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog select IMAGINE Image from the File Type popup list Under Filename click on the file germtm img Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and confirm that the Fit to Frame option is enabled Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file germtm img displays in the Viewer In the Viewer 2 menu bar select File New Vector Layer The New Vector Layer dialog opens In the New Vector Layer dialog under Vector Layer enter a name for the new layer such as zone88subsel in the directory of your choice Vector coverages include Arc Coverage SDE Vector Layer and Shapefile Click OK in the New Vector Layer dialog The New Arc Coverage Layer Option dialog opens c New Are Coverage Laver Option
391. ick OK in the File Name dialog The new file sharp dmtm img is listed in the Raster dialog Click on the Delete If Exists checkbox This option allows you to run the model many times You may have to run the model more than once to get it working Click on the OK button in the Raster dialog At this point your model should look similar to the following Spatial Modeler Hle Edit Model Text Process n4 sharp dmtm 7 Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar j A Job Status dialog opens which tracks the progress of the model execution Modeler running model EGMD 008221 Job State Done Percent Done 100 0 NMNMEEEEEEEEEEEEEEENN 100 OK Parei Help You receive an error similar to the following 422 ERDAS IMAGINE Correct the Model Start the Model Librarian Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Note the line Error processing file AmpvEGMD_008221 line 36 number the error parse error at ar near It occurs on OK OK to All The next step is to figure out what this error means Click OK to dismiss the Error dialog Click OK to dismiss the Job Status dialog You can set the Keep Job Status Box in the User Interface amp Session category of the Preference Editor so that the Job Status box is dismissed automatically after an operation is performed In the Model Maker viewer select Process Generate Script The name of the mode
392. ick OK to display the layer in the Viewer The zone88 polygon layer is displayed in the Viewer similar to the following example Tour Guides 97 ui Vector Querying and Editing Change Vector Properties 1 Select Vector Viewing Properties from the Viewer menu bar File Utility View AOI The Properties dialog opens Click the check boxes to select the features to display Use the popup lists to modify properties Click to apply new styles to the displayed vectors J Polygon 93 Arcs 243 g Ir Points 92 Attribute A Paso 5 6d EN Ej wr EDEN J Hb taheis EE a MHSUDE Lars a o Tics Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel J Nodes d B wr EDEN Semi g J Preudo g j Bounding Box Z selection Color 3 Display the Selected Subset Only J Attribute based symbology Help Right hold this color patch to select another highlight color for selected features Click to use attribute based symbology This dialog allows you to determine how and which vector features lines points attributes polygons tics and nodes are displayed You can also select the color to use for selected features ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 10 11 12 Vector Querying and Editing In this example the lines are currently displayed in the Viewer using the default styles shown in the Properties dialog In the Properties dialog click to turn o
393. ick here lanier dms bldgs Enter new vector va bldgs layer name here zone88 examples tour zz Click here to start copy OK Batch Cancel Help Tour Guides 629 IMAGINE Vector In the Copy Vector Layer dialog under Vector Layer to Copy enter the file name zone88 Under Output Vector Layer enter zone88 in the directory of your choice Click OK in the Copy Vector Layer dialog A Job Status dialog displays to track the progress of the function When copying is complete you are ready to proceed with this tour guide Click OK in the Job Status dialog if it does not dismiss automatically The Copy Vector Layer dialog automatically closes Click Close in the Vector Utilities menu to dismiss it Manipulate Info Files Prepare Start Table Tool 630 The Table Tool is a utility for managing INFO files It allows you to view edit relate import export copy rename delete merge and create INFO tables ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and you must have completed the previous section Copy Vector Data on page 628 Click the Vector icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel amp In the Vector Ultilities menu click on Start Table Tool The Vector Utilities menu opens ERDAS IMAGINE The Table Tool opens 1 Hle Edit Utilities Relate View IMAGINE Vector 3 Click Close in the Vector Utilities menu to clear it from the screen Display an INFO File 4
394. ick here and it displays here Value 4 select Subset Add Remove Clear Close Help Next you select all classes with a slope greater than 25 By looking at the Recode dialog you can see that all classes greater than Value 4 have a slope greater than 25 You can then invert your selection to recode all classes with values less than 25 In the Selection Criteria dialog under Columns click Value Value is displayed in the Criteria window at the bottom of the dialog Under Compares click gt In the calculator click the number 4 The Criteria window now shows Value gt 4 In the Selection Criteria dialog click Select to select all classes meeting that criteria in the Recode dialog All classes greater than 4 are highlighted in yellow in the Recode dialog Click Close in the Selection Criteria dialog In the Recode dialog confirm that the New Value is set to 1 In the Recode dialog click Change Selected Rows to give the selected classes a new value of 7 With your cursor in the Value column of the Recode dialog right hold Row Selection Invert Selection to deselect all currently selected classes and select all nonselected classes Enter a New Value of 0 in the Recode dialog Click Change Selected Rows to give the selected classes a new value of 0 Click OK in the Recode dialog The Recode dialog closes Click OK in the Raster dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Define Input Flood Plain Laye
395. ick the Model Properties icon in the Geo Correction 16 Tools El The Polynomial Model Properties dialog opens Once you have checked the tabs of the Polynomial Model Properties dialog click Close in the Polynomial Properties dialog Resampling is the process of calculating the file values for the rectified image and creating the new file All of the raster data layers in the source file are resampled The output image has as many layers as the input image ERDAS IMAGINE provides these widely known resampling algorithms Nearest Neighbor Bilinear Interpolation Cubic Convolution and Bicubic Spline Resampling requires an input file and a transformation matrix by which to create the new pixel grid Click on the Resample icon in the Geo Correction Tools amp j The Resample dialog opens e Aesample Output File img Resample Method for the new p l georeferenced im age file Output Map Information Projection state Plane n Click here to select the Bilinear Interpolation Output map Number rows 511 Number columns 511 projection should be State Plane 148 resampling method Output Comers 7 Ry 1324358 000000 f Click here to exclude Output Cell Sizes zero file values in statistics x 109 000000 E w for output file _Recalculate Output Defaults W Ignore Zero in Stats OK Bath Cancel Hep Ti T i T ERDAS IMAGINE Verify the
396. ics are recalculated after a raster file is imported In the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Close All Viewers Get Image Information Edit Image Information The Imagelnfo utility is a function that gives you information about ERDAS IMAGINE image files With this function you can access any image file and see the e date of last modification e number of Layers e layer information Width Height Type Block Width Block Height Data Type Compression and Pyramid Layer status for each layer in the file e calculated statistics e map coordinates when available e map projection information when available NOTE Imagelnfo can only be used for image files Use Vector Info for vector coverages In image files that have write permission you can edit file information or perform the following operations using the ImagelInfo dialog e change layer name e compute statistics e add change or delete map information e add change or delete map projection ERDAS IMAGINE 176 Import Export e delete calibration e access the Raster Attribute Editor to change file attributes such as color histogram values etc View Image In this section you use the ImageInfo utility to learn more about the anier img file Information 1 Select Tools Image Information from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The ImageInfo dialog opens This option is also accessible from Session Tools Image Information on the ERDAS IMAGIN
397. iewed image this option may not be applicable to some data Coordinate Type the type of coordinates used to define the subset If there is no map information in the source image only File coordinates are available Subset Definition define a subset area for previewing or importing 2 Click OK in the Preview Options dialog 3 Click Preview in the Import SPOT dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function Job state Previewing level 1B from CDROM Percent Done 14 0M 100 ok Cancel Help When the Job Status bar shows 100 indicating that the job is 100 done the dialog automatically closes A Viewer window similar to the following opens and displays the preview image 162 ERDAS IMAGINE Check Import Options Tour Guides 1 Import Export Viewer 7 SPOT test preview img CSPOT Band 3 CSPOT a Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help isisiziaalor se es e Ix lal Preview images have a preview img file extension Because the preview image is decimated it is not suitable for image processing In the Import SPOT dialog click on Import Options The Import Options dialog opens This dialog is similar to the Preview Options dialog Output Data Compression Hone iW Output Data Type Unsigned 8 bit iW Block Size g4 f Select Layers No of Input Layers 3 Enter as a comma separated list i e 1 3 5 o
398. igned 4 bit 5 Confirm that Thematic is selected in the File Type popup list Tour Guides 379 Spatial Modeler Save the Model 380 6 Click OK in the Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n3 Slope ppdclass is written under the output Raster graphic In the Model Maker viewer menu bar select Model Set Window to define the working window for the model The Set Window dialog opens Set Window set Window To Intersection Click on this popup 4 diano Fip from Benue ox list to select Intersection Gro p goes Fans season a ak n aoao F inv sanos a You want the model to work on the intersection of the input files The default setting is the union of these files In the Set Window dialog click on the Set Window To popup list and select Intersection Click OK in the Set Window dialog Click the Save icon or select File Save As from the Model Maker viewer tool bar to save your model The Save Model dialog opens In the Save Model dialog enter a name for your model Be sure you are saving the model in a directory in which you have write permission Click OK in the Save Model dialog In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Run icon or select Process Run from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to run the model El While the model runs a Job Status dialog opens reporting the status of the model ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler 5 When the model is finished
399. image CD Click to go to the previous image on CD if a OK Preview Options Preview Help multi image CD Cancel Import Options CRHCKDOR Batch Click here to define Click here to see options for the preview a preview image before image importing the data 1 Click on Preview Options and the following dialog opens Preview Options S ZE 512 Decimation Nearest Neighbor Preview Bands Red n E aee iT Bue Coordinate Type subset Definition OK Cancel From Inquire Box Help 161 Import Export Preview Options Dialog The Preview Options allow you to import a decimated 1 e reduced version of the image file You can view the image before importing to be sure that this is the image you want or to define a subset area of the image to import The Preview Options dialog is the same for all importers For example if you were importing a Landsat TM scene and you wanted to preview the image the Preview Options dialog would be identical to the one on page 161 In the Preview Options dialog you can set Size of the displayed image up to 512 x 512 or 1024 x 1024 Decimation Nearest Neighbor provides a faster preview image although it may appear blocky or Average Pixel averages groups of pixels which provides a smooth image but may take longer especially with large images Preview Bands the bands that are assigned the red green and blue colors in the prev
400. in Viewer 1 and Viewer 2 Click Close in the Image Enhancement menu Next apply the Texture Analysis function to an image and observe the results The radar data s sensitivity to texture is an advantage over other types of imagery where texture is not a quantitative characteristic NOTE Texture analysis has been shown to be useful for geologic discrimination and vegetation classification From the Radar Interpreter menu select Texture Analysis The Texture Analysis dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE View Results Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Texture Analysis ju Enter the Enter the Input File img Output File img output file input file ievotanaradarimy ftextureimg 4 amp gf name here name here l Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Box Data Type Moving Window Input Unsigned 16 bit Use odd number only Output Fiat single Window Size 5 Lr Select operator to use by Operators Skewness E Ignore Zey Stats clicking here ok Batch Cancel Help Enter window SSS x size here In the Texture Analysis dialog enter flevolandradar img as the Input File Enter fexture img in the directory of your choice as the Output File Click on the Operators popup list and select Skewness Under Moving Window enter a Window Size of 5 Click OK in the Texture Analysis dialog The Texture Analysis dialog closes and a Job Status dialog disp
401. information on Image Interpreter functions see Chapter 11 Image Interpreter on page 237 Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 3 hours 339 Spatial Modeler Start Model ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open Maker l Click the Modeler icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Hodeler The Spatial Modeler menu displays Spatial Modeler a Model Maker Model Librarian Close Help 2 Click on Model Maker in the Spatial Modeler menu to start Model Maker The Model Maker viewer and tool palette open ERDAS IMAGINE is delivered with several sample graphical models that you can use as templates to create your own models Open these models in Model Maker by selecting File Open from the Model Maker viewer menu bar or clicking the Open icon on the tool bar 3 Click Close in the Spatial Modeler menu to clear it from the screen Create When three input thematic layers are combined the resulting file has meaningful class values Sensitivi ty La yer These values may also be easily color coded in the final output file so that they are visible over the SPOT panchromatic reference data Therefore you recode the data values of the input files so that the most environmentally sensitive areas have the highest class value and the least have the lowest value You use class values 0 4 with 4 being the most environmentally sensitive and 0 being the least This recode also fa
402. ing parameters in the Map Frame dialog Then you can select the image area you like by using the mouse to move the cursor box in the Viewer The three buttons at the top of the Map Frame dialog allow you to adjust two parameters while keeping the other frozen Start by selecting the size of the map frame Change Scale and Frame Area and then freeze that option to select the scale and position of the map frame Change Scale and Map Area Your map frame is positioned according to the following illustration The origin of the Map Composer viewer is the lower left corner In the Map Frame dialog click the Change Map and Frame Area Maintain Scale option so that you can accurately size the map frame in the Map Composer viewer window In the Map Frame dialog double click on the value in Frame Width to select it Type 5 5 for the width of the map frame and then press the Return key on your keyboard Double click on the value in the frame Height to the right of Frame Width to select it Type 5 5 for the height of the map frame and then press the Return key on your keyboard 75 Map Composer Adjust the Position of the Map Frame In the Map Frame dialog click the Change Scale and Map Area Maintain Frame Area option so that you can select a map area in the Viewer without losing the dimensions of the map frame in the Map Composer viewer In the Map Frame dialog under Upper Left Frame Coordinates change the Y value to 9 0 Pre
403. into the Y field Press Enter Zoom in on the lake identified by the Inquire Cursor ii Viewer 2 loudoun_maxclass img Layer 1 E ES m x File Utility View AO Raster Help GE D Bd B g 9 XE 9 ON EB IN GG P 281425 23 4351402 55 UTM Wis 84 Click Close on the Inquire Cursor dialog Select the Cursor Point Mode icon on the Class Grouping Toolbar The cursor will change to a crosshair when it is placed in the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Advanced Classification 6 Inthe Viewer place the crosshair cursor over the lake and click The lake and all pixels which belong to the same classification as the pixel you selected are highlighted in the Viewer All pixels in the same class are highlighted The selected class is also highlighted in the Working Classes CellArray Class Ww C T iHistagram 13 SEEN 20 The Row is highlighted and the WG Working Group column has an X indicating that this class is a member of the current Working Group 7 Click on the X in the WG column to clear the currently highlighted class from both the CellArray and the Viewer 8 Now place the crosshair cursor over the lake Click and drag the cursor in a short line over the lake All of the classes that the cursor passes over will be selected in the Working Groups CellArray 505 P Advanced Classification Start the line here Finish the line here All of the classes that the
404. ion dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 4 Whenthe Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 10096 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically Depending on your eml Preferences under Session Preferences User Interface amp Session Keep Job Status Box when the Job Status bar shows 100 indicating that the job is 10096 done you must either click OK to close the dialog or the dialog closes automatically 5 fitis not already displayed open the Session Log by selecting Session Session Log from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The calculated coefficient of variation is reported in the Session Log as shown in the following example Session Log frome kswanseniimagine_fog 097499 044520 50 14709 99 05 20 55 Sigma Value for layer 1 of file loplakebed img 0 274552 3 14 09 99 05 20 55 14709 99 05 20 55 1 14709 99 05 20 55 SessionMgr 2000 14709 99 05 20 55 1 14709 99 05 20 55 Sigma Value for layer 1 of file loplakebed img 0 274552 j 1 14 03 33 05 20 55 14 09 99 05 20 55 Calculated 14 03 99 05 20 55 Coefficient of 1 14709793 03 21 04 SessionMgr 2000 sigmaval completed normally l Variation is reported here When using the filters in the Speckle Suppression function you should calculate the coefficient of variation for the input image and use a number close to the calculated coefficient of variation for optimum
405. iridlabels a Label Color 1 gt Not Use MUN Grid Labels Set Up the Grid The first step in the Interpretation of the Samples is to create a Label set that will be used to label Labels all of the Samples 1 Determine the number of labels that you will use to interpret the Sample In this tour we will use three labels Forest Not Forest and Not Used 2 Select the Append new row to Grid Label CellArray item from the Dot Grid menu Repeat this for every label you will add to the Label Set 3 Inthe Grid Labels Group click on the Locked icon Al to enable the editing of the Grid Labels The icon changes to indicate that the labels have been unlocked ij 4 Click OK on the message that informs you that this label set will be applied to all of the samples in the project 5 Click in the Label Column of Row 2 Type Not Forest 6 Click in the Label Column for Row 3 Type Forest Tour Guides 545 ui Frame Sampling Tools Manually Label the Grid 546 10 11 12 13 14 Click in the Color column for the Not Used label Select Gray from the list of colors that appears Click in the Color column for the Not Forest label Select Red from the list of colors that appears Click in the Color column for the Forest label Select Dark Green from the list of colors that appears The Grid Labels will look like this Click to Lock Click here to Save the Grid Labels the Grid Labels ae D
406. is not checked then when the Batch process is run by the Scheduler it is not able to find the drive This is one of the reasons to make sure that the Schedule service runs as your account name This ensures that remembered network drive maps are reestablished when the Batch process runs Use Batch with a UNIX System Unlike the Scheduler on NT you do not have to be an administrator or a person with administrator privileges to set up Batch to run on a UNIX system On UNIX the ability to run Batch at a later time is built using the UNIX cron system See the man pages for more information about cron and the at command on UNIX Execute a Single File Single Command 1 2 3 182 This operation is very useful for performing lengthy processes on large files From the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar click the Interpreter icon and then select GIS Analysis Clump to open the Clump dialog In the Clump dialog select IMAGINE HOME examples Insoils img for the Input File name and your workspace Insoils clump img for the Output File name Where your workspace is the Default Output Directory specified in the User Interface amp Session category in the Preference Editor and IMAGINE HOME is the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is installed In the Clump dialog click the Batch button The Batch Wizard opens with the Select Type of Command Processing panel displayed The Use commands as they are button is already selected
407. istics These statistics include Count number of classes selected Total sum of column figures in this example total area Min minimum value represented in the column Max maximum value represented in the column Mean average value represented Total Count Stddev standard deviation 3 Click Close in the Statistics dialog Select Criteria 1 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor CellArray select the Class Names column by shift clicking in the Class Names title box Now the Class Names and Red columns are both selected both columns are highlighted in blue Next you generate a report that lists all of the classes and the area covered by each You do not include classes with an area of O zero 2 With your cursor in the Row column not the header row of the Row column right hold Row Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Generate Report Tour Guides Viewer Selection Criteria Columns Functions All columns in the CellArray are listed here even a n dd a Ani RE zh Click here and it displays here select Subset _ Subset ear Close Help Click here then here then here to define the criteria automatically written to the Criteria definition box In the Selection Criteria dialog under Columns click Red Red is written in the Criteria definition box at the bottom of the dialog Under Compares click gt In the cal
408. it is deleted batch job log This file contains the results of the Batch job 209 Batch Processing 210 ERDAS IMAGINE ERDAS IMAGINE i x Ae I DX ah m F LI a a j j i h d Won Jl Men x r 5 Tour Guides Section Il IMAGINE Advantage 212 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER TEN Fourier Transform Editor Introduction In this tour guide you enhance and destripe a 512 x 512 subset of a Landsat Thematic Mapper image using both interactive and automatic methods available in the ERDAS IMAGINE Fourier Analysis tools Not all of the edits in this tour guide necessarily enhance the image Many exercises are performed simply to show you how they affect the image When you use these techniques on other data sets you may want to experiment with different methods or combinations of methods to find the techniques that work best tis highly recommended that you read the Fourier Analysis section beginning on page 171 of the ERDAS Field Guide before going through this tour guide If you are a new to ERDAS IMAGINE it is recommended that you go through the tour guide Chapter 1 Viewer before using the Fourier Transform Editor Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 45 minutes Create an fft In order to use the Fourier Transform Editor you must first create a Fourier Transform fft Layer layer from the input image Display Source File ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and you must have
409. l and optionally the Lock tool connect the Raster object and the Vector object to the Function object as inputs Al Using the Connection tool connect the Function object to the output Table object When you are finished the model looks like the following ERDAS IMAGINE Add Raster Properties Add Vector Properties Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Confirm the Selector tool 1s active N Double click the Raster object In the Raster dialog click the Open icon to open the File Name dialog Select germtm img from the examples directory and click OK in the File Name dialog Click OK in the Raster dialog to accept the file germtm img Double click the Vector object The Vector dialog opens 411 Spatial Modeler Select the file from the directory in which you copied it select a n vector Layer Vector Layer Hame arcinfo Cell Size Use Default Specify Processing Window From Inquire Box j Prompt for File at Run Time Cell Value Record Humber iW apinn erue 4 Use r Custom Recode Area of Interest Declare as Rasterize To Feature Type POLYGON iW Integer ia Choose AOI 1 Memory Only iW OK Cancel Help 2 Click the Open icon to open the Vector Layer Name dialog 3 Select the copy of zone88 you made earlier and click OK in the Vector Layer Name dialog 4 Click OK in the Vector dialog Add Function Properties
410. l creating a map or rectifying an image requires certain steps regardless of the data you are using However processing radar data is application driven so there is no preset path to follow Therefore this tour guide shows you how the functions work but you have to experiment on your own data files for your own applications The default settings in the IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module dialogs provide acceptable results However it is recommended that you experiment with the settings to obtain the best results NOTE The data used in this tour guide are in the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory Replace IMAGINE HOME with the name of the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is installed on your system Although you can use the IMAGINE Radar Interpreter functions in any order it is recommended that you follow this tour guide in the order that it is presented It is important to address speckle noise before any other processing See Chapter 5 Enhancement in the ERDAS Field Guide for more theoretical information about using the Radar module The IMAGINE Radar Interpreter is part of the IMAGINE Radar Mapping Suite which also includes IMAGINE OrthoRadar IMAGINE StereoSAR DEM IMAGINE IFSAR DEM and the Generic SAR Node Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 45 minutes Suppress Speckle Noise Tour Guides In this section you display two images one that has been despeckled and one raw r
411. l displays here script Name mul E bit res merge mul In the Generate Script dialog click the Open icon and navigate to a directory where you have write permission Enter the name sharpen mdl and click OK In the Spatial Modeler dialog click on the Model Librarian button 423 m Spatial Modeler 424 Select Model Librarian yan Tn Model Librarian Close Help The Model Librarian dialog opens c Model Librarian a Model Library mdl sharpen mul wl Select the model hit res merge mdl sharpen mdl from the list data Library Functions Edit Delete Run Model Batch Close Help 2 Navigate to the correct directory then select sharpen mdl 3 Click on the Edit button in the Model Librarian dialog ERDAS IMAGINE 4 Tour Guides Select the Current Line Number option from this menu Enter the Line Number you want to view Click the Go To button a normalize matrix n2 Summary Spatial Modeler Hle Edit View Find Fajajs vela IE set cell size for the model SET CELLSIZE MIN Ik 3 set window for the model i SET WINDOW UNION 4 set area of interest for the model SET AOI NONE declarations Integer RASTER n1 dmtm FILE OLD NEAREST NEIGH Integer RASTER n4 sharp dmtm FILE DELETE IF E FLOAT MATRIX n2 Summary load matrix n2 Summary n2 Sum
412. l select File Close from the menu bar In the ZONE88 PAT Table Tool select Relate Relate from the menu bar The Relate Manager dialog opens In the Relate Manager dialog click New The Creating New Relate dialog opens 635 ui IMAGINE Vector 636 10 11 Enter a name for the Relate here Relate Name Comparisor Click here to select the source column Source Column ZONESS ID Enter the name of the Target Info Directory directory path here or Glick the icon to select Target Table a path ZONESs HEW PAT Click here to update the Relate Target Column Manager dialog zonas ip i esae OK Dismiss Help ll In the Creating New Relate dialog under Relate Name enter the name Comparison Under Source Column click on the popup list and select ZONEG88 ID Under Target Info Directory enter the path in which you saved the ZONE88 NEW PAT Table Tool if it is not already listed Under Target Table click on the popup list and select ZONE88 NEW PAT Click OK in the Creating New Relate dialog The Creating New Relate dialog closes and the information is displayed in the Relate Manager dialog Relate List Relate Description R Click OK in the source Column Relate M ZONEB88 ID Edit Sei eae d Target Info Directory Open New fnetimorticiavexportfarray 1 fdocs Target Table Save ZONEB8 NEW PAT Delet
413. l identify the MOI for this fraction file in the Project Manager 13 Click Next in the Final Analysis Wizard The View Analysis Results step displays in the Wizard The Final Analysis Report is opened in a Text Editor window Mi Editor county forests final Ext Dir F Eour sampling i e mi x File Edit View Find Help Le db Frame Sampling Results Sampling Froject Manage j tour sanpling county_forests pf Project Pere Single Sampling Estimator Direct Expansion Humber of Tiles 1 Humber of Tiles Selected 1 Humber of Tiles Used 1 Type of hi res analysis Dot Grid Tile 1 ID Loudoun TM Sampling Grid f tour zampling loudoun tm loudoun tm grid zhp Stratum File f tour sanpling loudoun_strata ing Humber of Strata 61 Humber of Samples 15 Humber of Samples Used 15 Rezultz Ares Estimate 52350 5 ha Confidence Interval Resampling Method Bootstrap Number of Iterations 10000 Median Value B1574 8 ha Confidence Lower Bound Upper Bound CV CV 90 Interval 48302 5 ha B5042 5 ha 7 PS Z Values 955 Interval 447655 5 ha 556511 9 ha 8 0x 6 3 Overall Estimate By Stratum Stratum Percent Statio Stratum Percent HOT ID Sampled narity Area MOI rea Stratum 1 2 08 1205 34 7 ha 100 00 34 7 ha Strata that S ratu 0 00 0 0 52 4 ha 00x 0 0 ha Stratum 3 0 34 0 0 a6 She Fite rrr Show poor Stratum 4 O 00 15 6 ha 0 00 T U ha j I slum 5 0 61 18 0 235 9 ha Er UD 235
414. lal ej a ee The point of observation target Positioning tool The observer s point of view eye NOTE The bounding box in the Viewer image pictured above is for visual purposes only and does not actually appear in the Viewer window To make the Positioning tool easier to see in the Viewer select Utility Selector Properties from the Viewer menu bar 55 Viewer Manipulate the Observer and Field of View Use the Positioning Tool Control ground level positioning here Control sea level positioning here Manipulate the Field of View here The Eye Target Edit dialog opens Eye Target Edit Eye x axesr ir Y as20171 91 e Hold on this popup Target x a71326 95 f Y 23551 37 f list to change the Selector Color EH selector color OK Cane Help In the Eye Target Edit dialog hold on the Selector Color popup list and select a color that displays well in the Viewer image e g Yellow Click OK in the Eye Target Edit dialog The dialog closes and the color of the Positioning tool is updated to the designated color You can manipulate the observer and the observer s field of view in several ways See steps 1 through step 3 below to learn how to obtain different views using the Positioning tool and the Position Parameters dialog Click on the Observer Positioning icon in the Image Drape viewer tool bar e The Position Parameters dialog opens Direction
415. lass has the rule Bright Within Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions v Specify 2908 F City which has the Variable Highway Map List of Conditions Variable Relation Value Confidence j Highway Map o L C LU i Apply Close Help 4 Click Apply in the Rule Props dialog then Close 5 Now use the Create Hypothesis graphic tool to place a new hypothesis which is an intermediate hypothesis on the Bright Within City rule rectangle See Add an Intermediate Hypothesis on page 566 if you forgot how to create a hypothesis 6 Double click on the New Hypothesis to open the Hypo Props dialog 7 Inthe Hypo Props dialog name the new hypothesis Bright and deselect the Create an Output Class checkbox 8 Click Apply then Close in the Hypo Props dialog The Knowledge Engineer dialog updates accordingly Knowledge Engineer Fle Edit Evaluate B a 8 2 jx PW skle a The Bright Hypothesis has been added using the Create Hypothesis icon Hypotheses Rules Variables CEE Vegetation Commercial Services Bright Tour Guides 569 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V j Knowledge Engineer File Edit Evaluate EH Hypotheses Rules Variables x 2 TM Band 4 gt 21 vegetated within city Bright c High IR and High Visible Dna 2 TM Band 2 gt have been Bright Within City High IR and Low Visible cnangea ior ine High IR a
416. lation For example if you calculate NDVI within your model you know that at most it can range from 0 5 to 0 5 In this case you could e store the result as floating point taking at least 4 bytes per pixel or e scalethe results to 0 255 in order to store the result as unsigned 8 bit data taking just 1 byte per pixel In this case since you know the range you can re scale the data by simply adding 0 5 then multiplying by 255 without the need for any temporary files For more extensive examples of how models may be written without the use of temporary disk space use Model Maker to open Sbit_pca gmd and 6bit res merge gmd in the IMAGINE HOME etc models directory where IMAGINE HOME is the location of ERDAS IMAGINE on your system Making Your Models Usable by Others Prompt User When you specify specific input rasters or vectors in your model their complete path is stored in the model The same is true when you specify output files So to give someone else your models they need to redefine all the inputs and outputs Starting with ERDAS IMAGINE 8 3 inputs and outputs can be set to Prompt User so that no absolute paths are contained in the model The model in turn may easily be shared without the need to redefine any inputs or outputs Providing a User Another method of producing a model that can not only be easily shared with others but is also Interface to Your very easy to run is to write an EML front end to your model Model Y
417. lay layer 2 _ Delete CDROM M Gren brans to Map Nysiem Cancel W Clear Display J Set View Extent Fit to Frame J No Stretch Click on Data Scaling Background Transparent 2 oo Fit to Frame Zoom by 1 00 fF Using Nearest Neighbor 7 Help displayed in mee gray scale 6 Click the Display as popup list and select Gray Scale 7 Under Display Layer enter 2 Depending upon your application it may be easier to select GCPs from a single band of imagery The image tmAtlanta img displays in True Color by default 8 Click Fit to Frame so that the entire image is visible in the Viewer 9 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file tmAtlanta img displays in the first Viewer 10 In the second Viewer tool bar click the Open icon or select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens 11 In the Select Layer To Add dialog click on the file panAtlanta img This file is a SPOT panchromatic image of Atlanta This image has been georeferenced to the State Plane map projection 12 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file panAtlanta img displays in the second Viewer You start the Geometric Correction Tool from the first Viewer the Viewer displaying the file to be rectified tmAtlanta img Select Raster Geometric Correction from the first Viewer s menu bar The Set Geometric Model dialog opens Tour Guides 137 138 Polynomial Rectification c S
418. layed in the map frame in the map composition It corresponds to the dimensions of the area on the ground in map units e The frame area is the area used by the map frame in the map composition It is the area on the page occupied by a particular image It is defined in page units e The scale like the scale used in geometric correction is the ratio of distance in the map frame to the distance that is represented on the ground For example you can define an area showing a scale of 1 24 000 A Viewer must be open with the data layer you want to use in your composition displayed in it You must also have an open Map Composer viewer 1 From the Annotation tool palette click the Map Frame icon E to draw the boundary of the map frame 2 Near the top of the Map Composer viewer Shift drag your cursor downward at an angle to draw the map frame You position and size the map frame later NOTE Pressing the Shift key while drawing the map frame allows you to draw a perfect square When the mouse is released the Map Frame Data Source dialog opens Map Frame Data Source Hill frame with data from Viewer Imported data Cancel Help 3 Inthe Map Frame Data Source dialog click the Viewer button to select the source image from the Viewer The Create Frame Instructions dialog displays Tour Guides 73 Map Composer Now eI in the Viewer from which to copy The cursor will appear in one nf thr
419. lays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 10096 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically In the menu bar of Viewer 1 select File Open Raster Layer In the Select Layer To Add dialog click on the file flevolandradar img This is an agricultural subscene from Flevoland Holland This image is from the ERS 1 satellite in C band with 20 meter pixels 619 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter 3 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog Viewer 1 flevolandradar img Layer T Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help ziuislelel Iciels eie PER 4 In Viewer 722 select File Open Raster Layer 5 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog click the file texture img then click OK Z Viewer 2 texture img Layer 1 STRE FSEPFESRPERES FPE r UB Em 6 Examine the difference between the two files 7 When you are finished comparing the images select File Clear in Viewer 1 and Viewer 2 ul 620 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Adjust Brightness Tour Guides The Brightness Adjustment function works by adjusting pixel DN values so that each line of constant range has the same average In this way the image is adjusted to have an overall even brightness Therefore you must tell ERDAS IMAGINE whether the lines of constant range are stored in rows or columns This depends on the flight path of t
420. ld on the new vector layer you just created The instructions for running Clean are included at the end of this tour guide for your reference Do not clean or build an open vector layer and do not attempt to open a layer that is being cleaned or built Ly In order to complete this section you must have already completed the exercises in Chapter 4 Vector Querying and Editing on page 95 A file you created there zone88subsetl is used in this example Click the Vector icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel 643 IMAGINE Vector Vector The Vector Utilities menu opens 2 Select Build Vector Layer Topology from the Vector Utilities menu The Build Vector Layer Topology dialog opens Input Coverage arcinfo Click here to m start build Eniervedoi zonesgsubset n l layer name to Ee Batch build here id Cancel ras files z ne88 Help z ne suhbset tour zz Feature Porygon ia 3 Inthe Build Vector Layer Topology dialog under Input Coverage enter zone88subset or the name you used for the subset in Chapter 4 Vector Querying and Editing on page 95 making sure you are in the proper directory 4 The Feature should be Polygon 5 Click OK in the Build Vector Layer Topology dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 6 Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the build is complete unless your Preferences are set to clear the Job Status dia
421. lignment Lett Green Blue M Porat Formula 18 E Click here to 2 move the Default only C Applpon OK C Auto Apply selected column up Display Width 100 0 Max width 100 Top Bottom EROS Delete Click here to rearrange the columns HM 3 Inthe Column Properties dialog under Columns select Opacity then click Up to move Opacity so that it is under Histogram 4 Select Class Names then click Up to move Class Names so that it is under Color 5 Click OK in the Column Properties dialog to rearrange the columns in the Raster Attribute Editor ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification The Column Properties dialog closes The data in the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray should appear similar to the following example Ws Raster Attribute Editor germtm_isodata imo Layer 1 9 E mi x File Edit Help ES O Bd W eel Layer Number fi E Lak Histogram Opacity Color 0 E 335 Class 1 m5 E T E uo Class 4 iue 1 1 NN 1249 1 NNUS 6 B6 sy 140 TP Class 8 PST 1 tless3 B5B 1 Clase 10 Analyze Individual Before you can begin to analyze the classes individually you need to set the opacity for all of Classes the classes to zero 1 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor click on the word Opacity at the top of the Opacity column to select all of the classes 2 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor
422. lity Tile Viewers Rearrange two or more Viewers on the screen so that they do not overlap Close All Viewers Close all Viewers that are currently open Access a menu of tools that corresponds to the Main icons along the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar Access a menu of tools that allow you to view and Tools edit various text and image files Access a menu of utility items that allow you to Utilities perform general tasks in ERDAS IMAGINE Help Access the ERDAS IMAGINE On Line Help Display the ERDAS IMAGINE Properties dialog Properties where system environment and licensing information is available Provides a mechanism for printing essential Generate Sy stem Information Rep ort IMAGINE operating system parameters Exit the ERDAS IMAGINE session keyboard Exit IMAGINE shortcut Ctrl Q Main Menu 2 Click on the word Main in the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The Main menu opens Start IMAGINE Viewer Import Export Data Preparation Map Composer Image Interpreter Image Catalog Image Classification Spatial Modeler Vector Radar OrthoBASE Stereo Analyst The following table contains the Main menu selections and their functionalities Table P 3 Main Menu Options Selection Functionality ee Import Export Open the Import Export dialog Data Preparation Open the Data Preparation menu Map Composer Open the Map Composer menu xxiii Ta
423. ll copy ps napp img to a directory in which you have write permission and at least 10 Mb of space Set the permissions on ps napp img to read write execute using the chmod 777 ps napp img command on UNIX Next you should verify that ps napp img has no map or projection information Select Tools Image Information from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar Open your copy of ps napp img Select Edit Delete Map Model and click Yes in the Attention dialog that opens Close the ImageInfo dialog and begin this exercise 1 Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar or click the Open icon in the Viewer tool bar E 1 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select ps napp img from the directory into which you copied it The Select Layer To Add dialog opens 3 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the camera image in the Viewer The file ps napp img opens in the Viewer The Viewer image is displayed with a view of the top left corner of the photo as shown in the following picture ewer i ps napp img Band 7 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation Terramodel BEREE Check for Map Model Before you continue with geometric correction you must first make sure that the image does not already have a map model ul 266 ERDAS IMAGINE Orthorectification 1 From the Viewer tool bar click the ImageInfo icon The ImageInfo dialog opens Hle Edit View oaza I Ke
424. llds xcu esckRAE PERSA E RSGRe REG Ee E aw eqePX E cauxcd esum stdmmbe esRs 391 CHECKING Results m pC 392 Use the Swipe Wy uu uacua n n8 ORE etate e necem Ex Yom ede wb dose ub bes 393 Check the spots img image 0 cc Rs 394 Using Vector Layers in Your Model rrrlrlr rrr tnn 395 Vector Layers as a Mask a nara doro bod oar digest iR i CR eb e gc eee Wh up dicun dnas A pa ae ee 395 Add Attributes to Vector Layers 0 cc hr 408 Debug Your MOUGI s oca ime R9 deg mnc De eva P ee ethene eh eee eee ee redis a ee 415 Eliminate Incomplete Definition 0 00 0 RII en 415 Eliminate Object type Mismatch 0 0 RR c ers 428 Eliminate Division by Zero illie n 443 Dee AOIS I Processing 2 ca uac diced usps reme es ony racc re see 94 Hee ead od EsqdPS deg ra PE 448 Using the Swipe Utility 2 RR A rs 453 Chapter 17 Advanced Classification 000 cee rrr 455 INTFOGUCUOR Prem 455 Supervised vs Unsupervised Classification 0 0 0 eee n 455 Tour Guides xi Perform Supervised Classification rrr hn 456 Define Signatures using Signature Editor 0 aaaea 456 Use Tools to Evaluate Signatures llle rns 468 Perform Supervised Classification 0 0 0 eee eee eens 479 Perform Unsupervised Classification es 483 Generate Thema
425. log 89 Symbology dialog 639 Symbols 88 T Tab 214 456 Table Tool 630 CellArray 632 Tasseled Cap Coefficients dialog 257 Tasseled Cap dialog 256 Tasseled Cap transformation 256 Test Knowledge Base 570 Text 89 align 87 default style 89 deselect 87 edit 87 fonts 86 position 87 style 86 Text Editor 44 473 478 ERDAS IMAGINE 372 menu bar 45 Text entry fields 93 Text icon 86 Text Properties dialog 87 Text String dialog 368 369 Text Style Chooser dialog 81 Texture 618 Texture Analysis dialog 618 Threshold 481 491 Threshold dialog 491 Threshold to File dialog 495 Tick label 80 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Tick mark 69 78 length 79 select 80 spacing 79 Tool palette AOI 293 299 459 Vector 100 107 115 Tools icon 23 100 115 Tools menu xxiv 621 623 Transformation changing the order of 145 coefficients 145 Transformation matrix compute 145 Transformed divergence 477 U Undersampled strata 556 Unique Value dialog 639 Unlink cursor 21 Unsupervised Classification Isodata dialog 128 Unsupervised Classification dialog 484 Utilities menu xxv Utility menu 172 V Variable 202 Vector icon 95 628 643 Vector tool palette 100 107 115 Vector Utilities menu 96 628 630 644 Vegetation classification 618 View Extent dialog 9 View Signature Columns dialog 458 Viewer 3 Attributes 101 110 112 Chip Extraction 270 275 Feature Space 466 Image Drape 53 Measurement Tool 12 Mosaic Tool 292 305 Vie
426. log allows you to manage the files in the Sampling Project You can add and remove files from the process as well as modify the relationship between a file and the process by clicking the Set Process Associations button Click Close without making any changes to the files You are returned to the Single Sampling Wizard Click Next gt on the Single Sampling Project Wizard The Add Image Tiles step is displayed Click the Add Image Tile button i on the Wizard The Manage Image Tiles dialog is displayed ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools M4 Single Sampling Project Root Node Manage Image Ti l ig xX Mame of Tile List of Tiles Enter the name Prien dr TM Lied TM of the new tile Click Add gt Click Close i Cancel Help This dialog allows you to add names for the tiles in the Sampling project The Image Tiles must cover the entire area frame You may need to add more than one tile if the frame cannot be covered by a single tile In the Name of Tile field type Loudoun TM Click Add to add the Tile name to the List of Tiles Click Close to exit the Manage Image Tiles dialog Note that the Tile Node has been added to the Tree View in the Project Manager 527 Frame Sampling Tools Sampling Project Manager File Process Help Click here to expand e es 3 the Root Node The buttons on the toolbar change to provide access to Tile level functions 3 4 county forests spf dm Loudo
427. log upon job completion If you get error messages when trying to display a vector layer in ERDAS IMAGINE build or clean the layer then try displaying it again Do not build or clean an open vector layer and do not attempt to open a layer that is being cleaned or built 7 Display the vector layer and attribute information to verify that the build ran successfully 644 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Vector Clean Vector Layer 1 Inthe Vector Utilities menu click Clean Vector Layer The Clean Vector Layer dialog opens I1 1 2 22I 40 20 Se AM NER EH i Click to write to a Input Coverage arcinfo M Write to New Output new output and then zoness Lr i enter the output file Enter the input name here coverage name here 1 info virtualgis examples Fuzzy Tolerance 0 00200 a Feature Polygon Fi A Dangle Length 0 00000 a In the Clean Vector Layer dialog under Input Coverage enter the name of the layer to be cleaned e g zone88 Click the Write to New Output checkbox and enter a name for the new file This file name must not be longer than 13 characters NOTE Although creating a new file is not necessary it is recommended 4 The Feature should be Polygon For this example accept the default values for Fuzzy Tolerance and Dangle Length Tour Guides 645 IMAGINE Vector 646 Fuzzy Tolerance and Dangle Length In general fuzzy
428. ltiple File Selection tab The specified TIFF files are added to the list in the Select Files to Process panel in the Input column NOTE You can repeat step 6 through step 8 to choose TIFF files from other directories Batch Wizard Select Files to Process Use the popup list to select the column to modify Use the Select button to add files to the list The Delete button can be used to remove selected rows from the list There must be at least one name in the list below to proceed This row is selected mj Input indicated by the germtm tif Y yellow highlight 1 e 3 hyperspectral tit EE wasial mss tif 5 pantlanta tif 4 E mu I Show Full Path ial Close lt Back Next gt Finish Help NOTE Entries in the list may be selected by clicking in the number column as shown above and then removed from the list with the Delete icon gi 10 Click Finish to start computing statistics on the listed images now A double Job Status dialog displays showing the progress of each individual file along with progress of the total job When the job is complete the OK button is enabled Click OK to close the Job Status dialog Execute Multi p le In the following example you are going to perform reprojection on all of the Lake Lanier related Files Single files in the ERDAS IMAGINE examples directory Command Run Later NOTE For Windows NT users you must be an administ
429. luding number of elements and projection information Image Information Obtain full image information for a selected ERDAS IMAGINE raster image Vector Information Image Command Tool Obtain full image information for a selected ERDAS IMAGINE vector coverage Open the Image Command dialog Coordinate Calculator Transform coordinates from one spheroid or datum to another Create Display Movie Sequences Create Display Viewer Sequences View a series of images in rapid succession View a series of images saved from the Viewer Image Drape Create a perspective view by draping imagery over a terrain DEM DPPDB Workstation View EML ScriptFiles Start the Digital Point Positioning DataBase Workstation if installed Open the EML View dialog which enables you to view edit and print ERDAS IMAGINE dialogs a UNIX only Utilities Menu 4 Click on Utilities on the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The Utilities menu opens JPEG Compress Images Decompress JPEG Images Convert Pixels to ASCII Convert ASCII ka Pixels Convert Images to Annotation Convert Annotation to Raster Create Update Image Chips Create Font Tables Font To Symbol Compare Images Reconfigure Raster Formats Reconfigure vector Formats Reconfigure Resample Methods Reconfigure Geometric Models The following table contains the Utilities menu selections and their functionalities
430. m 14 sg EE EE EE E Geer E E E ese Pee are eh ae ee ee eee eee E 16 ANAG ZOOM METT 18 BOLLO swastage ted 2 ee ae ou ees ee eee eee Meee eee owes eee bes oe eee ead eee eee 18 Real time ZOOM m 19 Display Two Images see arco a oy okt we eo hy Ooo ee oe ed ok Bor aan an a ec eee ae 20 AK MICWOTS erent oath iter tee ke fee arp ek ree Rah age eee ents ak 2 ered Sea Gee ee wee ee Ae 20 Compare IMAGES geek cutee oad Ao Hedy ahead appe en bt Reale Eee Boab eed ani wb 21 ShlnlSud i L 21 Raster Menu ODLOTIS xu ade dox ip ux ada doran Du ud Ede AR week eek da V ase DRE Ce ar d 22 Crede ando Laver ede cis eed oe PUSTOUETEPRITIGqUMEN eee dae aoe bed ee cee TQUE 22 Adjust Image Contrast 0 0 cc eee hh hrs 26 Use Piecewise Linear Stretches 0 0 0 eee teen eee eens 27 Manipulate Histogram 2 0 hh hn 28 veloz belii M cae s dae se ogee ese sa eee Sons 6 bee eae to eeeen hee E EEEE 30 Use Mouse Linear Mapping 0 eee eee eee nee 31 Rasler Ed O e O 33 MOPON eunea aa aa e E eG E a a Sears enced 34 Fill with Constant Value 2 60434 dpi x aana ERG bd eoemsesd de beens ide panes 35 d tlosibu D
431. m the list There must be at least one name in the list below to proceed These are all the Input files that begin with Duci ue directory identified f in the Selection niyata img Pattern window 7 inlandc img l Input ad Bl a Show Full Path Close Back Hext gt Finish Help 4 Click the Next button to open the Select When to Process Commands panel Click the Start Processing Later At checkbox Use the default time of the next available minute Tour Guides 191 ul Batch Processing 192 This Batch file begins on 21 October 1999 at 3 09 p m When you schedule Batch jobs later a Name is assigned Names cannot contain certain characters or spaces Batch renames the job accordingly On systems which support offline processing UNIAMAndowsNT these commands may be scheduled to be run at a later time When run at a later X time the results will be saved in the batch log file sf otart Processing How Start Processing Later At Hour s E Minute E 24 hour Clock Month fo E Day j E Year 1993 f Name Close lt Back paki gt Finish Help i The following characters are converted to a dash when present in the Name field of the Select When to Process Commands panel V 2 lt and gt Spaces and tabs are converted to an _ underscore Click the Finish button to begin processing The Scheduled Batch Job List dialog opens displaying
432. m this list germtm isodata img ee germtm superclass img Cancel germtm thresh img Help Recent Goto Enter the correct path name here Fe par oemtm superclass ima l Files of type IMAGINE Image in c kel pseudocolor 1024 Rows 1024 Columns x 1 Bandis 3 In the Classified Image dialog under Filename open the directory in which you previously saved germtm superclass img by entering the directory path name in the text entry field and pressing Return on your keyboard 4 Select the file germtm superclass img from the list of files in the directory you just opened This is the classified image file that is used in the accuracy assessment 5 Click OK in the Classified Image dialog to load the file Tour Guides 497 Advanced Classification Generate Random Points 498 In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select View Select Viewer or click the Select Viewer icon A then click in the Viewer that is displaying the germtm img file In the Accuracy Assessment dialog select View Change Colors The Change colors dialog opens x TH CO Or SOUN be set to white Points with no reference Click here Paints with reference This color should be set to yellow In the Change colors dialog the Points with no reference color patch should be set to White These are the random points that have not been assigned a reference class value The Points with reference color patch should be set to
433. mage file Ws Yiewer 3 germtm_isodata img GLayer_1 i121 x File Utility View AOI Raster Help S EDESSA Raan e m a e s 7 Y re aT a 4 of N 696917 80 492051 64 6 Click the Open icon again in the Viewer tool bar to display the thematic raster layer germtm isodata img over the germtm img file Tour Guides 487 ui Advanced Classification Open Raster Attribute Editor 488 The Select Layer To Add dialog reopens 7 Under Filename open the directory in which you previously saved germtm isodata img by entering the directory path name in the text entry field and pressing the Return key on your keyboard You are going to evaluate identify the classes in this file 8 Select the file germtm isodata img from the list of files in the directory you just opened 9 Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog 10 Click Clear Display to turn off this checkbox 11 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the image file 1 Select Raster Attributes from the Viewer menu bar The Raster Attribute Editor displays 2 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor select Edit Column Properties to rearrange the columns in the CellArray so that they are easier to view The Column Properties dialog opens i Column Properties 1 Columns Title Dess Names v Editable Histogram Opacity Type Bing Show AGB Color Click here to move Clase Names this column Fed A
434. mage to Image Rectification anaana naaa ee ee eee ees 135 Dial GC TOO see erected wo ect see ew ae eon at ee eee we ee edd de ee See ee ea a 137 DCCC OGPS cain Om 140 Calculate Transformation Matrix from GCPs 0 cc ee eee eens 146 Digitize Check Points 0 00 eee eee ee ee eee teens 146 Resample the Image ee en ee ee LTD OC T LT T ee ae 148 Verify the Rectification Process 0 cc eee eee ran 149 Rotate Flip or Stretch Images es 150 Chapter 7 Image Commands iuda son dea Em RR ERROR EUR EUR ned wee bee dee ees 153 IntTOQOUCIIOIE xu uniri x numm En icm ie ne e m e ee ee 0 e eee eee AE 153 Image Commands uiu ade dro dores Pes e Eus careo n ae hetero ee qe DUE Ra MP IRR UR GR D 153 Chapter 8 DOIT EXPOI 22 293 3 922 x 79 2022 x 28 a 2 E RUN sou RD E ROB RO ab qur RUD B dos 159 IN TTOGUCUION rn 159 IMDOI a SPOT SCEN x 2x uo pem Ead eee eae Ua UE UR EHE Pur Pod Rip eee Ae ee d ies 159 Check Preview Options 0 ccc RR RR RR rrr 161 eue inesniSei Rm m 163 EDOT LAN Dad aua quu REDE EE ES E ERE E ur i eee QUELS UE d wee E dn CI EIE 165 Choose EXPO TODBOIIS s s od py Tesx3qy24 eee ePRUSEOTAIZWeeT SPebre ruFIPQCPTETy 165 Credle All PileSict ack ee oreo seh ee eke teehee ee eae eee eh ee R 167 Check the Classification 325 2 3 n6 a ene eee taker ERE YR a eee Sedat Gnas ee EUR d Eres doa 169 Check Map Information
435. mand 2 Select lt your_workspace gt image1 img for the Input File name and your Wworkspace image2 img for the Output File name The Batch option is now enabled rightness Inversion Input File imgq Output File imgq E ED This is the output Coordinate Tvpe Subset Definition From Inquire Box file from the first y f Boich comiiahd Map ULX 233085 00 E LRxX 248415 00 File ULY 3807070 00 LR Y 3791740 00 E Data Type Output Options Input Unsigned 8 bit Stretch to Unsigned amp bit Output Fiat Single i Lo EB zur po ds gt Reverse Inverse The output from the first Batch command is used to create the output for the second Batch command Click the Batch button to add the second Batch command to the list 3 Click the Batch button The command to perform brightness inversion is added to the Record Commands for Automation panel The histogram brightness inversion starts and a Job Status dialog displays When the process is done click OK ateh Wizard Record Commands for Automation Currently Becordi a Use the Batch button in other IMAGINE dialogs to place commands in this list Use the Next gt button below to stop recording and proceed to the next step You may use the lt Back button to resume recording These are the Batch commands you created Note the exact files involved are specified state volfatlantasrootimaginefexample
436. mary MATRIX 5 5 l Ly 1 lt 1 1 i 2 2 2 x e 24 2 0 2 d 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 IE if global sum n2 Summary NE 0 n2 Summary n2 Summary global su In the Editor window select View Current Line Number The Current Line Number dialog opens In the Current Line Number dialog enter 36 for the Line Number the line number referred to in the Error dialog This highlights the line containing the error as depicted in the following picture 425 Spatial Modeler Correct the Function 426 Editor sharpen mdi Dir fusridatal File Edit View Find spjuja s el a set window for the model ISET WINDOW UNION 4 set area of interest for the model SET AOI NONE declarations 4 Integer RASTER n1 dmtm FILE OLD NEAREST NEIGHBOR AOI N Integer RASTER n4 sharp dmtm FILE DELETE IF EXISTING U FLOAT MATRIX n2 Summary load matrix n2 Summary IIn2 Summary MATRIX 5 5 1 L L 15 2 2 2 1 2 70 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 I normalize matrix n2 Summary TE S The line 36 i global sum n2 Summary NE 0 is highlighted n2_Summary n2 Summary global sum n2_Su TES i function definitions In 4 sharp _dmtm CONVOLVE n1 dmtm lt kernel gt If you examine the selected line just to the right of the equal sign is a function which also serves as a label to a Function object in
437. mber of Columns Area of Interest Declare as Integer i Choose AO xw Pecogb Doin l seiur eroe Temporary Raster Only fias eger ki Don d Becode Dala OK Cancel Help 2 Click the Open icon on the Raster dialog and navigate to the examples directory a 3 Inthe Open File dialog select spots img and click OK Add Function Properties 1 Double click the first Function object The Function Definition dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler GLOBAL DIVERSITY argi GLOBAL DIVERSITY argi Select Global GLOBAL MAJORITY argi gt from the GLOBAL MAJORITY arg gt l GLOBAL MAX lt arul gt Functions list GLOBAL MAX argl IGNC GLOBAL MEAN arg GLOBAL MEAN arg IGP GLOBAL MEDIAN arg 2 I GLOBAL MAX n1 spots OK Clear Cancel Help 2 Inthe Functions popup list select Global 3 Inthe list of Global functions select GLOBAL MAX lt arg1 gt 4 In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of arg 5 Under Available Inputs click on n1 spots 6 Click OK in the Function Definition dialog Add Scalar Properties 1 Double click the Scalar object The Scalar dialog opens Confirm thatthe Type Read From ae J Prompi is set to Float J3 Show Scalar in Session Log OK Cancel Help 2 Verify that the Type is set to Float and click OK Tou
438. mber of bytes in the header before the actual data values begin 2 Under Image Dimensions for Rows enter 512 3 Under Image Dimensions for Cols enter 512 4 Under Image Dimensions for Bands enter 7 The Import Generic Binary Data dialog is updated ERDAS IMAGINE Save Options Tour Guides Import Export Import Generic Binary Data ME Data Description Tape Hle Options Enter number of header sip s Files Data Format BIL iW bytes here e Unsigned amp Bit Hanki Pactar mm J Swap etes File Header Bytes 128 E Image Dimensions PRGA Op buS Image Record Length Enter i image i mm I anis dr Muligve Fees dimensions X Line Header Bytes Lr and number tmi PIG Dv ssl e F of bands here i F ri Hmi roker DRY UN fe Click here to Load Options Save Options see a preview of the Image OK Preview Options Preview Hep Close Import Options _ Batch Click on Save Options The Save Options File dialog opens Enter name for the options file clean zone88 info zone amp subset Click here to save file IMAGIME Stuff ET This dialog allows you to save the inputs you have entered to a gen file It can be recalled and loaded into the Import Generic Data dialog whenever you are importing data with this structure This keeps you from having to find and enter the necessary inputs again Under File name
439. me enter germtm_distance img in the directory of your choice This is the name for the distance image file NOTE Make sure you remember the directory in which the output file is saved It is important when you are trying to display the output file in a Viewer In the Supervised Classification dialog click Attribute Options The Attribute Options dialog opens 481 Advanced Classification Classify the Image 482 Wa Attribute X Signature Statistics Click here Std Dev Low Limit High Limit Order By Layer C Statistic Heo Click here to close this dialog The Attribute Options dialog allows you to specify the statistical information for the signatures that you want to be in the output classified layer The statistics are based on the data file values for each layer for the signatures not the entire classified image file This information is located in the Raster Attribute Editor In the Attribute Options dialog click Minimum Maximum Mean and Std Dev so that the signatures in the output thematic raster layer have this statistical information Confirm that the Layer checkbox is turned on so that the information is presented in the Raster Attribute Editor by layer In the Attribute Options dialog click Close to remove this dialog In the Supervised Classification dialog click on the Non parametric Rule popup list to select Feature Space You do not need to use the Classi
440. ment Tool viewer opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Viewer Click to print I Measurement Tool for Viewer 1 E e BE x K 3 Meters Hectares Map d il Measurement Description Click to to locate point coordinates Click on the Measure Positions icon in the Measurement tool bar This tool gives the individual point coordinates x y in the image Move the cursor into the Viewer and click anywhere In the Measurement Tool viewer the location of the point displays in the type of units in which the file is saved You may select different display units from the popup lists in the top toolbar Next click on the Polyline icon in the Measurement Tool viewer tool bar Move the cursor into the Viewer and click once at the beginning of a line feature then drag the mouse to extend the line along the feature Click to add a vertex at each point Middle click or double click depending on how your Preferences are set to end the measurement The length is displayed in the Measurement Tool CellArray 13 P Viewer The Measurement Tool zl The Measurement Tool can create a new annotation layer on top of your image Simply click the Annotation tool and a new layer is automatically created While this tool is enabled the measurement features points polylines polygons rectangles ellipses etc are added to the annotation layer as well as a text box containing the measured values Click the tool again
441. mn Change this name to Water and then press Return on the keyboard In the Raster Attribute Editor click and hold on the Color patch for Water and select Blue from the popup list You may need to select the entire row for this class first After you are finished analyzing this class click Cancel in the Viewer Flicker dialog and set the Opacity for Water back to O in the Raster Attribute Editor Press Return on the keyboard Change the Color for Class 2 in the CellArray to Yellow for better visibility in the Viewer Change the Opacity for Class 2to 1 and press Return on the keyboard This class is shown in the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Utility Flicker to analyze which pixels are assigned to this class The Viewer Flicker dialog opens Turn on the Auto Mode in the Viewer Flicker dialog The flashing yellow pixels in the germtm img file should be the pixels of this class These are forest areas In the Raster Attribute Editor click inside the Class Names column for Class 2 You may need to double click in the column Change this name to Forest then press Return on the keyboard In the Raster Attribute Editor click and hold on the Color patch for Forest and select Pink from the popup list You may need to select the entire row for this class first After you are finished analyzing this class click Cancel in the Viewer Flicker dialog and set the Opacity for Forest back to 0 Press Return on the keyboard 133
442. n S on the Dot Grid toolbar 548 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 3 4 Frame Sampling Tools The AOI Tool Palette is opened Select the Create Polygon AOI icon x Digitize a polygon around the forested portion of the image In the Label CellArray place the carat in the Forest label Click the Label AOI icon i to label all of the dots within the polygon Remove the AOI by selecting AOI Cut Select a dot that lies along the perimeter of the polygon 549 ui Frame Sampling Tools Select this dot Continue Interpretation 550 IT uiis File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation Dot Grid Help 10 ae Wg 2 pw AE ING m E 6 f m 4 ao ha oe D c 4 The Zoom View shows it is actually Not Forest re E 4 CS d Grid labels la Use the Zoom View to analyze whether or not the selected dot is correctly labeled If it is incorrectly labeled place the carat in the Not Forest label row and click the Label Selected Dot icon Continue to analyze the dots that lie along the perimeter of the polygon relabeling those that were erroneously included in the polygon Continue labeling the Dot Grid until the entire Grid is correctly labeled Select File Save Save Dot Grid from the Dot Grid Tool menu bar Click File Quit to exit the Dot Grid Tool The Dot Grid Tool closes and you are returned to the Interpret Samples step of the Wizard The
443. n in the Model Maker tool palette Al Click on the Lock icon in the Model Maker tool palette It changes to the locked state a al Connect the first Raster to the first Function Also connect the first Raster to the second Function Connect the first Function to the Scalar Connect the Scalar to the second Function Connect the second Function to the final output Raster NOTE You may want to refer to the following diagram of the model to verify your connections Connections may be broken or deleted by using the Connection tool in the reverse direction of the existing connection Click on the Selector icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click on the Lock icon in the Model Maker tool palette to turn it off Your model should look like the following ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler File Edit Model Text recess amp wjn u e x se Add Raster Properties 1 Double click the first Raster object The Raster dialog opens Tour Guides 431 ui Spatial Modeler Select the file spots img File Name img setsima sd Number of Layers Prompt User for File at Run Time uiii Dam PI unsigned 8 HhH ki pip Tyre Continuous ki d iere 5 8 HE PREE Dam EAE 1 1024 1024 Interpolation Nearest Neighbor Wi Processing Window Map Hle From Inquire Box ti ti UL 1690520 0000 LR x 17240846314 E UL Y 298490 1875 LR Y 764975 5561 E Humber of Rows Hu
444. n in the Select When to Process Commands panel to begin processing A double Job Status dialog opens showing the progress of each individual file along with progress of the overall job When the job is complete the OK button is enabled This meter tracks the Processing Batch Job progress of an individual file Can UTI UB Command 44 This meter tracks the Files progress of all the files in the Batch job OK Cancel Cancel Al Help Click OK to close the status meter The clump operation is complete If you wish you can open a Viewer and check the file The ability to execute a command on multiple files is very useful In the following example the Batch Wizard is used to compute statistics for several TIFF images NOTE You must provide your own TIFF files for this exercise See Chapter 7 Image Commands on page 153 for instructions on how to use Image Interpreter utilities to create TIFF images from image files 183 Batch Processing Set TIFF Image File Preferences 1 2 Start the Image Command Tool 1 2 184 v It is important to note that some processes depend upon the physical extents of the imagery or the number of bands or data types or the projection parameters etc You must be aware of both the requirements of the processes commands as well as the differences between the file types to be processed In many cases the data sets provided to multifile processing jobs must s
445. n is highlighted in yellow 3 Shift click on another polygon to add to the selection Now two polygons are highlighted in yellow 4 Click outside of the polygons within the Viewer to deselect everything 5 Inthe Viewer menu bar select Vector Attributes The Attributes dialog displays as in the following example Use the menu bar items to create and edit attributes Attributes for the displayed layer are shown here c Attributes for netimartinidatalimagine540 92 F540 examplesizones6 File Edit View BE Help Record AREA PERIMETER zONE88 zONE88 ID ZONING 106172047 e407014 250 69397 226 2 _3 __4 _3 __4 z i mj cn j ca Pa Pa L Poof E E cn co ca 470535232000 zena o o 8 18165996 000 22887 404 NE E ra ra k Polygon attributes are displayed in a CellArray Therefore you have access to the same tools that you use in other CellArrays 6 Inthe Viewer click on another polygon to select it The polygon is highlighted in yellow in the Viewer and the corresponding record in the Attributes CellArray is also highlighted 7 Click on a record number under Record in the Attributes CellArray to select it That record is highlighted in the CellArray and the corresponding polygon is highlighted in the Viewer 8 With your cursor in the Record column of the Attributes CellArray right hold Row Selection Sel
446. n only cover a small portion of the image To save on disk space and processing time IMAGINE will let you make new images out of a subset of the entire dataset In this exercise you will use the Subset Utility to take a subset of a small urbanized Area of Interest AOI from a much larger Landsat scene of San Diego ERDAS IMAGINE should be running with a Viewer open Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar The Select Layer to add dialog opens 237 Image Interpreter Selecting an AOI to Subset 238 Uncheck the Snap to Raster ULX 1698437 964006 LRX 1702255 506223 08 Enter these Click OK Files Permissions Raster Options Filename imq Directory t products gt imagine i t version Select r canton dmtm i roots mtm Img gt examples E Textures File Type IMAGINE Image imm i truecolor 331 Rows x 331 Columns x 7 Bandis Select dmtm img from the list of examples Click on OK to have the image display in the Viewer In this section you use the Subset utility to take a small Subset from a large image without using the Snap to Raster option With the cursor in the Viewer right click to access the Quick View menu Select Inquire Box from the Quick View menu The Inquire Box dialog displays The title of this dialog is Viewer 1 dmtm img Wewerz cdmim img oordinates checkbox ULY 2 88608 596611 LRY 284894 231
447. n the following example you generate and use an AOI to smooth out the appearance of the water in Mobile Bay You must have Model Maker running Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click near the upper left corner of the Model Maker viewer In a Viewer open mobbay img from the examples directory In the Viewer click on the Show Tool Palette for Top Layer icon Select the Region Grow AOI tool from the palette Click a dark portion of the water near the southeast corner of the image From the AO menu select Seed Properties Click the Area checkbox to turn it off Enter 20 0 for the Spectral Euclidean Distance ERDAS IMAGINE Add Raster Properties Add Raster Properties Add Matrix Properties Add Function Properties Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Click on the Redo button Double click on the first Raster object Select mobbay img from the examples directory Click on the Choose AO button on the right side of the Raster dialog Select Viewer as the AOI Source and click OK Click OK in the Raster dialog Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click to the right of the existing Raster in the Model Maker viewer Double click this newly placed Raster object Select mobbay img from the examples directory This time do not select an AOI but rather just click OK in the Raster dialog Click on the Matrix icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click just to the right of th
448. n the legend 8 Inthe Legend Properties dialog click the Title tab at the top of the dialog Click this tab to view title properties Basi Title columns Color Patches Legend Title NW Undertine Title Title Underline Gaplzo F points Tite Legend Gapizo F points Title Alignment Left Justified iy Click on this popup list to specify alignment Legend Units Points ia 9 Click on the Title Alignment popup menu and select Left Justified 10 In the Legend Properties dialog click Apply The legend is drawn in the Map Composer viewer 11 If you are not satisfied with the appearance of your legend you may make adjustments in the Legend Properties dialog and click Apply or Redo to apply them 12 Click Close in the Legend Properties dialog when finished Reposition Legend 1 If you wish to reposition the legend click on any of the color patches or text strings in the legend to select it To move hold and drag the selection box to the desired position Remember to click outside the selection box to deselect the legend Tour Guides 85 Map Composer Add a Map Title Change Text Style You must have a map composition and the Annotation tool palette open Click on the Text icon Al in the Annotation tool palette Move your cursor to the top of the map in the Map Composer viewer The cursor becomes an I beam I indicating that you are placing text Click where you want to place the text T
449. nA RE ESA ARAE 104 Change Viewing Properties 0 0 0 ee eee ras 105 Use Editing Tools and Commands llle 107 Create New Vector Layer elseeeeeeee ehh 109 Export Zoning Attributes l l hh rrr 111 Credle ADUDEUEOS xcu deem me ua denda md dara bea Sones a Bede E d ETE Qr Pd uu aes 112 Create a Simple Shapefile Layer lille 114 Tour Guides V Create a Shapefile Coverage llleleeeeeeeeeee eh hh 115 Editing the Shapefile Layer 0 0 0c rna 117 Open a Personal Geodatabase csse 120 Open An Enterprise Geodatabase llle hr 123 Chapter 5 CIassiTICalloll scs e zenzudimLsLEqeJ3 3 354 2393 d cda d CE 127 INIFOCUCUON Prnt 127 Use Unsupervised Classification 5a2z2 2 duo eee hae an Revere een 4 em RR E RR Rs 127 Generate Thematic Raster Layer llle 128 Choose Processing Options llis rss 129 Evaluate ClassifiCallOl 12i ohm REG REIR ELDER RU EU enh esses cbuntu dd RR US Roa Ros 130 Create Classification Overlay 0 0 cc rrr 130 Open Raster Attribute Editor 0 rn 131 Analyze Individual Classes 4s 73i ee kk CR D ae na RO RR o de don 132 Chapter 6 Polynomial HectHiecadlioD sce iau uc uc9 Cees sae eaGes ewes R3 aed LE RUE eee he oes 135 INTTOQUCUON uuu mec zem oe EE eed ee ES mE Ped ed eee dum Ped Y 135 Rectify a Landsat Ima g6 s us oe das DES See Re Re ARPS RSE ee eee ees 135 Perform I
450. nations dialog click the Add AII button ERDAS IMAGINE View Surface Profile Tour Guides Viewer Click Apply and Close As in the Spectral Profile viewer you can select Edit Chart Options to optimize the display Select File Close from the Spatial Profile viewer menu bar The Surface Profile can be used to view any layer band or subset in the data cube as a relief surface To use this tool follow the steps below The file hyperspectral img should be displayed in a Viewer with the Fit to Frame checkbox activated In the Viewer menu bar select Raster Profile Tools The Select Profile Tool dialog opens In the Select Profile Tool dialog click the Surface button and then click OK The Surface Profile viewer opens on a qmi E tL Columns Pixels 3 Click on the Rectangle icon in the Surface Profile viewer and then select an AOI in the Viewer by dragging to create a box around it Bi When the mouse button is released the surface profile for the selected area is displayed in the Surface Profile viewer As with all of the profile tools selecting Edit Chart Options allows you to optimize the display 51 M Viewer Analyze Data It may be desirable to overlay a thematic layer onto this surface For example a vegetation map could be overlaid onto a DEM surface or an iron oxide map Landsat TM3 TMI onto a kaolinite peak 1 40 Um layer In this example you overlay a true color image In
451. nction Use the View Option 250 The Crisp dialog is a good example of the basic Image Interpreter dialog Other dialogs may have more prompts for inputs depending on the function Each dialog opens with default entries that are acceptable for use These entries can be changed if necessary to achieve specific results Under Input File in the Crisp dialog enter panAtlanta img This is a SPOT panchromatic scene of downtown Atlanta Georgia Under Output File enter crisp img in the directory of your choice as the output file Under Output Options in the Crisp dialog turn on the Stretch to Unsigned 8 bitcheckbox by clicking on it This option produces the output file in unsigned 8 bit format which saves disk space Click on the View button at the bottom of the Crisp dialog The Model Maker viewer window opens and displays the graphical model used for the Crisp function ERDAS IMAGINE Image Interpreter File Edit Model Text Process s amp lw o u e sele 4 A ele INPUT RASTER PSF KERNEL n1 panAtlanta n2 Custom Matrix CONVOLVE n4_memory RESCALE 0 255 OUTPUT RASTER n4 memory GLOBAL MIN n12 panCrisp The View button in each Image Interpreter dialog lets you view the graphical model behind each function If you want to change the model for a specific purpose you can edit it through the Model Maker and apply the edited function to the image by running the model in Model Maker See Ch
452. nd High Visible rule Test the Knowledge Base 570 10 11 12 13 14 15 Since the rule to be attached to the Bright hypothesis is very similar to the High IR and Low Visible rule that is attached to the Vegetation hypothesis you can make a copy of it to paste and edit Click on the High IR and Low Visible rule Right click and select Copy from the Options menu Click on the Bright hypothesis then right click and select Paste from the Options menu A new rule is attached to the Bright hypothesis with a default name of High IR and Low Visible 1 the 1 is added since it is a copy Double click the High IR and Low Visible 1 rule to open the Rule Props dialog In Rule Props dialog for the new rule change the Name to High IR and High Visible The only change that needs to be made to the variables is the Relation for TM Band 2 Change the Relation for TM Band 2 to gt Click Apply then Close in the Rule Props dialog The portion of the tree visible in 2 4 eee tho edt window ee is highlighted in the overview 2 TM Band 4 21 window RAL c High IR and Low Visible Rule properties At this point two hypotheses and their conditions have been entered Now the two classes can be tested to see what pixels are allocated to them On the Knowledge Engineer dialog tool bar select the Run Test Classification icon or select Evaluate Test Knowledge Base ERDAS IMAGINE IM
453. nd maximum data file values for chaparral and riparian in the Criteria Table Rows 1 and 2 correspond to chaparral and rows 3 and 4 correspond to riparian see the chart on page 376 The Criteria dialog should look like the one in the following diagram ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Criteria Available Layers Criteria Table ni dimtm l Row Output n _slope Value tni dmtm d ni dmtm d nl dmtmis n1 dmtm 2 30 fal n1 dmtm 4 a m dmtm 5 uf n1 dmtm amp n1 dmtm 7 n2 slope Columns LL Satisfy 4 All Criteria Any Criteria Otherwise o F OK Add Column Descriptor cell value Wi Eus Use the scroll bars to view all columns The complete Criteria Table should look similar to the following table Table 16 4 Complete Criteria Table wW Value 2 3 31 EE 3 lt 3 gt 55 4 S 3 gt 55 Ei 12 When all of the values are entered into the Criteria Table click OK The Criteria dialog closes and All Criteria is written under the criteria graphic Define Output Raster Layer 1 Double click the output Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Raster dialog opens 2 Inthe Raster dialog under File Name enter the name Slope ppdrclass then Return on your keyboard Be sure that you specify a directory in which you have write permission 3 Click on the Delete if Exists option 4 Click on the Data Type popup list and select Uns
454. nd the image and note the small coordinates in the status area The small coordinates are pixel coordinates not map coordinates You can now proceed with geometric correction Perform Geometric Correction 1 Select Raster Geometric Correction from the Viewer menu bar The Set Geometric Model dialog opens Affine Polynomial Reproject Rubber Sheeting Click here to select Camera ok Cancel Help I 2 Inthe Set Geometric Model dialog click on Camera and then click OK The Geo Correction Tools open The Camera Model Properties dialog also opens 268 ERDAS IMAGINE Enter the DEM file name here Click here to select the elevation units Check to be sure that this checkbox is deactivated Set Camera Model Properties Edit Fiducials Tour Guides Orthorectification Enter the X and Y principal Elevation Source point coordinates Use File Constant here Elevation File img ps demang jl Elevation Units Meters Wi Enter the focal length here Account for Earth s curvature f Select the units for the principal points and focal length here Model has no solution In the Camera Model Properties dialog enter the DEM file ps dem img under Elevation File NOTE Upon request the data provider supplies the camera calibration certificate with the film at the time of purchase This certificate provides the information needed for steps 2
455. ndication that anything is wrong with the Function in which you are doing simple arithmetic 7 Inthe Navigation Pane click on the beside Global to view all the pages under this topic 8 Click on GLOBAL MAX Global Maximum to display this topic 9 Scroll down to the Object Types section Note the on line documentation states If arg1 is a RASTER the result is a TABLE with the same number of rows as lt arg1 gt has layers In your model you incorrectly connected the output of GLOBAL MAX of a Raster to a Scalar instead of a Table 10 Select File Exit from the On Line Help dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Correct the Model 1 In the Model Maker viewer click on the Scalar object 2 Select Edit Clear or press the Delete key on your keyboard 3 Click on the Table icon in the Model Maker tool palette mi 4 Click to position the Table object in the location where the Scalar object was in the Model Maker viewer 5 Using the Connection tool connect the first Function to the Table and the Table to the second Function Z New Model a IL Hle Edit Model Text cess Help siu n uje slale 4 Ele The Table replaces the Scalar you originally placed in the model Add Table Properties 1 Using the Selector tool double click the Table object in the Model Maker viewer The Table Definition dialog opens Tour Guides 439 Spatial Modeler Table Definition select Descri
456. necessary to recode the Grouped file so that only those classes which contain the MOI are included in the file This will eliminate the possibility of MOI contribution from strata that have been designated as Non MOI strata and will reduce the noise in the estimate It will also increase the User Confidence in the Final Analysis From the IMAGINE icon panel select the Image Interpreter icon ER The Image Interpreter menu is displayed xi Radiometric Enhancement Spectral Enhancement Hyperspectral Tools Click here to open Fourier Analysis the GIS Analysis menu Topographic Analysis ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools 2 Click the GIS Analysis button to open the GIS Analysis menu Eliminate Perimeter Search Indes Overlay Matris Click here to open the Recode utility Summary Zonal Attributes e 3 Click the Recode button to open the Recode dialog Output File ima Enter the Grouped file here Input File img loudoun_maxclass img Data Type Setup Recade Input Unsigned 8 bit Ignore Zero in Stats Output Unsigned B bit NN an Cancel Vig Help Click to Setup the Recode 4 Click the Setup Recode button to open the Thematic Recode dialog a Thematic Recode E Malue MewValue Histogram Red Green Blue ug venero ooo 000 0 000
457. ng help topics Browse buttons Click to move to the next or previous topic in the browse sequence Www Show Hide button Displays or hides the navigation pane xe ERDAS IMAGINE Icon Panel Netscape E 2 Far Mat d 4 A a uod S Reload Hauck Home Search Netscape Print Security Stop Mw AQAA Show lt lt gt gt ERDAS IMAGINE Icon Panel This is the main icon panel that comes up when you start ERDAS IMAGINE All functions in ERDAS IMAGINE are launched from this icon panel ar from the Viewer that also opens when ERDAS IMAGINE is started The actual Icons that you see may not include all of those listed here due the particular package of ERDAS IMAGINE you are using Add on modules may also display icons that are not documented here Icon size can be selected in the User Interface amp Session category of the Preference Editor The words Session Main Tools Utiiti s and Help display on the icon panel menu bar These are not icons but rather pull down menus tbatt ad to the ERDAS IMAGINE Session Manager IMAGINE tools general utilities and On Line Help You can resize the icon panel by clicking and dragging any corner Session Click on the word Session and a menu of the Session Manager operations will display Session is not an ican it is opened only as a word Preferences he Preference Editor dialog is opened The Preference Editar dialog controls many ERDAS IMAGINE parameter
458. ng on the package you have you may not see all of these utilities ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Vector IMAGINE Vector This menu lists most of the tools of the IMAGINE Vector module Through simple dialogs generated from this menu you can e Clean a vector coverage e Build topology e Copy Rename Delete and Externalize vector layers native functions e Subset vector layers e Mosaic polygon layers e Transform vector coverages from digitizer units to real world units e Create polygon Labels Convert Raster to Vector layers and Vector to Raster layers e Manipulate information tables using the Table Tool e Generate polygon attributes from a background image Zonal Attributes e Convert an ASCII File to a Point Layer NOTE Creating vector layers and vector editing tools are available through the Viewer If you have the IMAGINE Vector module you can also use the Import icon to access various external vector data types such as DFAD DGN DLG DXF SDTS TIGER and VPF The vector utilities in the Vector Utilities menu should not be run on open vector layers Close the layer you are using before running the utility and do not attempt to open the layer until the process is complete 2 Select Copy Vector Layer from the Vector Utilities menu The Copy Vector Layer dialog opens Copy Vector Layer a Vector Layer tn Copy arcinfo Output Vector Layer arcinfa A A infos Enter vector layer to copy here or simply cl
459. ng on your settings in Session Preferences User Interface amp Session Keep Job Status Box Click on the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel A new Viewer displays Click the Open icon in the Viewer you just created A g In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select AirMosaic img from the directory in which you saved it and then click OK The Select Layer To Add dialog opens AirMosaic img is displayed in the Viewer 1955524 79 278733 73 State Plane GRS 1980 4 Compare AirMosaic img to the original images air photo 1 img and air photo 2 img 303 Mosaic Mosaic Using LANDSAT Images Display Input Images 304 select the file In this section of the tour guide you mosaic LANDSAT images of MSS and TM scenes The three files to be mosaicked are wasia1 mss img wasia2 mss img and wasia3 tm img These data files are LANDSAT images of Kazakhstan in the former USSR ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open In the Viewer select File Open Raster Layer or click the Open icon The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Select Layer To Add Files Pennissidggs Raster Options ae 1 i iyol examples View the raster Lem options tree4 img venezuela img viis 30 meter img ieweee img imagine wasiaz mss img gt examples j wasia3 tm im Eg bldgs Click here to _tm img is A preview of af 9 lanier
460. ng that this is the case zzi 140 ERDAS IMAGINE Polynomial Rectification 1 In the first Viewer select one of the areas shown in the following picture by clicking on that area The circled areas are locations for GCPs You should choose points that are easily identifiable in both images such as road intersections and landmarks l manta img ayer 2 He Utility View AQI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Pie a zaas The point you have selected is marked as GCP 1 in the Viewer and its X and Y inputs are listed in the GCP Tool CellArray 2 In order to make GCP 1 easier to see right hold in the Color column to the right of GCP 1 in the GCP Tool CellArray and select the color Black 3 In Viewer 3 the Chip Extraction Viewer associated with the first Viewer drag the GCP to the exact location you would like it to be Tour Guides 141 P Polynomial Rectification ei Viewers a OI NOTE UNIX only To view the GCP while you are dragging it turn off the Use Fast Selectors checkbox in the Viewer category under Session Preferences this change does not take effect until the Viewer is restarted 4 Inthe GCP Tool click on the Create GCP icon ol 5 Inthe second Viewer click in the same area that is covered in the source Chip Extraction Viewer Viewer 3 The point you have selected is marked as GCP 1 in the Viewer and its X and Y coordinates are listed in the GCP Tool CellArray 6 Inorder t
461. ng the Batch commands and input file lists respectively 207 Batch Processing Batch Job Files Save Click the Save icon to save the commands in the Edit Commands Create Variables panel to a text bcf file and the input file list in the Select Files to Process panel to a text bls file for later use The Save Batch Commands dialog opens allowing you to enter a new file name Load Click the Load icon to load a previously saved command bcf file or input file list bls file A Load Batch Commands dialog opens allowing you to select from a previously saved list of files These lists are text files that may be created outside of ERDAS IMAGINE si Several files are created for each Batch job that runs at a later time The default file name root is batch_job The file name can be seen in the Name field of the Select When to Process Commands panel File names for each Batch job are listed in the Scheduled Batch Job List dialog PC Version The following are PC versions of Batch job files that are located in the Batch job directory The default Batch job directory is PERSONAL batch and you can go to Session Preferences Batch Processing to change the Batch Job Directory e batch_job bat This is an MS DOS Batch file This file sets up the environment for the ERDAS IMAGINE applications and runs batchprocess which runs the commands found in the batch job bcf file e batch job bcf These are ERDAS IMAGINE Ba
462. ng the map information for the georeferenced image The information in this dialog is not editable feference Map information Current Reference Map Projection Projection State Plane sphernid Clarke 1855 Znne Humber 3676 Datum MAD27 BEN IBN repi y OK Cancel Help 6 Click OK in the Reference Map Information dialog The Chip Extraction Viewers Viewers 3 and 4 link boxes and the GCP Tool open The link boxes and GCP Tool are automatically arranged on the screen you can turn off this option in the ERDAS IMAGINE Preferences You may want to resize and move the link boxes so that they are easier to see Tour Guides 139 Polynomial Rectification Chip Extraction Viewer WEN em Link box Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation He ili tor Annotation TerraModel GCP Tool Input tmAtlanta img Reference panAtlanta img File View Edit je sf e Sea fala z z Point Point ID Color X Input Vvinput Color X Ref Y Ref Type X Residual Y Residual RMS Error Contrib Match 1 serso De 05 585 fel 5 p J Ccotm In this tour guide you are going to rectify tmAtlanta img in the first Viewer to panAtlanta img in the second Viewer Select GCPs When the GCP Tool is started the tool is set in Automatic GCP Editing mode by default The following icon is active indicati
463. ni Recaie Data RRUEDDGDOI Mayes i _ Prompt User for File at Run Time PHEDDGDOI DORBYSISI HELE MEAT HY Nearest Meher ki PUDCOPSSHWP VANE E Delete If Exists n qe bin 4 Be from npe Hox Data Type Unsigned B hit iW File Type Continuous Wi mv peo Ve trv o com Ip Ignore loo E in Stats Calculation Arpa pi inieresh Declare mai nteger 0 x Choose AGH xw Binds Doin sei GEG 2 Click the Open icon in the Raster dialog then navigate to a directory where you have write permission A 3 Enter stretched img for the output image name then click OK in the File Name dialog Save the file in a directory where you have write permission file Mame Files c Filename imq Directory stretched imr usr data 8bhit res merge T6G img zm f output img gt usri sharp_dimtm img data E e Hn File Type IMAGINE Image imm ad 12 Files 0 subdirectories 3 Matched 11353240F Bytes Free 4 Inthe Raster dialog click the Delete If Exists checkbox You may have to run the model more than once to get it working Tour Guides Spatial Modeler 5 Click on the OK button At this point your model should look similar to the following New Model File Edit Model Text Process 3 ei Oo sjale s 4 gial n3_Float n5_stretched Execute the Model 1 Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar A Job Status
464. nparametric signature Select Feature Statistics from the Signature Editor menu bar to generate statistics for the Feature Space AOI A Job Status dialog displays stating the progress of the function When the function is 100 complete click OK in the Job Status dialog The Feature Space AOI now has parametric properties In the Signature Editor click inside the Signature Name column for the signature you just added Change the name to Water then press the Return key on the keyboard 467 Advanced Classification Use Tools to Evaluate Signatures 468 6 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 In the Signature Editor hold in the Color column next to Water and select Blue In the Linked Cursors dialog click Unlink to unlink the viewers The inquire cursors are removed from the viewers In the Linked Cursors dialog click Close Now that you have the nonparametric signature collected you do not need the AOI in the Feature Space viewer Select View Arrange Layers from the Viewer 2 menu bar The Arrange Layers dialog opens In the Arrange Layers dialog right hold over the AOI Layer button and select Delete Layer from the AOI Options popup list Click Apply in the Arrange Layers dialog to delete the AOI layer You are asked if you want to save the changes before closing Click No In the Arrange Layers dialog click Close Practice taking additional signatures using any of the signature generating t
465. nsigned 8 E 1 ole alz thematic unsigned 15 p E o c l 8 jj 34 34 p 10 11 12 ca ETzTzISISeSISITTDeTm m OL oo EE JE SE 4 EE x 3E em eme NOTE You can specify a default catalog via Session Preferences in the ERDAS IMAGINE menu More information on how to do this is located in Set Catalog Preferences on page 59 For the following example however use the default catalog which is distributed with ERDAS IMAGINE Add Information 1 Select Edit Catalog Image or click on the Add Image icon ud in the Image Catalog tool bar The Catalog Image dialog opens Tour Guides 61 Image Catalog Image to Catalog img pmmeerma E Click here to a add the selected bldgs file to the Image infos Click here to select ENTE Catalog this file to add to the streets Image Catalog va_bldgs 1 roned s ColorBlocks img examples Ej In the Catalog Image dialog file list select 3 rmeter img Click Add and then Close in the Catalog Image dialog 30meter img is recorded in the Image Catalog NOTE If you were to select 30meter img and then select Add All all files with an img extension would be added to the Image Catalog Perform Graphical Queries Select Area First select an area of the map in which you want to query the images and then you run the query The Image Catalog should be open
466. nsor Merge dialog 615 Session Log 159 604 Session menu xxi 3 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index Set Geometric Model dialog 137 150 268 Set Grid Tick Info dialog 79 Set Overlap Function dialog 300 309 320 Set Parallelepiped Limits dialog 469 Set up scheduler 180 Set Window dialog 342 380 Shadow enhance 27 Shift Bias Adjustment dialog 30 Shift Bias icon 30 Signature alarm 469 contingency matrix 472 ellipse 475 evaluate 468 feature space to image masking 473 histogram 476 merge 468 non parametric 456 480 parametric 456 480 separability 477 statistics 474 Signature Alarm dialog 469 Signature Editor 456 457 Signature Objects dialog 474 Signature Separability dialog 477 Single Sampling Project Nodes 525 Single Sampling wizard 524 SIR A 601 623 SIR B 623 Slant Range Adjustment dialog 622 Space resection 265 Spatial Enhancement menu 246 Spatial Modeler 237 495 Library 371 Spatial Modeler Language 237 339 371 Spatial Modeler menu 340 371 Spatial Profile viewer 49 Speckle noise 599 Spectral Enhancement menu 256 Spectral Profile viewer 46 Spectral Statistics dialog 48 Stacking 308 Stationarity 556 669 Index 670 Statistics dialog 41 479 Statistics icon 478 Stratified Tile 529 Styles dialog 80 Subset 238 Sun Positioning dialog 54 Supervised Classification dialog 480 Surface Profile viewer 51 Surfacing dialog 285 Symbol Chooser dialog 88 106 107 641 Symbol Properties dia
467. nt value to replace the bad data Value values 1 Select Raster Fill from the Viewer menu bar The Area Fill dialog opens Click here constant to apply Function Constant iW the specified area fill ruwt ooo I The preview window displays what the AOI J Exclude Value nas oF fill looks like 2 Inthe Area Fill dialog click Apply to accept the Constant function and its defaults The AOI is replaced with a Constant value of zero the area is black Tour Guides 35 Viewer Set Global Value Select Raster Undo from the Viewer menu bar The image returns to the original values In the Area Fill dialog enter 1500 in the Fill With number field and click Apply Now the AOI fill area is white Select Raster Undo from the Viewer menu bar The image returns to the original values In the Area Fill dialog click on the Function popup list and select Majority This option uses the majority of the pixel values in the AOI to replace all values in the AOI Click Apply in the Area Fill dialog The AOI displays the newly generated surface After observing the changes select Raster Undo from the Viewer menu bar Click Close in the Area Fill dialog Select File Clear from the Viewer menu bar Save the AOI layer in the Viewer if you like Raster Attribute Editor Change Color Attribute You can easily change the class colors in a thematic file Here you change the colors in Insoils im
468. nterface and Session category of the Preference Editor enables you to turn on Bubble Help so that the single line Help displays directly below your cursor when your cursor rests on a button or frame part This is helpful if the status bar is obscured by other windows Tour Guides xxxi xxxii ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides ERDAS IMAGINE heat Lj i i M J Fs y Anr y a 7h 4 PAY h T al w SECTION I IMAGINE Essentials d Ed E Lom Section IMAGINE Essentials ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER ONE Viewer Introduction In this tour guide you can learn how to e set Preferences e display an image e query for pixel information e arrange layers e adjust image contrast e link Viewers e use the Area of Interest AOI function e use the Raster menu functions Raster Attribute Editor Measurement tools etc Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 45 minutes Display ERDAS IMAGINE allows you to set up default band to color gun assignments for Landsat Preferences MSS Landsat TM SPOT and AVHRR data in the Preference Editor Check Band to ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open Color Gun Assignments 1 Click on the word Session in the upper left corner of the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar 2 From the Session menu click on Preferences The Preference Editor opens Tour Guides 3 Viewer Click here to select the preference categories Click here
469. nterpreter 602 Radiometric Enhance 252 Session xxi Spatial Enhancement 246 Spatial Modeler 340 371 Spectral Enhancement 256 Tools xxiv Utilities xxv Vector Utilities 96 628 630 644 Mineral ratio 260 Model using conditional statements 349 working window 342 380 Model Librarian dialog 372 Model Maker 237 250 339 functions 360 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index Analysis 360 Conditional 360 CONVOLVE 356 Criteria 375 EITHER 360 STRETCH 360 361 start 340 Modeler icon 340 371 Modify commands automatically 203 Modify commands manually 185 Modify variables 198 Mosaic 289 color balancing 312 cutline 298 display 303 input 292 intersection 296 output 301 run 302 309 Mosaic Image List 295 Mosaic Tool viewer 292 305 Mouse linear mapping 31 Mouse Linear Mapping icon 31 N Nearest Neighbor 9 148 276 Neatline 78 79 New Column dialog 633 New Map Composition dialog 70 New variable 202 New Vector Layer dialog 109 114 No Link symbol 21 North arrow 88 O Observer 56 On Line Help xxvi Opacity 39 Open FFT Layer dialog 217 Open Files dialog 492 Open icon 7 15 72 104 136 137 254 303 321 340 343 606 608 Open Info Table dialog 631 Options dialog 54 102 110 665 Index 666 Orthorectification 265 Output icon 301 Output Image icon 301 Output Image Options dialog 301 Overlay thematic data 52 Overlay True Color on Surface dialog 52 P preview img file import preview 163
470. ntil you can see the Confidence value 0 80 3 Inthe Knowledge Engineer dialog click on the Major Road rule Its properties display in the Rule Props dialog 4 Click the horizontal scroll bar until you can see the Confidence value 0 98 582 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Aule Props a factors ckb Name Rule Confidence Compute from Conditions v Specify 4949 F Compute from Conditions v Specify ou from Conditions Specify pee ED The Confidence for List of Conditions the Major Road rule isset higher than AND Relation Value Confidence i a that forthe Highway 2 2l category rule i PpiHy Close Help Note that the Confidence field for the Highway category rule has been set to a much lower value than the Confidence for the Major Road rule This is because you are less certain of the results from a maximum likelihood classification than you would be from a road map The next four hypotheses work on the same basis The expert rule is that open ground types are good for vehicle passage As slopes get steeper however the open ground becomes less and less manageable until it becomes impassable at very steep angles 5 Click Close in the Rule Props dialog Set ANDing Criteria These hypotheses also demonstrate the ANDing of criteria in a rule The Flat solid open ground go hypothesis has only one rule but that rule has two conditions Both conditions must be tru
471. ntour Map Gontour interval 10 00 Create Contours At 70 0000 P Remove Contours Shorter T har 00 zl 1 it 10000 a Batch Cancel Help Perform the SurFacing The two options for a surfacing method are Linear Rubber Sheeting 1st Order Polynomial solution and Non linear Rubber Sheeting 5th Order Polynomial solution Under Output File enter the name of the output file e g surface img in the directory of your choice Click on the popup list next to Surfacing Method and select Non linear Rubber Sheeting Click the gnore Zero In Output Stats checkbox to enable it Click OK in the Surfacing dialog A Job Status dialog displays stating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog reads that the function is 10096 complete click OK if necessary Click the Open icon in a Viewer 1 The Select Layer To Add dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Terrain Surface Interpolation In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename enter the name of the output file you created in step 2 beginning with the directory path in which you saved it Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The output image is displayed in the Viewer for you to examine Viewer 7 surface img Layer 7 simiv ulal2 sse 4I x ala al EY A B To edit portions of the resulting surface use the raster editing techniques described in Chapter 1 Viewer Raster Editor on page 33 287 ui
472. nts only when you know the general areas in the AOI that are bad The Interpolation function uses the data values of the digitized points and the boundary of the AOI to generate a new surface 1 Click on the Digitize Points icon in the Interpolate dialog then click on the Lock icon al 2 Click at least 12 times in the AOI in the Viewer to digitize 12 points The point coordinates display in the CellArray in the Interpolate dialog 34 ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer 3 When you are finished digitizing points click the Lock icon in the Interpolate dialog again to disable it 4 Inthe Interpolate dialog under Buffer Points enter 25 to allow up to 25 points in the computation 5 Inthe Interpolate dialog under Polynomial Order enter 3to increase the polynomial order of interpolation Click Apply in the Interpolate dialog 7 An Attention box displays asking if you want to remove the data stretch lookup table Click Yes 8 A Warning box displays suggesting that you recalculate the statistics Click OK The new surface displays inside the AOI 9 Observe the changes in the AOI and then select Raster Undo from the Viewer menu bar The data values return to the original values This lets you undo the edit without changing the original data values NOTE Undo works only for the last edit applied 10 Click Close in the Interpolate dialog Fill with Constant If the area to be edited is a flat surface you may use a consta
473. o create ni Open an existing Sampling Project Browse to a directory a new Sampling Project Create a new Sampling Project in which you have Project write permission Project File county forests spf Lez Enter the project name Enable at least one of these high resolution analysis types Enable Polygon Anala Click here to enable Dot Grid Analysis Cancel Help Tour Guides 523 ui Frame Sampling Tools 4 Click the Create a new Sampling Project radio button S Browse to a directory in which you have write permission 6 Enter county forests spf as the project name 7 Select the Enable Dot Grid Analysis checkbox 8 Click OK The Sampling Project Manager opens displaying the contents of your new project Wi Sampling Project Manager These buttons Vie races Tp wad os duda affect he Mus ip po 44 EX IS pic as selected node currently selected in the Tree View amp county forests spf Row File Descriptor File Path and Name in the Files CellArray JW Fina Results d The Tree View is a hierarchical view of all files in the project The Files CellArray shows all the files associated with the item selected in the Tree View The Frame Sampling process is very long and can take several days for large projects You can save your progress on any project by selecting File Save from the Project Manager menu bar You may now exit the project and return to it without losing any
474. o make GCP 71 easier to see in the second Viewer right hold in the Color column to the left of the X reference for GCP 1 in the GCP Tool CellArray and select the color Black The GCP Tool should now look similar to the one pictured below 142 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Polynomial Rectification c GCP ool Input mAtlanta img Heference panAtlanta img Hle View Edit B sE xeu fal zz Fonte Point ID Color X Input Yinput s Colr X Rer J v Ref Type Ss ES En MINI Henn Heer acre Ms control A Ad V V Select the color These are the X and Y file These are the X and Y map for the source coordinates for GCPs in the coordinates for GCPs in the GCP here input image tmAtlanta img reference image panAtlanta img 7 In Viewer 4 the Chip Extraction Viewer associated with the second Viewer drag the GCP to 10 11 12 13 14 15 the same location you moved it to in Viewer 3 Click on the Create GCP icon in the GCP tool bar Return to the source Viewer the first Viewer and click to digitize another GCP In order to make GCP 2 easier to see right hold in the Color column to the right of GCP 2 in the GCP Tool CellArray and select the color Magenta In Viewer 3 drag the new GCP GCP 2 to the exact location you would like it to be Repeat steps 4 and 5 to digitize the same point in the second Viewer As in step 10 you can change the color of t
475. o reconfigure the geometris models a UNIX only Help Menu 5 Select Help from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The Help menu opens xxvi ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Help For Icon Panel IMAGINE Online Documentation IMAGINE Version IMAGINE DLL Information About ERDAS IMAGINE NOTE The Help menu is also available from the Session menu The following table contains the Help menu selections and their functionalities Table P 6 Help Menu Options Help for Icon Panel View the On Line Help for the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel IMAGINE Online Documentation IMAGINE Version Access the root of the On Line Help tree View which version of ERDAS IMAGINE you are running IMAGINE DLL information Display and edit DLL class information and DLL instance information About ERDAS IMAGINE Open ERDAS IMAGINE Credits 6 From the Help menu select Help for Icon Panel The following Help page displays in your default internet browser xxvii Back button Click to return to the last topic viewed Location bar Displays the location of the current help file Hyperlinks Click on the blue underlined words to link to other help topics Fla Edi View Go Communicator Help SaaS uf Bookmarks A Location File CL Program Files IMAGINE 8 6 help html session erdas_imagine_icon_panetkim X I p Document Done Slider bar Use the slider bar to scroll through lo
476. ob Status dialogs You can set a preference to automatically close the Job Status dialog after computation is complete It is located in the User Interface amp Session category of the Preference Editor When the process is complete the classification displays in a Viewer Viewer 7 EEXP 001446 img Layer 7 2 Lj File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Boece y I bam DA Now that the classification is complete you should zoom in and see what the IMAGINE Expert Classifier designated as potential bridges In the Viewer tool bar click the Zoom In icon Al Move your mouse into the Viewer and click on an area of the river IMAGINE Expert Classifier V 3 Click as many times as necessary in order to see the detail of the area Two bridges are located in this area of the tation TerraModel Help sj s ujale sjsi ya sisl image a 4 Zoom in further until you can see yellow pixels at bridge locations which indicate the Bridges landings Choke Point class If you refer back to the Knowledge Engineer dialog you can see that the Bridges landings Choke Point hypotheses has a yellow color square Therefore pixels in that class are also yellow Use Pathway You can use the pathway feedback cursor to analyze the classification in the Viewer Feedback l Click the Classification Pathway Feedback Mode icon in the Knowledge Engineer dialog
477. ocess A Job Status dialog opens to let you know when the processes complete 11 Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the job is 100 complete 1 Open a new Viewer 2 Click the Open icon then select tmAtlanta_rotate img from the directory in which you saved it 3 Click the Raster Options tab and click the Display as dropdown list to select Gray Scale 4 Inthe Display Layer section select Layer 2 5 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog 151 Polynomial Rectification 6 Compare tmAtlanta georef img and tmAtlanta rotate img side by side Hle Utility View AOI Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel we lt 152 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER SEVEN Image Commands Introduction Image ERDAS IMAGINE gives you access to a tool called the Image Commands tool With it you can take any file supported by ERDAS IMAGINE and perform many types of operations One such operation is using the Image Commands tool to create a world file You can then use the world file with other software packages such as ESRI s ArcView In this tour guide you can learn how to e access the Image Commands tool e create a world file from a tif file Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 15 minutes With the Image Commands tool you can make many changes to your files Commands Use Image Interpreter Utilities Tour Guides ERDAS IMAGINE must be running Click the Interpreter ic
478. ogs that accompany the raster and vector editing tools as well as the Select Layer To Add dialog contain a Preview window which enables you to view the changes you make to the Viewer image before you click Apply Most of the functions in ERDAS IMAGINE are accessible through dialogs similar to the one below Select Layer Jo Add Files Permissions Raster Options An Filename imq Directory Hales ILE flevolandradarsiga31525 imtg A flevolandradarskews img t vols Rename flood tm147_radar img atlanta C root HERES genntm img gt imagine CDROM hardcopy data img gt examples hyperspectral img Eg bidgsi Eg info f j Eg lanier dms File Type IMAGIHE Image imgq pseudacalar 531 Rows x 531 Columns x 1 Bandis cel Help gu As you go through the tour guides or as you work with ERDAS IMAGINE on your own there are several ways to obtain more information regarding dialogs tools or menus as described below On Line Help There are two main ways you can access On Line Help in ERDAS IMAGINE e select the Help option from a menu bar e click the Help button on any dialog Status Bar Help The status bar at the bottom of the Viewer displays a quick explanation for buttons when the mouse cursor is placed over the button It is a good idea to keep an eye on this status bar since helpful information displays here even for other dialogs ERDAS IMAGINE Bubble Help The User I
479. oise around the edges that you want to eliminate so you use a subset of this image in the model To take a subset you display the file in a Viewer and select the processing window with an inquire box 1 Click the Open icon in a Viewer or select File Open Raster Layer from the menu bar 5 The Select Layer To Add dialog opens 343 ui Spatial Modeler Click here to select the Raster Options Ailes Permissio Raster Options Filename img Directory x seattle img Goto seattle dem img Rename sky ling Delete Click here to gf small_tm img imagines CDROM spots img gt examples ol j EJ lanier dms File Type IMAGINE Image imm i pseudacalar 564 Rows x 481 Columns x 1 Bandis im infor the image E M displays here 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on the file slope img 3 Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and then select the Fit to Frame option 4 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the file in the Viewer Viewer i siopedmg Clayer 7 Fle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help 8 ai e ss 2 4 Kalale Select Area to Use 1 With your cursor in the Viewer right hold Quick View Inquire Box 344 ERDAS IMAGINE Recode Classes Tour Guides Spatial Modeler A white inquire box opens near the center of the image dis
480. ollecting ground truth data from the entire county or of digitizing the entire state would be prohibitive to getting an accurate assessment The process of Frame Sampling provides an answer Frame Sampling is a statistical methodology that enables the accurate survey of a Material of Interest MOI in the study area As the name suggests Frame Sampling uses a frame to define the study area and the analysis of representative samples from within that frame to estimate the proportion of the MOI in the frame Although getting ground truth from an entire county or digitizing and entire state might not be feasible it would certainly make sense to use ground truth and imagery interpretation to calculate the amount of the MOI in these representative samples The use of Frame Sampling and remote sensing can assist the surveyor in achieving the most accurate estimate for the least cost Remote Sensing provides the user with a synoptic view of the entire Frame The classification methods described in Perform Unsupervised Classification on page 483 and the Class Grouping Tool described in Using the Grouping Tool on page 500 provide two methods of stratification or creating smaller homogenous units that represent the entire Frame This stratification reduces the number of samples that allocated to provide an accurate result High resolution aerial photography can be used in the labeling of the ares containing the MOI in the representative samples thereb
481. ollowing one depending upon your ERDAS IMAGINE preferences Title bar Map Composer 2 tour map Menu bar efile Utility View Annotation Help Tool bar oe e EE mae i tool a Ix anie Compose map here Status bar CARE EREE el EE sejal ae om 2 Map Composer 10 With your cursor in the Map Composer viewer right hold Fit Map To Window from the Quick View menu so that you can see the entire map composition page Prepare the Data Layers Draw the Map Frame You must determine what data layer s you are going to use in your composition and then display the layer s in a Viewer window In this exercise you use modeler output img from the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and you must have a Viewer and a Map Composer viewer open DL In the Viewer click the Open icon g on the tool bar or select File Open Raster Layer from the menu bar The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Second click here to display the Raster Options The file type should be img les Permissions Raster Options Filename img Directory 0K nubi escas Rees loptakebedsig357 img T Goto loplakebedsig35 7 Pre H3 imi g L vul merge PC img C atlanta First click here Heel l root Bn mobbaytfuzzy img imagine to select the file modeler output imi examples mssdata img Eg hidgs Can Eg info 1 ad j Eg lanie
482. olumn and then dragging down through the other classes In the Signature Editor menu bar select Evaluate Contingency The Contingency Matrix dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE 472 Generate a Mask from a Feature Space Signature Tour Guides Advanced Classification W Contingency Matrix m x Click to select Feature Space Decision Rules Feature Space Overlap Rule Parametric Rule LInclassified Rule Parametric Rule Parametric Aule Maximum Likelihood Use Probabilities Non parametric Rule Click to start the process v Pixel Counts Pixel Percentages Cancel Help In the Contingency Matrix dialog click on the Non parametric Rule popup list and select Feature Space See Chapter 6 Classification of the ERDAS Field Guide for more information on decision rules Click OK in the Contingency Matrix dialog to start the process A Job Status dialog displays stating the progress of the function When the process is 100 complete click OK in the Job Status dialog The IMAGINE Text Editor opens labelled Editor Dir displaying the error matrix After viewing the reference data in the Text Editor select File Close from the menu bar Deselect the signatures that were selected by right clicking in the Class column and choosing Select None from the Row Selection menu The Feature Space to Image Masking utility allows you to generate a mask from a Feature Space
483. on Ill IMAGINE Professional 338 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER SIXTEEN hip LIS dp m x EET Spatial Modeler EE 42 Introduction Tour Guides In ERDAS IMAGINE GIS analysis functions and algorithms are accessible through three main tools e script models created with the Spatial Modeler Language SML e graphical models created with Model Maker e pre packaged functions in Image Interpreter Spatial Modeler Language SML is the basis for all GIS functions in ERDAS IMAGINE and it is the most powerful It is a modeling language that allows you to create script text models for a variety of applications Using models you can create custom algorithms that best suit your data and objectives Model Maker Model Maker is essentially the SML with a graphical interface This enables you to create graphical models using a palette of easy to use tools Graphical models can be run edited saved or converted to script form and edited further using the SML This tour guide focuses on Model Maker Image Interpreter The Image Interpreter houses a set of common functions that are created using either Model Maker or the SML They have been given a dialog interface to match the other processes in ERDAS IMAGINE In most cases you can run these processes from a single dialog However the actual models are also delivered with the software so that you can edit them if you want more customized processing Lf For more
484. on on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel The Image Interpreter menu opens Click the Utilities option Topographic Analysis Close Help 2 Click Utilities in the Image Interpreter menu The Utilities menu opens 153 ui Image Commands Change Detection Functions Operators RGB Clustering Adv RGB Clustering Select the Subset option Layer Stack to create a tif file m ll Create File Rescale Degrade Replace Bad Lines Vector To Raster Reproject Images Close Help Use the Subset Function 1 Inthe Utilities menu select Subset The Subset dialog opens Subset Input File imm Output File tif Type the input file _ germina sf Nene IE Coordinate Type subset Definition From Inquire Box output file UL x fess7ea00 fF ur 77760400 F ULY 52386350 E LR Y 4azoz3 50 E Input Unsigned 8 bit Output Unsigned 8 bit i Output Continuous i Output Options Number of Input layers amp J Ignore Zero in Output Stats Use a comma for separated list i e 1 3 5 or enter ranges using a i e 2 5 2 Inthe Subset dialog click the Open icon below Input File S 154 ERDAS IMAGINE Check the TIFF file Tour Guides 10 11 Image Commands In the Input File dialog navigate to the IMAGINE HOME e
485. on one of the light green areas in the germtm img file in the Viewer In the AOI tool palette click on the Polygon icon In the Viewer draw a polygon around the green area you just magnified Click and drag to draw the polygon and click to draw the vertices Middle click or double click to close the polygon depending on what is set in Session Preferences After the AOI is created a bounding box surrounds the polygon indicating that it is currently selected These areas are agricultural fields 459 Advanced Classification Ws Yiewer 1 germtm img Layer_4 Layer_ 5 CLayer 3 File Utility View AOI Raster Help G B DE B 9 XD LAE RAAN ZF i 2I LA 5 Inthe Signature Editor click on the Create New Signature s from AOI icon s or select Edit Add from the menu bar to add this AOI as a signature 6 Inthe Signature Editor click inside the Signature Name column for the signature you just added Change the name to Agricultural Field 1 then press Return on the keyboard 7 Inthe Signature Editor hold in the Color column next to Agricultural Field 1 and select Green ij Signature Editor No File File Edit View Evaluate Feature Classify Help oO 4 ZwWl YA Signature Name Color Value Order Count ob gricultural Field ENS 1 1 2180 LODO X X X X 8 Zoom in on one of the light blue cyan areas in the germtm img file in the Viewer 9 Draw a polygon as you did in
486. on page ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Map Composer 2 Click the Grid Tick icon 4 on the Annotation tool palette 3 Click on the image inside the map frame on which you want to place the neatline and tick marks The Set Grid Tick Info dialog opens Set Grid Tick info Specify neatline EE here EEE Geographic Ticks NW E Neatline Margin 0 000 E Inches 7 Map Units Meters gt Feet r Other Enter tick mark information here Honzontal Axis Vertical Axis for the horizontal P Length Outside o os0 Jr m axis Length Inside foooo memes po F Starting at 1700000 re feet Spacing 5000 je et Click here to copy horizontal Copy to Vertical o Use Full Grid Humber of lines tick information to the vertical axis reply Redo cose p Accept the default of Neat line to put a neatline around the map and leave the Margin at 0 so that the neatline fits to the edge of the map frame In the Horizontal Axis options drag across the Length Outside field to select it Type a tick length of 0 06 Press Return on your keyboard Tick marks extend 0 06 outside of the map frame Drag across the Spacing field to select it Type 5000 Press Return on your keyboard The Number of lines is about 4 indicating that there are 4 horizontal tick marks depending on the actual image area you selected Click the Copy to Vertical option to apply these settings to the verti
487. on page 16 In the Viewer 2 menu bar select File New Vector Layer The New Vector Layer dialog opens Under File of Type select Shapefile shp from the pulldown list In the New Vector Layer dialog under Vector Layer enter a name for the new layer such as zone88shapefile in the directory of your choice Click OK in the New Vector Layer dialog Vector coverages include Arc Coverage SDE Vector Layer and Shapefile ERDAS IMAGINE Vector Querying and Editing The New Shapefile Layer Option dialog opens New Shapefile Layer Option select Shapefile Type Polyqon Shape i OK Cancel Help i 13 Select Polygon Shape from the pulldown list 14 Click OK in the New Shapefile Layer Options dialog Create a Shapefile Coverage 1 Inthe Viewer tool bar click the Tools icon or select Vector Tools from the Viewer menu bar The Vector tool palette displays 2 Inthe Vector tool palette click on the Polygon tool aa For more information on using the Shapefile editing tools see the Vector Tools Diagram page in the Vector On Line Manual 3 Using the Inquire Cursor find the triangular field at X 726102 951800 Y 497901 936911 Tour Guides 115 ui Vector Querying and Editing 4 Left click at the north end of the field and begin digitizing a shapefile coverage of the field Left click to begin digitizing the field S The polygon tool re automatically draws gt
488. on the Matrix icon in the Model Maker tool palette 1 Click to place the Matrix object to the right of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click to place the Function object below and centered between the Raster object and the Matrix object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click to place the Raster object below the Function object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Connection icon in the Model Maker tool palette Al 10 Click on the Lock icon in the Model Maker tool palette It changes to reflect the locked state ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler uj al 11 Connect the first Raster object and the Matrix object to the Function object as inputs 12 Connect the Function object to the final Raster object as an output 13 Click on the Selector icon in the Model Maker tool palette N 14 Click on the Lock icon in the Model Maker tool palette to turn it off Your model now looks like the following New Model Add Raster Properties 1 Double click the first Raster object The Raster dialog opens Tour Guides 417 Spatial Modeler T 231 adl Interpolation Nearest Neighbor i Processing Window Eo 4 Map v Fle From Inquire Box Baia PY Unsimnesd Bhd v Humber of Rows nt User for File at Run Time Select the file Humber of Columns here pip Py on
489. on to clear the window ai 45 M Viewer Profile Tools Display Spectral Profile The spectral profile display is fundamental to the analysis of hyperspectral data sets As the number of bands increases and the band widths decrease the remote sensor is evolving toward the visible infrared spectrometer The reflectance DN of each band within one spatial pixel can be plotted to provide a curve approximating the profile generated by a laboratory scanning spectrometer This allows estimates of the chemical composition of the material in the pixel To use this tool follow the steps below Prepare ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open In the Viewer menu bar select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog select hyperspectral img under Filename Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog In the Raster Options click the Fit to Frame checkbox to activate it and then click OK The file hyperspectral img is displayed in the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Raster Profile Tools The Select Profile Tool dialog opens c Select Profile fool select Profile Spectral Spatial Surface OK Cancel Help Accept the Spectral default and click OK in the Select Profile Tool dialog The Spectral Profile viewer opens ERDAS IMAGINE Analyze Data Tour Guides 7 Viewer c SPECTAAL PROFILE 1
490. onal ViewFinder IMAGIZER IMAGINE OrthoBASE and Stereo Analyst are registered trademarks ERDAS MapSheets ERDAS MapSheets Express IMAGINE Radar Interpreter IMAGINE OrthoRadar IMAGINE StereoSAR DEM IMAGINE IFSAR DEM IMAGINE VirtualGIS IMAGINE OrthoBASE Pro IMAGINE Vector IMAGINE Developers Toolkit IMAGINE Geospatial Light Table IMAGINE GLT ERDAS Field Guide ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides and CellArray are trademarks of ERDAS LLC ERDAS is a wholly owned subsidiary of Leica Geosystems and operates as the Geographic Imaging unit within Leica Geosystems GIS amp Mapping Division Other brands and product names are the property of their respective owners 10 02 Part No EI86TG Table of Contents Table Of COMPING s oso ee ede eR X RR E dE Qaeda x wd We ud dr deu Ex ua d d RE iii LISUO TavleS 22 e200 x 3oP UR RECRACANE ees WU E EAE RURCRERECURCURR D Ue RR E RR RU XV iiie pC XVii About This Manual auam dr cmo mnn hhh eo eee eee ee hans hee eee bee xvii 25 4 1 71 2907 NER T Pre xvii Time HCGUINCG nPF xvii DOCUMCINAQHON Prem xvii Digital Hardcopy Documentation 0 0 ee eee ee eee xviii On Line Help Documentation llle xviii Documentation Functions 0 0 06 cc ehh hh hrs XX Conventions Used in This Book es XX GeCHINnG SlalleG PEPPER xxi ERDAS IMAGINE Icon Patel um rre e hn e024 26045 den XR E
491. ong NOTE Some models do not support Auto Calculation If this is the case the function is disabled If your model does not support Auto Calculation click on the Calculate icon in the GCP Tool tool bar z NOTE The transformation matrix contains the coefficients for transforming the reference coordinate system to the input coordinate system Therefore the units of the residuals and RMS errors are the units of the input coordinate system In this tour guide the input coordinate system is pixels Check points are useful in independently checking the accuracy of your transformation In the GCP Tool turn all of the GCPs to yellow by right holding Select All in the Point column and then right holding Yellow in each of the two Color columns Right hold Select None in the Point column of the GCP Tool CellArray to deselect the GCPs In the last row of the CellArray right hold in each of the two Color columns and select Magenta All of the check points you add in the next steps are Magenta which distinguishes them from the GCPs Select the last row of the CellArray by clicking in the Point Z column next to that row Select Edit Set Point Type Check from the GCP Tool menu bar All of the points you add in the next steps are classified as check points Select Edit Point Matching from the GCP Tool menu bar The GCP Matching dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 10 11 12 13 14 Polynomial Recti
492. ons click on Add Change Projection The Projection Chooser dialog opens c fdited Projection Chooser Click here to select UTM Standard Custom Projection Type UTM f Spheroid Name Clarke 1866 A Click here to view enn ee the Custom options UTM Zone 2 ponui coui North N Click here once the desired options have been chosen 3 In the Projection Chooser dialog click on the Custom tab 4 Confirm that Projection Type lists UTM 5 Confirm that Datum Name lists NAD27 6 Confirm that 11 is the UTM Zone 7 Click OK in the Projection Chooser dialog The projection information you just entered displays under Current Reference Map Projection in the Camera Model Properties dialog 8 Inthe Camera Model Properties dialog click on the popup list next to Map Units and select Meters this activates the Apply button 9 Click Apply and then Save As in the Camera Model Properties dialog Name the Geometric Model 1 The Geometric Model Name dialog opens 2 Inthe Geometric Model Name dialog under Filename enter the name GeoModel in the directory of your choice The gms file extension is added automatically 3 Click OK in the Geometric Model Name dialog 274 ERDAS IMAGINE Orthorectification Start the GCP Tool and compute RMS Error 1 Inthe Geo Correction Tools click on the GCP Tool icon amp The GCP Tool Reference Setup dialog opens 2 Inthe GCP Tool Referen
493. ool bar zu a In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select germtm img from the file list The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and then click on the Fit to Frame option so that the entire layer is visible in the Viewer Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file germtm img is displayed in the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select File Open Vector Layer ERDAS IMAGINE Change Viewing Properties Tour Guides 10 Vector Querying and Editing The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select zZone88 NOTE If zone88 does not appear in the file list click on the popup list next to File Type and select Arc Coverage Click the Vector Options tab at the top of the dialog and then confirm that the Use Symbology checkbox is turned off Also make sure that the Clear Display checkbox is turned off so that the raster layer remains in the Viewer Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The vector layer is displayed over the raster layer Since the vectors are black they may not be easily visible With your cursor in the Viewer right hold Quick View Zoom Rotate and Magnify Area A white rotation box displays in the Viewer and a Rotate Magnify Instructions box also displays Drag the white rotation box so that it is positioned over the vector layer in the Viewer Make it just big enough to
494. or back to Black and the Width back to 0 500 points then click Apply Click Close in the Line Style Chooser dialog and then click Apply in the Properties dialog The lines are redisplayed in black 99 Vector Querying and Editing Display Attributes in the Viewer View Attributes In the Properties dialog click the Points and Attribute checkboxes then click on the popup list under Attribute and select ZONING Click Apply in the Properties dialog The polygon label points and zone numbers display in the Viewer In the Properties dialog click the Attribute checkbox to deselect it and then click Apply Click Close in the Properties dialog An Attention dialog displays asking if you want to save these styles in a symbology file Click No The Properties dialog closes In the Viewer tool bar click the Tools icon or select Vector Tools from the Viewer menu bar The Vector tool palette displays Use the Select tool to select features NOTE Depending on the package you have your tool palette may include more icons than the one pictured above If you have the IMAGINE Vector module please see Section V IMAGINE Vector on page 625 for a description of the entire Vector tool palette With your cursor in the Viewer click on a polygon to select it the Select tool is enabled by default in the Vector tool palette ERDAS IMAGINE 100 Tour Guides Vector Querying and Editing The selected polygo
495. or chaser lights Right hold to select a new color Click to fill the AOI polygon with a color Click to see On Line Help Click to apply the new for this dialog style to the AOI This dialog enables you to change the style of the AOI display Experiment in the AOI Styles dialog with the line widths and colors to find a style that looks best on the displayed image When you are finished click Close in the AOI Styles dialog Next select AOI Seed Properties from the Viewer menu bar The Region Growing Properties dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Save AOI Tour Guides Viewer Heighborhood Geographic Constraints Adjust the Spectral Euclidean Distance W Area 1000 00 pixel d E Fjemes fl here J Distance i Click to select an AOI to constrain the region growing Redo Invert Close Help This dialog enables you to define the region that grows from the seed In the Region Growing Properties dialog change the Spectral Euclidean Distance to 5 00 Click Set Constraint AOl in the Region Growing Properties dialog The Choose AOI dialog opens In the Choose AOI dialog select Viewer under AOI Source and then click OK Click the Region Grow AOI icon in the AOI tool palette Click this tool to plant seeds or points in the Viewer from which to grow a regional AOI The region grows in the Viewer as an AOI that can be selected Move the cursor into the Viewer window and click on th
496. or layers may be used in several different ways within models All processing is done in raster format However converting the vector layers to raster is done on the fly at either a default resolution or one specified to meet the level of detail required by the application One simple application of vector layers is to use polygonal boundaries to cookie cut your imagery Whether the polygons represent political boundaries ownership boundaries zoning or study area boundaries they may be used to limit your analysis to just the portions of the imagery of interest In the following example you use a vector coverage to not just cookie cut an image but to generate an output image for visual presentation that highlights the study area Inside the study area you enhance the image while outside the study area you blur the image to further distinguish the study area You must have ERDAS IMAGINE running Click the Modeler icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel 395 ui Spatial Modeler Hodeler The Spatial Modeler menu opens Select Model Maker Model Maker Model Librarian Close Help 2 Click on the Model Maker button in the Spatial Modeler menu A blank Model Maker viewer opens along with tools Set up the Model 1 Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 2 2 Click near the top center of the Model Maker viewer 3 Click on the Matrix icon in the Model Maker tool palette
497. or this tour guide In the Viewer click on the Info icon to view the calibration information The Imagelnfo dialog opens displaying the information for the calibrated image ERDAS IMAGINE 278 Tour Guides Hle Edit View s o e z a kf 7 Orthorectification General Projection Histogram Pixel data File Info Layer Info Statistics Info Map Info Hle Projection Info Layer Name Band 1 Last Modified Wed Aug 11 13 16 41 1999 Humber nf Layers 1 Width 2294 Height 22954 Type Continuous Block Width 64 Block Height 64 Data Type Unsigned 8 hit Compression Hone Pyramid Layers Present Min O Max 24 7 Mean 113 522 Median 124 Mode 129 std Dev 28 472 skip Factor x 22 skip Factor Y 22 Last Modified Wed Aug 11 13 16 43 1999 Upper Left X 538537 55449342 Upper Left Y 3749535 45443985 Lower Right X 548554 34273352 Lower Right Y 3739916 67616815 Pixel Size x H A Pixel Size v H A Unit meters Gen Model Camera Genreferenced to UTM spheroid Clarke 1366 fone Humber 11 Datum HADz7 For amore in depth discussion of the concepts behind rectification see Chapter 9 Rectification of the ERDAS Field Guide Orthorectification 280 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER THIRTEE Terrain Surface Interpolation 8B Qe Fy e Introduction Create a Surface Tour Guides The Surfacing Tool enables you to create a three dimensional surface from irregularly spa
498. ory Input img vol fexamples imagine t examples bldgs infos lanier dms File Type IMAGIHE Image imgq pseudacalar 512 Rows x 812 Columns x 1 Bandis 4 Click OK in the Select Image dialog to add the file to the Variable Props dialog 5 Click the Apply button in the Variable Properties dialog to add Highway Map to the rule properties CellArray 564 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Expert Classifier V je Aule Props untitled ckb Highway Map is the Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions Specify i35 F Variable List af Conditions SEEN Variable Relation Value Confidence E LUI NUN a CNN rom Change the Value Apply Close Help 6 Click Close to dismiss the Variable Props dialog 7 Inthe Rule Props dialog click in the cell under Value and select Other 8 Into the highlighted cell type 7 and press Return on your keyboard 7 is the class number for urban areas in Input img Rule Props untitled ckb iem The Value is now Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions v Specify 55 E setio7 List of Conditions ane Variable Relation Value Confidence j a Highway Map o LOCO LU Apply Close Help 9 Click Apply in the Rule Props dialog to enter the changes then Close The new rule with its attached variable appears in the edit window Notice that the diagonal lines in the hypothesis Residential and rule Vegetated Within City rectangl
499. ou are finished the model looks like the following 397 Spatial Modeler Add Matrix Properties ul 398 1 Make sure the Selector tool is active N 2 Double click the top left Matrix object in the Model Maker viewer The Matrix Definition and Matrix dialogs open ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Spatial Modeler caf 990 71 809 1 99 1 coo 999 f3 Imm a E Select the 5 x 5 Summary Kernel E Honnalize Matrix During Execution OK Cancel Help 3 Using the Kernel popup list select Summary 4 Using the Size popup list select 5x5 5 Click the OK button in the Matrix Definition dialog 399 ui Spatial Modeler Add Raster Properties 1 Double click the top Raster object in the Model Maker viewer 6 Select the file Prompt User for File at Run Time RUNE d Humber of Columns 1024 here Interpolation Nearest Neighbor iW Processing Window Ouiput Map Fle From Inquire Box paia P Unsiined Bhd i pip Dye on ngbus ki uty 5230635000 F Le v asznessum F J mare s HE TELS Da uini 4rea of Interest Declare as integer Choose AOI w Hace Doin l sei Periit Temporary Raster Only int eger i 4 Doni Herode Data ok cancel Hep 2 Click the Open icon to open the File Name dialog wl 3 Select germtm img from the examples directory and click OK in the File Name dialog 4 Click OK in the Raster dialog to accept the file germtm img Add Matrix Prope
500. ou must have ERDAS IMAGINE running l Click the Modeler icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel 382 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Hodeler The Spatial Modeler menu opens Select Model Maker Model Maker j Model Librarian Close Help 2 Click Model Maker on the Spatial Modeler menu A blank Spatial Modeler viewer opens along with the Model Maker tool palette Open an Existing Model 1 Select File Open or click on the Open Existing Model icon in the tool bar a The Load Model dialog opens Load Model Files Permissions Filename gmd Directory _ o Select vol etc models 8bit res merge gmd 8hit pca gmd B Soton cee Ghit res merge qmd t volf ame j from the list AUTO l4RReflectance qmd L products AUTO LogResiduals gmd C imagines _ Delete Aspect qmd versioni Badlines qmd jasper _coROM Qump gmd toolkits Cancel Create File gmd t root Crisp greyscale qmd Help File Type Graphical Model qmd v F Filename abit res merge qmd size 4587 2 Select bit res merge gmd in the Load Model dialog and click OK The model opens in the Spatial Modeler viewer Tour Guides 383 Spatial Modeler 384 voliproducisiimagineiversionijasperitootkitirootietcimodelsi8bit_res_merge gind File Edit Model Text Process alu olais ele 4 7 ale Input Multispectral 8 bit Inpu
501. ow and drag the magnifier window until it is the desired size Press the space bar to enter precise positioning coordinates in the inquire box dialog Use the Quick View menu from the right mouse button or the View menu from the Viewer menu bar to zoom in either Viewer As you try these methods you notice that each change in size is reflected in the other window As the cursor box is adjusted the magnification in the magnifier window is adjusted to accommodate the new area Likewise as the magnifier window is adjusted the cursor box changes to reflect the new size and proportion 7 Viewer Animated Zoom Box Zoom Other methods of zooming in and out of imagery are Animated Zoom Box Zoom and Real time Zoom Animated Zoom enables you to zoom in and out of the Viewer s image in a series of steps that are similar to animation The image is resampled after it is magnified or reduced Display anier img in the Viewer Select Session Preferences In the Preference Editor dialog select Viewer from the Category list Click the checkbox for Enable Animated Zoom Click User Save then Close in dialog and go back to the Viewer Click the Zoom In By Two icon a k AF The Viewer zooms into the image in a simulated animation by a factor of 2 The Viewer center is maintained Click the Zoom Out By Two icon EA k d The Viewer zooms out of the image in a simulated animation by a factor of 2 The Viewer center is m
502. p html help htmitsession erdas imagine icon panel htm x Show Hide button Displays or hides the navigation pane Search Click on this tab to perform a Full Text Search for a word or phrase ini x ll What s Related Print Security Stop P Hide lt lt gt gt ERDAS IMAGINE Icon Panel This is the main icon panel that comes up when you start ERDAS IMAGINE All functions in ERDAS IMAGINE are launched from this icon panel ar from the Viewer that also opens when ERDAS IMAGINE is Started The actual icons that you see may not include all of those listed here due the particular package of ERDAS IMAGINE you are using Add on modules may also display icons that are not documented here Icon size can be selected in the User Interface amp Session category of the Preference Editor The words Session Main Tools Utilities and Help display on the icon panel menu bar These are not icons but rather pull down menus that lead to the ERDAS IMAGINE Session Manager IMAGINE tools general utilities and On Line Help You can resize the icon panel by clicking and dragging any corner Session Click on the word Session and a menu of the Session Manager operations will display Session is not an ican it is opened only as a word Preferences The Preference Editor dialog is opened The Preference Editor dialog controls many ERDAS IMAGINE parameters and defaults and can be used to customize IMAGINE Config
503. pac x 644 CIL eee 83 Ro Ce de LAC ee E QU 9 de E Rc Re 540 Dot Gud Interpretation 222444406 dchecnn nek RE EERAE RULES ERES endo Ed Sod T Rd edo dE Rind d 542 FinalAnalysis WIZI a ee a ee ee eee ee ce eee ee eee ee a ne eee cr ree ee ee eee 552 Chapter 19 IMAGINE Expert Classifier rrrrrrrrrtnn n 559 IN TOGUGCUON BENE eae Pee Oe eae Cee eee eee eae ee es 559 Create a Knowledge Base coco idee eee ERE ox KDR Ee Eee le CU Rd e 559 Set Up ihe Output Classes ae sdquadex ETT ESGEEr TUREEXARISEEECE RIO bus PRESE WE RES 559 Enter Rules for the Hypothesis 251 red Dee Hec Ee d e 08 AE dr E Je di RO Cane ede weed 562 Add an Intermediate Hypothesis nannaa naaa eee eee eens 566 Copy aA EOI peeraa ss cusses E EEEREN E EE e Eee ETEEN EAS EEE 568 Test the Knowledge Base 1 eee rns 570 Wala eere E EE EE E E E E ES E eee eee eee 5795 Meilhodology sises md CAS 5400 ous Soe ee hen ead e pasos ee bab bbe cea ese aoe Ge seceasea 575 Open a Knowledge Base 1 ee eee ee ee eee eens 576 Examine the Knowledge Base 0 ccc ee eee eee eens 577 Derive Slope Valles 4 22222 kets eoeee owas aC o ded dedo and de ut eie Rb E dea 578 Build Hypotheses xac aK kondh axo ope eho xod AGE CAESAR SBER ESOS OR EORR S RR ESAS OR HERDED ETE DD 581 Set ANDING OMENA rsrsrsrs toon dB eee aurca iore d SUBE EEEE d etti EE E mcs cs 583 Check Other Hypotheses llsllleeeleeee eer 584 xii ERDAS IMAGINE Introduce Spa
504. pixels are assigned to each class You may also try selecting more than one class at a time Continue assigning names and colors for the remaining classes in the Raster Attribute Editor CellArray In the Raster Attribute Editor select File Save to save the data in the CellArray Select File Close from the Raster Attribute Editor menu bar Select File Clear from the Viewer menu bar The Thresholding utility allows you to refine a classification that was performed using the Supervised Classification utility The Thresholding utility determines which pixels in the new thematic raster layer are most likely to be incorrectly classified This utility allows you to set a distance threshold for each class in order to screen out the pixels that most likely do not belong to that class For all pixels that have distance file values greater than a threshold you set the class value in the thematic raster layer is set to another value The threshold can be set e with numeric input using chi square statistics confidence level or Euclidean spectral distance or e interactively by viewing the histogram of one class in the distance file while using the mouse to specify the threshold on the histogram graph Since the chi square table is built in you can enter the threshold value in the confidence level unit and the chi square value is automatically computed In this example you threshold the output thematic raster layer from the supervised
505. played in the Viewer The Inquire Box Coordinates dialog also opens The title of this dialog is Viewer 1 slope img uLx EZA LRX 17285556197 ULY 281789 3125 LRY 275703 5412 Fit to AOI Hold inside the inquire box in the Viewer and drag the box to the desired image area You use the entire image area you select except for the edges You can reduce or enlarge the inquire box by dragging on the sides or corners NOTE You may wish to select nearly the entire image area with the inquire box as this is helpful when you compare your output image with the example output image at the end of this exercise In the Raster dialog under Processing Window click From Inquire Box The coordinates in the Raster dialog now match the coordinates in the Inquire Box Coordinates dialog Click Close in the Inquire Box Coordinates dialog Now that the processing window is defined you can recode the values In the Raster dialog click the Recode Data option Click the Setup Recode button The Recode dialog opens You recode this file so that the classes with a slope greater than 2596 have a class value of 1 and all other classes are 0 zero This is easy to do using the Criteria option of the Row Selection menu With your cursor in the Value column of the Recode dialog right hold Row Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria dialog opens 345 Spatial Modeler 346 10 11 12 13 14 15 Cl
506. ple 148 151 277 RGB to IHS 260 Rule Props 563 Run Mosaic 302 309 321 Save AOI As 25 294 Save As 45 Save Layer As 221 232 Save Model 351 357 380 Save Options File 175 Save Signature File As 468 Save Symbology As 643 Scalar 359 Scale Bar Instructions 82 Scale Bar Properties 83 Select A Directory 7 Select Layer To Add 4 7 15 20 46 72 91 97 104 105 109 114 130 136 213 248 254 286 343 363 456 487 600 609 614 616 637 Select Profile Tool 46 Selection Criteria 42 103 345 Sensor Merge 615 Set Geometric Model 137 150 268 Set Grid Tick Info 79 Set Overlap Function 300 309 320 Set Parallelepiped Limits 469 Set Window 342 380 Shift Bias Adjustment 30 Signature Alarm 469 Signature Objects 474 Signature Separability 477 Slant Range Adjustment 622 Spectral Statistics 48 Statistics 41 479 Styles 80 Sun Positioning 54 Supervised Classification 480 Surfacing 285 Symbol Chooser 88 106 107 641 Symbol Properties 89 Symbology 639 655 Index 656 Tasseled Cap 256 Tasseled Cap Coefficients 257 Text Properties 87 Text String 368 369 Text Style Chooser 81 Texture Analysis 618 Threshold 491 Threshold to File 495 Unique Value 639 Unsupervised Classification 484 Unsupervised Classification Isodata 128 View Extent 9 View Signature Columns 458 Viewer Flicker 133 490 495 Wallis Adaptive Filter 613 Wedge Mask 229 Digitize Points icon 34 Display options
507. ptor Custom Read Output Output Options J Show Table in Session Log 1 Output to Descriptor or Attribute Select the Float Data Type 2 Click the Data Type popup list and select Float 3 Click on the OK button Correct Function Properties 1 Double click the second Function object 440 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Notice Model Maker replaced the name of the deleted Scalar object with a scalar place holder It did this to remind you what was there before In this case you replace scalar with a Table Available Inputs CLUMP layer 4 CLUMP layers 8 COHVOLVE raster kem CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster CORRELATION raster IC COVARIANCE raster COVARIANCE raster IGH Replace the DELROWS lt dsctable gt sie scalar place lt lt 3 holder 255 scalar n1 spots OK Clear Cancel Help 2 Inthe lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of scalar 3 Under Available Inputs click on n6 Output Available Inputs ED CLUMP layer 4 CLUMP layer amp CONVOLVE raster kem CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster The correct input CORRELATION raster IC HH COVARIANCE raster n6 Output COVARIANCE raster IGN displays in the DELROWS dsctable sie window zi j foo
508. put data Field Type Delimited by Separator Fixed Width separator Character omma Wi Row Terminator Character Mewline Unix i Comment Character Number of Rows To Skip n ir Column Mapping Output Column Mame Input Field Number 5 Inthe Import Options dialog click the Input Preview tab to see how the ASCII file is imported and mapped under the present parameter settings Tour Guides 283 ui Terrain Surface Interpolation 284 10 File to Import From fvolfatlanta rootimagine examplesjnpts c Field Definition l Input Preview 47531 3125 2 LMr58153125 3 L247550 503375 From the Input Preview display you can tell that the Separator Character is the comma and that Field 1 should be ignored Click the Field Definition tab Click on the popup list next to Separator Character and select Comma In the Column Mapping CellArray alter the Input Field Number column values vertically from 1 2 3to 2 3 4 in order to ignore the ID column of the input file Click OK in the Import Options dialog A Job Status dialog opens reporting the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog shows that the process is 10096 complete click OK ERDAS IMAGINE Terrain Surface Interpolation The X Y and Z columns of the 3D Surfacing CellArray are now populated with 4 411 rows of X Y and Z coordinates Hle Row Surface A in ae ee eee ae X A e4753
509. quire Color Hold on the popup Inquire Color B5 list to select a new _oK Cancel Help color 2 Selecta new color for the Inquire Cursor by holding on the Inquire Color popup list and dragging to select the desired color Tour Guides 11 ies Viewer Take Measurements Click OK in the Inquire Color dialog The Inquire Cursor changes colors To change the shape of the Inquire Cursor select Utility Inquire Shape from the Viewer menu bar The Inquire Shape dialog opens Click to select Ma Click to make the a new shape IBI norin cursor Inquire Cursor an northeast cursor ICON OF a Cursor northwest cursor south cursor southeast cursor cursors Click here to apply the new shape Use Icon Use Cursor to the Inquire Cursor eppy cose Hep Click on circle cursor in the scroll list that displays then click Apply The Inquire Cursor becomes a circle In the Inquire Shape dialog click on the Use Cursor button then Apply to return the Inquire Cursor to the original crosshair shape Click Close in the Inquire Shape and the Inquire Cursor dialogs The Inquire Cursor is cleared from the Viewer The Measurement tool enables you to measure points lines polygons rectangles and ellipses in the displayed layer Both distance and area are reported in the units you select Click on the Measurement icon in the Viewer tool bar or select Utility Measure from the Viewer menu bar The Measure
510. r 8 CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster CORRELATION raster IC COVARIANCE raster COVARIANCE raster IGH j DELROWS dsctable sie P OK Clear Cancel Help Confirm that the Functions dropdown list shows Analysis Under Functions select CONVOLVE raster kernel In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of raster Under Available Inputs click on n1 dmtm At this point you would normally replace the kernel prototype intentionally forget to do that Click the OK button Double click the output Raster object The Raster dialog opens but you are going to ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Spatial Modeler File Name img sdarp omm and a PHHERRG GY Layer Pgariieess gpf MODI _ Prompt User for File at Run Time PHEDDOPSOI AHAB YER BnOUDORIEHY Mearest Menppibar ki PEE SSH VAP W Delete If Exists wide C PHe fron ddunubm Sox Data Type Unsigned bit F E REEE LRNID BSSOS File Type Continuous VEOYI REEE LA YI BB L Ignore loo F in Stats Calculation Arpa pi interest Declare mai nteger 0 x Choose AGH xw Hands Doin O Temmerary Raster Oniv integer ki 4 Beni Recede Data seiur eroe Click the Open icon then navigate to a directory where you have write permission 5 In the File Name dialog enter sharp dmtm img for the output image name Cl
511. r Define Input Land Cover Layer Tour Guides Spatial Modeler The Raster dialog closes The Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer now has n slope RC written under it Double click the second Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer The graphic is highlighted and the Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog click on the Open icon under File Name 7a w In the File Name dialog under Filename select the file floodplain img and then click OK The File Name dialog opens This file does not need to be subset or recoded Click OK in the Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n2 floodplain is written underneath the second Raster graphic Double click the third Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer The graphic is highlighted and the Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog click on the Open icon under File Name 7 w In the File Name dialog under Filename select the file landcover img and then click OK The File Name dialog opens You recode this file so that the most sensitive areas have the highest class value In the Raster dialog click the Recode Data option Click the Setup Recode button The Recode dialog opens In the Value column of the Recode dialog click on f to select it In the New Value box enter a New Value of 4 347 Spatial Modeler 8 Click Change Selected Rows to recode Riparian to 4 Now both Riparian and Wetlands have a class value of 4 9 With your cursor in the Val
512. r Since this file contains only one layer the Layer Number defaults to 1 However if the file contained more than one layer you could choose the layer to edit here Edits performed on one layer can be applied to all layers of the fft file using the File Save All option on the Fourier Editor menu bar 4 Click OK to display the selected file in the Fourier Editor A status meter opens as the layer is read Then the layer is displayed File Edit Mask You can resize the Fourier Editor window to see the entire file 5 Click on any point inside the Fourier Editor and the coordinates of that point are shown in the status bar Hold and drag to dynamically update the coordinates ui 218 ERDAS IMAGINE Fourier Transform Editor Fourier Editor Coordinates The coordinates are referred to as u v with the origin u v 0 0 at the center of the image See the illustration below Since Fourier images are symmetrical a point in one quadrant is exactly the same as the corresponding point in the opposite quadrant For example point 64 170 is the same as point 64 170 For this reason all edits are automatically performed on both halves of the image at the same time Edit Usin 9 Menu As previously stated the menu bar and mouse driven tools offer the same techniques and kinds Op tions of edits only the method is different In the menu bar options you enter all parameters into dialogs In many cases you want to use t
513. r e adding the class reduces the overall complexity of the selection Exclude the class if e adding the class creates speckles in places where there were none before e removing the class removes speckles in the overall image e removing the class reduces the overall complexity of the selection Your selections will look similar to this Note that all of the pixels that belong to these classes are selected N 12 Save the Working Group as a Class Group by clicking the Save As New Group button Click here to save Saves New Group the Working Group as a new Class Group The new Class Group is Tour Guides 507 Advanced Classification Using the AOI Tools 1 Inthe Viewer right click and select Inquire Cursor from the Quick View menu The Inquire Cursor dialog displays 2 Inthe Inquire Cursor dialog enter 261278 630592 in the X field and 4334243 327665 in the Y field 3 Usethe re centering zoom tool Ql to zoom in on the lakes identified by the Inquire Cursor Md Viewer 2 loudoun_maxclass img Layer_1 i E mi x File Utility View AGOI Raster Help 281425 23 4351402 55 UTM f Was 84 4 Click Close on the Inquire Cursor dialog to dismiss it 5 If the Class Group from the previous section is still highlighted in the Viewer use the Clear Working Group contents button amp to clear the selections 6 Select AOI Tools from the Viewer menu bar The AOI Tools palette is displayed 508 ERDAS
514. r us Under Filename click the file sensitivity spot img The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and confirm that the Fit to Frame option is selected so that you can see the entire layer Click OK to display the file 363 Spatial Modeler E Viewer 7 sensitivity spot img Layer 7 E Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Adjust Colors The sensitivity analysis is displayed with a gray scale color scheme 1 Inthe Viewer menu bar select Raster Attributes The Raster Attribute Editor opens You add a Class Names column 2 File Edit 2 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor select Edit Add Class Names A new Class Names column is added to the CellArray Next rearrange the columns so that the Color and Class Name columns come first This makes it easier to change the colors of the overlaid sensitivity analysis 3 Inthe Raster Attribute Editor select Edit Column Properties 364 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Spatial Modeler The Column Properties dialog opens First click on A Te CE the column Hi name here i Alignment Center F then click on the action formal here Porania Aup Down Display Width Click here to change Hew Deleis the order of the columns 4 Click on Color under Columns then click Top to make Color the first column in the Raster Attribute Editor 5 Click OK in th
515. r click the Shift Bias icon on the tool bar The Shift Bias Adjustment dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Use Mouse Linear Mapping Tour Guides Viewer Shift moves the lookup table graph left and right X direction Apply To Bias moves the Ir Red W Gem M Bw lookup table graph up and down Rest cose Help Y direction The lookup table graph and the output histogram are updated in the Histogram Tool dialog as you manipulate the information in the Shift Bias Adjustment dialog In the Shift Bias Adjustment dialog drag the Shift slider bar to the right Notice that the value in the number field to the left increases as you move the slider bar This is the number of pixels that the lookup table graph is moved In the Shift Bias Adjustment dialog double click on the number in the Shift number field and change the number field to 20 Press Enter on your keyboard In the Breakpoint Editor click Apply All The image is redisplayed using the new lookup table It is very dark In the Shift Bias Adjustment dialog return the Shift value to 0 In the Breakpoint Editor click Apply Allto return the image to its original contrast Repeat steps 2 through step 6 using the Blas option When you are finished click Close in the Shift Bias Adjustment dialog In the Breakpoint Editor click the Red Mouse Linear Mapping icon which is located on the left border of the Red histogram E The Red Mouse Linea
516. r Filename The Filename dialog opens Navigate to a directory where you have write permission Click the File Type dropdown list and select TIFF tif Type in dmtm1 tif in the Filename field and then click OK Change the Number of Classes to 30 This tells the classifier how many classes to create Deselect the Output Signature Set Filename checkbox Click OK at the bottom of the Unsupervised Classification dialog A job status dialog displays the progress of the classification of the file ERDAS IMAGINE Import Export Job state Computing Statistics Percent Done o 3 A Bl ox Cancel Hep The resulting classification is created in the tif format Check the Classification l Click the Viewer icon to open a Viewer 2 From the Viewer tool bar click the Open icon g 3 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog click the Recent button 4 Select the file dmtm1 tif from the top of the list Select dmtm1 tif from the top _List of Recent Files of the Recent Files list Recent Files maginefexamples dmtin img maginefexamples tmAtianta iqw maginefexamples timAtianta img ortfarray 1 docs docs tour lMAGINE StuttitmAtianta iqgw 5 Click OK in the List of Recent Files dialog 6 Click the Raster Options tab of the Select Layer to Add dialog Tour Guides 169 Import Export ex Select Layer To Add Select Gray Scale Files Permissions Raster Options Display as Gray scal
517. r Guides 433 Spatial Modeler Add Function Properties Add Raster Properties 434 You select Float to insure the model uses floating point arithmetic instead of integer arithmetic You do this because you are calculating a ratio between 255 and the GLOBAL MAX In other words you want to be able to multiply the pixel values by numbers such as 1 3 2 1 or 3 4 and not just 1 2 or 3 Double click the second Function object The Function dialog opens avatanie ss Functions Fe a i n3 Float El Es ER E CLUMP layers 4 CLUMP layer 8 CONVOLVE raster kem CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster CORRELATION raster IC i COVARIANCE raster m COVARIANCE raster IGN D H gt DELROWS dsctahle sie appears here i l a The function definition 255 n3 Float n1_spots OK Clear Cancel Help Using the calculator portion of the Function Definition dialog enter 255 Under Available Inputs click on n3 Float In the calculator portion of the Function Definition dialog click on Under Available Inputs click on n1 spots Click OK in the Function Definition dialog Double click the output Raster object The Raster dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler File Name img SM Ku a PHHERRG GY Livari Make sure you click the Delete If Exists checkbox O Terwmerary Raster Oniv integer y 4 Be
518. r Mapping dialog opens 31 M Viewer 8 9 Click here to Move this dot left and right disable this to shift the lookup table graph option Move the dot up and down to rotate the lookup table graph In the Red Mouse Linear Mapping dialog click the Rotate button to disable the rotate option Drag the dot in the center of the grid left or right to shift the red lookup table graph In the Breakpoint Editor click the Run icon for the red histogram to update the image in the Viewer In the Red Mouse Linear Mapping dialog click the Rotate button to turn it on and the Shift button to turn it off Drag the dot in the grid up or down to change the slope of the lookup table graph Click the Run icon for the red histogram to update the Viewer image Click Close in the Red Mouse Linear Mapping dialog With your cursor over the red histogram graph right hold Graph Options Undo All Edits 10 Click Apply All in the Breakpoint Editor to return the Viewer image to its original contrast 11 Click Close in the Breakpoint Editor 12 Select File Clear from the Viewer menu bar Linear Mapping Moving the dot in the center of the grid left and right shifts the lookup table graph in the histogram graphic left or right Moving the dot up and down rotates the lookup table graph changing the slope Up rotates the graph counterclockwise and down rotates the graph clockwise As the dot is moved the numbers on the right side of
519. r can be used to integrate spatially aware rules In this case the values of neighboring pixels are analyzed to help determine the land use bridge as opposed to road of the target pixels Click the Close Model icon or select File Close from the Spatial Modeler viewer ail Also note that the Bridges landings Choke Point hypothesis is always going to occur at pixel locations that have also met the requirements to be in the Wide Road or Narrow Road classes it is extremely difficult to create expert rules that are always mutually exclusive Consequently the Confidence values on the Bridges landings rule have been set higher than those for the normal road rules In this way the Bridges landings Choke Point hypothesis always takes precedence in the classifications In the Knowledge Engineer dialog double click the Bridges landings rule The Rule Props dialog for Bridges landings opens Hule Props mobility factors ckb Hame fert EE landings Rule Confidence 4 Compute from Conditions Specify i35 T Check the List of Conditions Confidence value Variable Relation Value Confidence i Identify possible bridges model T 0 954 i PpiHY Close Help ERDAS IMAGINE Run the Expert Classification Tour Guides IMAGINE Expert Classifier V 6 Move the horizontal scroll bar to the right see the Confidence value 7 Note that the Confidence of the variable Identify possible bridges
520. r dims Hel A preview of File Type IMAGINE Image ima Wi the Image pseudacalor 1024 Rows x 352 Columns x 1 Bandis displays here In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on modeler output img Be sure that the source directory is IMAGINE HOME examples the default Click on the Raster Options tab and then select the Fit to Frame option so that you can see the entire file and can more easily select the area to include in the map Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog You can now begin creating your map composition The first step in creating your map is to define the map frame ERDAS IMAGINE Map Composer What is a Map Frame A map frame is drawn resized and selected like other annotation elements but a map frame works like a Viewer Map frames can contain raster vector and annotation layers that you want to include in your composition Although map frames display the layer s you want to include in a map composition the data in a map frame are not copied but are referenced When you create a map frame simply click in the Viewer where the layers you want to use in the map are displayed Map Frame Dimensions There are three ways to select the dimensions of a map frame You use different options depending on the image area you want in the final map composition The dimensions of a map frame are expressed in the following ways e The map area is the area in the Viewer that is disp
521. r enter ranges using a I e 2 5 Create Pyramid Layers Ignore Zero in Output Stats M Coordinate Type subset Definition OK Cancel From Inquire Box Help NOTE Like the Preview Options dialog the Import Options dialog is the same for every type of importer 2 Select Utility Inquire Box from the SPOT test preview img Viewer menu bar 163 Import Export The Inquire Box Coordinates dialog opens and a rectangular box the Inquire Box is displayed in the center of the Viewer c Viewerdsi SPOT lest preview img ucs EDIT Rx 2159 0000 ULv 1578 0000 LRY 1928 0000 Fit to AOI Type Map i Units other Apply Close Help Subset an Area You can select a subset area to be imported by moving and resizing the Inquire Box in the Viewer e toresize the Inquire Box hold and drag on the sides or corners of the box e to move the Inquire Box hold and drag in the center of the box The coordinates update in the Inquire Box dialog as you move and or resize the Inquire Box 3 When you have selected the subset area to import click on From Inquire Box in the Import Options dialog The coordinates for the subset area display in the Import Options dialog Sometimes when map coordinate information is not available in the source image there are apparent differences between the Inquire Box coordinates and those transferred to the Import Options dialog However the impor
522. r warehouse LS paper pts 7j Close Use the scroll bar A boundary monument 4 Help A preview of to scroll down the Bi oil platform f the currently USGS symbol list L selected symbol displays here E Auto Apply changes 5 Click the popup list and select USGS to display the available USGS symbols 6 Scroll through the symbol list under USGS and click on the marsh symbol NOTE This zone is not really marsh this example is simply to show you how the pattern fill option works 7 Change the symbol Size to 24 00 points The preview window in the Symbol Chooser dialog displays the symbol and the symbol size you have selected Tour Guides 641 IMAGINE Vector Click Apply and then Close in the Symbol Chooser dialog The preview window in the Fill Style Chooser dialog displays the symbol and the symbol size you selected in the Symbol Chooser dialog In the Fill Style Chooser dialog change both the X Separation and Y Separation to 10 00 The new style is reflected in the preview window Edited FillStyle Style Chooser Standard Custom W Use Solid Color Eu d Use Outline E Use Pattern E ID m Thisisthe a Y Separation 10 00 f new style E Auto Apply changes 10 Click Apply and then Close in the Fill Style Chooser dialog The Fill Style Chooser dialog closes and the new style displays in the Symbology dialog 11 Click Apply in the Symbology dialog to
523. r will be showing Select this connection and click Add Select GeoDatabase Feature Class to Add Look in E Database Connections E amp sp adl Add OLE DB Connection s Add Spatial Database Connection iz Connection to alpha 2 sde i Connection to alpha sde i Connection to morticia 2 sde E Connection to morticia 3 sde Connection bo morticia sde m OLE DB Connection adc Eo Eos rr Big m n nh Q Q M ame Connection to morticia sde Add Show of type Feature classes Cancel You will be connected to the database where you can select a feature to create a proxy file that will serve as a connection to the server and feature classes This proxy file will reside in the directory where your file chooser is located If you wish to rename the file right click and select rename To access the feature classes in the database simply double click the proxy file name Tour Guides 125 Vector Querying and Editing 126 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER FIVE Classification Introduction Classification is the process of sorting pixels into a finite number of individual classes or categories of data based on their data file values If a pixel satisfies a certain set of criteria then the pixel is assigned to the class that corresponds to that criteria In this tour guide you perform a basic unsupervised classification of an image file img All of the data used in this tour guide are in
524. rack of how the Class Group was collected Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each of the Target Classes moving the carat in the Target Classes CellArray to the next Target Class each time 514 ERDAS IMAGINE Identifying and Resolving Similarities and Conflicts Tour Guides Advanced Classification Save the Grouping Process by selecting File Save Image from the Class Grouping Tool menu bar This provides a broad grouping of all the classes in the image and each Class Group must be closely examined to determine the accuracy of the Majority grouping Next we will discuss how to find the grouping conflicts and some strategies for resolving them The Class Grouping Tool allows there to be any number of Class Groups representing each Target Class and there is no limit on whether these groups overlap or conflict with each other It is frequently the case that a single class may properly belong with more than one target class These classes are termed conflicted classes and they generally are a source of speckle in the resulting final classification Both Similarity and Conflict are measures of shared classes Similar classes are shared by other groups within the same Target Class while conflicted classes shared by groups under a different Target Class If the classes from a previous section are still highlighted in the Viewer use the Clear Working Group Contents button amp to clear them In the Class Grouping Tool
525. racy Assessment 496 Add Images for Mosaic 294 Add Random Points 498 Affine Model Properties 150 Annotation Text 86 89 AOI Styles 24 Archive 67 Area Definition 65 Area Fill 35 Arrange Layers 15 22 38 78 463 468 471 Attention 107 Attribute Options 481 Band Combinations 50 Brightness Adjustment 621 Brightness Inversion 253 Build Vector Layer Topology 644 Camera Model Properties 268 Catalog Image 61 Chart Options 47 Choose AOI 295 299 Circular Mask 226 Classified Image 497 Clean Vector Layer 645 652 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index Color Chooser 37 39 365 Column Attributes 112 Column Properties 40 131 365 488 Compositions 90 93 Contingency Matrix 472 Contrast Tool 26 Contrast Tool piecewise 27 Convolution 246 Copy Vector Layer 96 629 Create Feature Space Maps 464 Create Frame Instructions 73 Create New Table 632 Creating New Relate 635 Crisp 249 Criteria 377 Data Viewer 172 Defined Areas 65 Edge Enhancement 608 Export Column Data 111 Export ERDAS 7 5 LAN Data 166 Eye Target Edit 56 Feature Space to Image Masking 473 Fill Style Chooser 641 Filter Options 231 Form View 64 Formula 132 489 Fourier Transform 215 Function Definition 349 355 360 GCP Matching 146 GCP Tool Reference Setup 275 Generate Script 371 Geo Correction Tools 138 148 268 Histogram 476 Histogram Plot Control 476 Hypo Props 561 IHS to RGB 261 Image Files 177 ImageInfo 65 177 278 606 IMAGINE Ra
526. ramid Layers Once yu click Map Model Change Map Model Opions to World the field updates Delete Map Model E Map Model to World File germtm tfw Change Map Projection Options Delete Map Projection OK Batch Cancel Help automatically 5 Click the checkbox next to Map Model to World By default the Image Commands tool assigns the same name to the output file but with the tfw extension In this case the file name is germtm tfw The world file is saved in the same directory as the 1mage you create it from 6 Ifyou wish click the Open icon and navigate to a different directory in which you want to save the world file If not proceed to step 9 y 1 Tour Guides 157 ui Image Commands The File Selector dialog opens 7 Type the name germtm tfw in the Filename window then press Return on your keyboard 8 Click OK in the File Selector dialog 9 Click OK in the Image Commands dialog to start the process A Job Status dialog opens which tracks the progress of the function fmageCommarnd Job State Done Percent Done 100 0 MEN 100 OK Cancer Help 10 When the job is complete click OK in the Job Status dialog You can set a preference in the User Interface amp Session Category of the Preference Editor Keep Job Status Box which allows the Job Status box to close automatically upon completion of a job Check for tfw file
527. raster COVARIANCE raster IGH DELROWS lt dsctable gt sie of P VE raster kemel OK Clea Click here and inputs automatically display in the designated prototype here Click CONVOLVE from the list below Functions The CONVOLVE statement displays in the function definition window Click in the first prototype lt raster gt and then click on n1_spots under Available Inputs to define the raster input Click in the second prototype lt kernel gt and then click on n3_Summary under Available Inputs to define the kernel Click OK to close the Function Definition dialog The Function Definition dialog closes and CONVOLVE is written below the Function graphic in the Model Maker viewer Double click the output Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer The Raster dialog opens In the Raster dialog under File Name type the name spot_summary for the new output file The img extension is added automatically Be sure that you specify a directory in which you have write permission Click on the Delete if Exists option Confirm that Continuous is selected for the File Type Click OK in the Raster dialog ERDAS IMAGINE 356 Save and Run the Model Run the Model Combine Models Tour Guides Spatial Modeler The Raster dialog closes and n2 spot summary is written under the Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Save icon or sel
528. rator or a person with administrator privileges to run a Batch process at a later time 1 From the ERDAS IMAGINE icon bar click the DataPrep icon and then select Reproject Images to open the Reproject Images dialog Select lanier img as the Input File and lanier_reproj img as the Output File Select UTM WGS 84 South from the Categories popup list Select UTM Zone 25 from the Projection popup list NOTE If you are creating projections of your own do not include a slash or in the name The Batch processor uses the presence of a slash in a name to decide if it is an argument to be converted to a variable 188 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Batch Processing Reprojectimages is Save the Output File in Input File img Output File img the directory of your Jlanierimg lanier reproj img 4f choice Output Projection Projection UTM Zone 25 Range 36W 30W m Units meters Wi Ignore Zero in Stats Output Cell sizes x 30 000000 gt v 30 000000 Resample Method Nearest Heighbor i Rigorous Transformation Polynomial Approximation Maximum poly order s i Tolerance pixels 0 500 E If tolerance exceeded Continue Approximation Rigorous Transformation Click the Batch button Click the Batch button The Batch Wizard starts with the Select Type of Command Processing panel Select the Modify commands automatically option In the Batch Wizard click the Next
529. re a number of ways to reduce the Undersampled strata and the Stationarity of the Strata two of the most helpful methods are described below e Use the Dendrogram Tool in the Class Grouping Tools to revise your stratum file and group some of the problematic strata into spectrally similar groups that are adequately sampled You will also need to recode the stratum file again e Some of the Strata may include classes that are substantially different from each other These classes need to be split apart into two separate strata Use the Dendrogram Tool in the Class Grouping Tools to revise your stratum file and regroup these classes e Add additional Samples to the project to get a better estimation of the contents of the strata Resolving these problems to achieve an acceptable Confidence Value may require numerous iterations of refining and recoding the Stratum File adding and or removing Samples as well as finding and correcting labelling errors in the Interpretation files 14 Once you are satisfied with the Analysis Results click Next on the Final Analysis Wizard to generate the Fraction File The Final Analysis process will generate a Fraction File for each of the image tiles 15 Click Close on the Final Analysis Wizard to exit the wizard and return to Project Manager 556 ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools The Fraction File which is generated during the Final Analysis process is a floating point file each pixel v
530. rest Neighbor as the resampling technique Enter the appropriate layers to colors here 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 View Results 616 Sensor Merge Enter the i l r name ofthe Gray scale Image img Multispectral Image imm Output File img output file flood tm147 radar img flood tm147 radar img wl wl here Select Layer ja i Number of layers 4 Resampling Techniques Data Type w Principal Component Nearest Neighbor Gray Seale Unsioned G bit IHS Bilinear Interpolation RGEC UGH Unsionen 8 DL w Multiplicative Cubic Convolution Guys unsipes 8 hit vj larer Seale Modification IHS Substitution Output Options 4 Sermon Intensity Stretch to Unsigned 6 bit v Hist Match saturation _ Ignore Zerg in stats v Med piy ve Pn Click this i checkbox oK Batch to activate this option In the Sensor Merge dialog under Gray Scale Image enter flood tm147 radar img Click on the Select Layer popup list and select 4 the radar image layer Enter flood tm147 radar img under Multispectral Image Enter merge img as the Output File in the directory of your choice Under Method click IHS Under Resampling Techniques click Nearest Neighbor Make sure that Intensity is selected under IHS Substitution In the R G and B boxes enter 1 for R 2 for G and 3 for B the TM image layers Under Output Options click Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit Click
531. results 6 Click Close in the Session Log 1 Inthe Radar Interpreter menu select Speckle Suppression The Radar Speckle Suppression dialog opens 2 Under Input File enter the file name loplakebed img 3 Under Output File enter despeckle1 img in the directory of your choice NOTE Be sure to remember the directory where you have saved the output file This is important when you display the output file in a Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Radar Interpreter 4 Under Coef of Var Multiplier under Output Options click 0 5 5 Under Output Options confirm Lee Sigma is selected from the popup list next to Filter 6 Under Output Options enter 275 for the Coef of Variation coefficient of variation then press Return on your keyboard This is the value 275 that was reported in the Session Log when you calculated the coefficient of variation 7 Click OK in the Radar Speckle Suppression dialog The Radar Speckle Suppression dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 8 Whenthe Job Status dialog indicates that the job is 10096 complete click OK if the dialog does not close automatically View Results 1 Inthe menu bar of Viewer Z2 select File Open Raster Layer or click the Open icon zu 4 in the tool bar The Select Layer To Add dialog opens 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog select despeckle1 img as the file to open and click OK 3 Repeat steps 1
532. retation of the high resolution sample This file is created by the Polygon Analysis Tool This file is required for this sample to be included Polygon Final Analysis The first step in assigning the Rectified Samples is to find out which selected cells overlap which high resolution image On the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel click the Viewer icon to open a Viewer Click the Open file icon B on the Viewer toolbar The File Chooser is opened Browse to the IMAGINE_HOME examples directory From the Files of Type popup list select MrSID sid Ctrl click loudoun highres1 sid and loudoun highres2 sid Click OK to open the files in the Viewer Click the Open file icon 1 on the Viewer toolbar The File Chooser is opened Browse to the directory that contains your Sampling Project 541 Frame Sampling Tools 9 Select the Joudoun tm sample 1 directory 10 From the Files of Type popup list select AOI aoi 1 Sample Boundary AOls loudoun_highres1 sid 12 13 14 15 16 17 Dot Grid Interpretation 542 Select sample 1 boundary aoi and click OK The AOI that defines the boundary of Sample 1 is opened in the Viewer loudoun highres2 sid In the Assign Files step of the Sampling Wizard select Sample 1 from the Samples popup list Select Rectified Sample trom the File Descriptor popup list Lar Click the Browse icon and browse to the IMAGINE HOME examples directory In the Files
533. ript Name defaults to the same root name as the graphical model Scripts have the extension mdl If you do not want to use the default enter a new file name under Script Name Click OK to generate the script The model is now accessible from the Model Librarian option of Spatial Modeler From the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel click the Modeler icon The Spatial Modeler menu displays Select the Model Librarian option in the Spatial Modeler menu 371 Spatial Modeler The Model Librarian dialog opens Model Library mdl iour moserne jw info Click here ras files to select zone88 the model tour model mul tour Library Functions Click here to edit Run Model Batch Close Help From this dialog you can edit delete or run script models Under Model Library select the name you used for your model in step 2 7 Click Edit in the Model Librarian dialog The model is displayed in the Text Editor as in the following example 372 ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler File Edit View Find gojas eja Sensitivity Analysis Model Create a sensitivity file by combining Slope Floodplain and Landcover using a conditional statement Enhance the SPOT image using a summary filter Overlay of sensitivity analysis on SPOT Panchromatic image Th set cell size for the model ET CELLSIZE MIN set window for the model ET WINDOW INTERSECTION set area of in
534. rom the Quick View menu right hold on the Viewer image underZoom Zoom In by 2 the Viewer tool bar by clicking this icon a k Ac Move the scroll bars on the bottom and side of the Viewer window to view other parts of the image To move by small increments you can click the small triangles at either end of the scroll bars To move by larger increments drag the scroll bars You can also enlarge the Viewer window by dragging any corner Select View Create Magnifier from the Viewer menu bar A white cursor box opens in the center of the image This area is displayed in a small magnifier window that opens over the top corner of the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Image in this new Viewer is a magnified view of the image area under this cursor box Viewer 4 With your pointer inside the white cursor box hold and drag the box around the image The data in the magnifier window change as the cursor box is moved over the image This technique is called chip extraction which is used in the Rectification tools to help you precisely identify ground control points GCPs 5 Inthe Viewer menu bar select File Close Other Viewers to close the magnifier window Magnifying Areas There are four ways to change the size of the area magnified With the cursor on any corner or side of the cursor box drag the box until it is the desired size Place the cursor on the lower right corner of the magnifier wind
535. rom the Threshold dialog menu bar Select File Clear from the Viewer menu bar NOTE The output file that is generated by thresholding a classified image can be further analyzed and modified in various ERDAS IMAGINE utilities including the Image Interpreter Raster Attribute Editor and Spatial Modeler 495 Advanced Classification Recode Classes After you analyze the pixels you may want to recode the thematic raster layer to assign a new class value number to any or all classes creating a new thematic raster layer using the new class numbers You can also combine classes by recoding more than one class to the same new class number Use the Recode function under Interpreter icon GIS Analysis to recode a thematic raster layer See Chapter 11 Geographic Information Systems of the ERDAS Field Guide for more information on recoding Use Accuracy The Accuracy Assessment utility allows you to compare certain pixels in your thematic raster Assessment layer to reference pixels for which the class is known This is an organized way of comparing your classification with ground truth data previously tested maps aerial photos or other data In this example you perform an accuracy assessment using the output thematic raster layer from the supervised classification germtm superclass img Preparation ERDAS IMAGINE must be running and you must have germtm img displayed in a Viewer 1 Click the Classifier icon 88S in th
536. ropriate directory by clicking here Compress Output to zampressed dutput File Hame std pl whieh Outputs Selected Click here to run the mosaic _L EN E n E Batch Cancel Help In the Run Mosaic dialog under Output File Name enter a name for the output file in the directory of your choice e g wasia mosaic img Click OK in the Run Mosaic dialog A Job Status dialog displays stating the progress of the mosaic operation 309 Mosaic Display Output Image 310 Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the mosaic operation is finished NOTE The mosaic operation can take up to ten minutes to run based upon your hardware capabilities and the size of the files Select File Close from the Mosaic Tool viewer to clear it from the screen You are asked if you want to save the changes in the Mosaic Tool viewer Save them if you like or click No to dismiss the dialog Click the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel to open a second Viewer In the Viewer you just opened select File Open Raster or click the Open icon E g In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on the file wasia mosaic img or the output mosaic image you previously created Remember to look in the directory in which you saved the file The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog Check to be sure that the Fit to Frame
537. rray of the Symbology dialog fills with the newly generated styles Tour Guides 639 ui IMAGINE Vector Every Class Name has File Edit View Automatic Help its own unique symbol T Rol Symbol Class Name 10 Click Apply in the Symbology dialog to apply this new symbology to the displayed layer The vector layer is redrawn with the new symbology As the Symbology CellArray indicates red areas are zone 23 green are zone 15 dark blue are zone 4 etc Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help isiu m u e 2 igsi wala al Add Pattern Polygon Now change the style of zone 15 green from a plain solid to a pattern fill over a solid Fill 640 ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Vector 1 Inthe Symbology dialog hold in the Symbol column for Zone 15 How number 14 and select Other The Fill Style Chooser dialog opens Hilf Style Chooser Click this tab to 7T n t select custom B sou green W Use Solid Color style options _ E Use Outline W Auto Apply changes 2 Inthe Fill Style Chooser dialog click the Custom tab at the top of the dialog 3 Click the Use Pattern checkbox to activate it 4 Hold on the Symbol popup list and select Other The Symbol Chooser dialog opens Symbol Chooser Standard Custom ses Change the as peus sas E E B use Color p symbol size here 44 rice field EE Z 5 bam o
538. rt n before the asterisk It should look like this IMAGINE HOME examples ln img Where IMAGINE HOME represents the installation directory of ERDAS IMAGINE on your system ERDAS IMAGINE Batch Processing Files l Permissions Multiple File Selection You can use this panel to select multiple files to be added to the selection of files tn process Clicking on the checkbox below will enable the Selection Pattern which is used to enter a wild card pattern that describes the files to be selected The pattern may contain and tn match any characters When the pattem is set press OK to continue The OK button will not be enabled until a file has been selected on the File tab The Selection Pattern has W Use the following Selection Pattern been changed to include all Selection Pattem files that start with In cu 3 Click the OK button in the Select Batch Files dialog The input files are displayed under the Input column Select and delete any duplicate or unwanted files by clicking in the numbered column next to the file name and then clicking the Delete Files icon This list of input files may be saved for future use See Additional Information on page 207 for information about saving files c Batch Wizard Select Files to Process x L Use the popup list to select the column to modify Use the select button to add files to the list The Delete button can be used to remove selected rows fro
539. rties 1 Double click the top right Matrix object in the Model Maker viewer 2 Verify that Low Pass is selected in the Kernel popup list 3 Using the Size popup list select 7x7 4 Click the OK button in the Matrix Definition dialog Add Function Properties 1 Double click the left Function object 400 ERDAS IMAGINE Add Function Properties Tour Guides Spatial Modeler The Function Definition dialog opens Available Inputs n1 genntm n1 genntm 1 CLUMP layer 4 n1 genntm 2 CLUMP layer 8 n1 genntm 3 CONVOLYE lt raster gt lt kerm n1 genntm 4 CORRELATION covariance n1 genntm 5 CORRELATION raster n1 genntm E CORRELATION raster IC COVARIANCE lt raster gt COVARIANCE raster IGH DELROWS lt dsctable gt sie Define the Analysis m z Function using CONVOLVE n1 genmtm n2 Summary Inputs in this window OK Clear Cancel Help From the Analysis Functions select CONVOLVE raster kernel this should be the third item on the list In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of raster Under Available Inputs click on n1_germtm In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of kernel Under Available Inputs click on 6n2 Summary Click OK in the Function Definition dialog Double click the right Function objec
540. s spatial Enhancement Radiometric Enhancement spectral Enhancement Select Topographic Hyperspectral Tools Analysis Fourier Analysis Topographic Analysis GIS Analysis Utilities Close Help 2 From the Image Interpreter menu select Topographic Analysis The Topo Analysis menu opens Tour Guides 325 Viewshed Analysis slope Aspect Level Slice Shaded Relief Painted Relief Topographic Honmalize Click Viewshed Paster Contour surface Viewshed DEM Height Converter Close Help 3 From the Topo Analysis menu select Viewshed A Viewer Selection Instructions dialog opens Viewer Sefection instructions a e T inside a viewer to select for Viewshed Analysis 4 Click in the Viewer containing eldodem img and eldoatm img The Viewshed dialog opens 5 Atthis time click Close on both the Image Interpreter menu and the Topo Analysis menu to remove them from your display Viewshed 7 linked to Viewer 1 Function Observers Output Typ Multiple Viewsheds E Position Ufits Meters i Spokes n X Height Ufits Meters Wi Btervais D id e Units Meters i PHB GE see f Meteks J Uge Earth Curvature Start ne E Meters Maxima Search o oo E Meters Click the Observers tab to add an
541. s Imported Tile n Imported Tile is a native IMAGINE format image that provides the initial synoptic view of the study area This file provides the initial starting point for all of the files below The inclusion of an Imported Tile in the project is optional as long as you can provide a Stratified Tile Rectified Tile Rectified Tile is an orthorectified version of the Imported Tile The Rectified Tile must undergo Classification to provide the Classified Tile below The inclusion of a Rectified Tile in the project is optional as long as you can provide a Stratified Tile RA For more information on orthorectification see Orthorectification on page 265 Classified Tile A Classified Tile is a thematic classification of the Rectified Tile RA For instructions on classifying an image refer to Advanced Classification on page 455 Stratified Tile The stratified tile is a refined grouping of the Classified Tile This grouping is usually performed with the Class Grouping Tool The Grouped image is then Recoded to include only those strata which contain the MOI This file is required by the Frame Sampling process RA For tips and techniques on stratifying images see Using the Grouping Tool on page 500 Sampling Grid The Sampling Grid contains the vector polygons needed for Sample Selection The Sampling Grid is usually created with the Grid Generation Tool but it can be a previously created Shapefile This file is r
542. s Image Information View Histogram from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar e Utility Layer Info View Histogram from the Viewer menu bar Select Tools Image Information from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar The ImageInfo dialog opens Select File Open from the ImageInfo menu bar to select a file You can also click on the Open E icon B in the ImageInfo tool bar to select a file In the Image Files dialog click on loplakebed img to select it and then click OK The information for loplakebed img displays in the ImageInfo dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter File Edit View Menu bar 1 Tu raol Sita F ee 4 Tool bar General Projection Histogram Pixel data Layer Hame Layer 1 Hle Info Last Modified Tue Oct 6 13 02 45 1332 Humber nf Layers 1 Width 555 Height 523 Type Continuous Layer Info Block Width 64 Block Height 64 Data Type Unsigned 8 hit Compression Hone Pyramid Layers Absent Min 9 Max 255 Mean 80 382 atatistcs info Median 78 Mode 7b std Dev 35 512 skip Factor x 1 skip Factor Y 1 Last Modified Tue Oct 6 13 02 47 1332 Upper Left x 0 0 Upper Left 0 0 so pone Lower Right X 564 0 Lower Right Y 522 0 File Pixel Size X N A Pixel Size Y N A Unit ather Gen Model Hone QDrPIDMENHECIMITDI LEAP EE Projection Info Stern EPHE BSDOOC DOaIBD Status bar 4 Inthe ImagelInfo dialog select View Histogram or click the Hi
543. s 7 x i Media File iW Input File immn Output File lan anion sm Jmenerin 1m Imm A clean zone88 IMAGINE stuff fm stuff info zonedisubset ras files ILS IMAGINE stuff mmy tour m OK dose PRALE VEU Help 7 Click OK in the Import Export dialog The Export ERDAS 7 5 LAN Data dialog opens Input File lanier img Output File lanier lan alz Bands Rows 317 Cols OK Export Options Close 8 Click OK in the Export ERDAS 7 5 LAN Data dialog A Job Status dialog displays The file lanier lan now resides in the selected directory ERDAS IMAGINE 166 Create tif Files Tour Guides Import Export Creating LAN Data ERDAS IMAGINE also creates two other files when it exports the LAN data e Janier pro contains map projection information e fanier sta contains file statistics These file formats are used in ERDAS 7 5 software In ERDAS IMAGINE map projection and file statistics are included in the image file format You may delete the files lanier pro and anier sta if desired since they are not used in this exercise In this section run an ERDAS IMAGINE process producing a tif file instead of an image file NOTE Since the input image is georeferenced the output TIFF image has geotiff tags If you wish to produce a TIFF World file select the Write option in the TIFF image file category of t
544. s and defaults and can be used to customize IMAGINE Configuration The Configuration Editor is opened and allows you to configure peripheral devices such as tape drives printers CD ROMS etc far use with ERDAS IMAGINE Session Log A Session Log window is opened that reports ERDAS IMAGINE processing and error messages Active Process List he Process List dialog is opened This dialog displays a list of the IMAGINE processes that are currently running under this session You can explicitly terminate any of the processes by selecting them in the list and then clicking the Kill button This is very useful for toolkit users sd blue is the default link color your system may be different xxviii The ERDAS IMAGINE On Line Help OLH system is a collection of on line manuals that functions just like an internet website The OLH system includes help for all of the dialogs in ERDAS IMAGINE as well as in depth Help files that provide more details about a process Each manual covers a specific topic These manuals can be printed for convenience The individual html files may also be bookmarked for quick reference Click the Shor button at the upper right corner of the help topic The Navigation Pane displays in the left portion of your browser ERDAS IMAGINE Contents Index Click on this Click on this tab to tab to view the look up help topics by Table of keyword Contents YE ERDAS IMAGINE 8 5 On Line Help Manual N
545. s for Mosaic dialog under Image Filename select air photo 2 img 12 Under Image Area Options click the Compute Active Area button 13 Click Add and then Close in the Add Images for Mosaic dialog The data for air photo 2 img display in the Mosaic Image List CellArray and a graphic of the image displays on top of the air photo 2 img graphic in the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer Se s ujmjejajs e mf m aaae a5 Click this for input mode Match histograms using this icon Identify Areas of Intersection 1 Inthe Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Input icon to verify that the input mode is activated ui 296 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 2 gt Mosaic Click on the Image Matching icon kol The Matching Options dialog opens W Matching Options X Set Exclude Areas Color Balancing Set Matching Method C No Matching Click this radio button C Far All Images Overlap Areas Histogram Type f Band by Band C Intensity AGE Use external reference Click here to apply the change p OF Help External reference In the Matching Options dialog under Matching Method click the Overlap Areas button Click OK in the Matching Options dialog In the Mosaic Tool viewer click on the Intersection icon to activate the intersect mode H In the canvas of the Mosaic Tool viewer click on a line that intersects the two images The lin
546. s now the default symbol for Symbol Style in the Styles dialog Select the Symbol tool from the Annotation tool palette In the Map Composer viewer click under the map image between the legend and the scale bars The north arrow is placed on your composition You can reposition it by clicking on it to select it then dragging it to the new position You can also double click on a selected symbol to bring up the Symbol Properties dialog Here you can enter size and positioning measurements Write Descriptive Text Place Text Tour Guides You can add descriptive text to your map to provide more information The steps below include the instructions for adding two lines of text However you may add more 1f you like You must have a map composition and the Annotation tool palette open If the Styles dialog is not currently open select Annotation Styles from the Map Composer menu bar The Styles dialog opens In the Styles dialog hold on the Text Style popup list and select Other The Text Style Chooser dialog opens In the Text Style Chooser dialog change the text Size to 10 points Click on the Custom tab at the top of the Text Style Chooser dialog Check to be sure that Fill Style is set to solid black Click Apply to change the defaults Click Close in the Text Style Chooser dialog and in the Styles dialog Click on the Text icon A in the Annotation tool palette to use the text option to write descriptive text
547. s that are all controlled by the same X server The ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel is opened on the default screen which is usually the CRT where IMAGINE was started Ey using this preference the IMAGINE Viewer can be told to start on another screen for by default the same screen as the icon panel The valid options are default Q 1 2 and 3 The default is default Display Card Depth Under UNIX this preference tells the IMAGINE Viewer what display depth it should use when displaying images tis useful only on displays that support multiple depths For example most 24 bit cards support 3 bit depth as well as 24 bit depth This preference is used primarily on systems that support multiple hardware colormaps of different depths simultaneously in which case itis best ta start the window system with an S bit PseudocColor visual and tell the IMAGINE Viewer to use a 24 bit DirectColor visual The valid options are default 5 12 and 24 The default is default B My Computer E 2 When you are through studying the Viewer preferences help file select File Exit from the On line Help file menu bar 3 Click the Close button on the Preference Editor NOTE If you have changed any preferences you can save them at this time by clicking the User Save or Global Save buttons on the Preference Editor dialog Di splay an Ima ge Next you display a Landsat Thematic Mapper TM image of Gainesville Georgia in a Viewer Since the data
548. s the ISODATA utility from running indefinitely By specifying a convergence threshold of 95 you are specifying that as soon as 9596 or more of the pixels stay in the same cluster between one iteration and the next the utility should stop processing In other words as soon as 546 or fewer of the pixels change clusters between iterations the utility stops processing Click OK in the Unsupervised Classification dialog to start the classification process The Unsupervised Classification dialog closes automatically A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the process is 10096 complete Proceed to the Evaluate Classification section to analyze the classes so that you can identify and assign class names and colors After a classification is performed the following methods are available for evaluating and testing the accuracy of the classification e classification overlay e thresholding e recode classes s accuracy assessment See Chapter 6 Classification of the ERDAS Field Guide for information on accuracy assessment In this example use the Raster Attribute Editor to compare the original image data with the individual classes of the thematic raster layer that was created from the unsupervised classification germtm isodata img This process helps identify the classes in the thematic raster layer You may also use this process to evaluate the classes of a
549. s to Add Look in wa atabase Connections Add OLE DB Connection Add Spatial Database Connection i Connection to alpha 2 sde i Connection to alpha sde i Connection to morticia sde E OLE DB Connection ode M ame Add Show of type Feature classes Cancel 3 Choose Add Spatial Database Connection and click Add Select GeoDatabase Feature Class to Add Look in E Database Connections 2 Ey s E Add OLE DB Connection Add Spatial Database Connection Connection to alpha 2 sde 4 Connection to alpha sde Connection to morticia sde iz OLE DB Connection ode M ame Add Spatial Database Connection Add Show of type Feature classes Cancel 4 The Spatial Database Connection dialog appears 124 ERDAS IMAGINE Vector Querying and Editing Server micas 0000000000 Service esri sde 00 0 0 0 00000 Database e IF supported by your DBMS Account User Mame Password W Save Name Password Test Connection Version v Save Version ede DEFAULT Change cancel You should see your System Administrator to find out exactly what you should use as your server service database and account information The information used here is for instructional purposes only Click OK in the Spatial Database Connection dialog 5 You are brought back to the Select Geodatabase Feature Class to Add dialog and a connection to the serve
550. sed to derive slope In the Variables tab double click the variable called Slope from model The Variable Props dialog updates accordingly ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides These are the properties for the Slope from model variable The Slope from model variable uses a Graphic Model IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Variable Name Em zd _ Optional Variable Type Raster i Data Type Fiat i Raster Variable Options Output n2 PROMPT 1 i Layer Layer 1 Use cen Value Define Model Input Hades with Vanables Notice that the variable is again raster in nature so the Variable Types set to Raster In this case however the Graphic Model option of the Raster Variable Options has been selected The graphic model associated with this variable is named slope gmd In the Variable Props dialog click on the Edit Model button to view the graphic model A Spatial Modeler viewer opens which contains the model that defines the Slope from model variable 579 ui IMAGINE Expert Classifier V 580 lt Inetimorticialexportiarrayl docsidocsitourITEMP keislope gmd File Edit Model Text Process s wjn u e sje s 2 sis INPUT RASTER This is the model that the variable Slope from model uses to calculate the slope of any location To make the knowledge base transportable you do not want to define actual image names in the slope gmd model Instead the INPUT RASTER and the OUTPUT RA
551. select the Water Target Class by placing the carat in the Water row Select the Open Class Group by placing the carat in the Open row 515 Advanced Classification Wa Class Grouping Tool T nmi xj File Edit Colors Groups Targets Tools Help BL 2 O00 om s m Class iw C T Histogram Diversity Maiority Target CE O 0 tat Ta Em ES E Place the carats gt T here 4 Similarity 18 Conflict 155 HClasses 166 gt Tanet Classes 1 Value Calor Class Mame Groups 1 GNE water 2 2L Gee and then click Load to highlight the classes in the Working Groups CellArray Group Name sim Cont Classes UCont S Open o o 0 19 Maii of of 4 18 Ao E Fevrest a 7 31 9 Uben 1 1 1 id A Notice the Similarity and Conflict numbers that are displayed just under the Working Groups CellArray Clase w l3 C T Histegram Diversity Majoritu Target X O EE 00 0 Number of conflicts between the Working Group and the selected Class Group Number of similarities between the Working Group and the selected Class Group Number of selected classes in the Working Group CellArray Similarity 20 Conflict 13 HClasses 20 516 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Advanced Classification The Similarity statistics are calculated between the Working Groups and
552. selected as input to the next command In this case the Create and Insert Variables button can be used to identify and replace intermediary files with temporary file variables so that only the final output file is left on disk and not all of the intermediate steps Optionally you can select the Hun commands as they are recorded checkbox on the Record Commands for Automation panel This sets the preference for the current session without changing your general preferences 3 Inthe Preference Editor click the Image Files General category then click to deselect the Compute Pyramid Layers option You do not want pyramid layers to be generated for the temporary files Rather you can run the Image Command Tool as a Batch process to create pyramid layers for the output files only 4 Click User Save in the Preference Editor then click Close 5 Select Session Start Recording Batch Commands from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to start the Batch Wizard The Record Commands for Automation panel displays Note that the flashing record light located in the lower left corner of the Batch Wizard dialog has been activated 194 ERDAS IMAGINE Run First Command Tour Guides Batch commands display in this window This is the flashing record unit Batch Processing Use the Batch button in other IMAGINE dialogs to place commands in this list Use the Next gt button below to stop recording and proceed to the next step You may use the
553. sfanier imng fusridataftemp ing A state fusridatastemp img fusridataftempe img 233085 3807070 248417 pump E Run commands as they are recorded Close a EER Hext gt PHUSH Help ERDAS IMAGINE 196 Run Another Command Tour Guides Batch Processing You can also use Batch to create pyramid layers of your data Now you instruct the Image Command Tool to create pyramid layers for the output files only From the Tools menu of the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Image Command Tool In the Image File window of the Image Commands dialog select the file you generated in the last example iImage2 img image Commands No File a Select the image Image File img output from the last maez al Batch request w Change Raster Tyee contnueus y Compute Statistics ODE Compute Pyramid Layers Options Delete Pyramid Layers Ej Ej ad j Change Map Model Options H H Ej Select the Compute Pyramid layers option Delete Map Model Change Map Projection Cellos Delete Map Projection OK Batch Cancel Help Click the Compute Pyramid Layers checkbox then click the Options button next to Compute Pyramid Layers to open the Pyramid Layers Options dialog Notice the Kernel Size and that the External File option is not checked You want the output file to contain internal pyramid layers rather than having the pyramid layers stored in
554. signature i e the AOI in the Feature Space image Once the Feature Space signature is defined as a mask the pixels under the mask are identified in the image file and highlighted in the Viewer This allows you to view which pixels would be assigned to the Feature Space signature s class A mask can be generated from one or more Feature Space signatures If you do not have any signatures selected then the active signature which is next to the is used The image displayed in Viewer 1 must be the image from which the Feature Space image was created In the Signature Editor select Feature Masking Feature Space to Image The FS to Image Masking dialog opens 473 es Advanced Classification turned off disabled Click to create the mask 0 MEER T This checkbox should be x Indicate Overlap E 2 Inthe Signature Editor click in the Class row for Water to select that signature The mask is generated from this Feature Space signature 3 Disable the Indicate Overlap checkbox and click Apply in the FS to Image Masking dialog to generate the mask in Viewer 1 A mask is placed in the Viewer 4 Inthe FS to Image Masking dialog click Close 5 Deselect the Water feature View Signature Objects The Signature Objects dialog allows you to view graphs of signature statistics so that you can compare signatures The graphs display as sets of ellipses in a Feature Space image Each ellipse is based on
555. splays the number 1 This is the Cell that we manually selected In the Total Samples number box enter 15 and press Enter The New Samples number will update to 14 indicating the number of samples that the program needs to automatically identify Click OK on the Required Samples dialog to close it and automatically select 14 additional Cells NOTE Because the Automatic Selection process is random the automatically selected samples may differ from those in this tour Select File Save Selected As to save the selected Cells as a new shapefile The Save Sampling Grid As dialog is opened Navigate to the loudoun tm directory that contains the loudoun tm grid shp file Enter loudoun selected shp in the filename and click OK to save the shapefile Select File Close to dismiss the Sample Selection Tool and return to the Sampling Project Wizard A Progress meter displays as the Sample Selection Tool creates AOI bounding boxes for each of the selected Samples Note that the Project Manager has been updated to include the 15 samples we have selected 539 Frame Sampling Tools i W Sampling Project Manager E Ini xi File Process Help Ton we amp amp LP 0 Click here to expand a nda Row File Descriptor File Path and Name Date Loudoun TM H imotdTie pie Vet Nene Somes Rested Tie Sample 3 Sample 15 L Suatied Tie EAbu sanpingfoudoun stating J i EK
556. ss Inversion Tour Guides Image Interpreter Click here to access Mistogram Equalization the Brightness Inversion Histogram Match function TUA Close Help In this section you use both the Inverse and Reverse options of the Image Inversion function to enhance images Inverse emphasizes detail in the dark portions of an image Reverse simply reverses the DN values 1 Inthe Radiometric Enhance menu select Brightness Inversion The Brightness Inversion dialog opens Enter output Brightness Inversion file name here ree mg Hle immg Output File img ea ae Type Subset Definition From Inquire LY LAY zi i i p 00 E tRYv 52z 00 E Select this option to reduce file size Output Options r Reverse Inverse Click here fiut o Unsioned S b E Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit to see model J Ignore Zero in Stats in Model Maker Guini pUnmsigneg 9nd y Select option here 2 Inthe Brightness Inversion dialog under Input File enter loplakebedsig357 img 3 Under Output File enter inverse img in the directory of your choice 4 Under Output Options turn on the Stretch to Unsigned 8 bit checkbox by clicking on it 5 Under Output Options click on Inverse 253 Image Interpreter Reverse View Changes 254 Click OK in the Brightness Inversion dialog to start the process A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the fun
557. ss Return on your keyboard Double click on the value in Scale 1 to select it Type 50000 Press Return on your keyboard With your cursor inside the cursor box in the Viewer drag the cursor box to the area you want to display in the map composition When the cursor box is positioned to your satisfaction click OK in the Map Frame dialog to reference that portion of the image to the map composition The image area that you selected in the Viewer is now displayed in the map frame in the Map Composer viewer To enlarge the image in the Map Composer viewer drag on the corners of the Map Composer viewer to enlarge it and the right hold to select Fit Map To Window trom the Quick View menu ERDAS IMAGINE Edit the Map Frame Map Composer You are now finished with the Viewer so select File Close from the Viewer menu bar to close it Choose Your Path e Ifyou are satisfied with your map frame and the image area you have selected proceed to Add a Neatline and Tick Marks on page 78 e If you want to edit your map frame or change the image area you selected proceed to Edit the Map Frame The Map Composer is very flexible in allowing you to place a map frame in a composition based on scale image area etc Once you have placed a map frame in a composition you can move it change the size of it and change the image area within it If you want to change the image you are using you must delete the map frame and redraw
558. st lt argl gt arg Function PICK number argl1 an EITHER n amp memory IF n8 2one88 OR n memory OTHERWISE E dit th e Function here OK Clear Cancel Help In the Functions popup list select Conditional In the list of Functions select EITHER lt arg1 gt IF lt test gt OR lt arg2 gt OTHERWISE this should be the second item on the list In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt arg1 gt Under Available Inputs click on n6 memory In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt test gt Under Available Inputs click on n9 zone88 In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of lt arg2 gt Under Available Inputs click on n7_ memory Click OK in the Function Definition dialog Double click the final output Raster object The Raster dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Spatial Modeler File Name img The output ro gemm ma ee i i PHOTOG GI BOW file name is _ Prompt User for File at Run Time listed here Humber af Colum SPLEEN DEATH Mearest Melia y Ppcpgpina VAN E Delete If Exists Data Type Unsigned B hit iW wide C fis Fron bupubm Dox Bk A EE GME LI HRE E E Hle Type Continuous Wi si Wl BS LR YI BB Ignore nn E in Stats Calculation PreSGDPIninmSLE Decam ms nteger 0 y Choose AGH xw P
559. steps 2 through step 4 These areas are also agricultural fields ui 460 ERDAS IMAGINE Select Neighborhood Options Tour Guides 10 11 12 Advanced Classification After the AOI is created a bounding box surrounds the polygon indicating that it is currently selected In the Signature Editor click on the Create New Signature s from AOI icon h or select Edit Add to add this AOI as a signature In the Signature Editor click inside the Signature Name column for the signature you just added Change the name to Agricultural Field 2 then press Return on the keyboard In the Signature Editor hold in the Color column next to Agricultural Field 2 and select Cyan This option determines which pixels are considered contiguous i e similar values to the seed pixel or any accepted pixels Select AOI Seed Properties from the Viewer menu bar The Region Growing Properties dialog opens W Region Growing Properties Meighborhiood Geographic Constraints 300 00 u pixels Enter 10 here SpestialEueldeon Diane e 79 0 E Click here to create jpe Grow at Inquire Set Constraint ALI Options an AOI at the Redo Invert F Inquire Cursor Enter 300 here Click on the Neighborhood icon f in the Region Growing Properties dialog This option specifies that four pixels are to be searched Only those pixels above below to the left and to the right of the seed or any acc
560. stogram icon l The histogram for loplakebed img displays Bin Function Direct The presence of spikes indicates the need for speckle reduction 5 Select File New from the ImageInfo dialog menu bar to open another Imagelnfo dialog A second Imagelnfo dialog opens 607 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V 10 11 12 Y Click on the Open icon in the new ImageInfo dialog B In the Open File dialog select despeckle1 img from the directory in which you saved it and then click OK The information for despeckle1 img displays in the ImageInfo dialog In the ImageInfo dialog click the Histogram icon The histogram for despeckle1 img displays Bin Function Direct After one pass the spikes have been reduced Also note the separation of two distinct classes in the data Repeat steps 5 through 8 of Use Histograms to Evaluate Images to view the subsequent passes of speckle reduction performed despeckle2 img despeckle3 img When finished click Close in the Histogram viewers Select File Close from the ImageInfo dialogs Select File Clear in both Viewers Enhance Edges 608 In this exercise you create two images one that is processed from the original image with the Edge Enhancement function and one that is processed from the final result of the Speckle Suppression exercise The objective is to demonstrate the effectiveness of Speckle Suppression prior to Edge Enhancemen
561. t From the Analysis Functions select CONVOL VE raster kernel this should be the third item on the list In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of raster Under Available Inputs click on n1_germtm In the lower portion of the Function Definition dialog click in the middle of kernel Under Available Inputs click on n3 Low Pass Your function string should look like the following CONVOLVE n1 germtm n3 Low Pass Click OK in the Function Definition dialog 401 ui Spatial Modeler Add Raster Properties Add Raster Properties Add Vector Properties Double click the Raster object that is output from the Function on the left Pie MIsTEZI Yid IL Ed a PYRG User far Fie SL Him PUDE Quiput I Delete If Exists Baia UY Final S HSE ki pip Pu Continuous i d innere 5 8 E HE PREE Da uiai Click this checkbox E Temporary Raster Only Fiat i tHEDDODOI Layer tHEDDOPOGI ISO PREY Gf CORRER HELA E MEAT HY Nearest Menpibar i UUDCPSSHwE VAN wide C ffe fron barnes Dox VEO REEE E LI REEE ME Yi BSBOS E LR YI BB Area pi inieresh Declare mx Dr ChoDSe AH LL wr poige Doin seiur GEG font Recate Dale In the lower left corner of the dialog click the checkbox Temporary Raster Only Click OK in the Raster dialog Double click the Raster object that is output from the Function on the right In the lower left
562. t The Edge Enhancement functions in the IMAGINE Radar Interpreter module are similar to the Convolution and Neighborhood options in Image Interpreter NOTE You can use the Edge Enhancement functions on any type of image not just radar data From the Radar Interpreter menu select Edge Enhancement The Edge Enhancement dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Input File imm Coordinate Type Kernel Definition mecum 1i Select input and Output File img output files here A FFF Subset Definition From Inquire Box nE RE h E uve ao Finx sem F COE CHE CE uty ooo Jf ury gem E Output Options Data Type Select filter here 2 Inthe Edge Enhancement dialog under Input File enter loplakebed img 3 Under Output File enter edgeuf img in the directory of your choice 4 Under Output Options click on the Filter popup list and select Prewitt Gradient 5 Click OK in the Edge Enhancement dialog The Edge Enhancement dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 using despeckle3 img as the Input File and edgess img as the Output File View Results 1 In Viewer 1 select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog click on the file edgeuf img then click OK This is the edge filtered file derived from the unfiltered radar image file Tour
563. t when you try to display the output file in a Viewer Next you must select the kernel to use for the convolution A default kernel library containing some of the most common convolution filters is supplied with ERDAS IMAGINE This library is opened in the Kernel Selection part of this dialog From the scrolling list under Kernel click on 3x3 Edge Detect Click on the Edit button in the Kernel Selection box 247 i Image Interpreter Check the File ui 248 The 3 x 3 Edge Detect dialog opens Hle Edit m ajeje 7 e ca So 71 900 7100 C L3 Bn For this exercise you use the Kernel Editor to simply view the kernel used for the 3 x 3 Edge Detect filter However if desired you could make changes to the kernel at this time by editing the CellArray Select File Close from the 3 x 3 Edge Detect dialog Click OK in the Convolution dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function When the Job Status dialog shows that the process is 10096 complete click OK Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename click on lanier img Click OK to display the file in the Viewer Open a second Viewer window by clicking on the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel ERDAS IMAGINE Apply Crisp Tour Guides Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Im
564. t File TM 1 fft is automatically generated Make sure it is in a directory in which you have write permission The default is your default data directory set by Session Preferences Enter 1 1 in the Select Layers field Click OK in the Fourier Transform dialog to create the new file A Job Status dialog displays showing the progress of the function When the process 1s 100 percent complete click OK Start the Fourier Transform Editor 216 With the fft file created you are ready to begin using the Fourier Transform Editor In the Fourier Analysis menu select Fourier Transform Editor The Fourier Editor opens ERDAS IMAGINE Menu bar Tool bar FFT layer displayed here Fourier Transform Editor TEX WIPE YET EY TETTE TTEUTT UTE TUTETETUVTTUTUTETETETRTPTITEE ETE I EPIIT i Fourier Editor Editor na n Inl File Edit Mask 0 ajej w n e 7 2 Inthe Fourier Editor click the Open icon on the tool bar or select File Open from the menu bar 1 The Open FFT Layer dialog opens Enter FFT layer to open here Open FET Laver FFT Layer fft wal infor ras files Foned s TM 1 fft a INENEMM Layer Number fi E OK Cancel Help 3 Inthe Open FFT Layer dialog under FFT Layer enter the path and name of the fft layer you created in steps 4 through 5 on page 216 e g TM 1 ffft Tour Guides 217 Fourier Transform Edito
565. t GeoDatabase Feature Class to Add Mame w erdCities Add Show of type Feature classes Cancel 6 This connection will be mapped for you to the proxy file and you will be brought back to the Select Layer To Add dialog where it will be listed in a directory with any other mapped connections Tour Guides 121 ui Vector Querying and Editing Select Layer To Add EM E File Vector Options Look in E examples bd ergelib gnutimelib lib3ds 1 1 0 Cancel Mational mdb w arldCantainer w arldCities gdb Help C National mdb w arldCantainer w orldCities_0 gdb Ix Connect File name national mdb_worldcontainer_werldcities_0 gdb Files of type Arcis Geodatabase gdb Filename c program files imagine 8 5 examples national mdb vearldcontaimner worldc 7 Selectthe gdb file you want to view From this point on you can treat this like any other vector layer You can access it and edit it just like any other vector data You may also rename the file by right clicking on the file name and selecting rename Click OK in the dialog to display the information in a viewer Wi Viewer 1 national mdb_worldcontainer_worldcities O gdb File Utility View AGOI Vector Help SE D 0m t RE WX Q P n LI 9 a Hiis cti en H da 4 4 4 wl NE EUER ao r 9 P Pid d i ae te eg ZA amp DM MT F 4 og a 4 ge FRE Fi PM s9 ew IU Noe WR T Ba
566. t High Resolution 8 bit d LINEAR STRETCH n31 memory C1 Data Range AT Principal Componen B Qutput STACKLAYERS Select Process Generate Script The Generate Script dialog opens Click the Open icon in the Generate Script dialog and navigate to a directory where you have write permission 1 Name the file 8bit res merge mdl then click OK in the dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler Save the mdl file in a Sue Cotes pan Bhit res merge mul gl location where you have writer permission you can then edit the file Ra Remember where you saved the file You use it again on page 389 6 Click OK in the Generate Script dialog Edit the Model 1 Inthe Spatial Modeler menu click on Model Librarian 2 Navigate to the directly in which you saved 8bit res merge mdl and select it Model Librarian a Select the model re Library mdl from your writable pst res merema igg directory i a hit res merge mul datar Click Edit to make Library Functions changes to the model Run Model Batch Close Help 3 Click on the Edit button in the Model Librarian dialog The following SML script is displayed in the Editor Tour Guides 385 ui Spatial Modeler 386 Principal Components Resolution Merge Input Multispectral 8 bit Principal Components Replace PC1 with High Res Data Inverse PC Output Merged Image 8 bit
567. t button to open a list of recently accessed files 4 Select subset no snap img from the List of Recent Files 5 Click OK to dismiss the List of Recent Files 6 Click the Raster Options tab 242 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Image Interpreter Files l Permissions Raster Options Agom by o0 E Using Nearest Neighbor i Help Display as True Color K Layers to Colors mts oto nea a pereen p peue e p F Click here g ene S E View Extent Help to uncheck ay L ritt Frame L no Steten m play _ Data Scaling _ Background Transparent option Uncheck the Clear Display option so the new subset of the original image will appear superimposed on the original image Click OK The subset displays in the Viewer over the original image The darker pixels belong to the subset Note the original Inquire Box o The pixels appear to shift Actually the pixels are redrawn to match the exact coordinates of the Inquire Box Note how the corner of the Inquire box is centered in the Subset pixel 243 Image Interpreter Subsetting an Image With Snap to Raster ui 244 When a subset of an image is taken from an Inquire Box that is not snapped to the pixel grid of the original image the subset is drawn using the exact coordinates of the of the Inquire Box Because the subset pixel grid differs slightly from the original image s pixel grid the subset image appears shifted
568. t to the final Raster object as an output Click on the Selector icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click on the Lock icon in the Model Maker tool palette to turn it off Double click on the first Raster object Select ortho img from the examples directory and click OK Double click on the Function object Under Available Inputs click on n1_ortho 1 In the Calculator portion of the Function Definition dialog click on the key Under Available Inputs click on n1_ortho 2 Click on the OK button Double click on the output Raster object Navigate to a directory where you have write permission and enter veg index img for the output image name Click on the Delete If Exists you are going to run the model more than once to get it working properly Click on the OK button At this point your model should look similar to the following ERDAS IMAGINE Spatial Modeler l New Model File Edit Model Text Process s o wje x w e s gja n ortho Execute the Model 1 Select Process Run or click on the Execute the Model icon in the tool bar After your model appears to have run to completion you receive the following error C Divided by zera OK OK to All Next you attempt to avoid dividing by zero by setting the output pixel value to zero any place there would be a division by zero 2 Click OK to dismiss the Error dialog 3 Click OK to dismiss the Modeler status dialog Change
569. talog Image dialog 61 CellArray 37 101 add columns 112 column adjust size 40 Column Options menu 40 41 GCP Tool 143 report 43 Row Selection menu 40 101 103 345 select columns 40 select rows 40 using criteria 42 selection criteria 42 statistics 41 Change Colors 498 Change Colors dialog 498 Chart Options dialog 47 Chip extraction 17 Chip Extraction Viewer 139 270 275 Choose AOI dialog 295 299 Circular Mask dialog 226 Class color change 36 Class name edit 366 Classification 127 130 455 486 627 decision rule 479 feature space 480 Mahalanobis distance 480 649 Index 650 maximum likelihood 480 minimum distance 480 parallelepiped 480 distance file 480 output file 480 overlay 130 486 supervised 455 unsupervised 127 455 483 Classification icon 559 Classification menu 457 484 501 522 560 Classification tools 375 Classified Image dialog 497 Classifier icon 457 484 491 501 522 Clean 643 Clean Vector Layer dialog 645 Coefficient of variation 604 605 calculating 603 color balancing mosaic 312 Color Chooser dialog 37 39 365 Color printer 90 Colorwheel see Color Selector dialog Column Attributes dialog 112 Column icon 40 Column Properties dialog 40 131 365 488 Composer icon 70 90 92 Compositions dialog 90 93 Conditions copy 568 Constant value 35 Contingency matrix 472 Contingency Matrix dialog 472 Contrast 27 adjust 26 46 47 49 50 51 shift bias 31 Contrast matching 308 Con
570. tch command files These files hold the variable definitions and issue the ERDAS IMAGINE commands to perform the step or steps required to complete a job e batch job bls These files contain lists of input files e batch job id This file contains a job number assigned by the system This file is deleted automatically to indicate completion of the job e batch job Ick This is an empty file that is created when the job actually starts running This indicates the job is ACTIVE When the job is done it is deleted e batch job log This file contains the results of the Batch job ERDAS IMAGINE 208 Batch Processing UNIX Version These are UNIX versions of Batch job files Tour Guides batch job bcf These are ERDAS IMAGINE Batch command files These files hold the variable definitions and issue the ERDAS IMAGINE commands to perform the step or steps required to complete a job batch job bls These files contain lists of input files batch job id This file contains a job number assigned by the system This file is deleted automatically to indicate completion of the job batch job job This is a UNIX shell script This file sets up the environment for the ERDAS IMAGINE applications and runs batchprocess which runs the commands found in the batch job bcf file batch job lck This is an empty file that is created when the job actually starts running This indicates the job is ACTIVE When the job is done
571. te Editor right hold on the word Opacity at the top of the Opacity column and select Formula from the Column Options menu The Formula dialog opens Columns Functions rau pi mod lt a gt lt h gt abs lt a gt int a even a n dd a ah a_l Formula Click here to apply a 0 pde ss close Click here to enter a 0 value to the Opacity column this dialog in the Formula 3 Inthe Formula dialog click 0 in the number pad A Ois placed in the Formula field 132 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Classification In the Formula dialog click Apply to change all of the values in the Opacity column to 0 and then click Close In the Raster Attribute Editor click and hold on the color patch under Color for Class 1 in the CellArray and change the color to Yellow This provides better visibility in the Viewer Verify the Opacity for Class 1 in the CellArray is set to f This class is shown in the Viewer In the Viewer menu bar select Utility Flicker to analyze which pixels are assigned to this class The Viewer Flicker dialog opens Turn on the Auto Mode in the Viewer Flicker dialog by clicking on the checkbox The flashing black pixels in the germtm img file are the pixels of this class These areas are water In the Raster Attribute Editor click inside the Class_Names column for Class 1 You may need to double click in the colu
572. techniques are available Principal Component IHS and Multiplicative these are similar to those in the Wallis Adaptive Filter option ul 614 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Principal Component In using the Principal Component techniques you have the option to modify the gray scale image in any of the following ways e Remap tescales the gray scale image to the range of PC 1 e Hist Match matches the histogram of the gray scale image to PC 1 e Multiply tescales the gray scale image into the 0 1 range and then multiplies the gray scale by PC 1 e None replaces PC 1 with the input gray scale image IHS Using the HS family two options exist e Intensity trescales the gray scale image to the numerical range of the intensity I and then substitutes it for I e Saturation trescales the gray scale image to the numerical range of saturation S and then substitutes it for S Multiplicative The Multiplicative technique remaps the gray scale image to a 0 1 range Each band is then sequentially multiplied by the remapped gray scale image If it is not already open open the Image Enhancement menu by selecting Image Enhancement from the Radar Interpreter menu In the mage Enhancement menu select Sensor Merge The Sensor Merge dialog opens 615 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter V Click on this popup list to select the radar image layer Select IHS for the method Select Nea
573. ted image subset matches the area bounded by the inquire box 4 Click OK in the Import Options dialog 5 Click OK in the Import SPOT dialog A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the import process Depending on your eml Preferences when the Job Status bar shows 100 indicating that the job is 100 done you must either click OK to close the dialog or the dialog closes automatically 6 Opena Viewer window and display the output file 164 ERDAS IMAGINE Export LAN Data Choose Export Options Tour Guides Import Export Viewer 2 SPOT_test img CSPOT _Band_3 CSPOT_Band_2 a Uy Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help EEISEIPEEESEBEBRISE EE LE See Chapter 3 Raster and Vector Data Sources of the ERDAS Field Guide for more information on importing data In this section you export one of the image example files to an ERDAS Version 7 x LAN file ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and the Import Export dialog should be open In the Import Export dialog click on Export Click on the Type popup list to see a list of available exporters Click to select LAN Erdas 7 x from the Type popup list Confirm that the Media lists File Enter lanier img under Input File In the Import Export dialog ERDAS IMAGINE automatically enters lanier lan as the output file You may change this name if you want 165 Import Export Import Export Type LAN Erda
574. ter state Input Templ E HOME etcimodelsiinverse pmdl meter state Templ Output tput pyramid 2x2 0 meter imagecommand Tl ot E Cose lt Back Next gt Sess He Modify Variables This procedure creates an intermediate file that is used to pass the output of the first process to the input of the second There is no need to keep this file and use disk space Also you might want the output file name to be a little more meaningful than image2 The following steps tell you how to modify variables 1 Click the Variables tab to gain access to the variable editing tools The Input variable is defined by you 198 Use the Insert and Replace buttons on the Commands tab to place variables at the current cursor position in commands Variables are defined on the Variables tab Click Next gt to select files once variables are defined Commands Variables Type User i J Priis heime Preceding Delete Sitor P DOPSSIS Hew Delete huh Close Back Hext gt PHUSH Help ERDAS IMAGINE Batch Processing The Input variable is of type User This means that you provide the names of the input files This is accomplished in subsequent steps using the Select Files to Process panel 2 Select the Temp7 variable This represents the intermediate files that are not needed after processing The Delete Before Processing checkbox is automatically selected to remove th
575. ter radar glacier img as the Input File 3 Type in despeckle4 img in the directory of your choice as the Output File 4 Select Gamma MAP from the Filter popup list 5 Click OK in the Radar Speckle Suppression dialog to filter the image The Radar Speckle Suppression dialog closes and a Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 6 Click OK in the Job Status dialog when the process is complete 7 Select Image Enhancement from the Radar Interpreter menu The Image Enhancement menu opens Click Wallis mage Enhancement Adaptive Filter EG gt Wallis Adaptive Filter Luminance Modification sensor Merge Close Help 612 ERDAS IMAGINE 10 11 12 13 14 15 View Results Tour Guides IMAGINE Radar Interpreter Click on Wallis Adaptive Filter in the Image Enhancement menu The Wallis Adaptive Filter dialog opens Wallis Adaptive Filter n Enter the Enter the Input File img Output File img name of the name of the input file here Co emanceamg A is a a A Coordinate Type Subset Definition From Inquire Box Data Type Moving Window Input Unsigned 8 bit Use odd number only uini unsigned 8 i iv Window Size Stretch to Unsigned amp Bit Set window size here OpOoHS Bandwise Ignore Zero in Stats Click this check box to activate e f Eef Es fe E muttiptier 3 00 4E t
576. ter while keeping an eye on the lookup table values in the blue color gun as reported in the Inquire Cursor dialog This gives you an idea of the range of data file values in the water You can stretch this range to bring out more detail in the water In the Contrast Tool dialog click Blue under Select Color Under Range Specifications set the Low range From 34 To 55 and press Return on your keyboard Drag the Brightness slider bar the top slider bar to 50 Click Apply in the Contrast Tool dialog The water now has more contrast and shows more detail If your image is at a magnification of 1 this new detail may be difficult to see You can zoom in to a magnification of 2 using the Quick View menu in the Viewer In the Contrast Tool dialog click Reset and then Apply to return the image to the original lookup table values Click Close in the Contrast Tool dialog Click Close in the Inquire Cursor dialog In the Viewer menu bar select Raster Contrast Breakpoints The Breakpoint Editor opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Viewer Breakpoint Editor For lanier img Allows you to set histogram display 8 R options Ir Indicate which histograms to view Click to apply changes to the red histogram only Click to apply changes made to all histograms Enlarge the Histogram Source 4 AOI Whole Image J Auto Apply histograms by dragging on any corner 2 Click on the popup list at the top
577. terest for the model Ir it 4 I 4 IE I 4 it 4 is it it 4 Is IE it a SET AOI NONE 4 declarations 3 Integer RASTER n1 slope RC Org FILE OLD NEARE Integer RASTER n2 floodplain FILE OLD NEAREST Integer RASTER n3 landcover RC Org FILE OLD N Integer RASTER n4 sensitivity FILE DELETE IF Integer RASTER n spots FILE OLD NEAREST NEIG Integer RASTER n7 spot summary FILE DELETE IF Integer RASTER n12 sensitivity spot FILE DELE FLOAT MATRIX n8 Summary INTEGER SCALAR n11 Integer 3t JE 3 Annotation in scripts is located at the top of the file in the order in which it was entered If you want the annotation to be in the order of processing annotate your graphical model from top to bottom Select File Close from the Text Editor menu bar Click Close in the Model Librarian dialog and the Spatial Modeler menu Print the Model Tour Guides You can output graphical models as ERDAS IMAGINE annotation files ovr extension and as encapsulated PostScript files eps extension You can also output directly to a PostScript printer You must have a graphical model open In the Model Maker viewer menu bar select File Page Setup The Page Setup dialog opens Spatial Modeler Indicate margins around the outside ds oid edges of each page here Ton 2 Left ar Enter printer E Em Em paper size here i Bottom o 50 f Right o 50 f Ent
578. tes CellArray now has the same ZONING column and attributes as the original Attributes CellArray Select File Close from the menu bar of Viewer 2 When asked if you would like to save changes click Yes The Attributes dialog automatically closes 113 Vector Querying and Editing Create a Simple Shapefile Layer 114 10 11 12 Click the Viewer icon in the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel A new Viewer opens In the new Viewer Viewer 2 select File Open Raster Layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens In the Select Layer To Add dialog select IMAGINE Image from the File Type popup list Under Filename click on the file germtm img Click on the Raster Options tab at the top of the dialog and confirm that the Fit to Frame option is enabled Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file germtm img displays in the Viewer With your cursor in the Viewer right hold Quick View Zoom Rotate and Magnify Area A white rotation box displays in the Viewer and a Rotate Magnify Instructions box also displays Drag the white rotation box so that it 1s positioned over the same area that was covered by the zone88 vector coverage Double click within the rotation box to magnify that area The Rotate Magnify Instructions box dismisses and the raster layer is magnified in the Viewer Ly For other methods of zooming into an area of interest see Animated Zoom Box Zoom and Real time Zoom starting
579. that can make the hypothesis true or false Select Edit New Hypothesis once again to set up the next class Commercial Services Enter the class Name and Specify Red as the color for the class Click Apply in the Hypo Props dialog to add the class Click Close on the Hypo Props dialog 561 IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Enter Rules for the Hypothesis 562 Hypotheses Rules Variables Residential Commercial Services Knowledge Engineer EIE lle Edit Evaluate mr Tk E in the edit window in gjela lt gt l N 9 v the overview and in ee Hl the component list Hop New classes display 7 Ue Ke tee YELLE jo x a f l Select the Create Rule Graphic Tool icon from the Knowledge Engineer dialog icon bar E 2 Move the cursor which changes to the shape of a rule and click on the green hypothesis rectangle for Residential A yellow rule rectangle called New Rule is attached to the hypothesis rectangle Residential by a line that is mirrored in the knowledge tree overview ERDAS IMAGINE Enter Variables for the Rule Tour Guides IMAGINE Expert Classifier V Hle Edit Evaluate siiel a Ir s s sf A new rule is added to the Residential class Hypotheses Rules Variables 3 Double click the yellow New Rule rectangle to open the Rule Props Rule Properties dialog fule Props untitled ekb
580. the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory You should copy the germtm img file to a different directory so that you can have write permission to this file Ly For more detailed information on Classification techniques please see Advanced Classification on page 455 Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 20 minutes Use This section shows you how to create a thematic raster layer by letting the software identify Unsupervised statistical patterns in the data without using any ground truth data Classification ISODATA Classifier ERDAS IMAGINE uses the ISODATA algorithm to perform an unsupervised classification The ISODATA clustering method uses the minimum spectral distance formula to form clusters It begins with either arbitrary cluster means or means of an existing signature set Each time the clustering repeats the means of these clusters are shifted The new cluster means are used for the next iteration The ISODATA utility repeats the clustering of the image until either a maximum number of iterations has been performed or a maximum percentage of unchanged pixel assignments has been reached between two iterations Performing an unsupervised classification is simpler than a supervised classification because the signatures are automatically generated by the ISODATA algorithm In this example you generate a thematic raster layer using the ISODATA algorithm Tour Guides 127 Classification You must
581. the Add Images for Mosaic dialog Set Exclude Areas 1 Click the Image Matching icon in the Mosaic Tool viewer E The Matching Options dialog opens Tour Guides 315 ui Mosaic ij Matching Options Set Exclude Areas Color Balancing Set Matching Method C No Matching C For All Images Overlap Areas Histogram Type f Band by Band f Intensity AGE Use external reference External reference OF Help 2 Select Color Balancing and under Matching Method choose For All Images 3 Click on Set Exclude Areas at the top of the Matching Options dialog The Set Exclude Areas dialog opens Set Exclude Areas zw 4 MIA e 8 G eM Amy aee no The overview shows the full extent of the image and the detail view allows you to zoom in on specific areas to create AOIs to be excluded from the Color Balancing process Use the link cursor to isolate AOIs i 316 ERDAS IMAGINE 4 Mosaic Color Balancing Tour Guides Mosaic Image 2 2 img will be the first image displayed in the viewers Left hold your mouse and drag the link cursor to the dark body of water in the upper left of the center of the image In the Detail View the area is magnified so you can create specific AOIs to exclude from the Color Balancing process Click the Create Polygon AOI icon x Your cursor becomes a cross hair when inside a view Use the Detail View to create polygons around the d
582. the Fourier Editor drag toward the right until the u coordinate in the status bar reads 20 Release the mouse button The image is filtered as soon as the mouse is released The combination of filters is shown in the following example Fourier Editor TM 1 fft Layer 7 File Edit Mask z o w e x nfe 7 2 Select File Save As from the menu bar The Save Layer As dialog opens In the Save Layer As dialog enter a new name for the fft layer such as TM1highpass fft Be sure to use a directory in which you have write permission Click OK to save the layer Click the Run icon on the tool bar or select File Inverse Transform from the menu bar to create an inverse Fourier layer for display In the Inverse Fourier Transform dialog enter a name for the new img layer in the directory of your choice such as TM1highpass img ERDAS IMAGINE Fourier Transform Editor 11 Click OK A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function 12 When the Job Status dialog indicates that the new img layer is created click OK and then display the layer in a Viewer Your new image should look similar to the following example E Viewers TMithighpass img Layer 1 7 ae EF i HF Bi gt sde LEES Yan Em 6 R gt M gt on bad 0 yi Apply a Wedge Mask In the next exercise you remove the nearly vertical radial line in the image thereby removing th
583. the Function Definition dialog click on the Functions popup list and select Conditional In the list under Functions click on EITHER The EITHER statement and prototype arguments display in the function definition window Click in the first prototype arg then click n4 sensitivity under Available Inputs to automatically replace the prototype with an argument Click in the prototype test then click n4 sensitivity The function definition now reads EITHER n4 sensitivity IF n4 sensitivity OR arg OTHERWISE Click on the Functions popup list and select Analysis Click the remaining prototype arg2 and then scroll down the list under Functions and click on the first STRETCH function to replace lt arg2 gt The STRETCH function and its prototype arguments are inserted into the function definition ERDAS IMAGINE 10 11 12 13 Define Output Raster Layer Tour Guides Spatial Modeler function Definition EITHER n4 sensitivity iF Available Inputs Functions Analysis I n4 sensitivity n7 spot summary CLUMP layer 4 4 n11 Integer CLUMP layer amp COHVOLVE raster kem CORRELATION covariance CORRELATION raster CORRELATION raster IC COVARIANCE raster COVARIANCE raster IGH DELROWS lt dsctable gt sie e a EITHER n4_sensitivity IF n4_sensitivity OR STRETCH n spot summary 2 U A 90
584. the GLOBAL MAX function as a Scalar so you can see the type of error generated You must have ERDAS IMAGINE running Click the Modeler icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel ERDAS IMAGINE Create the Model Tour Guides Spatial Modeler Modeler The Spatial Modeler menu opens Select Model Maker Model Maker Model Librarian Close Help Click Model Maker on the Spatial Modeler menu A blank Spatial Modeler viewer opens along with the Model Maker tool palette Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 2 Click to position the Raster object in the upper left corner of the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click to position the Function object below and to the right of the Raster object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Scalar icon in the Model Maker tool palette o Click to position the Scalar object below and to the right of the Function object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Function icon in the Model Maker tool palette Click to position the Function object to the left of the Scalar object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Raster icon in the Model Maker tool palette 429 Spatial Modeler 430 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Click to position the Raster object below the Scalar object in the Model Maker viewer Click on the Connection ico
585. the Next button to open the Select Files to Process panel The original input file is listed in the Input column Click the Add Files button The Select Batch Files dialog opens Select Inaspect img from the Select Batch Files dialog Click the Multiple File Selection tab and click the Use the following Selection Pattern checkbox Edit the Selection Pattern field to insert n before the asterisk It should look like this IMAGINE HOME examples ln img Where IMAGINE HOME represents the ERDAS IMAGINE installation directory ERDAS IMAGINE Batch Processing Files l Permissions Multiple File Selection You can use this panel to select multiple files to be added to the selection of files tn process Clicking on the checkbox below will enable the Selection Pattern which is used to enter a wild card pattern that describes the files to be selected The pattern may contain and tn match any characters When the pattem is set press OK to continue The OK button will not be enabled until a file has been selected Insert In in the Selection Mess Pattern window to select Mf Use the following Selection Patten all files in the directory Selection Pattern starting with the letters In alpro 4 Click the OK button on the Select Batch Files dialog The input files are displayed under the Input column Select and delete any duplicate or unwanted files by clicking in the numbered column next to the file name and
586. the Styles dialog hold on the popup list next to Line Style and select Other The Line Style Chooser dialog opens Line Style Chooser standard Custom Menu Wi Join Rounded Change the Solid black line width Cap Rounded iz here gt 22 Dashed White on Black Black With Arrow Ends Hone ii Black Railroad W Auto Apply changes 4 Inthe Line Style Chooser dialog next to Width enter 1 00 to change the width in points 5 Click Apply and then Close in the Line Style Chooser dialog The group redraws with the new line width 6 Inthe Styles dialog hold on the popup list next to Text Style and select Other The Text Style Chooser dialog opens Tour Guides 81 Map Composer Make Scale Bars 10 Text Style Chooser Verify that the text size is 10 points aBbC Black Galaxy 4 Units paper Ales aBbC Black Galaxy Bold Black Galaxy Outlined ia5bC Black Galaxy Italic aBbC Black Galaxy Shadow aBbC White Galaxy Outlined aBbC Black Baskerville E Auto Apply changes In the Text Style Chooser dialog verify that the Size is 10 00 Click Apply and then Close in the Text Style Chooser dialog Deselect this annotation group by clicking anywhere in the map composition window outside of the selection box Click Close in the Styles dialog A scale bar indicates the scale of the image on the map You can create one scale bar or several
587. the Surface Profile viewer select Edit Overlay True Color The Overlay TrueColor on Surface dialog opens Overlay File immg hyperspectral img wl hardcopy data img Click to select A hyperspectral ime j intensity img j me We landcover img i Change the lanier img RGB band lanier_home img j lanier home 1 img e i combinations lanier home _ img ere LL P examples OK Cancel Help In the Overlay TrueColor on Surface dialog select hyperspectral img under Overlay File Under Band Combination enter 55 for Red 34 for Green and 2 for Blue Click OK in the Overlay TrueColor on Surface dialog When you are finished analyzing the data select File Close from the Spatial Profile viewer menu bar Ly For more information on Hyperspectral Image Processing or the Hyperspectral Profile Tools see Chapter 5 Enhancement in the ERDAS Field Guide Image Drape It is possible to access the Image Drape utility either through the Tools menu in the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar or through the Viewer Here you access the Image Drape utility via the Viewer ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and a Viewer should be open Click the Open icon in the Viewer tool bar 5 The Select Layer To Add dialog opens ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Viewer In the Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select the file eldodem img Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog The file
588. the dialog are automatically updated The Rotate number reports the angle of the rotation ramp with 180 being a straight horizontal line and 90 being a straight vertical line The Shift number reports the pixel value at the center of the lookup table graph ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer Raster Editor Prepare UNIX Prepare PC Open the Image Tour Guides The Raster Editor enables you to edit portions of the displayed image using various tools in the Viewer Raster menu When a specific raster editing tool is in use that tool locks the Viewer therefore work with one tool must be completed before opening another one All of the dialogs that accompany the raster editing tools contain a preview window which enables you to view the changes you make to the Viewer image before you click Apply You must have a writable file displayed to use this function Follow the steps below to create a writable file to work with In a command window copy Indem img to testdem img by typing the following cp IMAGINE HOME examples Indem img your directory path gt testdem img Press Return on your keyboard Change read write permissions by typing the following in the command window chmod 644 testdem img Press Return on your keyboard and close the command window Open the Explorer Copy Indem img from the IMAGINE HOME examples directory to the directory of your choice Right click and select Rename to rename the file testdem img Rig
589. the interior orientation parameters have been solved An error of less than 7 0000 is acceptable An error of greater than 1 0000 indicates that the points were inaccurately measured or poorly identified In the Camera Model Properties dialog under Viewer Fiducial Locator click the Toggle icon Oo The Chip Extraction Viewer the second Viewer closes Click on the Orientation tab in the Camera Model Properties dialog The Orientation options display General Fiducials Orientation Projection Rotation Angle _ Unknown i xnens 5 909 E Enter new parameters Unknown i Phi DOO Unknown i Rap o 5 988 Perspective Center Position Unknown gt 8 86 E Unknown x 8 086 S unknown y es S status Model has no solution If you have known parameters for the Rotation Angle and Perspective Center Position derived from another triangulation package or if you have estimated values you can enter them in the Orientation tab Select the appropriate settings Unknown Estimate or Fixed If no changes are being made to the Orientation you do not need to click Apply therefore it is deactivated NOTE If Account for Earth s curvature is selected under the General tab then the Orientation options are disabled see step 4 on page 269 Click on the Projection tab in the Camera Model Properties dialog 273 ul Orthorectification The Projection options display 2 Inthe Projection opti
590. the map frame Apy Reset Up Close Help In the Arrange Layers dialog move your pointer to the box titled MapFrame modeler output img and right hold to select Delete Layer from the Frame Options popup list In the Arrange Layers dialog click Apply to delete the map frame Click Close in the Arrange Layers dialog You are now ready to redraw the map frame Return to Draw the Map Frame on page 72 Add a Neatline and Tick Marks Now add a neatline and labeled tick marks around the image in the map composition Neatlines and Tick Marks e A neatline is a rectangular border around a map frame e Tick marks are small lines along the edge of the map frame or neatline that indicate regular intervals of distance Tick marks are usually labeled in meters feet or other units The Map Composer allows you to generate a neatline and labeled tick marks at the same time A set of these elements for a map frame is actually a group of line and text elements that is automatically generated to your specifications You can also generate grid lines in the same step but grid lines are not included in this map You must have a Map Composer viewer open containing a map frame referenced to a georeferenced image in order to generate georeferenced tick marks The Annotation tool palette must also be open If you have not already done so right hold Fit Map To Window in the Map Composer viewer so that you can see the entire map compositi
591. the mean and standard deviation of one signature A graph can be generated for one or more signatures If you do not have any signatures selected then the active signature which is next to the gt is used This utility also allows you to show the mean for the signature for the two bands a parallelepiped and a label 1 Inthe Signature Editor menu bar select Feature Objects The Signature Objects dialog opens 474 Mi Signature Objects X Select Feature Space Viewers All Feature Space Viewers 2 Select Enter 2 here v Plot Elipses Gtd D 400 Enter 4 here Plot Rectangles Flot Means Label Save As Annotation Lauer Click here to start the process ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Advanced Classification In the Signature Editor select the signatures for Agricultural Field_1 and Forest 1 by clicking in the Class row for Agricultural Field 1 and Shift clicking in the Class row for Forest 1 In the Signature Objects dialog confirm that the Viewer number field is set for 2 Set the Std Dev number field to 4 Enable the Label checkbox by clicking on it Click OK in the Signature Objects dialog The ellipses for the Agricultural Field 1 and Forest 1 signatures are displayed in the Feature Space viewer File Utility View AOIL Annotation Raster Help Compare Ellipses By comparing the ellipses for different signatures for a one
592. the selected Class Group These are the same so we would expect there to be the same number of Similarities and Classes Selected and this 1s the case C Click the Toggle Similarity Conflict button s to highlight the other Target Classes that have classes in common with the Working Group which is exactly the same as the Open Class Group mossesssesessau a ESEESE Gave s New Group pM cum Sim Cont Classes LI Conf Class Groups Load Group Mame Aow aM a o 1 0 The Target Classes and Class Groups that share classes Cu Mete Je highligh EOE pon T heL Coe Class Mame Groups JEE Forest T dije Ub u Select the Agriculture Target Class by placing the caret in the Agriculture row NOTE The contents of the Working Group CellArray do not change when you change the selected Target Class but the contents of the Similarity and Conflict statistics have reversed To identify the classes that these two Target Classes have in common click the intersection ul boolean a button For more information on Boolean operators see Definitions of Boolean Operators on page 511 This loads the intersection of the classes included in the Working Group Water Open and the selected Class Group Agriculture Majority In the Viewer zoom in on the classes that are currently selected These classes are located in the Lakes we collected with the AOI Tool
593. thematic layer that was generated from a supervised classification ERDAS IMAGINE should be running and you should have a Viewer open ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification 1 Select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu bar or click the Open icon we in the tool bar to display the germtm img continuous raster layer The Select Layer To Add dialog opens Click on this file tab US ray er to see the raster Fite BPR aster Options Multiple options Look in examples ges cuprite hyperien img flevolandradar img Inaspect img Ok dmtm imq d flevalandradarregionb imq Ae Inclump imq eldoatm imq d flevolandradarsigS31525 img d Inder img Cancel id eldodem img A flevalandradarsk ew img d Inhydro img Help flare1 imq d flpad tm147 radar imq d Inlakes img d floodplain ing e Inlandc img J germtrm img Ae Input img e hyperspectral imq e Inslope img Click here to select germtm img Recent E b landcover img A Ihzoils img Goto d lanier img A loplakebed it passen xj File name germtm img di ME TRA Files of type IMAGINE Image imdq or truecolor 1024 Rows x 1024 Columns 6 Bandis i ad TX 2 Inthe Select Layer To Add dialog under Filename select germtm img 3 Click the Raster Options tab at the top of the Select Layer To Add dialog 4 Set Layers to Colors at 4 5 and 3 respectively 5 Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog to display the i
594. then clicking the Delete Files icon This list of input files may be saved for future use See Additional Information on page 207 for details on how to save lists of input files Set Start Time 1 Click the Next button to open the Select When to Process Commands panel Click the Start Processing Later At checkbox Use the default time of the next available minute 2 Click the Finish button to begin processing The Scheduled Batch Job List dialog opens displaying all current Batch jobs Scheduled Batch Job List fhomeikswansoniimagine840ibatch a Row Job Name we Status StartTime Start Date User The Status of the iimage Commands WAITING 0944 09 Nov 1883 kswanso nome 3 Batch job is still WAITING LT Ll paini amp editv LBS Close Help When the job begins the Status changes from WAITING to ACTIVE When the job has finished the Status changes from ACTIVE to DONE Tour Guides 201 Batch Processing 3 Work with Variables Create a New Variable Prepare 1 202 When the job is done the log file can be viewed by first selecting the job and then clicking the Log button in the Scheduled Batch Job List dialog The Scheduled Batch Job List dialog may be opened any time by selecting Session View Off line Batch Queue from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar When the Batch jobs are finished indicated by DONE in the Status column click Close in the Scheduled Batch Jo
595. tial Logic to the Knowledge Base 0 cc cee teens 585 Check Buildings Hypothesis 0 0 ccc ee eee eee eee eens 587 Identify Choke Points 54s e ur dae denm hecha Re Oe yy we Ns oe bad RACE RR C a 588 Hun the Expert Classification 2 52522 9 3 1 27 22 8 33 ao tesi sk ce dece te d P c diat alc eran datei Rd 591 Evaluate River Areas llle ee hh hh hh 593 Use Pathway Feedback leeren 594 Section IV IMAGINE Radar Interpreter r rrr hnnr 597 Chapter 20 IMAGINE Radar Interpreter MV lrrrrrrrrhrh n 599 Hodge P rrTT 599 Suppress Speckle NoiSe 2 03663 xau meh muy 504458 See em nsa wd bowen ee dx dd E d eA 599 Calculate Coefficient of Variation 0 0 ce hrs 603 Run Speckle Suppression Function 0 0 0 ee rn 604 Use Histograms to Evaluate Images 00 eee eee eens 606 ENHANCE EJOS 646456454 Ses Be eee es ek Eu ee Rua GG EE ee oe eS ORC a 608 PANANCe Ma 22s se ree SERB PEE AAS EE oS REE EEE Oe hae ee eS 611 Wallis Adaptive Filter 0 RR IRRRRRRR RR RA 6r arn 612 PID DIV Sensor METOE M sein ee at ee eee are Gonads Gowen ee db eee omen eee eee Gee eee 614 Apply Texture Analysis 0 0 ccc ee RR teen teen nena 618 AGIOS BHOGRINGSS cocueseaseeacedssacednys Bobs Se qr ee eee 79 E RC eos ween 621 AGUST Slant Hallo a ccgceh ade cee oo ee eae E acd b eR Bee ee oia eee go adi bcd 622 Section V IMAGINE
596. tic Click OK in the Raster dialog The Raster dialog closes and n12 sensitivity spotis written under the Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer Your final model should look like the following example usr datalteur model gmd Hle Edit Model Text Process lmj olaja lees 4 sis n1 slope RC n2 floodplain n3 landcover RC nB spot CONDITIONAL pu n4 sensitivity n8 Summary CONVOLVE n spot summary EB EITHER n4 sensitivity IF n11 Integer n12 sensitivity spot ERDAS IMAGINE Save and Run the Model Display New Layer Tour Guides Spatial Modeler In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Save icon or select File Save from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to save the model wl Run the Model You can now run the entire model In the Model Maker viewer tool bar click the Run icon or select Process Run from the Model Maker viewer menu bar to run the model El While the model runs a Job Status dialog opens reporting the status of the model When the model is finished running click OK in the Job Status dialog Once your model has run the new output file is created You can display this file in a Viewer and modify the class colors and class names of the overlaid sensitivity analysis Prepare You must have run the model and you must have a Viewer open In the Viewer tool bar click the Open icon or select File Open Raster Layer from the Viewer menu ba
597. tic Raster Layer 0 0 ccc ee eee ass 484 Evaluate ClassiiCallOTs ss uuu ure c ee Ede PO EHE url OES 12 c SER ere itas ed 486 Create Classification Overlay llle ras 486 Analyze Individual Classes 0 0 0 ccc ee ee ee eee eens 489 BENI C nFrrECTPPE 491 Use Accuracy Assessment 2e csse seem gegeben REOR Rx cm Re RURUROK bem Res e Owe koe gaiw od nc dex ee Rcs 496 Using The Grouping TOOL i52 dp hRAUE REG RE iriden ritea eked ia 500 Setting Up a Class Grouping Project llllllllllee ar 500 Collecting Class Groups xa sce exa Ex RR Ghae eee ex Ime ORC RR xL GhER eke eed ee bee he ee 504 Using the Ancillary Data Tool E 512 Coloring the Thematic Table 20 nnana aaa m rar 518 Chapter 18 Frame Sampling Tools creer ehh hn hn nnnm 521 MOGU ON Genoa cot KIPPPrETRDPT 521 Remote Sensing and Frame Sampling 0 0 cc ee eee eee eens 521 Frame Samping TOOS ss bdo oa ob aiias ean kpaa inari Bw wt Mere b Saves hb began od ad eine Ge 521 Setting Up the Sampling Project cere es 522 Create a New Sampling Project annaa naaa aa rr 522 ROO Eevel FUHCHOIS u xem s summ RR RR ed RU GLEVEd SY REA E dex dw x d ime E code 524 Tle L vel FUDCHOllS s sca dpa 908 xdi ROW 8 33 un E CR EO died a V di Vp ER E b tae acest ss 528 Selecting the Samples l ee hrs 536 Sample Level FUNCHONS ou suum
598. trast stretch linear 26 piecewise linear 27 Contrast Tool piecewise dialog 27 Contrast Tool dialog 26 Convolution dialog 246 Convolution kernel 352 define 354 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Index summary 354 Copy icon 357 Copy rules and conditions 568 Copy Vector Layer dialog 96 629 Create Feature Space Maps dialog 464 Create Frame Instructions dialog 73 Create GCP tool 143 Create New Signature icon 460 Create New Table dialog 632 Create Rule Graphic icon 562 Create Sensitivity Layer 340 Creating New Relate dialog 635 Crisp dialog 249 Criteria see Selection Criteria dialog Criteria dialog 377 Cubic Convolution 9 148 276 Cursor box 17 74 76 rotate 75 Cutline 298 Cutline Selection viewer icon 298 D Dangle length 645 Data ASCII 111 display 135 preference 3 59 export see Export flood plain 347 georeferenced 82 import see Import land cover 347 Landsat MSS 3 Landsat TM 3 6 135 raster 627 sensitivity 364 combine with SPOT 358 363 slope 342 SPOT 3 SPOT panchromatic 135 340 352 359 enhance 352 357 subset 343 thematic 69 transparent 38 651 Index vector 69 627 build 643 clean 643 copy 96 111 628 629 create 109 edit 104 undo 108 select 100 102 style 98 symbology 638 Data Preparation menu 128 281 Data View 172 621 623 Data Viewer dialog 172 DataPrep icon 128 305 Default symbol 89 Defined Areas dialog 65 DEM 33 edit 33 Dialog xxx 3D Surfacing 282 3X3 Edge Detect 248 Accu
599. u have verified the creation of the AOI layer Auply Reset S 3 After verifying the creation of the AOI layer click Close in the Arrange Layers dialog Later you are asked to name the layer and save it to a file ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer Open AOI Tools 1 Select AOI Tools from the Viewer menu bar or click the Tools icon on the tool bar The AOI tool palette displays Click to select an AOI Click to draw a rectangular AOI Click to plant a seed to grow a regional AOI 2 Click on the Rectangle icon in the AOI tool palette Bi 3 Move the cursor into the Viewer window Drag and then release to draw a rectangle over the AOL Include a portion of the water when designating the AOI A rectangular AOI displays in the Viewer File Utility View AO Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help EDBEDPEDBSEBENEG FIDE Rectangular AOI Tour Guides 23 Viewer Select Styles Set Seed Properties Selecting AOIs Following are some tips regarding the selection of the AOI e You can move the AOI by dragging the AOI to a new location e You can resize the AOI by dragging any of the handles at the corners and sides of the bounding box or by pressing the space bar to enter precise coordinates e The Xin the center of the bounding box marks the center coordinate of the AOI Select AOI Styles from the Viewer menu bar The AOI Styles dialog opens Enter new number to change flash interval f
600. uclidean Distance to see how this modifies the AOI polygon 462 ERDAS IMAGINE Add a Signature Add Another Signature Arrange Layers Tour Guides Advanced Classification In the Region Growing Properties dialog click Redo to modify the AOI polygon with the new parameters After the AOI is created click on the Create New Signature s from AOI icon L in the Signature Editor to add this AOI as a signature In the Signature Editor click inside the Signature Name column for the signature you just added Change the name to Forest_1 then press Return on the keyboard In the Signature Editor hold in the Color column next to Forest_1 and select Yellow In the Region Growing Properties dialog enter 300 in the Area number field In the Viewer select Utility Inquire Cursor The Inquire Cursor dialog opens and the inquire cursor a white crosshair is placed in the Viewer The inquire cursor allows you to move to a specific pixel in the image and use it as the seed pixel Drag the intersection of the inquire cursor to a dark red area in the germtm img file in the Viewer This is also a forest area In the Region Growing Properties dialog click Grow at Inquire Wait for the polygon to open After the AOI is created click on the Create New Signature s from AOI icon L in the Signature Editor to add this AOI as a signature In the Signature Editor click inside the Signature Name column for the signature you just
601. ue column right hold Row Selection Invert Selection Now all classes are selected except one Riparian 10 With your cursor in the Value column Shift click on 4 to deselect Wetlands 11 With your cursor in the Value column Shift click on 0 to deselect the background Your Recode dialog looks like the following oof 0000 oo 4 1000 0784 QODODRiparan 0 13 1 00 1 000 Wetlands i af orf 1 000 1 000 wetands Rows in yellow are recoded to a value of 1 Hew Value a 1 JF Change selected Rows Cancel Help 12 Enter a New Value of 1 13 Click Change Selected Rows 14 Click OK to close the Recode dialog 15 In the Raster dialog click OK n3 landcover HC is written under the third Raster graphic in the Model Maker viewer Now all of the files are set up so that the most sensitive areas have the higher class values Table 16 1 Class Values for n3 landcover RC Class Value flood plain riparian amp wetlands 4 These values are used in the next step to create the sensitivity file 348 ERDAS IMAGINE Define Function Click here here Tour Guides and it displays Spatial Modeler In the Model Maker viewer double click the Function graphic The graphic is highlighted and the Function Definition dialog opens sages Dess Functions Conditional i n1 slope RC B n2 floodplain CONDITIONAL testi lt 2 g1 n3 landcover RC
602. un TM The arrow indicates the node that is currently selected Click on the new Tile name to display files associated with Tile level processes EMEN 10 Click Next on the Wizard The Set Up Tile Node level files step displays Tile Level The Tile level functions are processes that apply to the entire Image Tiles Functions 1 Onthe Tile Node Set Up Files step click Next The Assign Tile Node Files step displays in the Wizard i Single Sampling Project Tile Node Assign Files Use this step to assign existing files ta the File Descriptors at the Tile Node level Some files originating from other sources must be manually associated with their appropriate File Descriptors in the Project Manager list of files to manage This step helps vou to make these assignments Select the Image Tile and File Descriptor for which vou wish ta make an assignment and then use the File Chooser to browse to the existing file you want to associate with This popup list contains the selected Descriptor j l i o all the Image Tiles in the project Image Tile Loudoun TM Select Classified Tile File Descriptor Imported Tile File Chooser Browse to the examples directory 528 ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Frame Sampling Tools The Assign Tile Node Files step allows you to select files that have already been prepared for the Sampling process and assign them to their proper places in the Project Tile Node File
603. un strata ima CaP Enter loudoun_strata img here Data Type Input Unsigned 8 bit Ignore Zero in Stats Cutout Unsigned B bit Bach aol View Help La 13 In the Output Filename field click the Browse button and browse to the project directory Enter loudoun strata img as the File Name and click OK in the File Selector 14 Click OK on the Recode dialog to start the Recode process A Progress meter displays 15 When the Progress meter reaches 100 click OK to dismiss it NOTE You may want to paste the color table from the grouped image to the Attribute Editor of the new stratum file Use the same criteria selection method as described above to copy the MOI colors to the Stratum file Generate the Sampling Grid Lar 1 Inthe Create Assign Stratum File step click the Browse button and browse to the directory in which you created the stratum file Select loudoun_strata img from the list of files and click OK 2 Click Nextin the Wizard The Create Assign Sampling Grid step is displayed 3 Inthe Create Assign Sampling Grid step click the Create Sampling Grid button to create a Sampling Grid file The Grid Generation Tool is opened Using the Grid Generation Tool The Grid Generation Tool is used to create a Shapefile grid that will overlay the Stratum file 534 ERDAS IMAGINE Frame Sampling Tools W Grid Generation Tool v1 2 E X Reference Image mg Output Grid File
604. underneath Experiment with different ways to change class color and opacity When you are finished click Close in the Color Chooser dialog With your cursor in the title bar of the Raster Attribute Editor drag it to the top of your screen Drag one of the bottom corners of the Raster Attribute Editor down until all rows of the CellArray are visible Drag the corners of the Raster Attribute Editor horizontally until all columns are visible NOTE The CellArray probably occupies most of your screen 39 Viewer Edit Column Properties Select Rows To select one row simply click in the How column of the desired row That row is highlighted in yellow You can select sequential rows by middle clicking in additional rows Shift click in a selected row to deselect a row You can also select rows using the How Selection menu that opens when you right hold in the How column Select Columns To select one column click in the title box of the desired column That column is highlighted in blue You can select multiple columns by middle clicking in the title bar of additional columns Shift click in a selected column to deselect it Choose Column Options Many column options are available from the Column Options menu which opens when you right hold in a column title bar You can have multiple columns and rows selected at the same time You use many of these features in the following steps Resize Columns You can make eac
605. ur choice This is the name for the output thematic raster layer Set Initial Cluster Options The Clustering Options allow you to define how the initial clusters are generated Under Clustering Options enter 10 in the Number of Classes field The Processing Options allow you to specify how the process is performed Enter 24 in the Maximum Iterations number field under Processing Options This is the maximum number of times that the ISODATA utility reclusters the data It prevents this utility from running too long or from potentially getting stuck in a cycle without reaching the convergence threshold Confirm that the Convergence Threshold number field is set to 950 Convergence Threshold The convergence threshold is the maximum percentage of pixels whose cluster assignments can go unchanged between iterations This threshold prevents the ISODATA utility from running indefinitely By specifying a convergence threshold of 95 you are specifying that as soon as 9596 or more of the pixels stay in the same cluster between one iteration and the next the utility should stop processing In other words as soon as 546 or fewer of the pixels change clusters between iterations the utility stops processing Click OK in the Unsupervised Classification dialog to start the classification process The Unsupervised Classification dialog closes automatically A Job Status dialog displays indicating the progress of the function NOTE This pro
606. uration The Configuration Editor is opened and allows you to configure peripheral devices such as tape drives printers CD ROMS etc for use with ERDAS IMAGINE 8 Click on the beside the Viewer On Line Manual in the Contents tab to view all of the topics in the Viewer manual 9 Double click on the Viewer topic 10 The first page of the Viewer Manual is displayed Use the z and browse buttons to jump from topic to topic and the scroll bars to page through a topic Click on any hyperlinked text to jump to that topic Click the Back button to return to the point from which you jumped 11 Use the Contents Index and Search tabs when looking for a specific title subject or word or phrase 12 Select File Exit from the On Line Help file menu bar when you are finished reading On Line Help The Help window is closed Tour Guides xxix ui Dialogs More Information Help 5 A dialog is a window in which you enter file names set parameters and execute processes In most dialogs there is very little typing required simply use the mouse to click on the options you want to use Most of the dialogs used throughout the tour guides are reproduced from the software with arrows showing you where to click These instructions are for reference only Follow the numbered steps to actually select dialog options For On Line Help with a particular dialog click the Help button in that dialog All of the dial
607. utput img in a second Viewer Select Session Tile Viewers from the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar to position the two Viewers side by side so that you can view both images at once Viewer amp 1 sensitivity spot img Laver 7 File Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel In Viewer 1 select View Link Unlink Viewers Geographical A Link Unlink Instructions dialog opens instructing you to click in Viewer 2 to link the two Viewers Click in Viewer 2 to link the two Viewers and close the Link Unlink Instructions dialog If sensitivity_spot img is a subset of modeler_output img a white bounding box displays in Viewer 2 modeler_output img marking the area of the image that is shown in Viewer 1 sensitivity spot img Select Utility Inquire Cursor from either Viewer s menu bar Compare the two images using the Inquire Cursor When you are finished click Close in the Inquire Cursor dialog Right click in the Viewer displaying sensitivity_spot img to access the Quick View menu 367 Spatial Modeler Add Annotation to a Model Add a Title Format Text 368 10 Select Geo Link Unlink Click in the Viewer containing modeler output img to break the link You can add annotation to a model to make it more understandable to others or to help you remember what the model does It is also a helpful organizational tool if you create sev
608. v x 9 65 2 Ma o0 3 5 75 xii EMEN c 0 a Em 7 2 s 8 z aM 0 5 x 3 amm 3 os 3 EH 20 5 X 45 T k Classes that are conflicted or are not included in any Target Class are highlighted All of the classes that have not been grouped into Target Classes or are in conflict with other Target Classes will be highlighted Refine the groupings to include all of the highlighted classes C To change back to the standard color table click the a button To view the Thematic color l T table click the button ly When you have finished the grouping process click the T button to display the Thematic colors in the Viewer then select File Save Top Layer As Save the image as loudoun_strata img ERDAS IMAGINE Advanced Classification Tour Guides 519 Advanced Classification 520 ERDAS IMAGINE CHAPTER EIGHTEE Frame Sampling Tools Introduction Remote Sensing and Frame Sampling Frame Sampling Tools Tour Guides sy Lets say that you needed to assess the amount a land that is covered by parking lots on a university campus How would you go about accomplishing this You could either go and start surveying parking lots or you could get aerial photography of the campus and start digitizing them But what if you wanted to analyze the amount of land covered by forests in an entire county or the amount of arable land planted with grain in an entire state The cost of c
609. various ERDAS IMAGINE functions e Section I IMAGINE EssentialsTM e Section II CIMAGINE Advantage e Section IJI IMAGINE Professional e Section IV IMAGINE Radar Interpreter e Section V IMAGINE Vector Example Data Time Required Data sets are provided with the software so that your results match those in the tour guides The data used in the tour guides are in the lt IMAGINE_HOME gt examples directory IMAGINE HOMES is the variable name of the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE resides When accessing data files you must replace IMAGINE HOME with the name of the directory where ERDAS IMAGINE is loaded on your system Each individual tour guide takes a different amount of time to complete depending upon the options you choose and the length of the tour guide The approximate completion time is stated in the introduction to each tour guide Documentation Tour Guides This manual is part of a suite of on line documentation that you receive with ERDAS IMAGINE software There are two basic types of documents digital hardcopy documents which are delivered as PDF files suitable for printing or on line viewing and On Line Help Documentation delivered as HTML files xvii ui Digital Hardcopy Documentation On Line Help Documentation xviii The ERDAS IMAGINE Digital Hardcopy Documentation is designed to provide comprehensive information about a particular concept or to walk you through complic
610. ve the eml file as bit res merge TG eml then click OK in the Save As dialog ERDAS IMAGINE Set Session Commands Tour Guides Spatial Modeler 1 On the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar select Session Commands The Session Command dialog opens Session Command History shomefkswansonimagine_history_ 101499 080152 54 emi statusfinished modelmaker editor loadfile usridata 6bit_res_merge mdl editor new editor openfile usr data Ghit res merge eml editor saveas usr data Gbit res merge TG eml Your most recent commands are listed here 2 Inthe Command field enter the following command replacing the directory with the one you chose load c temp 8bit res merge eml Session Command History homefkswansonimagine_history_ 107499 080152 54 emi statusfinished modelmaker editor loadfile usridata 6bit_res_merge mdl editor new editor openfile usr data Ghit res merge eml editor saveas usr data Gbit res merge TG eml load usr data Gbit res merge TG eml EI Command load usridatalgbit res merge TG eml Close Type the load command plus the location of the eml file here to execute the model 3 Press Return on your keyboard The following dialog displays 391 Spatial Modeler Check the Results 392 Select these files from Multispectral File img M es mem jal High Resolution Pan File img sptsim
611. wer ERDAS IMAGINE 72 74 289 363 AOI menu 22 arrange layers in 15 close 17 21 Index 671 Index 672 link 20 150 menu bar 6 343 open new 20 Quick View menu 150 resize 16 291 split 254 title bar 10 tool bar 100 115 unlink 21 Viewer Flicker dialog 133 490 495 Viewer icon 109 114 135 248 290 303 321 601 Viewshed Analysis 323 Viewshed dialog 326 328 viewshed layer 327 329 Visual Query icon 62 W Wallis Adaptive Filter 612 Wallis Adaptive Filter dialog 613 Warning box 278 Wedge Mask dialog 229 Window icon 352 Z Zoom 16 Zoom In icon 16 ERDAS IMAGINE geographic imaging made simple ee ERDAS LH Systems NW Information subject to change without notice Copyright 2002 Leica Geosystems All rights reserved ERDAS and ERDAS IMAGINE are registered trademarks ERDAS Field Guide and ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides are trademarks of ERDAS LLC ERDAS is a wholly owned subsidiary of Leica Geosystems and operates as the Geographic Imaging unit within Leica Geosystems GIS amp Mapping Division Other brand and product names are the properties of their respective owners Imagery courtesy of the city of San Luis Obispo CA and Golden State Aerial Surveys DigitalGlobe i cubed and USGS Part No El 8 6 Manuals cc 10 02 etca Geosystems Leica Geosystems GIS amp Mapping Division 2801 Buford Highway Atlanta Georgia 30329 USA Phone 1 404 248 9000 Fax 1 404 248 9400 gis leica g
612. xamples directory and select the file germtm img Click OK in the Input File dialog to transfer germtm img to the Subset dialog Click the Open icon under Output File In the Output File dialog navigate to a directory where you have write permission Click the File Type dropdown list and choose TIFF Type the name germtm in the Filename window then press Return on your keyboard The tif extension is automatically added By using the Subset utility in this fashion you can quickly create a TIFF image from an image file Click OK in the Output File dialog The Subset file updates accordingly Click OK in the Subset dialog to generate germtm tif A Job Status dialog opens tracking the progress of the function When the Job is complete click OK in the Job Status dialog You can set a preference in the User Interface amp Session category to automatically dismiss the Job Status dialog once a job is complete Click the Viewer icon on the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Click the Open icon and click the Recent button in the Select Layer To Add dialog Select the file you just created germtm tif Click the Raster Options tab and select Fit to Frame Click OK in the Select Layer to Add dialog The TIFF image displays in the Viewer Notice that it is in the State Plane projection indicated in the status area of the Viewer 155 Image Commands You can create a world file from this tif file AEREE ee R V I 3
613. y On Line Manual Graphical Models Reference Guide DLL Reference Guide Imagizer On Line Manual Creating On Line Help for IMAGINE Appendices Documentation The following table depicts the different types of information you can extract from ERDAS Functions IMAGINE documentation Table P 1 ERDAS IMAGINE Documentation Functions If you want to Read Install ERDAS IMAGINE ERDAS IMAGINE Release Notes then ERDAS IMAGINE Configuration Guide Set up hardware for use with ERDAS IMAGINE ERDAS IMAGINE Configuration Guide Learn to use ERDAS IMAGINE ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Learn about GIS and image processing theory ERDAS Field Guide See what a particular dialog does On Line Help Get quick information for a button or function On Line Help or Status Bar Help Learn how to most effectively use the On Line Help Introduction to On Line Help in the On system Line Help Learn more about the Image Interpreter functions ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides Use the Spatial Modeler Language to write models ERDAS Spatial Modeler Language Reference Manual Customize the ERDAS IMAGINE graphical user ERDAS Macro Language Reference interface GUI Manual Write custom application programs within ERDAS ERDAS Developers Toolkit On Line IMAGINE Manual Conventions In ERDAS IMAGINE the names of menus menu options buttons and other components of Used in This Book the interface are shown in bold type For example
614. y limiting the amount of ground truth data that needs to be collected The Frame Sampling Tools provide a framework guiding the Frame Sampling process a means of managing the array of files generated by the process links to the appropriate remote sensing tools and the necessary computations for the Final Analysis of the MOI Frame Sampling Tools Tour This Tour is intended to walk you through a landcover analysis Frame Sampling project The frame for this project is defined by the political boundaries of Loudon County The MOI for this project is forest cover 521 Frame Sampling Tools Setting Up the Sampling Project Create a New Sampling Project 522 The Frame Sampling Project Manager provides the ability to track and perform the necessary steps for preparing a file for Frame Sampling For the purposes of this Tour the following preparatory steps have already been performed for you e Obtain a large scale synoptic image or images that covers the entire study area e Orthorectify that synoptic image OrthoRecitifaction is explained in Orthorectification on page 265 e Classify the orthorectified image using a classification technique such as the ISODATA classification described in Perform Unsupervised Classification on page 483 e Group the Classified image with the Class Grouping Tool Tips an techniques for Grouping the Classified image are illustrated in Using the Grouping Tool on page 500 This section shows
615. y under Image X and Image Y in the Fiducials CellArray of the Camera Model Properties dialog Create three more fiducials by repeating steps 5 and 6 for the points in the three other corners of the image in the first Viewer Move clockwise around the image in the Viewer using the Viewer scroll bars as shown in the following diagram 271 ui Orthorectification Drag the scroll bars to view the image in clockwise order Point 2 Hle Utility View AOI Raster Vector Annotation TerraModel Help Begin digitizing here point 1 Point 4 PODES q It is crucial that you follow step 7 exactly to match the points with the coordinates in step l Enter Film Coordinates 1 Itis necessary to enter the Film coordinates into the Camera Model Properties dialog manually The data provider can include this information in the camera calibration certificate Being sure to match the point numbers with the proper coordinates enter the Film X and Film Y coordinates from the following table Table 12 1 Film X and Film Y Coordinates j or i Film X Film Y 1 106 000 106 000 2 105 999 105 994 3 105 998 105 999 4 106 008 105 999 ui 272 ERDAS IMAGINE Change Projection Tour Guides Orthorectification When the last Film coordinate has been entered in the Camera Model Properties dialog the Status changes to Solved and the Error is calculated This indicates that
616. zing Template is supplied in the information packet for ERDAS IMAGINE V6 6 The vector data provided with ERDAS IMAGINE do not have write permission therefore you need to copy them to another directory so that you can edit them However vector layers are not simple files They are stored in directories called workspaces Using the simple UNIX copy commands does not copy all of the necessary files You must use the Copy utility provided with ERDAS IMAGINE NOTE If you do not have the full IMAGINE Vector module you do not need to move the data since you cannot edit it Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 55 minutes Move to the directory where you want to create your workspace Start ERDAS IMAGINE from this directory Make sure this is a directory in which you have read write permissions Click on the Vector icon from the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel Vector The Vector Utilities menu opens Clean Vector Layer Click here to Build Vector Layer Topology copy sample B gt Copy Vector Layer vector layer External Vector Layer Rename Vector Layer Delete Vector Layer Display Vector Layer Info subset Vector Layer Mosaic Polygon Layers Transform Vector Layer Create Polygon Labels Raster to Vector Vector to Raster start Table Tool onal Attributes ASCII to Point Vector Layer Close Help Dependi

ERDAS IMAGINE Tour Guides

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents